JP7551466B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to provide an advantageous state for the player.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, there are some that are capable of executing a super reach effect (specific effect) that uses a character to notify whether or not the machine is in a jackpot gaming state, and an effect (post-event effect) in which a pattern is re-drawn after a jackpot has been notified (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-34239 A

There was room for improving the marketability of a gaming machine having the functions and configuration of Patent Document 1.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

(A) The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitter;
a performance execution means capable of executing a moving performance that displays an image of a plurality of characters moving, a specific performance that can notify a player that the player will be controlled to the advantageous state by notifying the player of an advantageous result , a special performance that is executed when the advantageous result is notified by the specific performance , and an advantageous post-event performance that is executed after the special performance that is executed when the advantageous result is notified by the specific performance;
Equipped with
The display period of the image in the movement performance includes a first display period and a second display period,
The first display period is a period from when a first character starts to be displayed in the movement performance to when a new character is displayed and until the first character ends to be displayed,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific performance, a first specific performance displaying a specific character, a second specific performance displaying a special character, and a third specific performance displaying neither the specific character nor the special character can be executed;
As the advantageous post-event performance, a first advantageous post-event performance in which the specific character is displayed after the special performance is executed in the first specific performance can be executed,
As the advantageous post-event performance, a second advantageous post-event performance can be executed in which the special character is displayed after the special performance is executed in the second specific performance,
As the advantageous post-event performance, after executing the special performance in the third specific performance, a third advantageous post - event performance can be executed, which is a performance mode related to the third specific performance and does not display either the specific character or the special character;
The light-emitting body can be illuminated during the advantageous post-event performance,
In the first advantageous post-event performance, the light-emitting body is caused to emit light in a light-emitting pattern common to the second advantageous post-event performance ;
In the third advantageous post-event performance, the light emitter is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern different from that in the first advantageous post-event performance and the second advantageous post-event performance ;
The proportion of the second advantageous state controlled varies depending on which of the first specific performance, the second specific performance, and the third specific performance is executed.
It is characterized by:
In addition, other gaming machines,
A gaming machine capable of controlling a variable display of identification information based on the establishment of a start condition to provide an advantageous state for a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the engine to a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
a reserved storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the identification information as reserved storage;
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state;
An information transmitting means capable of transmitting information related to a game;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The effect execution means is capable of executing a group effect in which an image of a plurality of characters progressing as a group is displayed in the non-special state;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, until a new display of a character is performed, until the display of any character ends first,
the second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues;
the third display period is a period during which a state in which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without a new display of the character;
during the first display period, a first situation in which a part of a character that is first displayed is displayed is changed to a second situation in which a part of the character that is first displayed is displayed further than the first situation and a part of a character that is second displayed is displayed;
The special state includes a first special state that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays have been executed;
The performance execution means includes:
Based on the information received from the information transmission means, a pre-reading effect can be executed that suggests that the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory means will be controlled to the advantageous state,
One look-ahead performance pattern is determined from among a plurality of look-ahead performance patterns, and the look-ahead performance is executed;
In the case where the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the number of look-ahead performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of look-ahead performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the first special state,
The rate at which the look-ahead performance is executed in the case of a variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the display to the advantageous state in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the look-ahead performance is executed in the case of a variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the display to the advantageous state in the first special state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which it has not been controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display where it is not decided to control it to an advantageous state, the number of look-ahead preview performance patterns is small, which makes it possible to reduce development costs, and since there is less chance of being unnecessarily swayed by the look-ahead preview performance, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state and execute the group performance more suitably, thereby improving marketability.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine in characteristic part 069SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine in characteristic part 069SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. An explanatory diagram showing a time-saving count determination table for each transition trigger. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 2 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions. This is an explanatory diagram to explain Yu-time (rescue time reduction). This is also an explanatory diagram for explaining Yu-time (rescue time reduction). This is also an explanatory diagram for explaining Yu-time (rescue time reduction). 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to Battle Rush, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to Yu-Time. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to Extreme Battle Rush. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode relating to a variable display count display and a special display count display. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of the effects when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect when the rescue time-saving mode is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot, and (B) is a time chart showing a modified example of time-saving entry effect B. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when the number of reserved memories is 0 when the rescue time reduction is reached. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more when the rescue time reduction is reached. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode relating to a customer waiting screen. A figure showing an example of a presentation operation regarding transition to a customer waiting screen as feature part 069SG variant example 1. A figure showing a modified example of a presentation operation regarding transition to a customer waiting screen as feature section 069SG modified example 1. A flowchart showing timer interrupt processing for game control as variant example 2 of feature section 069SG. This is a flowchart showing the special pattern stopping processing as feature part 069SG variant example 2. This is a flowchart showing the special pattern stopping processing as feature part 069SG variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing a display process as a modified example 2 of the characteristic part 069SG. A figure showing a modified example 3 of characteristic portion 069SG. A diagram for explaining the contents of various effects. A figure showing an example of a countdown preview presentation operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a countdown preview presentation. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of the hold change notice. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of the pattern chance eye announcement. A figure showing an example of the effect display preview performance. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a pre-reading notice type determination table. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing a pre-reading preview performance pattern determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. 13A is a diagram showing a reach notice execution determination table, and (B) to (E) are diagrams showing button notice performance pattern determination tables. 11A to 11D are diagrams showing a character preview pattern determination table. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a movable body motion pattern determination table. 13A to 13D are figures showing a movable object preview pattern determination table. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining various operation examples according to game status. (A) is a timing chart showing the variable display mode of the pattern in the sure-change state and the miss-shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern of the time-saving state A, and (B) is a timing chart showing the variable display mode of the pattern in the miss-shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern of the time-saving state B. This is an example of the presentation operation of a shortened non-reach missed fluctuation pattern in the special state and time-saving state A. This is an example of the presentation operation of a shortened non-reach missed fluctuation pattern in the special state and time-saving state A. This is an example of the presentation operation of a shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B. This is an example of the performance of SP Reach E and SP Reach D. A diagram comparing examples of the presentation operation of non-reach miss fluctuation patterns. A diagram comparing examples of the presentation operation of non-reach miss fluctuation patterns. This is a diagram comparing examples of the presentation operations of super reach fluctuation patterns. This is a diagram comparing examples of the presentation operations of super reach fluctuation patterns. This is a diagram comparing examples of the presentation operations of super reach fluctuation patterns. 13A to 13C are timing charts showing examples of control operations in SP reaches E, C, and D. This is a diagram comparing super reaches and non-reach misses. (A) to (C) are figures showing examples of entry introduction effects, and (D) is a figure showing an example of the time-saving entry effect A. (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing an example of the special mode entry performance, and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams showing an example of the time-saving mode entry performance B. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table as embodiment 2 in feature part 069SG. A figure showing a part of the variable display start setting process as embodiment 2 in characteristic part 069SG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a variable display effect pattern determination table. This is an example of the performance of SP Reach D. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining characteristics according to game status. In the feature part 099SG, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the normal pattern hit determination table, (C) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time of the normal pattern, and (D) is an explanatory diagram of the second start winning port opening time when a normal pattern is hit. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern according to a variable display result. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a data retention area for game control. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a normal state. This is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a special probability state. This is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a special probability state. An explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state A. An explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state A. An explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state B. An explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state B. An explanatory diagram of the probability of winning at the starting winning slot and the winning interval. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values α, β, and γ. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of period values α', β', and γ'. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values δ, ε, and ζ. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of period values δ', ε', and ζ'. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values η, θ, and ι. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values η', θ', and ι'. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values κ, λ, and μ. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of period values κ', λ', and μ'. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of period values v, ξ, and π. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of period values v', ξ', and π'. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value. 1A is an explanatory diagram of the actual shooting values of a pachinko gaming machine for 10 hours, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram of the design values of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of calculation of an average fluctuation time in a normal state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of calculation of an average fluctuation time in a time-saving state A. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of calculation of an average fluctuation time in a time-saving state B. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for calculating the average fluctuation time in a probability variable state. This is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation of the second special chart is executed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special state. This is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays of the second special chart are executed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 1,100 fluctuation displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 2 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 1,100 fluctuation displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 2 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 1 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 1,100 fluctuation displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 1 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in a state in which the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 1,100 fluctuation displays are executed in a state in which the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern in feature portion 018SG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a low base state, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a high base state. This figure shows the execution periods of various effects in the jackpot fluctuation patterns of Super Reach α, β, and γ. This figure shows the execution periods of various effects in the failure variation patterns of Super Reach α, β, and γ. (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects, and (B) is a diagram for explaining character types. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of characters in SP reach performances A to E, (B) is a diagram showing the lighting patterns of LEDs in SP reach performances A to E, and (C) is a diagram showing the output patterns of background music and sound effects in SP reach performances A to E. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of each light emission pattern, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of each sound pattern. This is a tree diagram showing the flow of SP reach performances A to E. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation from the start of the variable display of SP reaches α, β, and γ to the development into the SP reach presentation. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of SP reach presentation A. A figure showing examples of the presentation operations of SP reach presentations B and C. A figure showing examples of the presentation operations of SP reach presentations D and E. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of the win/lose button presentation. A diagram showing an example of a movable body presentation. A figure showing examples of the performance operations for announcing a jackpot in SP reach effects A to E. A figure showing an example of the performance operation for notifying the loss of SP reach performances A to E. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of post-performance A. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of post-performance B. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of post-performance B. 13A is a diagram showing SP reach performance type definition table A, FIG. 13B is a diagram showing SP reach performance type definition table B, and FIG. 13C is a diagram showing SP reach performance type definition table C. 13 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in a smooth rainbow light emission lighting pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in a flash rainbow light emission lighting pattern. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. A diagram to explain the special pattern LED board and the fourth pattern unit. 13 is a view looking between the game board and the image display device. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. A diagram to explain the various boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. A diagram to explain the types of wins. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining each random number. A diagram to explain the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a performance control command. A diagram to explain an example of a front fluctuation pattern on the main side. A figure to explain an example of a subsequent fluctuation pattern on the main side. This is a diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table when a miss occurs. This is a diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. 13 is a diagram for explaining the previous fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. A diagram to explain an example of a total fluctuation pattern on the main side. A diagram to explain an example of a total variation pattern on the sub side. A diagram to explain the lottery table for each preview performance. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during a jackpot opening. A flowchart showing an example of processing after a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a group preview setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a group announcement execution process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a group advance notice work process. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of the video production process. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of the video production process. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of the video production process. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of the video production process. This is a diagram showing the overall picture of the six-person group preview. A diagram to explain the auxiliary display used in the group preview performance. A diagram to explain the motion blur processing used in the group preview performance. A diagram to explain the shape of the contours when characters overlap in a group preview performance. This is a view looking into the space between the game board and the image display device while the group preview performance is being performed. This is a diagram showing the overall picture of the Bakuchu group preview. A diagram to explain the volume changes and brightness data table during the group preview performance. This is a diagram to explain the timing of the occurrence of the six-person group announcement in stage A. This is a diagram to explain the timing of the Bakuchu swarm announcement in stage B. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for reel lamps in a group preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the group preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in a group preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the group preview brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a reach line luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a reach line luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the reach line luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a reach line brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the reach line brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a reach line brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a reach line brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for reel lamps in a background preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the background preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in a background preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the background preview brightness data table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a full-light-on luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during a PUSH performance. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview luminance data table relating to a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a group preview brightness data table relating to a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation style of a comparative example when a six-person group announcement is executed on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a background preview is executed on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a lamp announcement is executed on stage A. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the details of the Boingo Group announcement. This is a diagram to explain the presentation style of a comparative example when a Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation style of a comparative example when a Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. A figure to explain the presentation mode when a Boingo Group announcement related to a modified example is executed. A figure to explain the presentation mode when a dog pack announcement in a modified example is executed. A figure to explain the presentation mode when a dog pack announcement in a modified example is executed. This is a diagram to explain the comparison between the six-person group forecast and the dog group forecast. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group preview performance is executed during a reach line. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group preview performance is executed during a reach line.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention with reference to the drawings.

(Feature 069SG form)
(SG2020-069) The gaming machine of type 1-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
In the case of a variable display in which the determination means has not determined that the variable display should be controlled to the advantageous state, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, in the case of a variable display result being a "miss," the number of miss variable patterns (e.g., two) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" in the case of a "miss" is smaller than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., three) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" and is also smaller than the number of miss variable patterns (e.g., four) that can be determined in the "probable variable state");
In the case where the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is "miss", the average time (e.g., about 2.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-shortened state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 5.58 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined in the "time-shortened state A", and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined in the "probable state". See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display for which it is not determined to be controlled to an advantageous state has a smaller variety of variable display patterns and a shorter average duration of the variable display period, thereby providing a preferable second special state since the variable display is consumed at a faster rate than in other states.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-1,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns displayed in the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C);
The start order of the variable display of the decorative identification information of each column is the same for a case in which, in the first special state, in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and a case in which, in the second special state, in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed,
The time until the variable display speed of the decorative identification information of each column that has started the variable display reaches the maximum speed is different between the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which the determination means does not decide to control the advantageous state in the first special state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which the determination means does not decide to control the advantageous state in the second special state and a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the start order of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is common between the case where the non-reach miss variable pattern is in the probability variable state and the time-saving state A, and the case where the non-reach miss variable pattern is in the time-saving state B, but the time until the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C reach the maximum speed is shorter in the time-saving state B than in the probability variable state and the time-saving state A (tb1 to tb2 < ta1 to ta3). See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while the order in which the decorative identification information of each column starts to be variable is the same in the first special state and the second special state, the time taken to reach maximum speed is different, thereby giving a different impression for each state and increasing interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-1 or 1-2,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
The stop order of the variable display of the decorative identification information of each column is different between the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the second special state and a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the stop order of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the order of left → right → middle in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability change state and the time-saving state A, and the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed simultaneously in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B. See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display stopping order of the decoration identification information in each column differs between the first special state and the second special state, so that different impressions are given for each state, thereby enhancing interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-3,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
The order in which the variable display of the decorative identification information of each column is stopped is the same for a case in which, in the first special state, in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and a case in which, in the second special state, in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed,
The time from when one of the decoration identification information in the multiple columns is statically displayed to when the next decoration identification information is statically displayed differs between a case where in the first special state, in the variable display where it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state by the determining means, the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and a case where in the second special state, in the variable display where it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state by the determining means, the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, a decorative pattern display The stopping order of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is common to the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A, and the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B, but the time from when a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C until the next decorative symbol is stopped and displayed may be different between the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A, and the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the time from when one decorative identification information is statically displayed to when the next decorative identification information is statically displayed differs between the first special state and the second special state, so that different impressions can be given for each state, enhancing interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-4,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
an output means for outputting a stop sound when the decoration identification information of each row is stopped and displayed;
The number of times the stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is different between the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state, and the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the second special state, and the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the number of times the pattern stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is three times in the case of a non-reach miss variation pattern in the probability change state and time-saving state A, because the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at different timings, and in the case of a non-reach miss variation pattern in the time-saving state B, because the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same timing. See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the stop sound can draw attention to the stopping of the decorative identification information, and by outputting the stop sound differently between the first special state and the second special state, different impressions can be given for each state, thereby enhancing interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-5,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
an output means for outputting a stop sound when the decoration identification information of each row is stopped and displayed;
The number of times the stop sound is output in one variable display is common between a case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and a case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the second special state and a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the number of times the pattern stop sound is output in one variable display may be common between a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern is displayed in a probability variable state and a time-saving state A, and a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern is displayed in a time-saving state B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the stop sound can draw attention to the stopping of the decorative identification information, and by making the number of times the stop sound is output common between the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-7 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-6,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
a display means capable of executing a specific action display for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific action when the decoration identification information is statically displayed in a state in which the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is a variable display that displays a non-specific display result rather than a specific state when the determination means does not determine that the decoration identification information is to be controlled to the advantageous state;
When the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special state, the specific operation display is executed, and when the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special state, the specific operation display is not executed (for example, when the pattern is a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in the probability change state and the time-saving state A, a specific operation display (pattern stop action) is executed, whereas when the pattern is a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B, a specific operation display (pattern stop action) is not executed. See Figures 11-51 to 11-54).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while the special action display is used to enhance the presentation effect in the first special state, a smooth variable display can be achieved by not executing the special action display in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-8 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-7,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
a display means capable of executing a specific action display for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific action when the decoration identification information is statically displayed in a state in which the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is a variable display that displays a non-specific display result rather than a specific state when the determination means does not determine that the decoration identification information is to be controlled to the advantageous state;
The display mode of the specific operation display is common between the case where the decorative identification information is stopped and the case where the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special state and the case where the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special state (for example, the specific operation display (pattern stop action) is common between the case where the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern is in the probability change state and the time-saving state A and the case where the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern is in the time-saving state B, thereby enhancing the performance effect with the specific operation display, while commonizing the mode of the specific operation display in the case of the probability change state, the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B. See Figures 11-51 to 11-54).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while the presentation effect is enhanced by the specific action display, development costs can be reduced by standardizing the manner in which the specific action display is displayed between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-9 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-8,
It is possible to perform variable display by synchronizing decoration identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) with predetermined identification information (e.g., a small pattern) different from the decoration identification information,
The period from when the identification information is stopped and displayed to when the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed is shorter in the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed when it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, than in the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed when it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to when the small pattern is stopped and displayed is shorter in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B than in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability change state and the time-saving state A {t1 (ta6 to ta7)>t2 (tb3 to tb4)} portion. See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a smooth variable display can be realized in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-10 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-9,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
The minimum period from when the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the first special state until the variable display of the decorative identification information is started in the next variable display, and the minimum period from when the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the second special state until the variable display of the decorative identification information is started in the next variable display are common (for example, the pattern determination period (ta7 to ta8), which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the probability change state and the time-saving state A until the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in the next variable display, and the pattern determination period (tb4 to tb5), which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the time-saving state B until the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in the next variable display, are common parts. See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by standardizing control that takes into account the rendering process until the decoration identification information is completely frozen and displayed.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-11 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-10,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the first special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, when the variable display result is a "miss", a miss variable pattern (e.g., "non-reach A") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" and a miss variable pattern (e.g., "non-reach A") that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" and the "probable variable state" are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-070) The gaming machine of type 2-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
In the case of a variable display in which the determination means has not determined that the variable display should be controlled to the advantageous state, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state and is also less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, in the case of a variable display result being a "miss," the number of miss variable patterns (e.g., two) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" in the case of a "miss" is less than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., three) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" and is also less than the number of miss variable patterns (e.g., four) that can be determined in the "probable variable state");
In the case where the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state and is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "miss", the average time (e.g., about 2.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-shortening state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 5.58 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined in the "time-shortening state A" and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined in the "probable state". See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display for which it is not determined to be controlled to an advantageous state has a smaller variety of variable display patterns and a shorter average duration of the variable display period, thereby providing a preferable second special state since the variable display is consumed at a faster rate than in other states.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 2-1,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in at least one of the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, a losing variable pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and a losing variable display pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 2-1 or 2-2,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in both the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, a losing variable pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B is common to a losing variable display pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-3,
The average duration of the control period controlled to the second special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the first special state (for example, it is preferable that the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state B is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variable state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variable state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average control period is shorter than in the third special state, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, thereby providing a preferable second special state, while in the first special state, the average control period is longer, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-4,
In the case of a variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (e.g., 2) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-shortening state B is smaller than the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the time-shortening state A, and the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the time-shortening state A is smaller than the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (e.g., 4) that can be determined in the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is reduced to give priority to consumption of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is increased to increase the interest of the game.

(SG2020-071) A gaming machine of form 1-12 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-11,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns (e.g., 1) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" is smaller than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., 2) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A", and is also smaller than the number of loss fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the "probable variable state");
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a “jackpot”, the average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the “time-shortened state B” is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the “time-shortened state A”, and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the “probable variable state”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the variable display has not been controlled to an advantageous state, it is decided to control the variable display to an advantageous state, and since there are fewer types of variable display patterns, development costs can be reduced, and since the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, an ideal second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-13 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-12,
The variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state includes a variable display part for performing a variable display of identification information, and a post-performance part for notifying game value information capable of identifying the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state after the end of the variable display part,
An execution period of the variable display part in the first special state is different from an execution period of the variable display part in the second special state,
The execution period of the post-event performance part in the first special state and the execution period of the post-event performance part in the second special state are common (for example, the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) of the variable display part in the time-saving state A and the probability change state is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part in the time-saving state B, while the pattern determination time (15 seconds) of the post-event performance part in the time-saving state A and the probability change state is common to the pattern determination time (15 seconds) of the post-event performance part in the time-saving state B. See FIG. 11-61).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by sharing the execution period of the post-effect in the variable display in which it has been decided to control to an advantageous state between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-14 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-13,
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information,
The variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state includes a variable display part for performing a variable display of identification information, and a post-performance part for notifying game value information capable of identifying the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state after the end of the variable display part,
a display means for executing a specific action display for causing the indicator to perform a specific action when the indicator is displayed in a stopped state during an execution period of the variable display part in the variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state;
An execution period of the variable display part in the first special state is different from an execution period of the variable display part in the second special state,
The execution period of the specific operation display in the first special state and the execution period of the specific operation display in the second special state are common (for example, the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) of the variable display part of the time-saving state A and the probability change state is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time-saving state B, while the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific operation display of the time-saving state A and the probability change state is common to the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific operation display of the time-saving state B. See FIG. 11-61).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by standardizing the execution period of the specific action display in the variable display that has been determined to be controlled to an advantageous state between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-15 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-14,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the first special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", a miss variable pattern (e.g., "SP reach D") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" and a miss variable pattern (e.g., "SP reach D") that can be determined in the "probable variable state" are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-072) The gaming machine of form 2-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-5,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state and is also less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot variable patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" (e.g., 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" (e.g., 2) and is also less than the number of loss variable patterns that can be determined in the "probable variable state" (e.g., 3)).
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state and is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-shortened state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time-shortened state A" and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probable variable state". See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the variable display has not been controlled to an advantageous state, it is decided to control the variable display to an advantageous state, and since there are fewer types of variable display patterns, development costs can be reduced, and since the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, an ideal second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-7 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-6,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in at least one of the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, a jackpot variable pattern (e.g., SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-shortening state B is common to a jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in at least one of the time-shortening state A and the probability variable state (e.g., the probability variable state)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-8 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-7,
At least a part of the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in both the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, a jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-shortening state B is a common part to a jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in both the time-shortening state A and the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-9 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-8,
The average duration of the control period controlled to the second special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the first special state (for example, the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state B is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variable state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variable state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average control period is shorter than in the third special state, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, thereby providing a preferable second special state, while in the first special state, the average control period is longer, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-10 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-9,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-shortened state B (e.g., 1) is smaller than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time-shortened state A (e.g., 2), and the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time-shortened state A (e.g., 2) is smaller than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the probability variable state (e.g., 3)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is reduced to give priority to consumption of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is increased to increase the interest of the game.

(SG2020-073) A gaming machine of form 1-16 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-15,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining, in the case of the variable display of special identification information that is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP Reach A to E Miss") in which a display result of the variable display of the special identification information (e.g., a miss display result) is displayed after the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific state (e.g., a reach state), and a second non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "Non-reach Miss") in which a display result of the variable display of the special identification information is displayed without the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becoming a specific state,
The rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case where the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case where the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state (for example, the rate at which the "non-reach miss variable pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "miss" in the "time-shortened state B" (for example, 97%) is higher than the rate at which the "non-reach miss variable pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "miss" in the "time-shortened state A" (for example, 95%), and is higher than the rate at which the "non-reach miss variable pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "miss" in the "probable variable state" (for example, 95%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state is not controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display for which it is not decided to control the state to an advantageous state, by making the manner of the variable display a specific manner, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state, since the state is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-17 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-16,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
The period from when the variable display of the decorative identification information starts to when it is stopped in the second non-specific variable display pattern is shorter than the period from when the variable display of the decorative identification information starts to when the variable display mode becomes the specific mode in the first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach miss variable pattern is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb3) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts to when the variable display mode becomes the reach mode in the super reach miss variable pattern. See FIG. 11-62).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display ends in a period shorter than the period until the variable display mode becomes the specific mode, so that a preferable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-18 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-17,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
In the second non-specific variable display pattern, the period from when the variable display of the decorative identification information of a specific column among the multiple columns is started to when it is stopped is shorter than the period from when the variable display of the decorative identification information of the specific column is started to when it is stopped in the first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, in a non-reach miss variable pattern, the period (tb0 to tb1) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is started to when it is stopped is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb2) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is started to when it is stopped in the super reach miss variable pattern. See FIG. 11-62).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display of the decoration identification information of the predetermined row ends in a short period of time, so that a preferable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-19 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-18,
The second non-specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is common to the second non-specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the first special state (for example, a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-074) The gaming machine of form 2-11 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 1-10,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining, in the case of the variable display of special identification information that is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP Reach A to E Miss") in which a display result of the variable display of the special identification information (e.g., a miss display result) is displayed after the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific state (e.g., a reach state), and a second non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "Non-reach Miss") in which a display result of the variable display of the special identification information is displayed without the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becoming a specific state,
The rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state, and is higher than the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the third special state (for example, the rate at which the "non-reach miss variable pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "miss" in the "time-shortening state B" (for example, 97%) is higher than the rate at which the "non-reach miss variable pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "miss" in the "time-shortening state A" (for example, 95%), and is higher than the rate at which the "non-reach miss variable pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "miss" in the "probable change state" (for example, 95%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state is not controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display for which it is not decided to control the state to an advantageous state, by making the manner of the variable display a specific manner, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state, since the state is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-12 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-11,
The second non-specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is common to the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state (for example, a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-13 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-12,
The second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is common to the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state (for example, a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B is common to a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-075) The gaming machine of form 1-20 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-19,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining, in the case of the variable display of special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach A to C, E jackpot") which displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information after the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific state, and a second specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach D (instant hit or full spins)", "not via SP", etc.) which displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becoming a specific state,
The rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the case where the special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state in the second special state is a variable display of the special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state in the first special state is higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined (for example, the rate at which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (instant hit performance or full rotation performance)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time-saving state B is determined (for example, 90%) is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the time-saving state A is determined (for example, 5%), and is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the probability variable state is determined (for example, 5%). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in the variable display in which it has been decided to control to an advantageous state, taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued during which it has not been controlled to an advantageous state, the manner of the variable display is set to a specific manner, so that the second special state is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, thereby making it possible to provide an advantageous second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-21 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-20,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
a display means capable of executing a first specific action display for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific action when the variable display mode becomes a specific mode, and a second specific action display (e.g., a pattern stop action display) for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific action when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed;
In the first specific variable display pattern, the first specific operation display and the second specific operation display are executed by the display means, whereas in the second specific variable display pattern, the first specific operation display is not executed by the display means but the second specific operation display is executed (for example, in the variation pattern of SP reach E which goes through a reach, a reach specific operation display and a jackpot specific operation display are executed, whereas in the variation pattern of SP reach D which does not go through a reach, a reach specific operation display is not executed but a jackpot specific operation display is executed. See FIG. 11-55).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the first specific action display is performed in the second special state, the player is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked, and therefore a preferable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-22 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-21,
The second specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is common to the second specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the first special state (for example, a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-076) The gaming machine of form 2-14 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-13,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining, in the case of the variable display of special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach A-C, E jackpot") which displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information after the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific state, and a second specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach D (instant hit or full spins)", "SP non-via A", etc.) which displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becoming a specific state,
The rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state in the first special state, and is also higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the rate at which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (instant hit performance or full rotation performance)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time-saving state B is determined (for example, 90%) is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined in the time-saving state A (for example, 5%), and is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined in the probability variable state (for example, 5%). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in the variable display in which it has been decided to control to an advantageous state, taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued during which it has not been controlled to an advantageous state, the manner of the variable display is set to a specific manner, so that the second special state is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, thereby making it possible to provide an advantageous second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-15 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-14,
The second specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is common to the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state (for example, a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B is common to a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-16 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-15,
The second specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is common to the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state (for example, a non-reach big win variable pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-077) The gaming machine of form 1-23 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-22,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) which can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a first start winning hole) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol) based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a second start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A first reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process);
A second reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage;
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a suggestion performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period capable of storing a reserved memory in the second reserved memory means when a reserved memory is not stored in the second reserved memory means in the first special state and the second special state and when a variable display is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state, and does not execute the suggestive effect in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the second special state (for example, when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "time-saving state A", and when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "probable change state", a suggestive effect such as "movable object notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, while when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "time-saving state B", a part that does not execute a suggestive effect such as "movable object notice" or "character notice" in the variable display. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the state is not controlled to be advantageous, the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern does not unnecessarily induce excitement through suggestive effects, and therefore a favorable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-24 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-23,
In the second special state, if the variable display is one that is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestive performance is not executed by the performance execution means, and if the variable display is one that is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestive performance is executed by the performance execution means (for example, in the time-saving state B, if the pattern is a miss fluctuation pattern, the "movable object forecast" or "character forecast" is not executed, and if the pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, the "movable object forecast" or "character forecast" may be executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance will be executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-25 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-24,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
the variable display pattern determination means includes a variable display pattern that displays a display result of the variable display after a state of the variable display of the decoration identification information becomes a specific state,
The suggestive performance includes a provocative performance inviting a player to know whether the state of the variable display will be a specific state (for example, a suggestive performance inviting a player to be controlled to a jackpot game state may include a "reach notice" or a "button notice" as a provocative performance inviting a player to know whether the state of the variable display will be a reach state (whether a reach will be established)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance will be executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-26 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-25,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a portion capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a first suggestive effect (for example, a line A or a vibration (small)) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a line B or a vibration (large)) which has a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, based on the variable display result);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance will be executed in the second special state.

(SG2020-078) The gaming machine of form 2-17 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-16,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) which can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a first start winning hole) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol) based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a second start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A first reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage;
A second reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage;
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a suggestive performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "movable object announcement" or a "character announcement");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period capable of storing a reserved memory in the second reserved storage means when a reserved memory is not stored in the second reserved storage means in the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state, and when a variable display is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state and when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the third special state, and does not execute the suggestive performance in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the second special state (for example, when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "time-saving state A", and when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "probable change state", a suggestive performance such as "movable object notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, while when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "time-saving state B", a part that does not execute a suggestive performance such as "movable object notice" or "character notice" in the variable display. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the state is not controlled to be advantageous, the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern does not unnecessarily induce excitement through suggestive effects, and therefore a favorable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-079) The gaming machine of form 1-27 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-26,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A reserved memory means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the identification information as reserved memory (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
An information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of transmitting information related to a game (e.g., a performance control command);
A performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading notice performance) capable of executing a performance including a pre-reading notice performance that suggests that the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory means will be controlled to the advantageous state based on the information received from the information transmission means;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The performance execution means is capable of determining one pre-reading notice performance pattern from among a plurality of types of pre-reading notice performance patterns (for example, "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "symbol chance notice", "effect display notice");
In the case of a variable display in which the determination means has not determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0) is smaller than the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 3), and is also smaller than the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 4)).
The rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case where the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case where the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0%) is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 30%), and is also lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 40%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state was not controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control the state to an advantageous state, the number of pre-reading preview performance patterns is small, thereby reducing development costs, and the player is less likely to be unnecessarily swayed by the pre-reading preview performance, thereby providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-28 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-27,
As a look-ahead notice performance pattern which can be commonly executed by the performance execution means in the first special state and the second special state, there are a first look-ahead notice performance pattern and a second look-ahead notice performance pattern which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first look-ahead notice performance pattern is executed,
The rate at which the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, as a pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be commonly executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state, there is a first pre-reading notice performance pattern (for example, a "blue" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice"), and a second pre-reading notice performance pattern (for example, a "red" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice") that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed, and the rate at which the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the time-saving state B (for example, 0%, see FIG. 11-43(D)) is lower than the rate at which the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the time-saving state A and the probability variable state (for example, 10%, see FIG. 11-43(C))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the player is less likely to be unnecessarily swayed by the first pre-reading preview performance in the second special state, a preferable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-29 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-28,
As a look-ahead notice performance pattern which can be commonly executed by the performance execution means in the first special state and the second special state, there are a first look-ahead notice performance pattern and a second look-ahead notice performance pattern which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first look-ahead notice performance pattern is executed,
The rate at which the second pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, as a pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be commonly executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state, there is a first pre-reading notice performance pattern (for example, a "blue" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice"), and a second pre-reading notice performance pattern (for example, a "red" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice") that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed, and the rate at which the second pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the time-saving state B (for example, 90%, see FIG. 11-43 (D)) is higher than the rate at which the second pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the time-saving state A and the probability variable state (for example, 50 to 70%, see FIG. 11-43 (C))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the second pre-reading preview performance is likely to be executed in the second special state, a favorable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-30 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-29,
The pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be executed by the performance execution means in the first special state and the pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be executed by the performance execution means in the second special state are common (for example, the pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A and the probability change state and the pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the part that is a "pattern chance eye notice").
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a pre-reading preview performance pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, development costs can be reduced and program capacity can be reduced.

(SG2020-080) The gaming machine of form 2-18 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 1-17,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A reserved memory means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the identification information as reserved memory (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
An information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of transmitting information related to a game (e.g., a performance control command);
A performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading notice performance) capable of executing a performance including a pre-reading notice performance that suggests that the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory means will be controlled to the advantageous state based on the information received from the information transmission means;
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The performance execution means is capable of determining one pre-reading notice performance pattern from among a plurality of types of pre-reading notice performance patterns (for example, "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "symbol chance notice", "effect display notice");
In the case of a variable display in which the determination means has not determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that can be determined in the first special state and is also less than the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0) is less than the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 3), and is also less than the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 4)).
The rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case of a variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case of a variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and is also lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case of a variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-shortening state B" (for example, 0%) is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-shortening state A" (for example, 30%), and is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 40%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state was not controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control the state to an advantageous state, the number of pre-reading preview performance patterns is small, thereby reducing development costs, and the player is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked by the pre-reading preview performance, thereby providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-19 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-18,
The look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state and the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in at least one of the first special state and the third special state are common (for example, the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in the time-saving state B and the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability change state are common (for example, the "pattern chance eye notice") part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a pre-reading preview performance pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, development costs can be reduced and program capacity can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-20 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-19,
The look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is common to the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in both the first special state and the third special state (for example, the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in the time-saving state B is common to the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in both the time-saving state A and the probability change state (for example, the "pattern chance eye notice") part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-21 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-20,
The number of the look-ahead notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of the look-ahead notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the first special state, and the number of the look-ahead notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the first special state is smaller than the number of the look-ahead notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the third special state (for example, the number of types of look-ahead notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0) is smaller than the number of types of look-ahead notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 3), and is smaller than the number of types of look-ahead notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 4)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable pre-reading preview performance patterns is reduced to prioritize consumption of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable pre-reading preview performance patterns is increased to increase the interest of the game.

(SG2020-081) The gaming machine of form 1-31 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-30,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including an action promotion performance for encouraging a player to take an action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 10% for a jackpot and 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 80% for a jackpot and 20% for a miss), and is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "probability change state" (for example, 80% for a jackpot and 30% for a miss). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the player was not controlled to an advantageous state, the number of times that the player is prompted to take an action in one variable display is reduced, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-32 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-31,
In the second special state, the percentage of the action promotion effect being executed by the effect execution means when the variable display is one that has been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the percentage of the action promotion effect being executed by the effect execution means when the variable display is one that has not been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in the time-saving state B, the percentage of the effect control CPU 120 executing a “button notice” when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 10%) is higher than the percentage of the effect control CPU 120 executing a “button notice” when the variable display result is a miss (for example, 5%)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the fact that the action promotion effect is executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-33 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-32,
The action promotion performance pattern executable by the performance execution means includes a first action promotion performance pattern and a second action promotion performance pattern in which the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first action promotion performance pattern is executed,
The rate at which the second action-promoting presentation pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second action-promoting presentation pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, as presentation patterns for the "button notice", there are a "hit" pattern and a "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern which has a higher rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state than when the "hit" pattern is executed, and the rate at which the "hit" pattern is executed in the time-saving state B (for example, 10%) is lower than the rate at which the "hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state (for example, 40%), but the rate at which the "hit" pattern is executed in the time-saving state B may be higher than the rate at which the "hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the action-promoting performance is executed in the second special state, the second action-promoting performance pattern is often obtained, thereby increasing interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-34 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-33,
The period during which the action promotion effect is executed in the first special state and the period during which the action promotion effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, the period during which the “button notice” is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability change state and the period during which the “button notice” is executed in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the period during which the “reach notice” is executed)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution period of the action prompting effect can be made common between the first special state and the second special state, thereby reducing development costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-35 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-34,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a motion promotion preparation performance before executing the motion promotion performance,
The period during which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the first special state and the period during which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing an action promotion preparation effect (for example, although not shown in particular, before the operation effective period starts, an effect in which the push button 31B to be operated is faded in or an effect display is displayed) before executing the “button notice”, it is preferable that the period during which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state and the period during which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the time-saving state B are common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the execution period of the action promotion preparation performance common between the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced and the execution of the action promotion performance can be appropriately notified.

(SG2020-082) The gaming machine of form 2-22 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-21,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including an action promotion performance for encouraging a player to take an action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the first special state and is also lower than the execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 10% for a jackpot, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 80% for a jackpot, 20% for a miss) and is also lower than the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "probability change state" (for example, 80% for a jackpot, 30% for a miss). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the player was not controlled to an advantageous state, the number of times that the player is prompted to take an action in one variable display is reduced, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-083) The gaming machine of form 1-36 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-35,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a performance for encouraging a player to perform a motion and a specific performance for informing the player that the player is being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a "win/lose button performance" and a "movable body performance");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
As the performance execution patterns of the action prompting performance and the specific performance that can be executed by the performance execution means in one variable display, there are a first performance execution pattern (e.g., “patterns A-2 and A-3”) in which the specific performance is executed after the action prompting performance is executed, and a second performance execution pattern (e.g., “pattern A-1”) in which the specific performance is executed without executing the action prompting performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the rate at which the "immediate hit performance" in which the "movable body performance" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B (for example, 90%) is higher than the rate at which the "immediate hit performance" in which the "movable body performance" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state A (for example, 0%), and is higher than the rate at which the "immediate hit performance" or "full rotation performance" in which the "movable body performance" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the probability variable state (for example, 0%). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which control to the advantageous state has not been made, the player is less urged to take action when notified that a decision has been made to control to the advantageous state, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-084) The gaming machine of form 2-23 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-22,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a performance for encouraging a player to perform a motion and a specific performance for informing the player that the player will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice" and a "win/lose button performance");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
As the performance execution patterns of the action prompting performance and the specific performance that can be executed by the performance execution means in one variable display, there are a first performance execution pattern (e.g., “patterns A-2 and A-3”) in which the specific performance is executed after the action prompting performance is executed, and a second performance execution pattern (e.g., “pattern A-1”) in which the specific performance is executed without executing the action prompting performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the execution rate (e.g., 90%) of the "immediate hit performance" in which the "movable body performance" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B is higher than the rate (e.g., 0%) of the "movable body performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state A, and is higher than the rate (e.g., 0%) of the "movable body performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the probability variable state without executing the "hit/miss button performance". See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which control to the advantageous state has not been made, the player is less urged to take action when notified that a decision has been made to control to the advantageous state, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-085) The gaming machine of form 1-37 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-36,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including an action promotion performance for encouraging a player to take an action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The types of the action prompting effects that can be executed by the effect execution means include a first action prompting effect that prompts the player to perform a single action (e.g., an action prompting display for a “one-hit” action), and a second action prompting effect that prompts the player to perform an action over a predetermined action period (e.g., an action prompting display for a “continuous hit” or “long press” action),
The effect execution means is capable of executing both the first action promotion effect and the second action promotion effect in the first special state, and is capable of executing the first action promotion effect in the second special state, but does not execute the second action promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of determining the execution of both the “one-hit pattern” and the “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern” in the “probable change state” and the “time-saving state A”, and is capable of determining the “one-hit pattern” in the “time-saving state B”, but does not determine the execution of the “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into account the long period during which the player was not controlled to an advantageous state, the player is less prompted to perform troublesome actions such as operating over a predetermined operating period, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-086) The gaming machine of form 2-24 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-23,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including an action promotion performance for encouraging a player to take an action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The types of the action prompting effects that can be executed by the effect execution means include a first action prompting effect that prompts the player to perform a single action (e.g., an action prompting display for a “one-hit” action), and a second action prompting effect that prompts the player to perform an action over a predetermined action period (e.g., an action prompting display for a “continuous hit” or “long press” action),
The effect execution means is capable of executing both the first action promotion effect and the second action promotion effect in the first special state and the third special state, and is capable of executing the first action promotion effect in the second special state, but does not execute the second action promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of determining the execution of both the "one-hit pattern" and the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" in the "probable change state" and the "time-saving state A", and is capable of determining the "one-hit pattern" in the "time-saving state B", but does not determine the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern". See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into account the long period during which the player was not controlled to an advantageous state, the player is less prompted to perform troublesome actions such as operating over a predetermined operating period, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-087) The gaming machine of form 1-38 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-37,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a suggestive performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "movable object notice");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a first suggestive effect (e.g., "small vibration") and a second suggestive effect (e.g., "large vibration") that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means;
The execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0% jackpot, 0% miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 90% jackpot, 30% miss), and is lower than the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "probable change state" (for example, 90% jackpot, 40% miss). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times that control to the advantageous state is suggested is reduced, taking into account the long period during which control to the advantageous state has not continued, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-39 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-38,
The rate at which the suggestive performance is executed in the second special state when the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the rate at which the suggestive performance is executed in the first special state when the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the rate at which the “movable object notice” is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 0%) is lower than the rate at which the “movable object notice” is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 90%), but the rate at which the “movable object notice” is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the rate at which the “movable object notice” is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be increased by differentiating the degree of attention to the suggestive performance between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-40 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-39,
The rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is higher than the rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the first special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means (for example, the rate at which the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 0%) is lower than the rate at which the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 30%), but the rate at which the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the rate at which the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 30%)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be increased by varying the degree of attention to the suggestive performance in the first special state and the second special state.

(SG2020-088) The gaming machine of form 2-25 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-24,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a suggestive performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "movable object notice");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a first suggestive effect (e.g., "small vibration") and a second suggestive effect (e.g., "large vibration") that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means;
The execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the first special state and is also lower than the execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0% jackpot, 0% miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 90% jackpot, 30% miss) and is also lower than the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "probable change state" (e.g., 90% jackpot, 40% miss). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times that control to the advantageous state is suggested is reduced, taking into account the long period during which control to the advantageous state has not continued, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-089) The gaming machine of form 1-41 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-40,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state, etc.) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a provocative performance for provoking whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is to be a specific mode (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "character announcement" or a "reach announcement");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The execution rate of the teasing performance per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the teasing performance per one variable display in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the “character notice” per one variable display in the “time-saving state B” (for example, 10% for a big hit, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the “character notice” per one variable display in the “time-saving state A” (for example, 80% for a big hit, 20% for a miss), and is lower than the execution rate of the “character notice” per one variable display in the “probability change state” (for example, 80% for a big hit, 30% for a miss). Also, the execution rate of the “reach notice” per one variable display in the “time-saving state B” (for example, 20%) is lower than the execution rate of the “reach notice” per one variable display in the “time-saving state A” (for example, 40%), and is lower than the execution rate of the “reach notice” per one variable display in the “probability change state” (for example, 50%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into account the long period during which the state was not controlled to be advantageous, the number of times that the question of whether or not to display a specific display is prompted is reduced, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-090) The gaming machine of form 2-26 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-25,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a provocative performance for provoking whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is to be a specific mode (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "character announcement" or a "reach announcement");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The execution rate of the teasing effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the teasing effect per one variable display in the first special state and is also lower than the execution rate of the teasing effect per one variable display in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the "character announcement" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 10% for a big hit, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "character announcement" per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 80% for a big hit, 20% for a miss). ), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "character announcement" per one variable display in the "probable change state" (e.g., 80% for big wins, 30% for misses). Also, the execution rate of the "reach announcement" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 20%) is lower than the execution rate of the "reach announcement" per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 40%), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "reach announcement" per one variable display in the "probable change state" (e.g., 50%). See FIG. 11-50.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into account the long period during which the state was not controlled to be advantageous, the number of times that the question of whether or not to display a specific display is prompted is reduced, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-091) The gaming machine of form 1-42 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-41,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
An operable movable body (e.g., movable body 32);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a moving body performance that operates the moving body and a specific performance that notifies the user that the moving body is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "moving body notice" and a "moving body performance");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
As the performance execution patterns of the movable body performance and the specific performance that can be executed by the performance execution means in one variable display, there are a first performance execution pattern (e.g., "patterns A-2, A-3") in which the movable body performance is executed before the execution period of the specific performance and the movable body performance is also executed during the execution period of the specific performance, and a second performance execution pattern (e.g., "pattern A-1") in which the movable body performance is not executed before the execution period of the specific performance and the movable body performance is executed during the execution period of the specific performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the execution rate (e.g., 90%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Time-saving state B” is higher than the execution rate (e.g., 10%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Time-saving state A”, and is higher than the execution rate (e.g., 20%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Probable variable state”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to an advantageous state taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued during which the state has not been controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state, since the movable body is unlikely to be unnecessarily operated even before a specific performance.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-43 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-42,
The control data used to control the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control the movable body to the advantageous state in the first special state and the control data used to control the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control the movable body to the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability change state (for example, the control data corresponding to the extended commands such as D100 and S200) is common to the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B (for example, the control data corresponding to the extended commands such as D100 and S200)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the control data used to control the movable body in the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-44 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-43,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light is provided,
The control data used to control the light-emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state, and the control data used to control the light-emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the control data (for example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) used to control the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 that emit light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability change state, and the control data (for example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by standardizing the control data used to control the light-emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movable body performance in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-45 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-44,
a display means capable of displaying an effect image for emphasizing the movable body,
The effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is decided by the decision means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is decided by the decision means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability change state (see the movable body performance image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)) and the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B (see the movable body performance image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)) are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the effect images displayed in conjunction with the movable object performance in the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-46 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-45,
A vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined portion is provided,
The vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the vibration patterns executed in conjunction with the movable body performance in the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-47 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-46,
The rate at which the first performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state is higher than the rate at which the first performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state (for example, the rate at which “patterns A-2, A-3 (first performance execution pattern)” are executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state (for example, 80 to 90%) is higher than the rate at which “patterns A-2, A-3 (first performance execution pattern)” are executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state B (for example, 10%)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the first special state, interest can be enhanced by drawing attention to whether or not the movable body moves.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-48 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-47,
The execution frequency of the movable body performance in the second special state is lower than the execution frequency of the movable body performance in the first special state (for example, the execution frequency of the "movable body performance" in the time-saving state B (for example, about 10%) is lower than the execution frequency of the "movable body performance" in the time-saving state A or the probability change state (for example, 80 to 90%)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the movable body is unlikely to be unnecessarily operated in the second special state, a preferable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-092) The gaming machine of form 2-27 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-15,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
An operable movable body (e.g., movable body 32);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a moving body performance that operates the moving body and a specific performance that notifies the user that the moving body is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "moving body notice" and a "moving body performance");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
As the performance execution patterns of the movable body performance and the specific performance that can be executed by the performance execution means in one variable display, there are a first performance execution pattern (e.g., "patterns A-2, A-3") in which the movable body performance is executed before the execution period of the specific performance and the movable body performance is also executed during the execution period of the specific performance, and a second performance execution pattern (e.g., "pattern A-1") in which the movable body performance is not executed before the execution period of the specific performance and the movable body performance is executed during the execution period of the specific performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and is also higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the execution rate (e.g., 90%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Time-saving state B” is higher than the execution rate (e.g., 10%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Time-saving state A”, and is higher than the execution rate (e.g., 20%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Probable state”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to an advantageous state taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued during which the state has not been controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state, since the movable body is unlikely to be unnecessarily operated even before a specific performance.

(SG2020-093) The gaming machine of form 1-49 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-48,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
a presentation execution means (e.g., a portion in which the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body presentation" and a "post-presentation") capable of executing presentations including a specific presentation that notifies the player that the display will be controlled to the advantageous state when the display is a variable display that has been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, and a post-presentation that is executed after the specific presentation and notifies the player of game value information (e.g., the number of balls expected to be dispensed) that can identify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns (e.g., 1) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" is smaller than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., 2) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A", and is also smaller than the number of loss fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the "probable variable state");
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a “jackpot”, the average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the “time-shortened state B” is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the “time-shortened state A”, and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the “probable variable state”. See FIG. 11-50).
The presentation mode of the post-event performance is common between the case where the post-event performance is executed in the first special state and the case where the post-event performance is executed in the second special state (for example, the presentation mode of the “post-event performance” which notifies the player of the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the SP reach performance notifies the player of the control to the jackpot game state is the part which is common to the “time-saving state B”, “probability change state”, and “time-saving state A” as shown in FIG. 11-60. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time had continued during which the variable display was not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display that has been decided upon to be controlled to an advantageous state has a smaller number of variable display patterns and a shorter average duration of the variable display period, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and after it has been announced that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to provide an advantageous second special state by using a presentation that is common to the first special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-50 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-49,
The specific performance executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state and the specific performance executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the "movable body performance" executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability change state, and the "movable body performance" executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state B are common parts. See FIG. 11-59 (D1)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by sharing specific effects between the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-51 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-50,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light is provided,
The control data used to control the light-emitting means to emit light in conjunction with the post-event performance in the first special state and the control data used to control the light-emitting means to emit light in conjunction with the post-event performance in the second special state are common (for example, the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 to emit light in conjunction with the “post-event performance” in the time-saving state A or the probability change state and the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 to emit light in conjunction with the “post-event performance” in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the light-emitting control data executed based on the extension command D300).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by standardizing the control data used to control the light-emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the post-performance in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-52 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-51,
A vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined portion is provided,
The vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-event performance in the first special state and the vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-event performance in the second special state are common (for example, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the “post-event performance” in the time-saving state A or the probability change state and the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the “post-event performance” in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300) part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the vibration patterns executed in conjunction with the post-event performance in the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

(SG2020-094) The gaming machine of form 2-28 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-27,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
a presentation execution means (e.g., a portion in which the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body presentation" and a "post-presentation") capable of executing presentations including a specific presentation that notifies the player that the display will be controlled to the advantageous state when the display is a variable display that has been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, and a post-presentation that is executed after the specific presentation and notifies the player of game value information (e.g., the number of balls expected to be dispensed) that can identify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state and is also less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns (e.g., 1) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" is less than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., 2) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" and is also less than the number of loss fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the "probable variable state");
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-shortened state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time-shortened state A" and shorter than the average time (e.g., about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probable variable state". See FIG. 11-50).
The presentation mode of the post-event performance is common to the case where the post-event performance is executed in the first special state, the case where the post-event performance is executed in the second special state, and the case where the post-event performance is executed in the third special state (for example, the presentation mode of the “post-event performance” which notifies the player of the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the SP reach performance notifies the player of the control to the jackpot game state is the part which is common to the “time-saving state B”, “probability change state”, and “time-saving state A” as shown in FIG. 11-60. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time had continued during which the variable display was not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display that has been decided to be controlled to an advantageous state has a smaller number of variable display patterns and a shorter average period of the variable display period, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and after it has been announced that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state, a common presentation can be used to liven things up in the first special state and the third special state, thereby providing an advantageous second special state.

(SG2020-095) The gaming machine of form 1-53 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-52,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) which can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a first start winning hole) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol) based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a second start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A first reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process);
A second reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage;
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The variable display pattern determination means
When the second reserved memory means has no reserved memory stored in the first special state and the determination means has not determined that the variable display should be controlled to the advantageous state, a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period that can store the reserved memory in the second reserved memory means can be determined;
In the case where the reserved memory is not stored in the second reserved memory means in the second special state and the determination means does not determine that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the CPU 103 can determine a special variable display pattern having a special variable display time shorter than the predetermined variable display period (for example, when the reserved memory number is 0 in the probability variable state or the time-saving state A, the CPU 103 can determine a miss variable pattern (for example, a non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variable pattern with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) having a long variable display time to earn time to store the reserved memory in the second reserved memory, while when the reserved memory number is 0 in the time-saving state B, the CPU 103 can determine a shortened non-reach variable pattern (for example, an ultra-shortened non-reach with a variable time of 1.5 seconds or a shortened non-reach A with a variable time of 3 seconds) having a shorter variable display time than a miss variable pattern (for example, a non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variable pattern with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state was not controlled to be advantageous, even if the reserved memory is not stored, a predetermined variable display pattern having a long variable display period is determined, so that the consumption speed of the variable display is not reduced, and a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-096) The gaming machine of form 2-29 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-28,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) which can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a first start winning hole) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol) based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a second start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A first reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process);
A second reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage;
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The variable display pattern determination means
When the second reserved memory means has no reserved memory stored in the first special state or the third special state and the determination means has not determined that the variable display should be controlled to the advantageous state, a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period during which the second reserved memory means can store the reserved memory is determined;
In the case where the reserved memory is not stored in the second reserved memory means in the second special state and the determination means does not determine that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the CPU 103 can determine a special variable display pattern having a special variable display time shorter than the predetermined variable display period (for example, when the reserved memory number is 0 in the probability variable state or the time-saving state A, the CPU 103 can determine a miss variable pattern (for example, a non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variable pattern with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) having a long variable display time to earn time to store the reserved memory in the second reserved memory, while when the reserved memory number is 0 in the time-saving state B, the CPU 103 can determine a shortened non-reach variable pattern (for example, an ultra-shortened non-reach with a variable time of 1.5 seconds or a shortened non-reach A with a variable time of 3 seconds) having a shorter variable display time than a miss variable pattern (for example, a non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variable pattern with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state was not controlled to be advantageous, even if the reserved memory is not stored, a predetermined variable display pattern having a long variable display period is determined, so that the consumption speed of the variable display is not reduced, and a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-097) The gaming machine of form 1-54 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-53,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
When the control of the special state is started, a performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "entry performance") capable of executing a performance including a special state start performance that notifies the start of the control of the special state by displaying a special state start display;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The performance execution means includes:
When the control of the first special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start performance;
When the control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start performance, and a special display that is not displayed when the control of the first special state is started is displayed (for example, when the control of the time-saving state A is started, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry performance A, and when the control of the probability variable state is started, the entry image 069SG472 consisting of the entry image 069SG470 and the probability variable image 069SG471 is displayed in the probability variable entry performance, while when the control of the time-saving state B is started, the entry image 069SG470 common to the entry image 069SG470 displayed when entering the time-saving state A and the probability variable state is displayed in the time-saving entry performance B, and the part that displays the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability variable state or the time-saving state A is started. See FIG. 11-50, FIG. 11-63, FIG. 11-64).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, which is controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has passed since it was not controlled to an advantageous state, the special state start presentation not only displays the special state start display that is common to when control of the first special state begins, but also displays a special display that is not displayed when control of the first special state begins, thereby creating excitement for the start of the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-55 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-54,
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
Equipped with
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern of a variable display period in which the special state start performance can be executed in the variable display in which the control of the second special state has been started (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may be capable of determining a special variable display pattern having a variable display time in which the “entry performance” can be executed in the rescue time reduction reaching variation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special state start presentation can be executed in an optimal manner.

(SG2020-098) The gaming machine of form 2-30 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-29,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
When the control of the special state is started, a performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "entry performance") capable of executing a performance including a special state start performance that notifies the start of the control of the special state by displaying a special state start display;
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The performance execution means includes:
When the control of the third special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start performance;
When the control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start performance, and a special display that is not displayed when the control of the third special state is started is displayed (for example, when the control of the time-saving state A is started, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry performance A, and when the control of the probability variable state is started, the entry image 069SG472 consisting of the entry image 069SG470 and the probability variable image 069SG471 is displayed in the probability variable entry performance, while when the control of the time-saving state B is started, the entry image 069SG470 common to the entry image 069SG470 displayed when entering the time-saving state A and the probability variable state is displayed in the time-saving entry performance B, and the part that displays the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability variable state or the time-saving state A is started. See FIG. 11-50, FIG. 11-63, FIG. 11-64).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, which is controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time continued in which it was not controlled to an advantageous state, in the special state start presentation, not only the special state start display that is common to when control of the third special state begins, but also a special display that is not displayed when control of the third special state begins is displayed, thereby creating excitement for the start of the second special state.

(SG2020-119) The gaming machine of form 1-56 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-55,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (e.g., jackpot C (10R)) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
When the determination means determines that control should be made to the advantageous state, the decoration variable display means is capable of executing a special decoration variable display (e.g., SP reach D (full rotation)) which displays a specific display result, which is displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stops and displays the special decoration variable display,
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the rate at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the “full rotation performance” when “jackpot C (10R)” is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state B (for example, 100%) is higher than the rate at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the “SP reach D (full rotation)” when “jackpot C (10R)” is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state A (for example, 0% (not executed)), and the rate at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the “SP reach D (full rotation)” when “jackpot C (10R)” is determined as the jackpot type in the probability variable state (for example, 0% (not executed)). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to a more advantageous second advantageous state, taking into consideration the long period during which the second special state has not been controlled to an advantageous state, a special variable display is more likely to be executed, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-120) The gaming machine of form 2-31 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-30,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is executed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (e.g., jackpot C (10R)) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
When the determination means determines that control should be made to the advantageous state, the decoration variable display means is capable of executing a special decoration variable display (e.g., SP reach D (full rotation)) which displays a specific display result, which is displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stops and displays the special decoration variable display,
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the first special state, and is also higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the third special state (for example, when "jackpot C (10R)" is selected as the jackpot type in the time-saving state B, The percentage (e.g., 100%) at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the "full spin performance" when the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot C (10R)" in the time-saving state A is higher than the percentage (e.g., 0% (not executed)) at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the "SP reach D (full spin)" when the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot C (10R)" in the probability variable state, and is higher than the percentage (e.g., 0% (not executed)) at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the "SP reach D (full spin)" when the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot C (10R)" in the probability variable state. See FIG. 11-69.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to a more advantageous second advantageous state, taking into consideration the long period during which the second special state has not been controlled to an advantageous state, a special variable display is more likely to be executed, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(Feature 099SG form)
(SG2020-099) The gaming machine of the form 1 of the characteristic part 099SG is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the first special state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time-saving state B, by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-100) Form 2 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the first special state by the first number of times and is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the third special state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, by 110, and the period value ψ is smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probability variable state, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-101) Form 3 gaming machine,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the first special state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time-saving state B, by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-102) Form 4 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the first special state by the second number of times and is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the third special state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, by 1100, and the period value ψ' is smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probability variable state, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-103) Form 5 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the first special state, by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state B, by 110, is a portion smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-104) Form 6 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the first special state, by the first number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the third special state, by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by 1 number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 110 is smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 110, and the period value ξ is a part smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-105) Type 7 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the first special state, by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state B, by 1100, is smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-106) Type 8 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times is executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, by the second number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the first special state, by the second number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the third special state, by the second number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 1100 is smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 1100, and the period value ξ' is a portion smaller than the period value π' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the probability variable state is a miss by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-107) Type 9 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 1, by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 1, by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories in the second special pattern is 1 in the time-saving state B, by 110, is a portion smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories in the second special pattern is 1 in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-108) The gaming machine of type 10 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state, by the first number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the first special state, by the first number of times, and is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the third special state, by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by 1 number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 110 is smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 110, and the period value λ is a portion smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-109) Type 11 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times is executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 1, by the second number of times, is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 1, by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value λ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories in the second special pattern is 1 in the time-saving state B, by 1100, is a portion smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories in the second special pattern is 1 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-110) Type 12 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state, by the second number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the first special state, by the second number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the third special state, by the second number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value λ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is one in the time-saving state B is a miss by 1100 is smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is one in the time-saving state A is a miss by 1100, and the period value λ is a portion smaller than the period value μ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is one in the probability variable state is a miss by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-111) Type 13 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the first special state, by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value θ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 2 in the time-saving state B, by 110, is a portion smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 2 in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-112) The gaming machine of type 14 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the first special state, by the first number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the third special state, by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by 1 number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value θ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 110 is smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 110, and the period value θ is a part smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-113) Type 15 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times is executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the second special state, by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the first special state, by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the period value θ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern is 2 in the time-saving state B, by 1100, is a portion smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern is 2 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-114) The gaming machine of type 16 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the second special state, by the second number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the first special state, by the second number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the third special state, by the second number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the period value θ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B is a miss by 1100 is smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A is a miss by 1100, and the period value θ' is a portion smaller than the period value ι' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-115) Type 17 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the first special state, by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 3 in the time-saving state B, by 110, is a portion smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 3 in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-116) Type 18 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the first special state, by the first number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the third special state, by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by 1 number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 110 is smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 110, and the period value ε is a portion smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-117) Type 19 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the variable display is executed more frequently and in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the second special state, by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the first special state, by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern is 3 in the time-saving state B, by 1100, is a portion smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern is 3 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-118) The gaming machine of type 20 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the second special state, by the second number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the first special state, by the second number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the third special state, by the second number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B is a miss by 1100 is smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A is a miss by 1100, and the period value ε' is a portion smaller than the period value ζ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the probability variable state is a miss by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

A gaming machine of aspect 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches gaming media into a gaming area (e.g., a right gaming area and a left gaming area) into which the gaming media can flow,
As the variable display, it is possible to execute variable display of special identification information and variable display of normal identification information (for example, a portion capable of executing variable display of special patterns and variable display of normal patterns),
a variable means (e.g., a variable winning ball device 6B forming a second starting winning hole) that changes the state between a first state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium is less likely to enter than in the first state, based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display of the normal identification information;
A reserved memory means (e.g., a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the special identification information as reserved memory;
Equipped with
The game area has a special path (e.g., a left game area) in which the variable means is provided, and a non-special path (e.g., a right game area) different from the special path,
The upper limit number of reserved memories that can be stored by the reserved memory means is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the game state),
The probability that the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display of the normal identification information is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2(B), the part where the normal winning probability is the same even when the game state is the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, or the probability-changing state),
The change pattern in which the variable means changes between the first state and the second state is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2(D), the opening time of the second start winning port is 3 seconds even when the game state is the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, or the probability variable state).
In both the first special state and the second special state, the game medium is launched toward the special path (for example, the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B are both game states in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the commonality of gameplay between the first special state and the second special state, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused due to a large difference in gameplay between the first special state and the second special state, which are the same special state.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-second aspect is the gaming machine according to the twenty-first aspect,
In the case where the period value is obtained by measuring the period required for the first or second number of variable displays not controlled to the advantageous state to be executed in each special state, the start point of the measurement includes the time when the launch of the game medium is started (for example, a part for calculating an average variable display period in which the variable display result is a miss, as the period from the time when the game ball is shot out or the time when the shot game ball enters a start winning hole to the time when the variable display based on the start winning is ended),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the period value can be appropriately obtained by measurement.

A gaming machine of aspect 23 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2, 6, 10, 14, and 18,
A reserve memory means is provided for storing a plurality of pieces of information relating to the variable display as reserve memory,
The upper limit number of reserved memories that can be stored by the reserved memory means is the same in any of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to four regardless of the game state),
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means (for example, as shown in Figs. 12-6, 12-8, and 12-10, the selection ratio of the change pattern of the variable display that results in a miss differs depending on the number of reserved memories, so that the average variable display period of the variable display that results in a miss differs depending on the number of reserved memories stored).
The period value is a sum of values obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed at each reserved memory number in the first number of times by the average variable display period of the reserved memory number (for example, as shown in Figures 12-13, the period value in each game state is a portion that is a sum of values obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed at each reserved memory number in 110 variable displays by the average variable display period of each reserved memory number),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine of aspect 24 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the first special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period A, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the first number of times is a proportion a (for example, A is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A is a miss, and a is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period B, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion b (for example, B is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A is a miss, and b is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period C, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion c (for example, C is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A is a miss, and c is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period D, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion d (for example, D is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A, and d is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The period value of the first special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio a, and the average variable display period A, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio b, and the average variable display period B, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio c, and the average variable display period C, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio d, and the average variable display period D (for example, the period value α is a part calculated by the value of A×a+B×b+C×c+D×d).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the first special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine of aspect 23 or aspect 24,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the second special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period E, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the first number of times is a proportion e (for example, E is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and e is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period F, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion f (for example, F is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and f is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period G, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion g (for example, G is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and g is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period H, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion h (for example, H is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and h is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The period value of the second special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio e, and the average variable display period E, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio f, and the average variable display period F, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio g, and the average variable display period G, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio h, and the average variable display period H (for example, the period value β is a part calculated by the value of E×e+F×f+G×g+H×h).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate second special state duration value corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 23 to 25,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the third special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period I, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the first number of times is a proportion i (for example, I is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state is a miss, and i is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period J, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion j (for example, J is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in a probability variable state is a miss, and j is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in a probability variable state to 110 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period K, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion k (for example, K is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state is a miss, and k is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period L, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion 1 (for example, L is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state is a miss, and 1 is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The period value of the third special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio i, and the average variable display period I, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio j, and the average variable display period J, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio k, and the average variable display period K, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio l, and the average variable display period L (for example, the period value γ is a part calculated by the value of I×i+J×j+K×k+L×l).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the third special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine of aspect 27 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 4, 8, 12, 16, and 20,
A reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information related to variable display as reserved memory,
The upper limit number of reserved memories that can be stored by the reserved memory means is the same in any of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to four regardless of the game state),
The average variable display period of the variable display varies depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means (for example, as shown in Figs. 12-6, 12-8, and 12-10, the selection ratio of the change pattern of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss varies depending on the number of reserved memories, so that the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss varies depending on the number of reserved memories stored).
The period value is a sum of values obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed at each reserved memory number in the second number of times by the average variable display period of the reserved memory number (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the period value in each game state is a sum of values obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed at each reserved memory number in 1100 variable displays by the average variable display period of each reserved memory number),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-eighth aspect is the gaming machine according to a twenty-seventh aspect,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the first special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period A, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the second number of times is a proportion a' (for example, A is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A is a miss, and a' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period B, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion b' (for example, B is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A is a miss, and b' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period C, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion c' (for example, C is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A, and c' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period D, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion d' (for example, D is the average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A, and d' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The period value of the first special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio a', and the average variable display period A, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio b', and the average variable display period B, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio c', and the average variable display period C, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio d', and the average variable display period D (for example, the period value α' is a part calculated by the value of A×a'+B×b'+C×c'+D×d').
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the first special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

The gaming machine of means 29 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27 or 28,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the second special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period E, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the second number of times is a proportion e' (for example, E is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and e' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period F, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion f' (for example, F is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and f' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period G, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion g' (for example, G is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B, and g' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period H, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion h' (for example, H is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B, and h' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The period value of the second special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio e', and the average variable display period E, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio f', and the average variable display period F, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio g', and the average variable display period G, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio h', and the average variable display period H (for example, the period value β' is a part calculated by the value of E×e'+F×f'+G×g'+H×h').
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate second special state duration value corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine according to a 30th aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the 27th to 29th aspects,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the third special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period I, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the second number of times is a proportion i' (for example, I is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state is a miss, and i' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period J, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion j' (for example, J is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in a probability variable state is a miss, and j' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in a probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period K, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion k' (for example, K is the average variable display period in which the variable display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state, and k' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state to the 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period L, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion l' (for example, L is an average variable display period in which the variable display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state, and l' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The period value of the third special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio i', and the average variable display period I, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio j', and the average variable display period J, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio k', and the average variable display period K, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio l', and the average variable display period L (for example, the period value γ' is a part calculated by the value of I×i'+J×j'+K×k'+L×l').
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the third special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

(Feature part 018SG form)
(SG2020-018) The gaming machine of the feature part 018SG form 3-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A light emitter (for example, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc.),
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32);
A performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state, and a special performance that moves the movable body and causes the light-emitting body to emit light (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing SP reach performances A to E and the movable body performance);
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific performance, a first specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance B) that displays a specific character (e.g., enemy character X-1) and notifies whether or not the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state by using the specific character, and a second specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance A) that notifies whether or not the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state without displaying the specific character can be executed.
When it is notified that the specific performance is controlled to the advantageous state, the special performance can be executed during the execution period of the specific performance (for example, a part where a movable body performance can be executed during the execution period (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5) of the SP reach performance),
During the execution period of the special performance in the first specific performance, the specific character (e.g., character image 018SGX1) is displayed together with an effect image (e.g., effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body (see FIG. 13-14 (D2) (D4)),
During the execution period of the special effect in the second specific effect, an effect image (e.g., effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body in a manner common to the first specific effect is displayed, while the specific character is not displayed (see FIG. 13-14 (D1)),
The light emission mode of the light emitter in the special performance (for example, the light emission pattern LP3-2) is common between the case where the special performance is executed in the first specific performance and the case where the special performance is executed in the second specific performance (see FIG. 13-6 (B)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the operating mode of the movable body and the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting body in the first special effect, in which a specific character is displayed, are common to a second special effect, in which a specific character is not displayed, thereby reducing manufacturing costs, while the presence or absence of a specific character during the execution period of the special effect increases the correlation between the special effect and the special effect, thereby improving the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1,
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is higher when the first specific performance is executed than when the second specific performance is executed (for example, since the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β has a higher jackpot expectation rate than the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach α, the SP reach performance B and SP reach performance C have a higher jackpot expectation rate than the SP reach performance A (jackpot expectation rate: SP reach performance A < SP reach performance B < SP reach performance C) part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the second specific effect is executed as the specific effect, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1 or 3-2,
The execution period of the special effect is common to the first specific effect and the second specific effect (for example, the execution period (ta3 to ta4) of the “decisive effect” in the SP reach effects A to E is common to the SP reach effects A to E (ta3 to ta4; SP reach effect A = SP reach effect B = SP reach effect C = SP reach effect D = SP reach effect E) part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the execution period of the special effects common, the control data for the movable bodies and light-emitting bodies in the special effects can be common, thereby enabling further reduction in manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-3,
The execution period of the special effect includes a first period and a second period subsequent to the first period,
The presentation mode in the first period is common to the first specific presentation and the second specific presentation, while the presentation mode in the second period is different between the first specific presentation and the second specific presentation (for example, the execution period of the movable body presentation includes the first period and the second period after the first period, and the presentation mode in the first period is common to the SP reach presentations B to E and the SP reach presentation A (the attack image 018SG250 in FIG. 13-14(C) is common), while the presentation mode in the second period is different between the SP reach presentations B to E and the SP reach presentation A. The parts different from the image shown in FIG. 13-14(D1) and the images shown in FIG. 13-14(D2 to D5)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by keeping the presentation format common until the first period, it is possible to further reduce manufacturing costs, while at the same time increasing interest in the presentation of the specific presentation, since it is unclear until the first period whether it is the first or second specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-4,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a third specific effect (e.g., SP reach effect E) that displays a special character (e.g., enemy character X-2) different from the specific character as the specific effect,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs between when the first specific performance is executed and when the third specific performance is executed (for example, when the variable display result is a jackpot in a low base state, the determination ratio of the SP reach β fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SP reach performance B is 300/997, and when the variable display result is a jackpot in a high base state, the determination ratio of the SP reach γ fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SP reach performance E is 800/997).
In the third specific performance, during the execution period of the special performance executed when it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled, an effect image (e.g., effect image 018SG250B) common to the first specific performance corresponding to the movement of the movable body is displayed, and the special character (e.g., character image 018SGX2) is displayed;
The light emission mode of the light-emitting body in the special performance executed in the third specific performance (for example, light emission pattern LP3-2) is common to the light emission mode of the light-emitting body in the special performance executed in the first specific performance (see FIG. 13-6 (B)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the operating mode of the movable body and the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting body in each special effect can be standardized to reduce manufacturing costs, while the number of specific effects with different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state can be increased, allowing players to focus on which specific effect will be executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-5,
The device is provided with a motion detection means (e.g., a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player,
The light emission end state of the light-emitting body in the special effect is common regardless of the detection timing at which the player's action is detected by the action detection means during the effective operation period before the fact that the specific effect has been controlled to the advantageous state is notified (for example, even if the "movable body effect" is executed at any timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed, or at the timing at which the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected, the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common light emission pattern LP3-2).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the manner in which the light emission of the light-emitting body ends can be changed by changing the timing of the player's action, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-7 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-6,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a post-period performance (a big win notification) in a post-period after the special performance during the specific performance,
The light emission pattern is common regardless of the type of the specific performance in which the later period performance is executed (for example, in the later period after the movable body performance during the execution of the SP reach performances A to E, a jackpot confirmation notification can be executed as a later period performance, and in the jackpot confirmation notification, the light emission pattern of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 and the movable body LED 208 is common regardless of the type of the SP reach performances A to E (for example, the light emission pattern LP3-2). See FIG. 13-6 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the post-period performance is executed using a common light emission pattern regardless of the type of specific performance, which makes it possible to further reduce manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-8 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-7,
Sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R) are provided;
The effect execution means is capable of outputting a special effect sound from the sound output means during the special effect,
The output pattern of the special performance sound is common to any type of the specific performance (for example, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body performance is common to any type of SP reach performance A to E (sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3). See FIG. 13-6 (C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the output pattern of the special effect sound common, it is possible to further reduce manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-9 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-8,
The device is provided with a motion detection means (e.g., a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player,
The output end mode of the special effect sound in the special effect is common regardless of the detection timing at which the player's action is detected by the action detection means during the effective operation period before the fact that the specific effect has been controlled to the advantageous state is notified (for example, even if the "movable body effect" is executed at any timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed, or at the timing at which the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common sound pattern BP2-1 to BP2-4).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the mode in which the output of the special sound effect ends can be changed by changing the timing of the player's action, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-10 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-9,
The specific character displayed in the special performance executed in the first specific performance is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image (for example, in FIG. 13-14 (D2 to D5), the effect image 018SG250B displayed in response to the vibration of the movable body 32 is displayed in a display color that is the same as or similar to the display color of the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 displayed at the same time (for example, a similar color, etc.)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the relationship between the specific character and the effect image, thereby improving the presentation effect of the special presentation.

(SG2020-019) A gaming machine of form 3-11 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-10,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32);
A performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a special performance that operates the movable body, and a post-performance that is executed after the special performance (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing SP reach performances A to E and post-performances A and B);
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific performance, a performance in which a specific character (e.g., an enemy character) is displayed and whether or not the specific character is controlled to be in the advantageous state is notified using the specific character can be executed in a first mode (e.g., SP reach performance B) and a second mode (e.g., SP reach performance D),
When it is notified that the specific performance is controlled to the advantageous state, the special performance can be executed during the execution period of the specific performance (for example, a part where a movable body performance can be executed during the execution period (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5) of the SP reach performance),
During the execution period of the special performance, in both the first and second modes, a common effect image (e.g., effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body is displayed together with the specific character (e.g., character image 018SGX1),
When the specific performance is executed in the first mode, the post-performance using the specific character displayed in the specific performance of the first mode is not executed, and when the specific performance is executed in the second mode, the post-performance using the specific character displayed in the specific performance of the second mode is executed (for example, in the case of SP reach performance B, instead of the post-performance B using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP reach performance, the post-performance A in which no enemy character is displayed is executed (see FIG. 13-17), while in the case of SP reach performance D, the post-performance B using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP reach performance (see FIG. 13-18 and FIG. 13-19) is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second modes share the same operating patterns of the movable bodies in the specific characters and special effects, thereby reducing manufacturing costs, while displaying the common specific characters in different effects, thereby increasing the correlation between the specific effects and the special effects, and between the specific effects and the post-effects, thereby improving the effect of the effects.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-12 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-11,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect in which the specific character is changed into a special form after the special effect executed in the specific effect,
The special effect when the specific effect is executed in the second mode is executed after the post-effect effect (for example, in the SP reach effect B, in the big win notification before the post-effect effect A, a character image 018SGX1Z of the defeated enemy character X-1 that is faded out and hidden is displayed (see FIG. 13-15 (E2)), and in the SP reach effect D, in the post-effect effect B, a special image 018SGXZ of the attacked enemy character X-2 that disappears and becomes a star after being blown away is displayed (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-5)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the timing at which the special effect is executed changes depending on the type of specific effect, thereby improving the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-13 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-11 or 3-12,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the post-event performance during a variable display period in which one variable display is being executed,
In the post-event performance, game value information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value to be awarded in the advantageous state that has been notified of being controlled by the specific performance related to the post-event performance is notified (for example, the execution period of "post-event performance A, B" in SP reaches α, β, and γ is the portion from timing ta5 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily displayed in the jackpot confirmation notification of SP reach performances A to E to timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed (the variable display ends) (ta5 to ta7) during the variable display period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, attention can be increased to the post-event performance in which the gaming value information is announced, and interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-14 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-11 or 3-12,
A gaming machine in which a specific display result is derived and displayed as a result of a variable display, thereby informing the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the post-performance when the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the execution period of "post-performance A, B" in SP reaches α, β, and γ is the portion from timing ta5 when the determined decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily displayed in the jackpot determination notification of SP reach performances A to E to timing ta7 when the determined decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily displayed (variable display ends) during the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to recognize the timing when the post-performance will be executed, thereby increasing attention to the post-performance.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-15 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-11 to 3-14,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which a game value to be awarded is greater than that of the first advantageous state,
The proportion of the control to the second advantageous state is higher when the specific presentation of the second mode is executed than when the specific presentation of the first mode is executed (for example, when the SP reach presentation B is executed when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, the proportion of the control to “jackpot B (6R)” (second advantageous state) which is more advantageous to the player than “jackpot A (6R)” (first advantageous state) is 30%, and when the SP reach presentation D is executed when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, the proportion of the control to “jackpot C (10R)” (second advantageous state) which is more advantageous to the player than “jackpot B (6R)” (first advantageous state) is 40%).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific presentation is executed in the first mode or the second mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-16 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-11 to 3-15,
When the performance execution means executes the specific performance in the first mode, it is capable of executing the post-performance in a mode in which the specific character is not displayed (for example, in post-performance A of SP reach performance A, since no character appears in SP reach performance A, no character appears in post-performance A either. Also, in post-performance A of SP reach performances B and C, characters appear in SP reach performances B and C but no character appears in post-performance A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a post-performance is also executed when the specific performance of the first mode is executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-17 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-11 to 3-16,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the specific performance during one variable display,
A variable display period of the variable display in which the specific performance is executed in the second mode is shorter than a variable display period of the variable display in which the specific performance is executed in the first mode,
In the specific performance of the second mode, the period from the end of the special performance to the derivation and display of the variable display result is longer than the period from the end of the special performance to the derivation and display of the variable display result in the specific performance of the first mode (for example, the variable display period of the SP reach γ for a high base is shorter than the variable display period of the SP reach β for a low base (ta0 to ta7: SP reach γ < SP reach β), and the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body performance" ends in the SP reach γ to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed is longer than the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body performance" ends in the SP reach β to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed in the SP reach β (ta4 to ta7; SP reach γ > SP reach β)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second type of specific presentation executed in a short variable display period, the impression of the variable display can be enhanced by lengthening the period after the end of the special presentation, even if the variable display period is short.

(SG2020-020) The gaming machine of form 3-18 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-17,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A performance execution means is provided that can execute a specific performance that notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, a special performance that is executed when the game is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state in the specific performance, and a post-performance that is executed after the special performance (for example, a performance control CPU 120 is provided as a part that can execute SP reach performances A to E, a movable body performance, and post-performances A and B);
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific effects, a first specific effect (e.g., SP reach effect D) is displayed to indicate whether or not the specific character and the special character are used to control the advantageous state, and a second specific effect (e.g., SP reach effect E) is displayed to indicate whether or not the special character and the special character are used to control the advantageous state, and
As the post-event performance, when the special effect is executed in the first specific effect, the specific character displayed in the first specific effect and the special character are displayed and operated, thereby executing a first post-event performance (e.g., post-event performance B) that notifies game value information (e.g., the number of balls expected to be dispensed) that can specify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state,
As the post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the second specific performance, a second post-event performance (e.g., post-event performance B) can be executed in which the special character displayed in the second specific performance and the special character are displayed and operated to notify game value information (e.g., the number of balls expected to be dispensed) that can specify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state;
At least the action mode of the special character is common to the first post-event performance and the second post-event performance (see FIG. 13-18 and FIG. 13-19 );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by using a common character for both the special performance and the post-performance, manufacturing costs can be reduced while the relationship between the special performance and the post-performance can be easily understood, thereby enhancing the effectiveness of the performance.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-19 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-18,
The execution period of the second post-effect is common to the execution period of the first post-effect (for example, the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) of “post-effect B” corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E are all common),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the execution period, it becomes easier to reuse the control data for the post-event performance, in particular the action control data for special characters, thereby enabling further reduction in manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-20 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-18 or 3-19,
The performance execution means is capable of causing a light-emitting body to emit light in the post-performance,
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting body is common to the first post-event performance and the second post-event performance (for example, the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 in the planned ball addition part of the post-event performance B is common to the SP reach performance D and the SP reach performance E (light emission pattern LP4-4)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission pattern can also be standardized, which makes it possible to further reduce manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-21 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-18 to 3-20,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying a background image in the post-performance,
The background image is common to the first and second post-event performances (for example, the background image 018SG280 representing the universe is common to the post-event performance B of the SP reach performance D and the post-event performance B of the SP reach performance E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the background image can also be made common, which makes it possible to further reduce manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-22 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-18 to 3-21,
The special character is common to the first and second post-event performances (for example, the ally character A-1 is common to the post-event performance B of the SP reach performance D and the post-event performance B of the SP reach performance E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special characters can also be made common, which further reduces manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-23 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-18 to 3-22,
The performance execution means includes:
In the first post-event performance, the specific character and the special character can be displayed at the same time,
In the second post-event performance, the special character and the special character can be displayed at the same time (for example, in the post-event performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance D, an image of an enemy character X-1 and an ally character A-1 fighting is displayed at the same time, and in the post-event performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance E, an image of an enemy character X-2 and an ally character A-1 fighting is displayed at the same time (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, each character is displayed simultaneously, which enhances the impression of the post-show performance and improves the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-24 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-18 to 3-23,
The performance period of the post-performance includes a first performance period and a second performance period subsequent to the first performance period,
The performance execution means includes:
During the first performance period, a suggestion display regarding the magnitude of the game value to be awarded in the advantageous state that notifies that the specific performance related to the post-performance is controlled and an addition display indicating the magnitude of the game value to be added to the suggestion display are displayed (for example, a planned ball output addition part in which the number of planned balls to be output is added and displayed in response to an ally character appearing in SP reach performances D and E attacking an enemy character);
In the second performance period, the amount of the game value shown in the addition display is added to the game value shown in the suggestion display to produce an awarded game value, which is reported as the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state (for example, in a planned ball output reporting part, after a friendly character delivers a final blow to an enemy character, the planned number of balls is displayed as a stopped number and the planned number of balls is reported, and then a fixed decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is displayed as a stopped number and the variable display ends).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the post-performance, the amount of game value to be awarded in an advantageous state is announced after the suggestion display and the addition display are displayed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the post-performance.

(SG2020-021) A gaming machine of form 3-25 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-24,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A performance execution means is provided that can execute a specific performance that notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, a special performance that is executed when the game is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state in the specific performance, and a post-performance that is executed after the special performance (for example, a performance control CPU 120 is provided as a part that can execute SP reach performances A to E, a movable body performance, and post-performances A and B);
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., "jackpot A (6R)" in a low base state and "jackpot B (6R)" in a high base state) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (e.g., "jackpot B (6R)" in a low base state and "jackpot C (10R)" in a high base state),
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific performance, a first specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance D), a second specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance E) different in performance mode from the first specific performance, and a third specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance A) different in performance mode from the first specific performance and the second specific performance can be executed.
As the post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the first specific performance, a first post-event performance (for example, a post-event performance B in which an ally A-1 and an enemy X-1 appear) of a performance aspect related to the first specific performance can be executed;
As the post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the second specific performance, a second post-event performance (for example, a post-event performance B in which an ally A-1 and an enemy X-2 appear) of a performance aspect related to the second specific performance can be executed,
As the post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the third specific performance, a third post-event performance (e.g., post-event performance A) of a performance mode related to the third specific performance can be executed;
The proportion of the second advantageous state varies depending on whether the first specific performance, the second specific performance, or the third specific performance is executed (for example, when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, the proportion of the second advantageous state, which is more advantageous to the player than the “jackpot B (6R)” (first advantageous state), is 40% when the SP reach performance D is executed, and 60% when the SP reach performance E is executed; when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, the proportion of the second advantageous state, which is more advantageous to the player than the “jackpot A (6R)” (first advantageous state), is 100% when the SP reach performance A is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, not only is it notified that a special effect will control the player to an advantageous state, but the proportion of the player being controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on which special effect is executed, so that the player's attention to the special effect can be suitably increased, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-26 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-25,
The performance period of the first post-performance and the performance period of the second post-performance are the same,
The performance period of the third post-performance is different from the performance periods of the first post-performance and the second post-performance (for example, the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) of "post-performance A" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances A to C are all common, and the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) of "post-performance B" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances D and E are all common, while the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of "post-performance A" (10 seconds) is different from the execution period (15 seconds) of "post-performance B").
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the performance period of the first post-performance and the second post-performance common, it is easier to standardize the performance content and control between the first and second post-performances, which reduces manufacturing costs. Furthermore, by executing a third post-performance which has a different performance period, it is possible to prevent the post-performance from becoming monotonous, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the post-performance.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-27 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-25 or 3-26,
The performance execution means is capable of causing the light-emitting body to emit light in the post-performance,
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the first post-event performance is common to the light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the second post-event performance,
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the third post-performance is different from the light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the first post-performance and the second post-performance (for example, the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 in the planned ball release notification part of the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance D and the SP reach performance E are common, while the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-2, LP4-3) of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 in the post-performance A corresponding to the SP reach performance A are different from the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 in the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance D and the SP reach performance E. See FIG. 13-6).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the lighting pattern for the first post-performance and the second post-performance common, manufacturing costs can be further reduced, and by executing a third post-performance with a different lighting pattern, the effect of the post-performance can be enhanced.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B, for example, has an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable pieces approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 (described later) that operates according to the performance is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the above-mentioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped special symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability/high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability/high base state, and the normal state is a low probability/low base state. A high probability state and a low base state is also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot", and if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for opening the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of times the round can be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball output rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball output rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball output rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 8, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the first special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a probability bonus state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving is set to 65317 to 65535 regardless of the setting value when the gaming state is normal or when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving is set to 65317 to 65425 regardless of the setting value when the gaming state is normal or when the time-saving state. In other words, when the gaming state is normal or when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the game excessively gambling-oriented. Furthermore, for the time-saving miss, which is assigned a common judgment value for each setting value, the setting is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss can be reduced.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 9. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 9 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly turning on and off the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding feature 069SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 069SG in this embodiment will be described based on FIG. 11-1 to FIG. 11-64. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the characteristic part 069SG, for example, "step S1" may be abbreviated to "S1" or "069SGS1", "normal reach" may be abbreviated to "N reach" and "super reach" to "SP reach". In addition, in the characteristic parts 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG, "variable" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, the same symbols are used to omit detailed description of the configurations that are similar to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or have different forms, arrangement positions, etc. but have similar functions. In the following, the front side of FIG. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. In this embodiment, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 refers to the surface facing a player playing on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[First embodiment]
The following describes the first embodiment of the feature part 069SG. As described in FIG. 7, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is not set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) with different rates at which the big win display result is displayed, but is described as a game machine in which the big win probability is set to about 1/319.

In addition, after the gaming machine is powered on (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, if the next jackpot does not occur even though the variable display is executed a certain number of times (900 times in this example) in a low probability state, the machine may be controlled to time-saving state B (also called rescue time-saving state or rescue time-saving) out of the multiple types of time-saving states. This rescue time-saving state is provided to rescue players who have played for a long period of time but have not yet won a jackpot (for example, to reduce the amount of money invested in playing), and in this example, it is a gaming state called "Yu-time".

In this embodiment, if the multiple types of jackpots are controlled to jackpot A, 110 variable displays are performed in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) out of the multiple types of time-saving states, so the number of variable displays remaining from the end of time-saving state A to the arrival of the rescue time-saving state is 790, while if the multiple types of jackpots are controlled to either jackpot B or jackpot C, 110 variable displays are performed in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state), so the number of variable displays remaining from the end of the probability variable state to the arrival of the rescue time-saving state is 900. Also, in this embodiment, the number of variable displays in time-saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the rescue time-saving count counter becoming "0" is 1100.

In this embodiment, in the variable display when the rescue time reduction is reached, a shutter image (see Figs. 11-23 (B) and (C)) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, thereby reducing the visibility of the first background image (see Fig. 11-23 (A)) corresponding to the normal state that was displayed as the background image in the variable display before the rescue time reduction is reached, and then a third background image (see Fig. 11-23 (D)) corresponding to the rescue time reduction is displayed as the background image.

In this embodiment, the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 is formed in a left game area where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed in a right game area where game balls can flow down. Game balls that are weakly shot by the launching device flow down the first path in the left game area, and game balls that are strongly shot by the launching device flow down the second path in the right game area.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening formed along the flow direction of the game balls. The first large winning opening can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where game balls cannot enter by driving a large winning opening door (not shown) to open and close by driving a solenoid 069SG2A (see FIG. 11-2). The second large winning opening can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where game balls cannot enter by driving a large winning opening door (not shown) to open and close by driving a solenoid 069SG2B (see FIG. 11-3).

Furthermore, a first count switch 069SG023A capable of detecting a game ball is provided in the first large prize opening, and a second count switch 069SG023B capable of detecting a game ball is provided in the second large prize opening.

In other words, game balls flowing down the left game area (first path) can win in the general winning port 10 and the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, and game balls flowing down the right game area (second path) can win in the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning port 10, and the first or second large winning port formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and can also pass through the passing gate 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, the switch circuit 110 is connected to the first count switch 069SG023A, the second count switch 069SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 069SG024 built into the jackpot start gate 069SG042.

A number of obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, game balls flowing down the left game area cannot win in the second start winning hole or the large winning hole, and game balls flowing down the right game area cannot win in the first start winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area), there are a first special pattern display device 069SG004A capable of variable display of the first special pattern, a second special pattern display device 069SG004B capable of variable display of the second special pattern, a first reserved indicator 069SG025A capable of displaying the first reserved memory number, a second reserved indicator 069SG025B capable of displaying the second reserved memory number, a normal pattern display device 069SG020 capable of variable display of normal patterns, a normal reserved indicator 069SG025C capable of displaying the normal reserved memory number, A game information display unit is provided in which a round indicator 069SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of a jackpot game during the jackpot game, a right hit lamp 069SG132 that lights up in a game state in which a game ball is shot toward the right game area, such as a jackpot game state, a high probability/high base state (high probability state), or a low probability/high base state (time-saving state), a high probability/high base state (high probability state) lamp 069SG133 that lights up when the game is in a high probability/high base state (high probability state), and a time-saving lamp 069SG134 that lights up in a high probability/high base state (high probability state) and a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) are all arranged together. Note that, when the game state is normal, the right hit lamp 069SG132 exceptionally lights up from the timing when the variable display stops if the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 is equipped with an information output circuit for outputting game information (signals) to an external device such as a management computer of the gaming center where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, via a terminal board (not shown).

In this embodiment, the second large prize opening has a V prize opening and an outlet downstream of the V prize opening. A variable V prize opening device (V lid) is provided upstream of the V prize opening. The variable V prize opening device changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid. In other words, the game balls flowing down the second large prize opening can pass through the V prize opening when the variable V prize opening device is in the open state, and cannot pass through the V prize opening and instead flow down to the outlet when the variable V prize opening device is in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 is provided with a V switch 069SG023B1 that can detect, via a switch circuit 110, that the game ball has passed through the V entry port located downstream of the second large entry port, and an ejection switch 069SG023B2 that can detect that the game ball has passed through the ejection port.

The performance control board 12 is also connected to a vibration motor 61 built into the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32. The lamp control board 14 is also connected to a right-hit LED 069SG031 for encouraging a right-hit operation, a first special symbol LED 069SG032 that lights up during the variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol LED 069SG033 that lights up during the variable display of the second special symbol, a first reserved LED 069SG034A that lights up when the first reserved memory number is 1 to 2, and a first reserved LED 069SG035A that lights up when the first reserved memory number is 3 to 4. 69SG034B, a second pending LED 069SG035A that lights up when the second pending memory number is 1 to 2, a second pending LED 069SG035B that lights up when the second pending memory number is 3 to 4, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B, a movable body LED 208 built into the movable body 32, and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

Figure 11-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 11-3 (A), in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so that they can be counted. In addition, random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating them by software using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are set to the ranges shown in FIG. 11-3(A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the settings set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program, making it possible to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used to control the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation pattern judgment table that stores a plurality of variation patterns that become the variable display mode of each pattern in the variable display of special patterns, normal patterns, etc.

Figure 11-3 (B) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 069SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 069SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 069SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/80.02 in this feature part 069SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/319.68 in this feature part 069SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

The judgment tables stored in ROM 101 include the first special symbol display result judgment table and the second special symbol display result judgment table shown in FIG. 7, as well as the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1) and the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), as well as a fluctuation pattern judgment table, a normal symbol display result judgment table (not shown), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown).

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) does not change depending on the set value, but it may also be configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value.

(Big hit type determination table)
11-3(C1) and 11-3(C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot pattern, to determine the type of jackpot as one of jackpots A to C, based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type.

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 11-3 (D). In this embodiment, the jackpot types provided are jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, for which time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, these jackpots A, B, and C are also jackpots for which special control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game by the game ball entering the V winning port after entering the second large winning port in the first round of the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) can be a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a short period of time, and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a long period of time. In the case of jackpot A, the variable V winning ball device is in a short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and in the cases of jackpot B and jackpot C, the variable V winning ball device is in a long open state in the first round of the jackpot game state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot A", the variable V prize entry ball device is in a short open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is not expected that the special bonus control will be executed, so it is essentially a normal jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot B", the variable V prize entry device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to tenth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot C", the variable V prize entry ball device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot C, are provided as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less types of jackpots, or four or more types of jackpots may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 149 is assigned to jackpot A, and 150 to 299 is assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this example, even if a jackpot A occurs, it is possible but extremely rare for a V entry to occur when the V lid is in a short open state, so in the case of a jackpot A, it will be explained as not having a V entry and the special rate control not being executed. Also, even if a jackpot B or jackpot C occurs, it is possible but extremely rare for a V entry not to occur when the V lid is in a long open state, so in the case of a jackpot B or jackpot C, it will be explained as having a V entry and the special rate control being executed.

In this embodiment, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for determining the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the result of the special chart display.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, a form having jackpots B and C in which 110 times of probability variable control and time-saving control can be executed after the end of the jackpot game state has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot D in which time-saving control is executed 1009 times (probability variable state: 110 times + time-saving state A: 899 times) after the end of the jackpot game state may be provided. By doing so, it is almost certain that the next jackpot will be won, which increases interest, and even if a jackpot does not occur in the 110 times probability variable state after the end of jackpot D and the probability variable control ends, after 899 variable displays are executed without a jackpot occurring in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), simply executing one variable display in the normal state will further control to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) described later, which increases interest.

(Number of time reductions)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time-saving times for each transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this example, if a jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, (1) the time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the low probability control is performed 110 times, and the game enters the probability variable area (in this example, the game enters the time-saving state A (in this example, the time-saving state B is controlled to a battle rush (BATTLE RUSH) with 110 times of time-saving). Also, if either a jackpot B or a jackpot C occurs and the game ball enters the probability variable area, (1) the time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the probability variable control is performed 110 times (in this example, the time-saving state C is controlled to a battle rush (BATTLE RUSH) with 110 times of time-saving). In addition, when 900 variable displays are performed in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot, (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times, and the game is controlled to a time-saving state B (in this example, a time-saving state B of 1100 times (Yu-1100 Battle Rush (Yu-1100 Battle Rush))). However, even if 900 fluctuations are performed again in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot after the end of the time-saving state B, the game is not controlled to the time-saving state B again based on this.

In addition, when a losing symbol with time reduction is stopped and displayed in the normal state, (1) the time reduction control is performed 1100 times, and (2) the low probability control is performed 1100 times, so that the state may be controlled to the time reduction state B (in this example, the play state with 1100 time reductions and 1100 battle rushes) in which the control is performed. In this case, even if a losing symbol with time reduction is stopped and displayed in the high base state (probability change state, time reduction state), the transition control of the game state is not performed (the game state is not controlled to the time reduction state with 1100 time reductions). This is to avoid reducing the degree of relief for the player. For example, if the game is configured to re-control to the time reduction state with 1100 time reductions based on the time reduction losing symbol being stopped and displayed when the game is controlled in the probability change state where a jackpot is likely to occur, this is not preferable because it would cause the game state to be controlled from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state for the player. Therefore, the game can be configured to be controlled to a time-saving state of 1,100 times only if the game state controlled when the time-saving losing symbol is stopped and displayed is normal.

The rescue time-saving achievement rate is the percentage of control to the time-saving state via rescue time-saving. The time-saving state via rescue time-saving is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this example) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, so the rescue time-saving achievement rate K can be calculated as follows.

K={(1-ML)^n}×100
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, ML = jackpot probability, n = variable display number)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in this embodiment is approximately 1/319, the rescue time reduction achievement rate K will be 5.9%. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting value to be set, if the rescue time reduction achievement rate is set to be higher as the jackpot probability is set to a lower value, the player can be rescued even if the jackpot probability is set to a low value.

(Fluctuation pattern)
11-5 to 11-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table in this embodiment.

Figure 11-5 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories in the normal state is 0 to 2, (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 3, and (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-5 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 2, 97 judgment values are assigned to non-reach B, 2 judgment values are assigned to SP reach A, and 1 judgment value is assigned to SP reach B. Also, as shown in Figure 11-5 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 3, 97 judgment values are assigned to shortened non-reach B, 2 judgment values are assigned to SP reach A, and 1 judgment value is assigned to SP reach B.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-5 (C), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for jackpots when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 10 judgment values are assigned to SP non-via B, 40 judgment values are assigned to SP reach A, and 50 judgment values are assigned to SP reach B.

In addition, FIG. 11-6 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories in the special bonus state is 0, (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, and (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-6 (A), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 95 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, 2 judgment values are assigned to SP reach C, and 3 judgment values are assigned to SP reach D. Also, as shown in Figure 11-6 (B), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 85 judgment values are assigned to shortened non-reach A, 10 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, 2 judgment values are assigned to SP reach C, and 3 judgment values are assigned to SP reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0, 5 judgment values are assigned to SP non-via A, 80 judgment values are assigned to SP reach C, and 15 judgment values are assigned to SP reach D.

In addition, FIG. 11-7 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories in time-saving state A is 0, (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, and (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-7 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 95 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, and 5 judgment values are assigned to SP reach E. Also, as shown in Figure 11-7 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 90 judgment values are assigned to shortened non-reach A, 5 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, and 5 judgment values are assigned to SP reach E.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 5 determination values are assigned to SP non-via A, and 95 determination values are assigned to SP reach E.

In addition, Figure 11-8 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state), (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, and (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-8 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 97 determination values are assigned to non-reach A, and 3 determination values are assigned to SP reach D. Also, as shown in Figure 11-8 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 97 determination values are assigned to super-shortened non-reach, and 3 determination values are assigned to SP reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-8 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 100 determination values are assigned to SP Reach D.

As shown in Figures 11-6 (A) and (B), in the high probability state, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the average time for the variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined is approximately 8.2 seconds {((7 s x 95) + (40 s x 2) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, and when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the average time for the variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined is approximately 4.8 seconds {((3 s x 85) + (7 s x 10) + (40 s x 2) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 4.8}.

Assuming that the first variable display when the probability of a special state begins has a reserved memory number of 0, and that the 2nd to 110th variable display has a reserved memory number of 1 to 3, the average variable display time for a losing variable pattern that can be determined in the probability of a special state is approximately 4.83 seconds {(8.2 + (4.8 x 109)) ÷ 110 = 4.83}.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-6(C), the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in the high probability state when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 51.1 seconds {((22 s x 5) + (55 s x 80) + (40 s x 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}, so the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in the high probability state is approximately 51.1 seconds.

As shown in Figures 11-7 (A) and (B), in time-saving state A, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is approximately 9.15 seconds {((7 s x 95) + (50 s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, and when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is approximately 5.55 seconds {((3 s x 90) + (7 s x 5) + (50 s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 5.55}.

Assuming that when time-saving state A starts, the first variable display has a pending memory count of 0, and the 2nd to 110th variable displays have a pending memory count of 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable display pattern for a miss that can be determined in time-saving state A is approximately 5.58 seconds {(9.15 + (5.55 x 109)) ÷ 110 = 5.58}.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 in time-saving state A is approximately 62.8 seconds {((22 s x 5) + (55 s x 95)) ÷ 100 = 62.85}.

As shown in Figures 11-8 (A) and (B), in time-saving state B, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is approximately 7.54 seconds {((7 s x 97) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, and when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is approximately 2.205 seconds {((1.5 s x 97) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 2.205}.

Assuming that when time-saving state B starts, the first variable display has a pending memory count of 0, and the 2nd to 1100th variable display has a pending memory count of 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable display pattern for a miss that can be determined in time-saving state B is approximately 2.2 seconds {(7.54 + (2.205 x 1099)) ÷ 1100 = 2.20985}.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in time-saving state B when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 40 seconds, so the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in time-saving state B is approximately 40 seconds.

In this way, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the number of possible variation patterns for a miss is three for the special state, two for the time-saving state A, and two for the time-saving state B. When the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the number of possible variation patterns for a miss is four for the special state, three for the time-saving state A, and two for the time-saving state B.

The average variable display time of the determinable losing variation pattern is 4.83 seconds in the guaranteed bonus state, 5.58 seconds in time-saving state A, and 2.2 seconds in time-saving state B.

In addition, when the number of reserved memories is between 0 and 3, the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined is three for the special state, two for the time-saving state A, and one for the time-saving state B.

The average variable display time of the determinable jackpot fluctuation pattern is 51.1 seconds in the guaranteed bonus state, 62.8 seconds in time-saving state A, and 40 seconds in time-saving state B.

In other words, the number of types of variable patterns for misses that can be determined decreases in the order of high probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (high probability state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B), and the average time of the variable display time of the variable patterns for misses that can be determined decreases in the order of high probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (high probability state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In addition, the types of variable patterns for big wins that can be determined decrease in the order of special probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (special probability state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B), and the average time of the variable display time of the variable patterns for big wins that can be determined decreases in the order of special probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (special probability state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B). In this way, the time-saving state B has fewer types of variable patterns and a shorter variable display period than the special probability state and time-saving state A. In other words, a monotonous and efficient variable display is performed.

In addition, the number of types of fluctuation patterns for misses and types of fluctuation patterns for big wins that can be determined is greater in the special state than in the time-saving state A, but the number of types of fluctuation patterns for big wins may be greater in the time-saving state A than in the special state, or may be the same in the special state and the time-saving state A.

The various fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 11-5 to 11-8 are used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In particular, in time-saving state B, the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 11-8 is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that even if the first start winning occurs in time-saving state B, the number of possible fluctuation pattern types is smaller than in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A, and the average variable display time is shorter, resulting in a monotonous and efficient variable display.

In addition, different variation pattern determination tables may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

When a V-winning occurs during a jackpot game state due to a "jackpot A", the game is controlled to a probability variable state in which probability variable control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, similar to "jackpot B" and "jackpot C", so the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-6. When a V-winning does not occur during a jackpot game state due to a "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", the game is controlled to a time-saving state A in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, similar to "jackpot A", so the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-7. In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination table does not use a fluctuation pattern determination table according to the jackpot type, but rather uses a fluctuation pattern determination table linked to the state after the jackpot game state ends, since irregular states may occur during the jackpot game state.

In other words, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a high probability state after the end of a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the passage of a gaming ball through a specific area (e.g., a V winning hole, etc.) in the jackpot gaming state, if a V winning occurs in the jackpot gaming state where a V winning is possible, the machine is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, while if a V winning does not occur in the jackpot gaming state where a V winning is possible, the machine is controlled to a first time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and if a V winning does not occur in the jackpot gaming state where a V winning is difficult, the machine is controlled to a second time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, in which the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are a common time-saving state, and it is preferable that the variable display period of 1 in the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state is shorter than the variable display period of 1 in the time-saving state B of this embodiment.

(Fluctuation pattern without reach)
In this embodiment, the variation pattern without a reach ("shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B", "ultra shortened non-reach", "non-reach A, non-reach B", "non-SP A, non-SP B") is a variation pattern in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the reach is not established after the variable display is started and the variable display result is a "miss" or "jackpot" is stopped and displayed. "Shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B", "ultra shortened non-reach", "non-reach A, non-reach B", and "non-SP A, non-SP B" are collectively referred to simply as "non-reach" or "non-reach variation pattern". Incidentally, "non-SP A, non-SP B" is a non-reach variation pattern for a jackpot that is a jackpot without the establishment of a reach or SP reach.

In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns not involving a reach, when it is determined to be a "non-reach A" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 7000 ms, when it is determined to be a "non-SP via A" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 7000 + 15000 ms, when it is determined to be a "non-reach B" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 12000 ms, when it is determined to be a "non-SP via B" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 12000 + 15000 ms, when it is determined to be a "shortened non-reach A" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 3000 ms, when it is determined to be a "shortened non-reach B" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 5000 ms, and when it is determined to be an "ultra-shortened non-reach" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 1500 ms. Of these, the "super-shortened non-reach" variation pattern is a variation pattern that can only be determined in time-shortened state B, and has a shorter variable display period than any of the variation patterns determined when the game is controlled in other game states in which time-shortened control is executed (time-shortened state A, special probability state).

(Fluctuating pattern with super reach)
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern with the super reach ("SP reach A", "SP reach B", "SP reach C", "SP reach D", "SP reach E"), after the reach state is established, as the SP reach performance, a bowling performance (SP reach A) in which the ally character and the enemy character bowl and notify whether or not the ally character has won the jackpot, and a battle performance (SP reach B to E) in which the ally character and the enemy character battle and notify whether or not the ally character has won the jackpot are executed, and the final display result is determined and stopped after the bowling performance or the battle performance ends. Here, if the final display result is a "miss", a performance (defeat performance) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "jackpot", a performance (victory performance) in which the ally character wins against the enemy character is executed, or a performance (defeat performance) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, and then a performance (revival performance) in which the ally character revives and wins against the enemy character is executed.

A "variation pattern without a reach" is a variation pattern in which the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a specified reach state and a variable display result is displayed. This includes a variation pattern in which even if there is a reach tease such as a "reach notice" described below, the final variable display result is displayed without becoming a reach state. Also, a "variation pattern with a super reach" is a variation pattern in which the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a specified reach state, the reach performance develops, and an SP reach performance is executed, and then the display result is displayed.

The Super Reach jackpot variation pattern (SP Reach A to E) also includes a variable display part in which a variable display of decorative symbols is executed, and a post-show performance part in which the number of balls expected to be awarded in the jackpot game state is notified in a specific manner after the victory and revival performances of the variable display part have ended.

The variable display period of the variable display part is different for each type of SP reach A to E: 45,000 ms for SP reach A, 80,000 ms for SP reach B, 40,000 ms for SP reach C, 25,000 ms for SP reach D, and 50,000 ms for SP reach E. On the other hand, the execution period of the post-performance part is the same for SP reaches A to E: 15,000 ms. In this embodiment, the post-performance part is assigned a predetermined period of time (for example, 15,000 ms) in the variable display period, but the predetermined period may be different depending on the type of SP reach. In addition, a fanfare period during a jackpot game state may be assigned to the post-performance part.

In this embodiment, all fluctuation patterns involving a reach are super reach fluctuation patterns, and an example is given of a form in which a normal reach fluctuation pattern is not set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a normal reach fluctuation pattern may also be set.

(Performance control command)
FIG. 11-9(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the performance control command in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (classification of command) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 11-9(A) is only an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-9(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time) of the decorative symbols etc. that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variation pattern etc.

Command 8C00H is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot" ("miss with time reduction"), and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of multiple types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C".

Command 8FXXH is a pattern confirmation command that stops (confirms) the variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, and specifies the pattern confirmation period until the next variable display begins.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (C), command 8F00H is a pattern determination command A that ends the variation of the special pattern and sets the pattern determination period to 0.5 seconds. Command 8F01H is a pattern determination command B that ends the variation of the special pattern and sets the pattern determination period to 20 seconds.

In this embodiment, (i) when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed, and (ii) when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot, a pattern determination command with different EXT data set is transmitted in the rescue time reduction reaching variation. Specifically, (i) when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed, a pattern determination A command is transmitted in which the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds in the rescue time reduction reaching variation. Also, (ii) when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot, a pattern determination B command is transmitted in which the pattern determination period is 20 seconds in the rescue time reduction reaching variation.

Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed (high base state, time-saving state).

Command E1XXH is a remaining time-saving count notification command that notifies the number of remaining time-saving control times in the time-saving state excluding rescue time-saving (time-saving state A). Command E2XXH is a remaining chance-of-chance-number notification command that notifies the number of remaining chance-of-chance-control times in the chance-of-chance-chance state.

Command F100H is a right-hit LED on notification command that notifies the right-hit LED069SG031 to light up. Command F101H is a right-hit LED off notification command that notifies the right-hit LED069SG031 to light up.

Command 91XXH is a command to specify the number of times rescue time-saving is performed upon recovery, and is a performance control command that converts the value of the rescue time-saving counter to a hexadecimal number and specifies it when the power is restored. With the command to specify the number of times rescue time-saving is performed upon recovery, different EXT data is set according to each digit (first, second, third, fourth digit) of the value (four-digit value) of the rescue time-saving counter when the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (D), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (D), commands 9100H to 910FH are recovery time reduction number specification 1 commands that specify the first digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9110H to 911FH are recovery time reduction number specification 2 commands that specify the second digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9130H to 913FH are recovery time reduction number specification 3 commands that specify the third digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9140H to 914FH are recovery time reduction number specification 4 commands that specify the fourth digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number.

Command 94XXH is a rescue time reduction count designation command, which is a presentation control command that designates the remaining number of variable display times (126 times or less) until rescue time reduction occurs. With the rescue time reduction count designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (E), different EXT data is set according to the remaining number of variable display times (126 times or less) until rescue time reduction occurs.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (E), command 9400H is a rescue time reduction count A designation command, which specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a rescue time reduction count B designation command, which specifies that 1 to 125 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a rescue time reduction count C designation command, which specifies that 126 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947FH is a rescue time reduction count D designation command, which specifies that 127 or more times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, which is a performance control command that designates the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs. In the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of variable displays until the rescue time reduction occurs is 100, command 9601H is sent as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of variable displays is 700, command 9607H is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration display designation command that designates a customer waiting demonstration.

(Game control main processing)
11-10 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in this embodiment. In this example, the processes in steps S1 to S7, S8 to S9, and S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when a performance control command to restore power from a power outage is sent in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of a rescue time reduction counter for counting the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction occurs, sets the current rescue time reduction counter value converted to a hexadecimal number, and controls the sending of a rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter and controls to send a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0014). For example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 125 times, the CPU 103 controls to send command 9401H as the rescue time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the gaming machine is turned on and the recovery process is performed, the rescue time reduction number designation command is sent and the remaining number of variable display times until the current rescue time reduction is notified.

In this example, when power is restored after a power outage, a command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for recovery and a command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for recovery are sent separately from the command at the time of recovery, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the EXT data of the command at the time of recovery (e.g., a command to specify power on) sent in step S7 may be configured to be set to a value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the time for recovery is shortened, and then sent.

In addition, when a RAM clear is requested in step S3, when there is no backup data in step S4, or when an abnormality is detected in the backup RAM in step S5, a clear process is performed on the area including the area of the rescue time reduction counter in the initialization process of step S8.

Also, when the presentation control command instructing initialization is sent in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 069SGS0015). Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900". That is, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on and a jackpot is not generated even after 900 variable displays are executed, rescue time reduction is performed and the time reduction state B is controlled. Note that, in this example, since the presentation control command instructing initialization sent in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set in the rescue time reduction counter, the CPU 103 can also specify the initial value to be set in the rescue time reduction counter based on the transmission of the presentation control command instructing initialization.

Next, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter (which is "900" in this example), converts the current value of the rescue time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number, sets the value, and transmits a recovery time reduction count designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0016).

In this way, the setting of the rescue time reduction counter is executed before the timer interrupt process, which is the game progress process, is executed, so that the variable display does not start before the rescue time reduction counter is set, and the number of times until the rescue time reduction can be reliably managed.

In this example, the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but this is not the only option, and the rescue time reduction counter may not be initially set when the RAM clear process is executed. If configured in this way, gameplay can be started from the continuation of the value of the rescue time reduction counter from the previous day, reducing the amount of investment required to reach the rescue time reduction, and the configuration can be made so as not to be disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected to be on (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clear process is performed, and the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clear process is performed.

(Time-saving flag, chance flag)
In this embodiment, when any of the conditions for controlling to the time-saving state is satisfied, the time-saving flag can be set. The time-saving flag includes a time-saving flag A and a time-saving flag B. In the following description, erasing (or clearing) the flag may be described as resetting the flag.

The time-saving flag A is set when the game is controlled to the time-saving state A via the jackpot A. This time-saving flag A is set when the jackpot game state of the jackpot A ends, and is cleared when the time-saving state A ends (when a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state A, or when the 110 times of time-saving control end and the game is controlled to the normal state).

The time-saving flag B is set when the game is in the time-saving state B controlled via the rescue time-saving function. This time-saving flag B is set when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern have been executed since the RAM was cleared, or when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern have been executed in a low probability state after the jackpot game state ends, and is erased when the time-saving state B ends (when a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state B, when the time-saving control ends after 1100 times and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.).

The high probability flag is set when the game is controlled to the high probability state. In this embodiment, if a V is won in the first round of a jackpot game, the game state is controlled to the high probability state when the jackpot game ends, and the high probability flag is set accordingly. This high probability flag is erased when the high probability state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the high probability state, when the 110th high probability control is executed and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.). For example, the high probability flag is erased when step 069SGS69A in FIG. 11-12 described later is judged as YES, based on the fact that it is the 110th time since the variable display has been controlled to the high probability state.

(Special pattern normal processing)
11-11 and 11-12 are flow charts showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory number (step 069SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is checked. If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory number is 0 (step 069SGS52). Specifically, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 069SGS53). If the second reserved memory count is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory count is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 069SGS54).

In this embodiment, the processing of steps 069SGS52 to S54 is executed, so that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot, for example.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 069SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 069SGS56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the combined pending memory count by 1. That is, the count value of the combined pending memory count counter is decremented by 1 (step 069SGS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending memory count counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 069SGS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 069SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value with the random number for hit determination, and decides that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating that the jackpot state is in a probability variable state is not set (if the state is in a low probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the jackpot determination value for low probability. Also, if the probability variable flag is set (if the state is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the jackpot determination value for high probability. When the value of the random number for determining a win matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined that a jackpot has been reached (step 069SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been reached (step 069SGS64). The CPU 103 then determines the type of jackpot to be the type (jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C) that corresponds to the value that matches the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 069SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined that a jackpot has been reached (step 069SGS63; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS66.

In this example, by performing normal special pattern processing, a rescue time-saving condition (reducing the value of the rescue time-saving counter to "0") can occur to control to rescue time-saving regardless of the variable display result (jackpot, miss). In this example, the time-saving state A is entered based on a jackpot A being reached, and the time-saving state B is entered based on the fact that no next jackpot has occurred even after a predetermined number of variable displays (900 in this example) have ended, but it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met will be a jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met is a jackpot, the system is configured to control to time-saving state A based on a jackpot being reached.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state is 0 (step 069SGS66). If the value of the time-saving counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter (step 069SGS67), and checks whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS68). If the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the variable display ends (step 069SGS69).

In this example, steps 069SGS66 to 069SGSS69 are executed to perform the subtraction process of the time-saving counter before the count process of the variable display number until the time-saving relief from step 069SGS71 onwards, but the processing is not limited to this. For example, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter may be executed after the count process of the variable display number until the time-saving relief from step 069SGS71 onwards. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that is a time-saving relief, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time-saving counter to "110" (see step 069SGS172), the value of the time-saving counter will be subtracted by 1 extra, so in the case of a variable display that is a time-saving relief, the value of the time-saving counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process. Also, the time-saving counter may be set to "111", which is 1 more than the previous value, in advance.

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 069SGS69A). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., the game is in a high probability state), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. In this example, the process of step 069SGS69A is executed, and if the game is in a high probability state, the process of steps 069SGS70 and after (particularly the process of step 069SGSS71) is not executed. Therefore, even if a variable display is executed when the game state is in a high probability state (in this example, during Extreme Battle Rush), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not decremented. If the high probability flag is not set (i.e., the game is not in a high probability state), the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70.

In this embodiment, when the high probability flag is set, the process proceeds to step 069SGSS84 without executing the processes after step 069SGSS70. However, this is not limited to the above. When the high probability flag is set, the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70, but the process of step 069SGSS71 may not be executed. In other words, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not updated, but a rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the unupdated rescue time reduction counter may be sent.

Next, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 at this point, this is a timing after the game has already been controlled to a time reduction state (time reduction state B) via the rescue time reduction (a timing when the game is controlled to time reduction state B, or when the game is controlled to a normal state after 1100 fluctuations in time reduction state B), and a jackpot, which is the trigger for setting the rescue time reduction counter to 900, has not occurred. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS70; No), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step 069SGS71). Also, in this example, by executing the processing of step 069SGS71, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern is executed or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 069SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS73). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9401H as the rescue time reduction number designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 947EH as the rescue time reduction number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS74). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that the rescue time reduction has occurred and that control will be made to time reduction state B at the end of the fluctuation (step 069SGS75). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 sets 7FH uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send the command 957FH as the rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the remaining variable display number until the rescue time reduction is a number in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 069SGS77). Note that whether the remaining variable display number until the rescue time reduction is a number in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining variable display count until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter in the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction count 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS78). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9601H as the rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9608H as the rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and transmits a rescue time reduction number designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and execute the teasing presentation or countdown presentation described below.

In addition, for example, if the rescue time reduction counter is set (set to "900") at the time of the rescue time reduction so that rescue time reductions can occur continuously, the rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may be sent only the first time the rescue time reduction occurs, and the rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may not be sent the second or subsequent time the rescue time reduction occurs.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the result of the determination of the jackpot type (step 069SGS84). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a jackpot A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", if it is determined to be a jackpot B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a jackpot C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", and if it is determined to be a miss, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". The CPU 103 also stores the determined stopping pattern of the special pattern in a stopping pattern storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 069SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 069SGS86).

(Special symbol stop processing)
11-13 and 11-14 are flow charts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 069SGS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS132).

If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is not 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has not yet ended), the special pattern stop process ends. If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has ended), the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 069SGS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the probability hit flag, time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, rescue time-saving decision flag, and the time-saving count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state (step 069SGS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 069SGS135). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" in response to a jackpot, and if the next jackpot does not occur even after 900 variable displays are executed in the low probability state after the jackpot game ends, rescue time reduction will occur and the game will be controlled to time reduction state B.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 069SGS135, when a jackpot is hit, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot to initialize it, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "900" during a round of jackpot play, or may be configured to be initially set to "900" at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot play.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right hit lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS136). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a right hit LED lighting notification command to the performance control CPU 120 to notify the lighting of the right hit LED 069SG031 (step 069SGS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a jackpot start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the large prize opening to measure the time before the large prize opening (fanfare time) until the first large prize opening 069SG007A and the second large prize opening 069SG007B are controlled to be open (step 069SGS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S144) (step 069SGS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (step 069SGS133; No), the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-shortening determination flag is set (step 069SGS170). If the rescue time-shortening determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time-shortening determination flag (step 069SGS171), and if it is set, sets the time-shortening flag B and controls the game to the time-shortening state (step 069SGS171A). Then, the time-shortening count counter is set to "1100" (step 069SGS172).

The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state B designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS174). The CPU 103 also controls the start of lighting of the right hit lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS174A), and controls the transmission of a right hit LED lighting notification command to the performance control CPU 120 notifying the lighting of the right hit LED 069SG031 (step 069SGS174B). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In this example, when the rescue time reduction occurs, the game is simply controlled to the time reduction state B, and the rescue time reduction counter is not set, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, the game may be configured to control to the time reduction state B when the rescue time reduction occurs, and also to set the rescue time reduction counter (set to "900"). With this configuration, it becomes possible to continuously generate rescue time reductions, and once a rescue time reduction occurs, the game can be configured to continue the time reduction state until a jackpot occurs.

In addition, in this example, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" when it is set, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is subtracted by one each time a variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction occurs when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "0", but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "0" when it is set, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is added by one each time a variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction occurs when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "900".

In this example, the process of step 069SGS172 is executed to set the number of time-saving times to 1100, which is greater than the number of variable display times (900) until a rescue time-saving time is generated, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the time-saving time counter may be set to a value equal to or less than "900" in step 069SGS172.

In addition, in step 069SGS172, the time-saving counter may be configured to be able to set values corresponding to multiple types of time-saving times. For example, the time-saving counter may be configured to be set to "110" if a rescue time-saving is performed the first time, and to be set to "1100" if a rescue time-saving is performed the second time.

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 069SGS172, a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the time-saving times counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 110 times with a 10% probability, and 1100 times with a 90% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving time type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

If the rescue time-saving determination flag is not set in step 069SGS170, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving end flag is set (step 069SGS141). If the time-saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving end flag (step 069SGS142).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the time-saving flags that have been set (either time-saving flag A or B) and ends the time-saving state (step 069SGS145). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to end the illumination of the right-hit lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS150). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a right-hit LED off notification command to the performance control CPU 120 to notify the right-hit LED 069SG031 that it has been turned off (step 069SGS151). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a normal state designation command (a type of game state designation command) to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In this example, the process of steps 069SGS141 to S152 is executed to transition to the normal state at the end of the pattern determination period during the final time-saving fluctuation and to end the right-hit notification, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the system may be configured to transition to the normal state and end the right-hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the pattern determination period during the final time-saving fluctuation.

Also, if the time-saving end flag is not set in step 069SGS141 (step 069SGS141; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In step 069SGS175, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 069SGS175).

(state transition)
Next, state transitions in this embodiment will be described below. Figures 11-15 are state transition diagrams for explaining state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 11-15, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the high probability region, the game is controlled to the high probability state, and if a jackpot A occurs, the game is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot (low probability/high base state)). Although not shown, even if a jackpot B occurs but the game ball does not pass through the high probability region, the game is also controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, even if it is a miss, if the rescue time-saving state is activated ((P) (P-1) after the RAM clear process or (P-2) after the end of the high probability state, when the variable display count reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring, or (Q) (Q-1) after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving state A, when the variable display count reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring), it will be controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state)).

Also, as shown in Figure 11-15, in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled to the probability variable state again. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-15, in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the state is controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the state is controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state A, if 110 variable displays end without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-15, in time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the state is controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the state is controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state B, if 1,100 variable displays end without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, even if it is a miss, if the rescue time-saving state is entered ((P) (P-1) after the RAM clear process or (P-2) after the end of the special probability state, when the variable display count reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring, or (Q) (Q-1) after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving state A, when the variable display count reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring), the game will be controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving state).

In this example, if a jackpot occurs during time-saving state B and the game ball does not enter the special probability area, the game will always transition to time-saving state A; however, this control is not limited to this. For example, the game may be configured to compare the current remaining number of time-saving times with the number of time-saving times that would occur if the game ball did not enter the special probability area (110 times in this example), and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, to continue the current time-saving state B as is.

In this example, although it is possible to execute a variable display of the first special symbol during the time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state, this would be disadvantageous to the player, so the state transition is explained without assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed during the time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state.

(Explanation of Yu-Time)
Next, the characteristics of "Yu-Time", which is the time-saving state B (relief time-saving state) in this embodiment, will be explained based on Fig. 11-16 to Fig. 11-18. Fig. 11-16 shows an example of the case where "Yu-Time" is not installed, with (A1) and (A2) being diagrams showing an example of the case where "Yu-Time" is installed, with (B1) and (B2) being diagrams showing an example of the case where "Yu-Time" is installed. Fig. 11-17 shows an example of deviation fluctuation in the normal state, with (A) to (D). Fig. 11-18 shows an explanatory diagram of Yu-Time in which the fluctuation efficiency is the same as in the normal state, with (E1) and (E2) being diagrams showing the Yu-Time of this case in which the fluctuation efficiency is higher than in the normal state, with (F1) to (F4) being diagrams showing the Yu-Time of this case. It should be noted that, for the convenience of explaining the characteristics of "Yu-Time" in Fig. 11-16 to Fig. 11-18, explanation images different from the performance images explained below will be used for explanation.

First, in the case of a pachinko game machine not equipped with the "Yu-Time" of this embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 11-16 (A1) (A2), even if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times when the jackpot probability is about 1/300, which is about three times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled to a jackpot in the low probability state (for example, normal state (low probability/low base state)) after the jackpot ends, it will not be controlled to "Yu-Time", that is, the time-saving state. Since the player is already stuck at about three times the jackpot probability denominator at this point, the player continues playing without a jackpot for a long time and is making a lot of investment. However, this normal state (low probability/low base state) continues until a jackpot occurs, and further investment is required, which may significantly reduce the player's motivation to play.

On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko game machine equipped with the "Yu-Time" of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 11-16 (B1) (B2), after the end of a jackpot, if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., about 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled to a jackpot in a low probability state (e.g., normal state (low probability/low base state)), the machine will enter "Yu-Time" and be controlled to time-saving state B for a specific number of variable displays (e.g., 1100 times, or up to about 3.8 times the jackpot probability denominator). At this point, the player is already stuck at about three times the jackpot probability, so the player has been playing for a long time without a jackpot, and has invested a lot. However, by being controlled to "Yu-Time", that is, time-saving state B, additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of a jackpot occurring increases, so a decrease in motivation to play can be suppressed.

Also, as shown in Figures 11-17 (A) to (D), the player continues playing (is "addicted") without winning a jackpot during the period from the end of the jackpot until control enters "Yu-Time", and during that period various preview effects are executed, hyping the player up. In addition, when the variable display reaches 900 times, for example, when the variable display is executed the first number of times (e.g., 105 times) after the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 11-17(A)), when the variable display is executed the second number of times (e.g., 213 times) (see FIG. 11-17(B)), when the variable display is executed the third number of times (e.g., 506 times) (see FIG. 11-17(C)), when the variable display is executed the fourth number of times (e.g., 882 times) (see FIG. 11-17(D)), at least an effect with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as an SP reach (e.g., the "super hot" SP reach effect), is executed a certain number of times, and since these SP reach effects continue to fail, it is highly likely that the player will feel quite depressed.

As shown in Figure 11-18 (E1) (E2), even if the "Yu-Time" (time-saving state B) is finally controlled after 900 variable displays, if this time-saving state B is in a state with low variable efficiency such as the normal state (low probability/low base state), the number of wasted shots will increase, leading to further investment and prolonged play. Also, since the SP reach effects are all missed in the 900 variable displays, which is quite depressing, the desire to play will decrease if provocative effects occur frequently in "Yu-Time".

As shown in Fig. 11-18 (F1) to (F4), the "Yu-Time" (time-saving state B) of this embodiment is a time-saving state in which the variable efficiency is higher than the normal state (low probability/low base state), so that the player can continue playing while suppressing additional investment. In addition, the time-saving control executes the variable display a specific number of times (for example, 1100 times, which is a maximum of about 3.8 times the probability of a jackpot), so that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot during the period controlled in the time-saving state B is high (for example, about 97%), so that the player can play with peace of mind. For example, if the jackpot probability is 1/319.9, the probability of not winning a jackpot with one variable display is about 99% {(319.9-1)÷319.9=0.996874}, and the probability of not winning a jackpot within 1100 spins is about 3% (0.996874^1100=0.031937). Therefore, the probability of hitting the jackpot within 1,100 spins is approximately 97% (1-0.031937=0.968063).

In addition, in "Yu-Time", the variable display period of the selected variable pattern is short, so the variable efficiency is higher than in other time-saving states, and there is a high possibility that the miss variable display will be efficiently consumed and a jackpot will be won in a short period of time, and a right-hit play will result in a jackpot in the second special game, so it is an advantageous state in which there is a high possibility that a jackpot advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot B or jackpot C) will be awarded. In addition, since it is difficult to execute the preview performance and SP reach performance described below, and there are few opportunities to be aroused by miss performance, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in motivation to play. In other words, unlike the game state for waiting for the next jackpot while enjoying the performance, such as the probability change state and time-saving state A, the "Yu-Time" of this embodiment is a game state in which efficiently consuming the miss variation and winning the next jackpot is prioritized over enjoying the performance. Details of the "Yu-Time" (time-saving state B) of this embodiment will be explained below.

(Battle Rush)
In this embodiment, when the time-saving state A via the big win A is controlled, the presentation mode is controlled to "Battle Rush". FIG. 11-19(A) is a diagram showing a presentation example in the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is controlled to "Battle Rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (A1), when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state A) and the value of the time-saving count counter is 0 to 110, the second background image 069SG320 showing an evening cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern, corresponding to the presentation mode being "Battle Rush", and a presentation mode display 069SG221 consisting of the characters "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, a time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 110) is displayed in correspondence with the remaining variable display count controlled to the low probability/high base state, and a right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" are displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, active display 069SG003 is displayed in active display area 069SG013 in response to the execution of the variable display of the second special pattern, and four second reserved displays 069SG002 are displayed in second reserved display area 069SG012 in response to the value of the second reserved memory count being 4. In addition, a display area 5SL is provided in the upper left corner of the screen of image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory count (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory count (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓") corresponding to the decorative pattern, and the small pattern is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The above-mentioned first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, reserved display, small symbol, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, time reduction remaining display 069SG201, right hit notification image 069SG400, etc. may be displayed in front of the performance images such as characters (upper layer) to prevent the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, small symbol, and error display, while the decorative symbols may be displayed behind the performance images (lower layer) to prevent the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The small symbol is also called the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is displayed variably by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5 as a symbol indicating that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed (see the small symbol displayed in the display area 5SL shown in FIG. 11-19 (A1)). By variably displaying the fourth symbol, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the decorative symbol is currently being variably displayed even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative symbol, such as when a performance content including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment, or when a performance is performed in which the movable body 32 covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command, thereby performing a variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Also, the performance control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command, thereby performing a variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

The pattern displayed on the fourth pattern display device provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 at a specified location on the game board 2), such as the first special pattern LED069SG032 or the second special pattern LED069SG033, is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A2), after the 110th variable display while the game state is controlled to the time-saving state A, if the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state), a first background image 069SG310 showing a daytime cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern, and a variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the characters "0 games") corresponding to the number of variable displays executed since the game state was controlled to the low probability/low base state is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance mode display 069SG221 in the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX games remaining", XX = 0 to 100) in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

When the game is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state), if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 300 or less, a countdown effect will be executed, as described below, and a special number of times display 069SG203 (in this example, the text "Until Play/1100 BATTLE RUSH", the text "XXX times left", and a triangular object, XXX = 1 to 300) will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

(Yu-1100 Battle Rush [Yu-Time])
In this embodiment, when the time-saving state B via the rescue time-saving is controlled, the presentation mode is controlled to "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" (also called "Yu-Time"). FIG. 11-19(B) is a diagram showing an example of presentation in the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is controlled to "Yu-1100 Battle Rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1), when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state B) and the value of the time-saving count counter is 0 to 1100, the third background image 069SG330 showing a nighttime cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern in accordance with the presentation mode being "Yu-1100 Battle Rush," and a presentation mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" is displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining," XX = 0 to 1100) is displayed in accordance with the remaining variable display count controlled to the low probability/high base state, and a right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are displayed at the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a display area 5SL is provided at the top left of the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small pattern is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, the display format (e.g., design, font, color, etc.) of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 is the same for the special bonus state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B, which allows costs to be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B2), after the 1100th variable display when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B ends, if the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state, the first background image 069SG310 is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern. At this time, the characters "Play/1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 1100), and the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

In this embodiment, even if 900 variable displays are executed without a jackpot occurring in the low probability state after 1100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring in the time-saving state B, the time-saving state B will not be controlled. Therefore, after 110 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring in the time-saving state A or the probability state described below, the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, while after 1100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring in the time-saving state B, the variable display count display 069SG202 is not displayed on the image display device 5. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the time-saving state B will be controlled if 900 variable displays are executed without a jackpot occurring in the low probability state after 1100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring in the time-saving state B.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1), during the period controlled in time-saving state B, the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013, and the second hold display 069SG002 is displayed in the second hold display area 069SG012. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the period controlled in time-saving state B, the active display 069SG003 and the second hold display 069SG002 may not be displayed. Note that during time-saving state A or the probability bonus state, the active display 069SG003 and the second hold display 069SG002 may or may not be displayed.

In addition, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state A and then the 110th variable display is completed, if the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state, it may be possible to display text such as "BATL RUSH END" before controlling the game state to a low probability/low base state. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B and then the 1100th variable display is completed, if the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state, it is preferable not to display text such as "BATL RUSH END" as described above.

In addition, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, after the 1100th variable display is completed, if the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state, the shutter effect (see FIG. 11-23 (B)) that is performed when transitioning to time-saving state B may be performed before controlling the game state to the low probability/low base state.

In addition, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state A, a countdown notification may be issued to indicate that there are 10 time-saving turns remaining when the 101st variable display begins, but when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, no countdown notification may be issued even when the 1091st variable display begins. This prevents the player from being hyped up when time-saving state B (Yu-time) is about to end.

(Extreme Battle Rush)
In this embodiment, when the probability of a special state is reached via the jackpot B or the jackpot C, the presentation mode is controlled to "Extreme Battle Rush". FIG. 11-20 is a diagram showing a presentation example in the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is controlled to "Extreme Battle Rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-20(A), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability change state) and the value of the time-saving count counter is 11 to 110, the fourth background image 069SG340 showing a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern in accordance with the presentation mode being "Extreme Battle Rush", and a presentation mode display 069SG223 consisting of the characters "Extreme Battle Rush" is displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, a time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 11 to 110) is displayed at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the remaining variable display count controlled to the high probability/high base state, and a right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a display area 5SL is provided at the top left of the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small pattern is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(B), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state and the value of the time-saving count counter is 0 to 10, an emphasized time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 10) is displayed in an enlarged form compared to the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 when the value of the time-saving count counter is 11 to 110, at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5. Note that the emphasized time-saving remaining display 069SG201 is not limited to an enlarged form of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201, and the display color of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 may be changed, or an effect display may be added to the time-saving remaining display 069SG201. Also, a dedicated sound effect may be played from the speaker at the timing when the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 is switched from the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 to the emphasized time-saving remaining display 069SG201.

In addition, in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, the remaining time-saving display may be displayed in a manner similar to that of the special probability state. In addition, in time-saving state B, the highlighted time-saving remaining display may not be displayed to avoid causing stress to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(C), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state, a result image 069SG500 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 when the 110th variable display in which the display result is "miss" is being executed. The result image 069SG500 includes the characters "Extreme Battle Rush Ended" notifying that Extreme Battle Rush has ended, the characters "BONUS x x times" indicating the number of jackpots (x is the number of jackpots), and the characters "XXXX pt" indicating the total number of game balls that have been awarded (XXXX is the total number of game balls that have been awarded).

The number of jackpots included in this result image 069SG500 is the number of consecutive jackpots based on the variable display in a high probability state (the so-called consecutive jackpot count), and the total number of game balls awarded includes the number of prize balls awarded in the consecutive jackpots.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(D), when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state after 110 variable displays have been completed, the first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image for the decorative pattern, and the variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the characters "0 games") corresponding to the number of variable displays executed since the game state was controlled to a low probability/low base state is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance mode display 069SG223 in the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the highlighted time reduction remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX games remaining", X = 0 to 10) in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

When the game state is controlled to the normal state from the special state, time-saving state A, or time-saving state B, a left-hit notification effect may be executed to instruct the player to hit to the left based on the end of the time-saving control. The left-hit notification effect displays a left-hit notification image and the words "Hit to the left" or an arrow image in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the sound "Please hit to the left" is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, after the 110th variable display has ended when controlled to time-saving state A as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A2), after the 1100th variable display has ended when controlled to time-saving state B as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B2), or after the 110th variable display has ended when controlled to the high probability state as shown in FIG. 11-20 (D), when control of the low probability/low base state (normal state) begins, the variable display count of the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed as a common "0 times", making it difficult to grasp the state of the pachinko game machine 1 (such as the type of previous jackpot, and whether it was controlled to time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or high probability state), and increasing the sense of anticipation for being controlled to time-saving state B.

When control of the low probability/low base state (normal state) begins, the variable display count displayed by the variable display count display 069SG202 may be set to display the variable display count executed in each state, such as "110 times" when control of time-saving state A ends, "1100 times" when control of time-saving state B ends, and "110 times" when control of the high probability state ends. By doing this, it is possible to roughly check the state of the pachinko game machine 1 (the type of jackpot last time, and whether it was controlled to time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or high probability state), which makes it easier to predict the variable display count until it is controlled to time-saving state B, which can lead to increased motivation to play.

In addition, in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, a common song (e.g., song A) may be played as a fixed background music, and in the probability bonus state, one of a number of songs including song A (e.g., songs A to X) may be selectable, and the selected song may be played.

In addition, when song A is played during the time-saving state A and the probability bonus state, the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. may be illuminated in a lighting pattern corresponding to the song A (such as a lighting pattern that matches the rhyme of the song).

In addition, when song A is played in the time-saving state B, the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. may be made to emit light in a different lighting pattern (such as a lighting pattern that matches the background image) than when song A is played in the time-saving state A or the special probability state.
In addition, the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. in the time-saving state A and the probability change state (patterns that match the rhyme of the music) are emphasized more than the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. in the time-saving state B (patterns that match the background image), and the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. in the time-saving state B are subdued. The emphasized light emission patterns include patterns with higher brightness than subdued light emission patterns, patterns with short switching intervals of light emission data, patterns with short blinking cycles, etc. In this way, since the player may be depressed in the time-saving state B as described in the above flow, by subduing the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. without overemphasizing them, the player's dissatisfaction can be suppressed.

In addition, for example, a common background image may be displayed in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, but the perspective (visibility) of the background image in time-saving state B may be made different from that in time-saving state A, so that even though the same background image is used, it is clear that the state is completely different (a different impression is given).

The size of the decorative pattern may also be different between time-saving state A and time-saving state B (for example, time-saving state A: normal, time-saving state B: large) so that it is clear (give the impression) that the state is completely different even though the background image is reused.

In addition, after the special chance entry effect/time-saving entry effect A is executed, a display to remind the player not to forget to take the prepaid card and a display of the gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable not to display the display to remind the player not to forget to take the prepaid card and the gaming machine manufacturer after the time-saving entry effect B is executed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being stressed by the above-mentioned displays when entering the time-saving state B without going through a jackpot.

(Variable display count display, special display count display)
In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state), a variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the characters "Game XXX times" or the like) corresponding to the number of variable displays executed since the game state was controlled to the low probability/low base state, and a special count display 069SG203 (in this example, the characters "Until Play/1100 BATTLE RUSH", the characters "XXX times left", and a triangular object or the like) corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays until the rescue time reduction is reached can be displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, the effect in which the special count display is displayed is referred to as a countdown effect.

In this embodiment, whether the variable display count display or the special count display is displayed is determined according to the value of the rescue time reduction count counter. In addition, the display mode of the special count display can be changed according to the value of the rescue time reduction count counter. Figure 11-21 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation on the image display device 5 when the variable display count display or the special count display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21(A), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 301 and 900, a variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the words "Game XXX times", where XXX = 0 to 699, etc.) is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. The number (XXX) in the variable display count display 069SG202 is incremented each time the variable display is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21(B), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 31 and 300, a countdown effect is executed, and a white special number display 069SG203 (in this example, the text "Until PLAY-1100 BATTLE RUSH", the white text "XXX times remaining", and a white triangular object, XXX = 31 to 300) is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 11-21(C), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 30, a countdown effect is executed, and a red special number display 069SG203 (in this example, the text "Until Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH", the red text "XXX times remaining", and a red triangular object, XXX = 30) is displayed in an enlarged manner in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, about 3 seconds), and then, as shown in FIG. 11-21(D), it is shifted to the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 and displayed in a reduced manner. Then, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1 to 30, a countdown effect is executed, and a red special number display 069SG203 (in this example, the text "Until Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH", the red text "XXX times remaining", and a red triangular object, XXX = 1 to 30) is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the special number of times display is not displayed in the variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0, but this is not limited to the above, and the special number of times display may be displayed in the variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0. For example, in the variable display where the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 1, after the special number of times display in red is displayed, when the variable display where the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 is executed, the special number of times display 069SG203 in gold (in this example, the characters "Until Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH" and the gold characters "0 times remaining", and a gold triangular object, etc.) may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display count display 069SG202 is hidden during the period when the special count display 069SG203 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The special count display 069SG203 may be displayed while the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed, and the variable display count display 069SG202 may be added and the special count display 069SG203 may be subtracted in accordance with the variable display. In this case, it is preferable to display the variable display count display 069SG202 in a manner that is less visible than the display manner of the special count display 069SG203 (for example, display the variable display count display 069SG202 in a less noticeable manner, such as by displaying it in a smaller size than the special count display 069SG203).

The trigger for starting the display of the special number of times display 069SG203 may be a fixed timing, such as when the variable display starts when the remaining number of variable display times before being controlled to the time-saving state B becomes a predetermined number (for example, 50 times remaining), or may be an irregular timing, such as when a lottery for starting the display of the special number of times display 069SG203 is executed and won, when the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach miss ends, or when the remaining number of variable display times before being controlled to the time-saving state B becomes a predetermined number (for example, 50 times remaining) is suggested by the execution of a remaining number suggestion effect. When the display of the special number of times display 069SG203 is started, the special number of times display 069SG203 may be highlighted by being displayed full screen, etc. Also, instead of displaying the special number of times display 069SG203, a dedicated background effect that switches to a dedicated effect mode (for example, "Super hot when you reach it") may be executed.

In addition, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter reaches 301 to 900, the table may be switched to a variation pattern table in which the SP reach variation pattern is more difficult to determine than before the value of the rescue time reduction counter reached 301 to 900. By doing this, it is possible to allow the player to play with a variable display that reflects their intention to enter the rescue time reduction mode quickly.

In addition, during the display period of the special number of times display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full screen display period), the execution of various preview effects described below may be restricted (for example, not executed or displayed in an inconspicuous manner). In addition, if the execution time of the preview effect overlaps with the display period of the special number of times display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full screen display period), the special number of times display 069SG203 may be displayed in a manner that does not highlight, or if the execution time of the pre-reading preview effect described below overlaps with the display period of the special number of times display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full screen display period), the special number of times display 069SG203 may be displayed when the variable display after the pre-reading preview effect ends is started, or if a predetermined variable display during the display period of the special number of times display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full screen display period) is a jackpot, the display of the special number of times display 069SG203 may be restricted (for example, not displayed or displayed in an inconspicuous manner).

(Example of the presentation when the rescue time reduction is reached)
As described above, (i) when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed (when the rescue time reduction is reached without a single jackpot after the RAM is cleared), a pattern determination A designation command is transmitted in which the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds in the rescue time reduction reaching variation, and (ii) when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot (when a jackpot is reached once and the rescue time reduction is reached without a single jackpot thereafter), a pattern determination B designation command is transmitted in which the pattern determination period is 20 seconds in the rescue time reduction reaching variation. In this embodiment, since the pattern determination period is different between the case (i) and the case (ii), the presentation mode is different for the period from when the rescue time reduction reaching variation in the low probability/low base state ends until the game is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time reduction state B) and rescue time reduction play begins (i.e., the pattern determination period).

Next, an example of the performance when (i) the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed will be described with reference to Figs. 11-22 to 11-25. In this example, a case where (i) the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed and the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach (reduced non-reach B or non-reach B) miss" will be described.

(Example of the performance in case (i))
Figure 11-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) miss," and Figure 11-23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image related to each of these effects.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-23(A), when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special pattern (variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1) (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-22), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the pattern determination A designation command, determines and stops the decorative pattern combination (in this example, "146") in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In other words, it determines and stops the decorative pattern combination that results in a "miss".

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 069SG003 in the active display area 069SG013, and displays the hold display 069SG001 in the first hold display area 069SG011 based on the first hold memory count being 1. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background image 069SG310 as the background image for the decorative pattern based on the normal game state.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the character "1" in the display area 5SL because the first reserved memory count is 1, and displays the character "0" because the second reserved memory count is 0. It also confirms and stops the combination of small symbols (in this example, "146") in the small symbol display area. In other words, it confirms and stops the combination of small symbols that will result in a "miss."

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23(B), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special pattern (the variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0) (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-22), the performance control CPU 120 executes a shutter performance and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-22), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination A designation command, determines and stops the final small symbol combination (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. In other words, the combination of small symbols that results in a "miss" is determined and stopped. In addition, in response to the end of the variable display, a right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a right hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are faded in and displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. By doing this, if the shutter image 069SG250 is only displayed, the player will continue playing left-handed and their interest will decrease, so by quickly displaying the right-handed play notification image 069SG400 in the bottom right of the screen and then fading in the right-handed play notification image 069SG401, the player can be led to play right-handed in an ideal manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-23 (D), when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state) at the timing when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in Figure 11-22), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the third background image 069SG330 as the background image for the decorative pattern, corresponding to the presentation mode becoming "Yu-1100 Battle Rush". At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a performance mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters "Yu-1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, displays a time reduction remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 1100) at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the combination of decorative symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Also, displays the combination of small symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area.

Next, an example of the presentation when (ii) the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot is reached will be described using Figures 11-24(A) and 11-25. In this example, a case where (ii) the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot is described, in which the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach (reduced non-reach B or non-reach B) miss."

(Example of the performance in case (ii))
Fig. 11-24 shows (A) a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the variable pattern is determined to be "non-reach (reduced non-reach B or non-reach B) miss" when the rescue time-saving is reached after 900 variable displays after a big win, and (B) a time chart showing a modified example of the time-saving entry effect B. Fig. 11-25 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image related to each of these effects.

First, the presentation configuration in Figures 11-25 (A) and (B) is the same as the presentation configuration in the "non-reach (shortened non-reach or non-reach) miss" variation pattern when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process, as shown in Figures 11-23 (A) and (B), so a description will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25(C), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-24(A)), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination B designation command, stops and confirms the final small symbol combination (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. In other words, the combination of small symbols that results in a "miss" is stopped and confirmed. Also, in response to the end of the variable display, a right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a right hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are faded in and displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. By doing this, if the shutter image 069SG250 is only displayed, the player will continue playing left-handed and their interest will decrease, so by quickly displaying the right-handed play notification image 069SG400 in the bottom right of the screen and then fading in the right-handed play notification image 069SG401, the player can be led to play right-handed in an ideal manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (D), when 0.5 seconds have elapsed of the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-24 (A)), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the shutter presentation, erases the shutter image 069SG250 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and fades out the right-hit notification image 069SG401 while still displaying the right-hit notification image 069SG400, and then executes the time-saving entry presentation B, causing the entry image 069SG473 (described later in this example, an image including the words "Entering YU-1100 BATTLE RUSH") to be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. In time-saving entry performance B, the entry image 069SG473 containing the text "Entering Yu-1100 BATTLE RUSH" is displayed to inform the player that the game state will be controlled to time-saving state B (low probability/high base state).

The entry image 069SG473 is also composed of an entry image 069SG470 that is displayed when the time-saving state A and the probability bonus state are started, a Yu-time image 069SG473A consisting of the characters "1100" displayed in the smallest size with 0% transparency in the bottom left of the display screen, and a Yu-time image 069SG473B consisting of the character "Yu".

Next, as shown in Figure 11-25 (E), when the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T5 shown in Figure 11-24 (A)), the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), and the presentation control CPU 120 displays the third background image 069SG330 as the background image for the decorative pattern, corresponding to the presentation mode becoming "Yu-1100 Battle Rush". At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a performance mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters "Yu-1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, displays a time reduction remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 1100) at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the combination of decorative symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Also, displays the combination of small symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area.

11-24(A) and 11-25 show an example in which the presentation mode becomes "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed at the timing when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B after the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command has elapsed, but the present invention is not limited to this form. The presentation mode may become "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed at a timing different from the timing when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B after the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command has elapsed. For example, the presentation mode may become "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed at the timing when (A) a customer waiting demo display designation command is received after the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B, or at the timing when the first variable display is started after (B) the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B. Also, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed (in this example, the pattern determination period specified by the pattern determination A command) during the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B command (time T4 in this example), the time-saving entry effect B (Figure 11-25 (D)) is not executed, and the effect mode becomes "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed.

In addition, when the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed in FIG. 11-23(B) or FIG. 11-25(B), an image suggesting that control will be made to time-saving state B (for example, the character "Play") may be displayed. By doing so, it becomes easier to distinguish between the timing when control is made to time-saving state B and the timing other than the timing when control is made to time-saving state B (for example, the timing when the presentation mode is switched) when the shutter image 069SG250 is commonly displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described in Figures 11-22 to 11-25, a different presentation mode is exemplified when (i) the rescue time-saving mode is reached after the RAM is cleared and (ii) the rescue time-saving mode is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common presentation mode may be executed in the cases of (i) and (ii). In other words, the time-saving mode entry presentation B may be executed in the cases of (i) and (ii), or the time-saving mode entry presentation B may not be executed in the cases of (i) and (ii). Also, a time-saving mode entry presentation B with a different mode may be executed in the cases of (i) and (ii).

In the examples of Fig. 11-24(A) and Fig. 11-25, a form in which the time-saving entry effect B is executed during the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the time-saving entry effect B may be started after control is entered into the time-saving state B. Below, modified examples of the execution timing of each effect when the rescue time-saving state is reached are explained based on Fig. 11-24(B), Fig. 11-26, and Fig. 11-27.

Figure 11-24(B) is a modified time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the rescue time reduction is reached. Figure 11-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance operation when the number of reserved memories is 0 when the rescue time reduction is reached.

First, the presentation configuration in FIG. 11-26(A) is the same as that shown in FIG. 11-25(A), so a description is omitted. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26(B), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (the variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0) (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-26 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special pattern (at the timing of T3 shown in Figure 11-24 (B)), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the pattern confirmation B designation command, stops confirming the decorative pattern combination (in this example, "234") that will result in a "miss" display result in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and also stops confirming the small pattern combination that will result in a "miss" display result in the display area 5SL of the image display device 5. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26(D), based on receipt of the right hit LED lighting notification command, the right hit LED 069SG031 is lit, the special number display 069SG203 is hidden, and the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right hit" are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, while the right hit notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400, and the text "Right hit" are faded in and displayed in front of the decorative pattern in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, starting the right hit notification.

Next, when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in Figure 11-24 (B)), control of the time-saving state B begins and variable display can begin, but if the number of reserved memories is 0, the display of the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 shown in Figure 11-26 (D) is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-26(E), when right-hit play is started in time-saving state B and the second start winning (or the first start winning) occurs, the first variable display is started (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), and the performance control CPU 120 starts the shutter performance and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (F), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the shutter presentation when the second variable display starts after the first variable display has ended (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 to start the time-saving entry presentation B.

The time-saving entry performance B may be started at a timing other than the start timing of the second variable display in the time-saving state B (for example, in the middle of the first variable display or at the start of the second or subsequent variable display). In addition, if the variable display period is short (for example, 1500 ms) such as when an ultra-short variable display pattern is determined as the variable display pattern, it may be executed continuously over multiple variable displays. In this case, it is preferable that the image of the time-saving entry performance B is displayed continuously regardless of the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition, if the variable display of a jackpot starts during the execution period of the time-saving entry performance B, the currently executed time-saving entry performance B may be interrupted or ended, and a performance corresponding to the variable display pattern (for example, an SP reach performance) may be started, or a jackpot notification performance may be executed without going through a performance corresponding to the variable display pattern.

Next, Figure 11-27 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more when the rescue time reduction is reached.

First, the presentation configuration in Figures 11-27(A) to (C) is the same as the presentation configuration shown in Figures 11-26(A) to (C), so we will omit the explanation.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-27 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special pattern (at the timing of T3 shown in Figure 11-24 (B)), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the pattern confirmation B designation command, stops confirming the decorative pattern combination (in this example, "234") that will result in a "miss" display result in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and also stops confirming the small pattern combination that will result in a "miss" display result in the display area 5SL of the image display device 5. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-27(D), based on receipt of the right hit LED lighting notification command, the right hit LED 069SG031 is lit, the special number display 069SG203 is hidden, and the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right hit" are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, while the right hit notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400, and the text "Right hit" are faded in and displayed in front of the decorative pattern in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, starting the right hit notification.

Here, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, control of the time-saving state B begins when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), and the first variable display begins, so that the performance control CPU 120 starts the shutter performance and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-27(D). Also, the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-27(E), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the shutter presentation when the second variable display starts after the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 to start the time-saving entry presentation B.

In this way, when the variable display of the rescue time-saving reaching fluctuation has ended, the presentation control CPU 120 turns on the right-hit LED 069SG031 based on the reception of the right-hit LED lighting notification command, and starts the right-hit notification by displaying the right-hit notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the word "Right Hit" on the display screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, since the variable display does not start until the control of time-saving state B has started, even if the shutter presentation or time-saving entry presentation B, which indicates that the control of time-saving state B is starting, does not start, it is possible to prevent the player from starting disadvantageous left-hit play without knowing that the time-saving state B is being controlled.

In the above embodiment, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared, and 20 seconds when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, a common pattern determination period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) may be set when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared and when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot. Even in this case, the right-hit notification and time-saving entry performance B are executed after the variable display starts after the control of time-saving state B has started, thereby preventing the player from starting the disadvantageous left-hit game without knowing that the time-saving state B has been controlled.

In the above embodiment, when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared, the shutter effect is terminated at the timing when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed, and the shutter image 069SG250 is terminated and the background image of the play-by-play 1100 Battle Rush is displayed. Here, if the performance control CPU 120 is unable to receive the pattern determination A designation command normally, for example, if it misses the pattern determination A designation command sent from the CPU 103, or if the pattern determination A designation command is corrupted and the received command cannot be recognized as the pattern determination A designation command, the shutter effect may be terminated at the timing when (A) a customer waiting demo display designation command is received, or (B) a command corresponding to the start of the first variable display after being controlled to the time reduction state B (for example, a variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), a variable pattern designation command, etc.) is received, and the shutter effect may be terminated and the shutter image 069SG250 is terminated and the background image of the play-by-play 1100 Battle Rush is displayed. Furthermore, when another command (for example, a game state designation command, a pattern determination designation command, etc.) corresponding to the first variable display after control to time-saving state B is received, the shutter effect may be ended, the display of shutter image 069SG250 may be ended, and the background image of the Yu-1100 Battle Rush may be displayed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the rescue time-saving period is reached after 900 variable displays following a jackpot, an example is shown in which the shutter effect ends when 0.5 seconds have elapsed of the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 ends, and the time-saving entry effect is executed. Here, if the performance control CPU 120 fails to receive the symbol determination B designation command normally, for example, if it misses the symbol determination B designation command sent from the CPU 103, or if it cannot recognize the received command as the symbol determination B designation command due to command corruption of the symbol determination B designation command, then (A) at the timing when a customer waiting demo display designation command is received, or (B) at the timing when a command corresponding to the start of the first variable display after being controlled to the time-saving state B (for example, a variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), a variable pattern designation command, etc.) is received, the shutter performance may be terminated, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 may be terminated, and the time-saving entry performance B may be executed. Note that, at the timing when other commands corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to the time-saving state B (for example, a game state designation command, a symbol determination designation command, etc.) are received, the shutter performance may be terminated, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 may be terminated, and the time-saving entry performance B may be executed.

In addition, in Figures 11-22 to 11-25, when the rescue time-saving mode is reached after the RAM is cleared and when the rescue time-saving mode is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot, each of the effects that are executed when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) miss" is explained. Although not shown in particular, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "SP reach A miss or SP reach B miss", an SP reach effect that corresponds to the SP reach type (for example, a bowling effect for SP reach A, and a battle effect for SP reach B) is executed, and after an image of an ally character being defeated by an enemy character in a bowling effect or battle effect is displayed to notify that the variable display result is a miss, a shutter effect is started, and a time-saving entry effect B may be started during the pattern determination period after the shutter effect ends.

In addition, if the variable display (rescue time reduction reaching fluctuation) where the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 is a jackpot, the following (1) to (3) may be performed.

(1) When the variable display where the rescue time reduction counter value becomes 0 has determined the jackpot variable pattern "SP Reach B (Battle SP)," a shutter effect is performed when the variable display starts (for example, the same as in FIG. 11-23 (B)), and the shutter effect ends when it develops into the SP Reach effect B (see the timing in FIG. 13-11 (A2)), after which the SP Reach effect B is executed and a jackpot is announced.

(2) If the variable display where the rescue time reduction counter value is 0 has determined the jackpot variable pattern "SP Reach B (Battle SP)," a winning effect may be executed in which the special count display remains at "1" and no shutter effect is executed, resulting in the execution of the SP Reach effect B.

(3) A special variation pattern for a jackpot when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (for example, shutter closes → shutter opens with decorative patterns aligned → jackpot) may be provided.

It is also preferable to restrict the execution of the look-ahead effect described below when the value of the rescue time reduction counter reaches 0 and a specific number of times remains, and to restrict the execution of the look-ahead effect in a variable display where the value of the rescue time reduction counter reaches 0.

(Example of customer waiting screen)
In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo display designation command that designates a customer waiting state, a customer waiting demo performance is executed in which a demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG. 11-28(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen in the customer waiting state.

As shown in FIG. 11-28(A), this demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A showing an ally character, the words "Demo Video", and a notification image 069SG700a (in this example, an image in which the words "Yu-Time Equipped" are displayed on a triangular object). Also, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 300, the demo image 069SG700 further includes a special number of times display 069SG203 (in this example, a special number of times display in white) in addition to the various images mentioned above (ally characters, the words "Demo Video", etc.).

This configuration makes it possible to notify the player while waiting for customers that there are only a few variable display times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached (in this example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 300 or less), thereby promoting operation.

(Variations of the waiting screen)
In the example of Figure 11-28 (A), a special number of times display 069SG203 is included in demo image 069SG700 when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 300. However, this is not limited to the above embodiment, and regardless of the value of the rescue time reduction counter, the special number of times display 069SG203 may not be included in demo image 069SG700 in either case where the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 301 or more or 300 or less.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-28(B), when a customer waiting demo performance is executed, a demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A showing an ally character, the words "Demo video", and a notification image 069SG700a (in this example, an image of a triangular object with the words "Yu-time installed"), but does not include a special count display regardless of the value of the rescue time reduction count counter.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-28 (C), when a new start winning occurs and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the customer waiting demo performance ends and the special number of times display 069SG203 is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

With this configuration, by not informing the player of the number of variable display times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached while in the waiting state, it is possible to prevent only gaming machines with a small number of variable display times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached from being selected, and to suppress excessive bias in the operation of gaming machines.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear process is performed when the power is turned on, the variable display count display and special count display may be hidden until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50 times) after the power is turned on.

For example, if the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on, whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter at the time of power-on is 301 or more or 300 or less, the variable display count display and special count display are hidden until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, thereby preventing players from playing solely for the purpose of rescue time reduction. Also, if the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on, whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter at the time of power outage is 301 or more or 300 or less, the variable display count display and special count display are hidden until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, thereby preventing players from avoiding playing.

With this configuration, if the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on at the opening of the store, it is possible to prevent players who aim to shorten the rescue time from selecting and playing on a gaming machine with a small number of variable display counts remaining until the rescue time is reached by referring to the final number of variable display counts at the time of the power outage on the previous day. Also, if the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on at the opening of the store, it is possible to prevent players who aim to shorten the rescue time from avoiding playing on a gaming machine with a large number of variable display counts remaining until the rescue time is reached by referring to the final number of variable display counts at the time of the power outage on the previous day.

In addition, without being limited to the above form, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter reaches a specific value, the variable display count display or special count display may be displayed even if the variable display has not been executed a predetermined number of times since the power was turned on.

For example, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the power is turned on and the value of the rescue time reduction counter at the time of power-on is a specific value (e.g., 20 or less) that is less than a value corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50), the special number display may be displayed during the customer waiting state after the power is turned on or when the variable display of the special pattern is being executed. Also, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the power is turned on and the value of the rescue time reduction counter at the time of power-on is not a specific value, but the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes a specific value (e.g., 20 or less) due to the variable display executed after the power is turned on, the special number display may be displayed even when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not a value corresponding to the predetermined number of times.

(Feature 069SG Modification 1)
Next, a description will be given of a modified example 1 of the feature portion 069SG. Fig. 11-29 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation related to a transition to a customer waiting screen as modified example 1 of the feature portion 069SG. Fig. 11-30 is a diagram showing a modified example of the performance operation related to a transition to a customer waiting screen as modified example 1 of the feature portion 069SG.

First, an example of the performance operation regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-29 (A1), for example, when a predetermined time (e.g., about 30,000 ms) has passed since the variable display of the patterns stopped in the normal state (low probability/low base state) without a new variable display being started, the performance control CPU 120, upon receiving a customer waiting demo display designation command, displays demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executes the customer waiting demo performance (see FIG. 11-29 (A2)). After that, when a starting winning occurs, the demo image 069SG700 is hidden and the variable display is started (see FIG. 11-29 (A3)).

Next, an example of the performance operation regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen after the rescue time reduction is reached will be explained. As shown in FIG. 11-29 (B1), when the variable display of the pattern in the rescue time reduction reaching variation that has reached the rescue time reduction stops, if the number of reserved memories is 0, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit LED 069SG031 based on the right hit LED lighting notification command received in response to the end of the variable display, displays the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, fading in front of the decorative pattern, to start the right hit notification. In addition, when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed, the control of the time reduction state B is started (see FIG. 11-29 (B2)).

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., about 30,000 ms) has elapsed since the variable display of the pattern in the rescue time reduction reaching variation stopped without a new variable display being started, the performance control CPU 120, even if it receives a customer waiting demo display designation command, will maintain the state in which the right hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed, without displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demo performance (see FIG. 11-29 (B3)).

After that, when a start winning occurs, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the shutter presentation at the timing when the first variable display starts based on the start of right-hit play in time-saving state B and the occurrence of the second start winning (or the first start winning), and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-29 (B4)).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the shutter performance when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right hit notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 when the second variable display starts (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), starting the time-saving entry performance B (see FIG. 11-29 (B5)).

Next, an example of the presentation operation regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen after the start of the right-hit notification will be explained. As shown in Figure 11-29 (C1), when the variable display of the pattern in the rescue time reduction reaching variation that has reached the rescue time reduction stops, if the number of pending memories is 1 or more (for example, 1), the presentation control CPU 120, based on receiving a right-hit LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display, turns on the right-hit LED 069SG031, and displays a right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and also displays a right-hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right hit" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, fading in the image in front of the shutter image 069SG250, thereby starting the right-hit notification. In addition, when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed, control of the time-saving state B is started, and the first reserved memory is consumed and the first variable display is started, so the performance control CPU 120 starts the shutter performance and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are maintained in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-29 (C2)).

After that, when the first variable display ends and the first reserved memory becomes 0, the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 will remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see Figure 11-29 (C3)).

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., about 30,000 ms) has elapsed without a new variable display being started since the variable display of the pattern stopped during the first variable display after the control of the time-saving state B was started, the performance control CPU 120, even if it receives a customer waiting demo display designation command, will not display the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 to execute the customer waiting demo performance, but will maintain the state in which the right hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-29 (C4)).

After that, when a start winning occurs, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the shutter presentation at the timing when the second variable display starts based on the start of right-hit play in time-saving state B and the occurrence of the second start winning (or the first start winning), and after hiding the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, displays the entry image 069SG473 and starts the time-saving entry presentation B (see Figure 11-29 (C5)).

In this way, in feature part 069SG variant 1, during the period from when the variable display of the rescue time-saving reaching fluctuation ends until the time-saving entry performance B ends, the performance control CPU 120 restricts the execution of the customer waiting demo performance and prioritizes the execution of the right-hit notification, so that the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, which is displayed larger than the right-hit notification image 069SG400, do not disappear. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (A2), the demo image 069SG700 is displayed, which prevents the player from starting unfavorable left-hit play without knowing that the game is controlled to time-saving state B.

In addition, in this modified example, an example is given of a form in which the execution of the customer waiting demo effect is restricted and the right hit notification is executed with priority during the period from the end of the variable display of the rescue time-saving reaching fluctuation to the end of the time-saving entry effect B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 may restrict the execution of the customer waiting demo effect by not sending a customer waiting demo display designation command during the period from the end of the variable display of the rescue time-saving reaching fluctuation to the end of the time-saving entry effect B.

Next, we will explain another variation of the example of the presentation operation regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen when the rescue time reduction is reached.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D1), when the variable display of the pattern in the rescue time reduction reaching variation that has reached the rescue time reduction stops, if the number of reserved memories is 0, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit LED 069SG031 based on receiving the right hit LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display, displays the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, fading in front of the decorative pattern, to start the right hit notification. In addition, when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed, the control of the time reduction state B begins (see FIG. 11-30 (D2)).

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., about 30,000 ms) has elapsed without a new variable display being started after the variable display of the symbols in the rescue time-saving reaching variation has stopped and been controlled to time-saving state B, the performance control CPU 120, based on having received a customer waiting demo display designation command, displays demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 to execute a customer waiting demo performance, and displays right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 11-30 (D3)).

After that, when a start winning occurs, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the shutter presentation at the timing when the first variable display starts based on the start of right-hit play in time-saving state B and the occurrence of the second start winning (or the first start winning), and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-30 (D4)).

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D3), when the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the customer waiting demo performance is being performed, when the player touches the touch ring of the ball hitting operation handle 30, the demo image 069SG700 is made invisible and the customer waiting demo performance is terminated, and the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" shown in FIG. 11-30 (D2) are displayed, and the shutter performance is started when the first variable display is started.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the shutter performance when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 and starts the time-saving entry performance B when the second variable display begins (see FIG. 11-30 (D5)).

In this way, during the period from when the variable display of the rescue time-saving achievement fluctuation ends until the time-saving entry performance B ends, the demo image 069SG700 may be displayed to enable the customer-waiting demo performance to be executed, but the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" may be displayed together with the demo image 069SG700 to execute the right-hit notification. In this way, the control for displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 to execute the customer-waiting demo performance is the same as in the normal state, reducing the processing burden, while the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from starting the unfavorable left-hit game.

In addition, for example, the right hit notification image 069SG400 may be displayed in a state where it is more visible than the demo image 069SG700, for example by overlapping a right hit notification image 069SG401 that is larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 in front of the demo image 069SG700.

(Feature 069SG Modification 2)
Next, the feature portion 069SG modified example 2 will be described. Fig. 11-31 is a flowchart showing a game control timer interrupt process as the feature portion 069SG modified example 2. Fig. 11-32 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process as the feature portion 069SG modified example 2. Fig. 11-33 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process as the feature portion 069SG modified example 2. Fig. 11-34 is a flowchart showing a display process as the feature portion 069SG modified example 2.

In the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 11-13 and 11-14, an example is given of a form in which the right hit lamp 069SG132 is turned on and off and a right hit LED on notification command and a right hit LED off notification command are sent to the performance control board 12 within the special pattern stop processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing of turning on and off the right hit lamp 069SG132 and the processing of sending the right hit LED on notification command and the right hit LED off notification command to the performance control board 12 may be executed outside the special pattern stop processing. Also, an example has been given in which the value of the rescue time reduction counter is decremented by the normal special pattern processing, and the rescue time reduction determination flag is set to the on state when the rescue time reduction is reached, but the value of the rescue time reduction counter may be decremented by the special pattern stop processing, and the right hit lamp 069SG132 may be turned on and off and a right hit LED on notification command and a right hit LED off notification command may be sent to the performance control board 12 without using the rescue time reduction determination flag.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 as feature part 069SG variant 2, in the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 executes a display process (step 069SGS24A) including a setting process for turning on/off the right hit lamp 069SG132 after executing the game random number update process (step S24) and a process for sending a right hit LED on notification command and a right hit LED off notification command to the performance control board 12, and also executes a display control process (step 069SGS26A) for turning on/off the right hit lamp 069SG132 in accordance with the setting process performed in the display process after executing the normal pattern process process (step S26).

In feature 069SG variant 2, in order to execute the display process (step 069SGS24A) and display control process (step 069SGS26A) described above, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol stop process shown in Figures 11-32 and 11-33.

In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 11-32 and FIG. 11-33, the CPU 103 first executes the processing of steps 069SGS131 to 069SGS135 in the same manner as the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 11-13 and FIG. 11-14 when the jackpot flag is set. Then, the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 069SGS138 and 069SGS139 without starting the illumination of the right hit lamp 069SG132 or sending a right hit LED illumination notification command, and then clears the memory of the state of the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B (step 069SGS139a), executes the processing of step 069SGS140, and ends the special symbol stop processing.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps 069SGS131 to 069SGS133, then identifies the state of time-saving flag A and time-saving flag B at that time, and updates and stores the state of time-saving flag A and time-saving flag B (step 069SGS160). It also determines whether or not the special probability flag is set (step 069SGS161). If the special probability flag is set (step 069SGS161; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS174E, and if the special probability flag is not set (step 069SGS161; No), it further determines whether or not the value of the rescue time-saving counter is already 0 (step 069SGS162).

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is already 0, i.e., if the time reduction state is already B (step 069SGS162; Yes), proceed to step 069SGS174E. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS162; No), decrement the value of the rescue time reduction counter by 1 (step 069SGS163), and determine whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after decrementing the value by 1 has become 0 (step 069SGS164).

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS164; No), the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps 069SGS141 to 069SGS145, and then executes the process of step 069SGS152 without turning off the right hit lamp 069SG132 or sending a right hit LED off notification command, and then proceeds to step 069SGS174E.

In addition, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 (step 069SGS164; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps 069SGS172 to 069SGS174, and then sets a specific number (e.g., 4) to a specific number reaching information output counter indicating the number of times that the specific number reaching information, indicating that the variable display number has reached 1100 times without the variable display result being a jackpot, is output from an external output terminal (not shown) to a hall management computer or the like, without starting the illumination of the right hit lamp 069SG132 or sending a right hit LED start notification command, and sets a specific number (e.g., 4) to a specific number reaching information output counter indicating the number of times that the specific number reaching information is output from an external output terminal (not shown) to a hall management computer or the like, and sets a specific number reaching information output period timer indicating the output period for each specific number reaching information, and proceeds to step 069SGS174E (step 069SGS174C, step SGS174D).

In addition, in the information output process at the time of the next interrupt (step S23), the CPU 103 outputs the specific count reaching information for the period set in the specific count reaching information output period timer the number of times set in the specific count reaching information output number counter.

Then, in step 069SGS174E, the CPU 103 sets a transition flag for turning on/off the right hit lamp 069SG132 and sending a right hit LED on notification command and a right hit LED off notification command within the display process (step 069SGS24A) at the time of the next interrupt, and then executes the process of step 069SGS175 to end the special symbol stop process.

As shown in FIG. 11-34, in the display process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the transition flag is set, that is, whether the special symbol stop process that results in a miss in the variable display result was executed at the previous interrupt (step 069SGS181). If the transition flag is not set (step 069SGS181; No), the display process is terminated. If the transition flag is set (step 069SGS181; Yes), the transition flag is cleared (step 069SGS182), and the stored states of the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B are compared with the current states of the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B (step 069SGS183), and it is determined whether the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has changed to the on state (set state) (step 069SGS184).

If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has changed to the on state, that is, if the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B has been newly controlled (step 069SGS184; Yes), the right-hit lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 are set to light, and a right-hit LED lighting notification command is sent to the performance control board 12 to end the display process (step 069SGS185, step 069SGS186).

If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has not changed to the on state (step 069SGS184; No), it is further determined whether the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has changed to the off state (cleared state) (step 069SGS187). If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has not changed to the off state (step 069SGS187; N), the display process is terminated, and if the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has changed to the off state, that is, if the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B has been newly controlled to the normal state (step 069SGS187; Yes), the right-hit lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 are set to be turned off, and a right-hit LED off notification command is sent to the performance control board 12, and the display process is terminated (step 069SGS188, step 069SGS189).

In addition, in the display control process (step 069SGS16A), the CPU 103 turns on and off the right hit lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 according to the lighting setting in step 069SGS185 or the lighting-off setting in the process of step 069SGS188.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the right hit notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the text "Right Hit" on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to receiving a right hit LED lighting notification command from the CPU 103, and ends displaying the right hit notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the text "Right Hit" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 in response to receiving a right hit LED turning off notification command from the CPU 103.

(Feature 069SG Modification 3)
In the above embodiment, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 300, a special number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, suggesting that the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is decreasing. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and a rescue time reduction suggestion display that suggests that the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is decreasing, which is different from the special number display, may also be executed.

First, the presentation configuration in Figures 11-35 (A) and (B) is the same as the presentation configuration for the variable display count display and special count display (white mode) shown in Figures 11-21 (A) and (B), so a description will be omitted. Also, the presentation configuration other than the rescue time reduction suggestion presentation in Figures 11-35 (C) and (D) is the same as the presentation configuration for the special count display (red mode) shown in Figure 11-21 (C), so a description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-35(C), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 11 and 30 and the first stage of the rescue time reduction suggestion performance is executed, the first suggestion image (in this example, the first suggestion image 069SG800A related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of reaching the rescue time reduction, which covers the upper 1/4 area of the background image) is superimposed on the first background image 069SG310. The first suggestion image is an image with a higher display priority than the background image (it has a higher display layer and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, the player sees a decrease in visibility of the background image in the portion where the first suggestion image is superimposed. In other words, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the first suggestion image 069SG800A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-35(D), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 10 and the second stage of the rescue time reduction suggestion performance is executed, a second suggestion image (in this example, a second suggestion image 069SG800B related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of reaching the rescue time reduction, which covers the upper 1/2 area of the background image) is superimposed on the first background image 069SG310. The second suggestion image has a higher display priority than the background image (it has a higher display layer and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, the player sees a decrease in visibility of the background image in the portion where the second suggestion image is superimposed. In other words, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the second suggestion image 069SG800B.

In this embodiment, the background image including the suggestion images (first suggestion image, second suggestion image) from the rescue time reduction suggestion performance is displayed as a background image on the image display device 5 even when the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed. In this way, by varying the display mode of the interface image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the value of the rescue time reduction counter regardless of whether the variable display of the special pattern is being executed or not, it is possible to suggest that the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is getting low, and interest can be increased.

In this example, a suggestion image (first suggestion image, second suggestion image) related to the shutter image when the rescue time reduction is reached is superimposed on the background image as an image that changes the interface image, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and an image that is not related to the shutter image when the rescue time reduction is reached may be superimposed on the background image. For example, an effect image whose display area and display color differ according to the value of the rescue time reduction counter may be superimposed, and when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 21 or more, the display area of the effect image may be a first area (e.g., 25% of the screen) and the display color may be blue, but when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 20 or less, the display area of the effect image may be a second area (e.g., 50% of the screen) that is larger than the first area and the display color may be red.

(Explanation of various performances)
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Figs. 11-36 to 11-50. Fig. 11-36 is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects. Fig. 11-37 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the countdown notice. Fig. 11-38 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the countdown notice. Fig. 11-39 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the reserve change notice. Fig. 11-40 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the pattern chance eye notice. Fig. 11-41 is a diagram showing an example of the effect display notice. Figs. 11-42 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a look-ahead notice type determination table. Figs. 11-43 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing a look-ahead notice effect pattern determination table. Fig. 11-44 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. Fig. 11-45 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing during variable display. Fig. 11-46 (A) is a diagram showing a reach notice execution determination table, and (B) to (E) are diagrams showing a button notice performance pattern determination table. Fig. 11-47 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a character notice pattern determination table. Fig. 11-48 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a movable body operation pattern determination table. Fig. 11-49 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a movable body notice pattern determination table. Fig. 11-50 (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining the characteristics according to the game state.

As shown in FIG. 11-36, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute countdown notices, hold change notices, symbol chance notices, and effect display notices as pre-execution previews that predict the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is pending).

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a moving object preview, a character preview, a reach preview, and a button preview as preview presentations that indicate that a jackpot will be reached in the variable display.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a hit/miss button presentation and a movable body presentation as a deciding presentation that notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state in a variable display based on the super reach jackpot variation pattern (SP reach A to E).

In addition, after the variable display part ends, in which the variable display of the decorative symbols in the variable display based on the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern (SP Reach A to E) is executed, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a post-performance in the post-performance part that notifies the player of the expected number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in a specific manner.

In addition, when control of one of the special states, the guaranteed bonus state, time-saving state A, or time-saving state B, begins, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute an entry presentation that notifies the start of control of each game state by displaying a state start display.

(Preview preview performance)
Next, the foreseeing notice performance will be explained. In this embodiment, in the start winning judgment process of step S101 in FIG. 6, the CPU 103 detects the occurrence of the start winning, stores reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and executes a process of updating the reserved memory number. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information, and a process for predicting the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value is executed. After storing the reserved information and the reserved memory number, a performance control command is sent to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of the start winning, the reserved memory number, and the foreseeing judgment.

In the look-ahead notice setting process of step S161 in the presentation control process of FIG. 10, the presentation control CPU 120, based on the information received from the main board 11, determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead notice presentation that suggests that the reserved memory stored in a specified area of the RAM 102 will be controlled to a jackpot game state, and if so, the type of look-ahead notice presentation to be executed (for example, whether to select "countdown notice," "reserved change notice," "pattern chance notice," or "effect display notice," and the presentation pattern of each notice).

In this embodiment, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is determined on the condition that the number of reserved memories is "4", but it may also be determined when the number of reserved memories is other than "4". Also, although the type of look-ahead preview performance to be executed is determined to be one of the countdown preview, reserved change preview, symbol chance preview, and effect display preview, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple previews may be executed simultaneously.

The "countdown preview" is a performance that executes a countdown such as "3" → "2" → "1" → "0" each time the variable display of a reserved memory that was not the subject of the look-ahead preview performance begins, until the variable display of the reserved memory that was the subject of the look-ahead preview performance (hereinafter also referred to as the target reserved memory) begins.

In this embodiment, the presentation pattern of the countdown announcement is determined from among the following patterns: ending the countdown at "3", ending at "2", ending at "1", and ending at "0". The expectation level increases in the order of ending at "3", ending at "2", ending at "1", and ending at "0" (expectation level: ending at "3" < ending at "2" < ending at "1" < ending at "0").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-37(A), when a start winning occurs, a countdown notice is executed and a pattern that ends at "0" is determined. After the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-37(B)), when the next variable display starts, a character image 069SG100D and a countdown display 069SG411 showing "3" are displayed (see FIG. 11-37(C)), and the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-37(D)). Next, when the next variable display starts, a character image 069SG100C different from the character image 069SG100D and a countdown display 069SG412 showing "2" are displayed (see FIG. 11-37(E)), and the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-37(F)).

Then, when the next variable display starts, a character image 069SG100A different from the character images 069SG100D and 069SG100C and a countdown display 069SG413 showing "1" are displayed (see FIG. 11-38(G)), and the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-38(H)). Then, when the next variable display starts, that is, a variable display of a pending target (for example, a super reach fluctuation pattern), a character image 069SG100B different from the character images 069SG100D to 069SG100A and a countdown display 069SG414 showing "0" are displayed (see FIG. 11-38(I)), and the countdown notice ends.

Although not specifically shown, if the "3" pattern is determined, the countdown preview ends when the character image 069SG100D and the countdown display 069SG411 showing "3" are displayed in FIG. 11-37 (C), if the "2" pattern is determined, the countdown preview ends when the character image 069SG100C and the countdown display 069SG412 showing "2" are displayed in FIG. 11-37 (E), and if the "1" pattern is determined, the countdown preview ends when the character image 069SG100A and the countdown display 069SG413 showing "1" are displayed in FIG. 11-38 (G).

The countdown presentation pattern is arbitrary, and five or more presentation patterns may be set. The countdown may also be allowed to start from a number other than "3." The countup may also go up from "0" → "1" → "2" → "3."

The "Hold Change Notice" is a display that changes the display color of the hold display of the target hold that is the subject of the pre-reading notice display until it is announced whether or not the target hold will be a jackpot in the variable display of the hold memory (target hold).

In this embodiment, the presentation patterns of the hold change notice include a pattern in which the display color of the hold display finally becomes "blue", a pattern in which it becomes "green", a pattern in which it becomes "red", and a pattern in which it becomes "gold", and one of these patterns is determined. Although detailed explanations are omitted in this embodiment, the change mode of the display color of the hold display (for example, at which timing the change occurs, such as at the time of the start winning, when the hold memory is consumed, or during the variable display period of the target hold, and if "red" is determined, whether to change to "red" from the beginning or to change gradually, such as "blue" → "green" → "red") can be determined arbitrarily. The expectation level increases in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-39(A), when a hold change notice is executed and a "red" pattern is determined following the occurrence of a start winning, the hold display of the target hold that was the subject of the hold change notice is displayed in white, and then the variable display ends. Then, when the next variable display starts, the display color of the target hold changes to "blue" (see FIG. 11-39(B)), and the variable display ends. Then, when the next variable display starts, the display color of the target hold changes from "blue" to "red" (see FIG. 11-39(C)), and the variable display ends. Then, the next variable display, that is, the variable display of the target hold (for example, a super reach fluctuation pattern), starts.

The number of presentation patterns for the pending change notice is arbitrary, and there may be five or more patterns. In addition, pending changes may not only involve a color change as described above, but may also involve changes to characters, items, etc.

"Pattern Chance Notice" is a display in which the losing symbols are displayed as "even number symbol combinations" or "odd number symbol combinations" in the variable display of reserved memories that were not the subject of the look-ahead notice performance until the variable display of the reserved memories (target reserved) that became the subject of the look-ahead notice performance begins.

In this embodiment, the performance patterns of the symbol chance eye notice include a pattern in which the losing symbol is displayed as an "even symbol combination" (for example, "264") and a pattern in which the losing symbol is displayed as an "odd symbol combination" (for example, "135"), and whether the losing symbol is an "even symbol combination" or an "odd symbol combination" is determined based on the variable display result. In addition, the symbol combination of the "even symbol combination" or the "odd symbol combination" may be determined from among multiple types. In addition, the display color of the pedestal display unit 069SG052 described later that constitutes the decorative symbol may be a "blue" pattern, a "green" pattern, a "red" pattern, or a "gold" pattern, and one of these patterns is determined. The expectation level is higher when the losing symbol is an "odd symbol combination" than when it is an "even symbol combination". Additionally, the colors of the pedestal display increase in order of "blue," "green," "red," and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-40(A), when the start winning occurs and the execution of the symbol chance eye prediction and the presentation pattern are decided, the variable display ends and the symbol chance eye prediction starts from the next variable display.

If the losing symbol is determined to be an "even number symbol combination" and the base display unit 069SG052 is determined to be a "blue" pattern, the losing symbol will be displayed as an even number symbol combination of "246" and the base display unit 069SG052 will be displayed in "blue" (see Figures 11-40 (B1) (B2)). On the other hand, if the losing symbol is determined to be an "odd number symbol combination" and the base display unit 069SG052 is determined to be a "red" pattern, the losing symbol will be displayed as an odd number symbol combination of "375" and the base display unit 069SG052 will be displayed in "red" (see Figures 11-40 (C1) (C2)).

In this embodiment, the decorative design is composed of a number display section 069SG051 consisting of the numbers "1" to "9", and a base display section 069SG052 that is displayed on a lower display layer (back side) than the number display section 069SG051. The base display section 069SG052 is formed in a roughly rectangular shape that surrounds the numbers "1" to "9" displayed on the number display section 069SG051, and is displayed in a specified display color (such as white), which is a display mode common to all numbers ("1" to "9").

The number of patterns for the symbol chance prediction is arbitrary, and the number of symbol combinations and the display colors of the base display unit 069SG052 may have five or more patterns. Character images and decorative images may be displayed on the base display unit 069SG052. For example, individual character images corresponding to each number ("1" to "9") may be displayed.

The "effect display preview" is a performance in which an effect image is displayed in the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 when the variable display of a reserved memory that was not the subject of the look-ahead preview performance begins until the variable display of the reserved memory (target reserved) that is the subject of the look-ahead preview performance begins.

In this embodiment, the presentation patterns of the effect display preview include a "blue" pattern, a "green" pattern, a "red" pattern, and a "gold" pattern for the effect image, and one of these patterns is determined. Although detailed explanation is omitted in this embodiment, the manner in which the display color of the effect image changes (for example, if "red" is determined, the color may be changed to "red" from the beginning, or may be changed in stages such as "blue" → "green" → "red") can be determined arbitrarily. The expectation level increases in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-41(A), when an effect display preview is executed and a "red" pattern is determined in response to the occurrence of a start winning, the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-41(B)), the next variable display starts (see FIG. 11-41(C)), and when the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, a "blue" effect image 069SG420 is displayed in the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 11-41(D)). Next, when the next variable display starts, the effect image 069SG420 is hidden (see FIG. 11-41(E)), and when the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, a "red" effect image 069SG420 is displayed in the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 11-41(F)). Then, when the next variable display, that is, the variable display of the target hold (for example, the super reach variable pattern), begins, the effect image 069SG420 becomes hidden (see Figure 11-41 (G)).

The number of presentation patterns for the effect display preview is arbitrary, and there may be five or more presentation patterns. The size of the effect image 069SG420 may be varied depending on the degree of expectation. The effect image 069SG420 may be displayed not only at the end of the variable display, but also at the start of the variable display or at other times.

Next, the pre-reading notice performance type determination tables A to D used by the performance control CPU 120 in the pre-reading notice setting process of step S161 to determine whether or not to execute a pre-reading notice performance that suggests that the reserved memory stored in a specified area of the RAM 102 will be controlled to a jackpot game state based on information received from the main board 11, and the type of pre-reading notice performance to be executed if execution is determined will be described. In FIG. 11-42, (A) is the pre-reading notice performance type determination table A used in the normal state, (B) is the pre-reading notice performance type determination table B used in the probability change state, (C) is the pre-reading notice performance type determination table C used in the time-saving state A, and (D) is the pre-reading notice performance type determination table D used in the time-saving state B. In the following, random numbers from 0 to 99 are used as random numbers for determining the various performance types.

As shown in FIG. 11-42(A), in the notice performance type determination table A used when the game state is the normal state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "hold change notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "effect display notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 50 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 10 judgment values are assigned to "hold change notice", 15 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye notice", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "effect display notice".

As shown in FIG. 11-42(B), in the notice performance type determination table B used when the game state is in the probability variable state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "reserved change notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "effect display notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 5 judgment values are assigned to "reserved change notice", 15 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye notice", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "effect display notice".

As shown in FIG. 11-42(C), in the pre-notification performance type determination table C used when the game state is the time-saving state A, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 40 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "reserved change pre-notification", 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye pre-notification", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "effect display pre-notification". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "reserved change pre-notification", 10 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye pre-notification", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "effect display pre-notification".

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (D), in the advance notice type determination table D used when the game state is time-saving state B, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 100 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, when the variable display result is a "miss," the rate of "not executing" the pre-reading preview performance increases in the following order: normal state, special chance state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B. In other words, it is most likely to be executed in the special chance state, and not executed (least likely to be executed) in time-saving state B. In addition, the "countdown preview" is a preview that is not executed in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, and the "hold change preview" and "effect display preview" are previews that are not executed in time-saving state B.

Here, the type of pre-reading preview performance is determined by comparing the three game states in which time-saving control is executed (high probability state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B).

First, the execution rate of the pre-reading preview performance when the variable display result is a "jackpot" is 80% in the special state, 60% in time-saving state A, and 30% in time-saving state B. The number of types of pre-reading preview performance that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" is 40% in the special state, 30% in time-saving state A, and 0% (not executed) in time-saving state B.

In addition, the number of types of pre-reading preview performances that can be determined when the variable display result is a "jackpot" is "four types" in the special state, "three types" in the time-saving state A, and "two types" in the time-saving state B. The number of types of pre-reading preview performances that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" is "four types" in the special state, "three types" in the time-saving state A, and "zero types (not executed)" in the time-saving state B.

In this way, in time-saving state B, only if the variable display result is a "jackpot," the "symbol chance notice" can be executed, and no other look-ahead notice effects are executed, and if the variable display result is a "miss," no look-ahead notice effects are executed. In other words, in time-saving state B, the execution rate of look-ahead notice effects is lower than in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A, and the number of possible types of effects that can be determined is smaller.

In addition, in time-saving state B, a "Pattern Chance Eye Notice" can be executed as a look-ahead notice performance. This is because in time-saving state B, a change pattern with a short variable display time (such as an ultra-shortened non-reach) is likely to be determined, and when a look-ahead performance is executed in one variable display, the time is short, so it is easy to miss color changes in small reserved display areas such as "reserved change notices." In addition, while a "countdown notice" is executed in multiple variable displays, it is difficult to notice the change in count because the period for displaying the count in one variable display is short. In contrast, a "Pattern Chance Eye Notice" is executed in multiple variable displays, and the change in the display color of the decorative pattern and the base can be suitably shown when the decorative pattern is stopped, so it can be said to be a look-ahead notice performance suitable for execution in time-saving state B.

In the present embodiment, the example shows a form in which the pre-reading preview performance is not executed when the variable display result is a "miss" in the time-saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the execution rate of the pre-reading preview performance when the variable display result is a "miss" in the time-saving state B is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading preview performance when the variable display result is a "miss" in the special probability state or the time-saving state A, the pre-reading preview performance may be executed when the variable display result is a "miss" in the time-saving state B. Also, if the number of types of pre-reading preview performance that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" is less than the number of types of pre-reading preview performance that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" in the special probability state or the time-saving state A, two or more types of pre-reading preview performance may be executed in the time-saving state B.

Next, we will explain the effect pattern determination tables A to F that the effect control CPU 120 uses when determining the effect pattern of the pre-reading preview effect that has been decided to be executed. In Figure 11-43, (A) is effect pattern determination table A used in the normal state, (B) is effect pattern determination table B used in the special probability state, (C) is effect pattern determination table C used in the time-saving state A, (D) is effect pattern determination table D used in the time-saving state B, (E) is effect pattern determination table E used in the normal state, and (F) is effect pattern determination table F used in the special probability state.

As shown in FIG. 11-43(A), in the presentation pattern determination table A, which is commonly used to determine the presentation patterns of the reserved change notice, the symbol chance notice, and the effect display notice when the game state is normal, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", 50 judgment values are assigned to "red", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", 10 judgment values are assigned to "red", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIG. 11-43(B), in the presentation pattern determination table B, which is commonly used to determine the presentation patterns of the reserved change notice, the symbol chance notice, and the effect display notice when the game state is in the probability change state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", 50 judgment values are assigned to "red", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", 10 judgment values are assigned to "red", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIG. 11-43(C), in the presentation pattern determination table C, which is commonly used to determine the presentation patterns of the reserved change notice, the symbol chance notice, and the effect display notice when the game state is the time-saving state A, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue," 20 judgment values are assigned to "green," and 70 judgment values are assigned to "red." On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "blue," 20 judgment values are assigned to "green," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red."

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (D), in the presentation pattern determination table D used to determine the presentation pattern of the symbol chance eye notice when the game state is time-saving state B, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 90 judgment values are assigned to "red," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "gold." On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss," the "symbol chance eye notice" is not executed, and therefore no judgment values are assigned to any presentation patterns.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-43(E), in the presentation pattern determination table E used to determine the presentation pattern of the countdown notice when the game state is in the normal state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "3", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "2", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "1", and 70 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "0". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "3", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "2", 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "1", and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "0".

As shown in FIG. 11-43(F), in the presentation pattern determination table F used to determine the presentation pattern of the countdown notice when the game state is in the probability state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "3", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "2", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "1", and 70 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "0". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 50 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "3", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "2", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "1", and 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "0".

In this way, the presentation patterns for the hold change notice, symbol chance notice, and effect display notice are set so that the expectation level increases in the order of "blue," "green," "red," and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold"). Also, the presentation patterns for the countdown notice are set so that the expectation level increases in the order of "end at 3," "end at 2," "end at 1," and "end at 0" (expectation level: "end at 3" < "end at 2" < "end at 1" < "0").

Here, the presentation patterns of various announcements are compared in three game states in which time-saving control is executed (high probability state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B).

In addition, the number of presentation patterns for various notices that can be determined when the variable display result is a "jackpot" is "four types" in the special state, "three types" in time-saving state A, and "two types" in time-saving state B. The number of presentation patterns for various notices that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" is "four types" in the special state, "three types" in time-saving state A, and "zero types (not executed)" in time-saving state B.

In this way, in time-saving state B, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," one of two types, "red" or "gold," can be determined as the presentation pattern for the "Pattern Chance Eye Notice." Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," no presentation pattern for the "Pattern Chance Eye Notice" is determined (not executed). In other words, in time-saving state B, there are fewer presentation patterns that can be determined than in the special state or time-saving state A.

(Preview performance)
Next, the preview performance will be described. As shown in Fig. 11-36, the preview performances "movable object preview", "character preview", "reach preview" and "button preview" can be executed at a predetermined time in the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute various preview performances in the variable display start setting process shown in Fig. 11-44, and if execution is determined, the performance pattern of the preview performance to be executed.

The "movable object preview" is a presentation that suggests that a jackpot will be controlled by vibrating the movable object 32 up and down when the variable display starts (see Figure 11-57 (A1) (B1)). The presentation patterns for the movable object preview include a "vibration (small) pattern" in which the amplitude of the vertical vibration is small, and a "vibration (large) pattern" in which the amplitude of the vertical vibration is larger than the vibration (small), and depending on the result of the variable display, it is decided whether to execute the "vibration (small) pattern" or the "vibration (large) pattern".

The movable body 32 can move vertically between an origin position above the display screen of the image display device 5 and a performance position approximately in the center of the display screen, and can fall from the origin position to the performance position under its own weight. The vibration in the movable body preview is a performance in which the movable body 32 vibrates vertically between the origin position and a specified position between the origin position and the performance position. Furthermore, the performance patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set.

In the "character preview," a specific character appears during the period from when the variable display begins until the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, and the character's lines are displayed while the audio of the displayed lines is output from speakers 8L, 8R to tease whether or not the reach state will occur (see Figure 11-57 (A2) (B2)). The reach preview presentation patterns include a "line A pattern" in which the character's lines are "Reach?" and a "line B pattern" in which the character's lines are "Maybe reach!!", and either non-execution, "line A pattern," or "line B pattern" is determined depending on the result of the variable display. The content of the lines is arbitrary and may be lines other than those mentioned above.

The character's dialogue patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set. Also, the type of character does not change, but it may be possible to select one of multiple types of characters depending on the variable display result.

The "reach preview" is a presentation that indicates whether or not a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L will be displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R after the variable display of decorative patterns has begun and the decorative pattern that was displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, i.e., whether or not a reach state will occur (see Figures 11-57 (A3 to A5), (B3 to B5)).

Specifically, after the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is stopped and displayed, the deceleration display of the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L begins just before the stop display position in the variably displayed right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 11-57 (A4), (B4)). Then, when the operation by the player is detected within a predetermined operation effective period after the deceleration display begins, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period has elapsed, if the reach mode is not reached, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L passes the stop display position and the next decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 11-57 (A5), (B5)), and if the reach mode is reached, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is stopped and displayed at the stop display position.

The reach mode is a mode (also called a reach performance) in which, from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed, all decorative symbols (e.g., the left and right symbols) excluding one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) from the combination of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., "333") that make up the jackpot display result are displayed stationary, and then the one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) is displayed variably.

When the fluctuation pattern is non-reach or SP reach, the performance control CPU 120 determines by lottery whether to execute a reach notice in the reach notice execution decision process of step 069SGS278 described below, regardless of whether the variable display result is a jackpot display result, and sets a performance control pattern (process table) according to the decision. Also, when the fluctuation pattern is non-reach, the reach mode does not appear after the reach notice is executed, and when the fluctuation pattern is SP reach, the reach mode appears after the reach notice is executed, and the SP reach performance is executed.

The "button notice" is an effect that is executed when the reach notice is executed, from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R that has the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, until the lapse of a specified effective operation period (see Fig. 11-57 (A4) (B4)). Specifically, it is an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the push button 31B from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern until the lapse of a specified effective operation period, and begins with the display of the operation promotion display and a button image that resembles the push button 31B, and ends when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period has lapsed without any operation being detected, by hiding the operation promotion display and the button image.

The presentation patterns (operation promotion modes) of the button preview include a "long press pattern" that encourages the user to press and hold the push button 31B for a specified operation period, a "repeated press pattern" that encourages the user to repeatedly press the push button 31B for a specified operation period, and a "single hit pattern" that encourages the user to press the push button 31B once. Depending on the variable display result, the non-execution, "long press pattern," "repeated press pattern," or "single hit pattern" is determined. Note that the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set.

The operation prompt will say "Long press!" for the "long press pattern," "Continuous tap!" for the "rapid tap pattern," and "One hit!" for the "single hit pattern."

(Decisive performance)
Next, the deciding performance will be explained. As shown in Fig. 11-36, the deciding performance is a performance that is executed before informing whether or not the jackpot is controlled at the end of the SP reach performance in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern (see Fig. 11-58 (C4 to C8), Fig. 11-59 (A10 to D3), (B7 to D3)), and there are a "win/lose button performance" that is executed during a predetermined operation effective period, and a "movable body performance" that is executed after the "win/lose button performance".

The "win/lose button effect" is an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the push button 31B until a specified valid operation period has elapsed. It begins with the display of an operation promotion display consisting of the text "RELEASE!!" or "PRESS!!" and a button image that resembles the push button 31B, and ends when operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, with the operation promotion display and button image going invisible (see Figure 11-58 (C4), Figure 11-59 (A8-A10), (B7)).

The presentation patterns include a "white pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits white light and the button image is displayed in white, and a "red pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits red light and the button image is displayed in red. In the "movable body operation pattern determination process" described below, if "Pattern A-1", "Pattern A-2", "Pattern B-1", or "Pattern B-2" is determined, the "white pattern" is determined, and if "Pattern B-3" is determined, the "red pattern" is determined. It is also possible to determine either the "white pattern" or the "red pattern" depending on the variable display result, regardless of the "movable body operation pattern determination process". Furthermore, the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

The "movable body effect" is an effect that notifies whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state depending on whether or not the movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position. Specifically, it is executed when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the effective operation period in the "win/lose button effect", or when the effective operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, and if the movable body 32 drops from the origin position to the effect position, it notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, and if the movable body 32 does not drop from the origin position to the effect position, it notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state, that is, it notifies that it has been a miss (see Figure 11-58 (C6) and Figure 11-59 (D1)).

When the movable body 32 falls, the movable body LED 208 and game effect lamp 9 built into the movable body 32 light up in a predetermined manner, and an image of an enemy character being defeated and an effect image emphasizing the movable body 32 are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. When the movable body 32 does not fall, the movable body LED 208 and game effect lamp 9 do not light up, and the image of an enemy character being defeated and the effect image are not displayed.

In this way, in the "decisive performance," if the variable display result is a jackpot, the hit/lose button performance is performed, and then the movable body performance is executed to notify the jackpot, and if the variable display result is a miss, the hit/lose button performance is performed, and then the miss performance is not executed, but instead the movable body performance is executed.

(Post-show performance)
Next, the post-effect performance will be described. As shown in Fig. 11-36, the post-effect performance is a performance in which the expected number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state is specified in the post-effect performance part after the variable display part in which the variable display of the decorative pattern in the variable display of the super reach jackpot variable pattern is executed is notified that the jackpot game state will be controlled (see Fig. 11-60 (D4 to D10)).

The variable display part is the period from the start of the variable display in the variable display period of the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern to the announcement of the variable display result, and the post-performance part is the period from the end of the variable display part in the variable display period of the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern to the end of the variable display. In other words, the variable display period of the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern includes the variable display part period and the post-performance part period. The post-performance may be executed during the fanfare period from the start of the jackpot game state to the start of the round game, or during the pattern determination period after the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in the variable display of the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern.

In the post-show performance, the ally character and enemy character that appeared in the SP reach performance are displayed, along with a planned ball number counter display showing the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state, and the planned ball number counter display increases each time the ally character attacks the enemy character. Next, during a specified operation valid period, an operation prompt display consisting of the characters "Push!" and a button image imitating the push button 31B are displayed, and when operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, or when operation is not detected and the operation valid period has elapsed, the ally character defeats the enemy character, a specified number (e.g., 1000 or 1500) is displayed on the planned ball number counter display, and the planned number of balls to be awarded during the jackpot is announced. Then, after the post-show performance ends, the jackpot game state begins.

(Rush-in performance)
Next, the entry performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-36, the entry performance includes a "entry introduction performance" executed before the start of the "probability variable entry performance" and the "time-saving entry performance A", a "probability variable entry performance" executed when the control of the probability variable state starts after the end of the big win game state, a "time-saving entry performance A" executed when the control of the time-saving state A starts after the end of the big win game state, and a "time-saving entry performance B" executed when the control of the time-saving state B starts because 900 variable displays have been executed without being controlled to the big win game state in the low probability state. In addition, the timing at which the rescue time-saving reaching variation (the variable display when the value of the rescue time-saving counter becomes 0) at which the "time-saving entry performance B" is executed is started, that is, a "shutter performance" (see FIG. 11-23 (B) (C), FIG. 11-25 (B) (C)) is executed before the execution of the "time-saving entry performance B".

Specifically, the "high probability of winning" and "time-saving entry effect A" are executed during the ending period of the jackpot game state, and the "time-saving entry effect B" is executed during the pattern determination period (e.g., 20 seconds) after the 900th variable display (rescue time-saving arrival fluctuation) at which the start condition for control of time-saving state B is met has ended.

The "Time-saving entry effect A" is an effect that notifies the player that control of the time-saving state A will begin by displaying the words "BATTLE RUSH ENTERED!!" after the entry introduction effect (see Fig. 11-63 (A) to (C)) is executed (see Fig. 11-63 (D)).

The "high probability entry effect" is an effect that notifies players that the control of the high probability state will begin by displaying the characters "Extreme" in addition to the characters "BATTLE RUSH ENTERED!!" after the entry introduction effect (see Fig. 11-63 (A) to (C)) (see Fig. 11-63 (D), Fig. 11-64 (A1 to A4)).

The "Time-saving entry effect B" is an effect that indicates that the control of time-saving state B will begin by displaying the words "Entering BATTLE RUSH!!" plus "Play 1100" without displaying the entry introduction effect (see Fig. 11-63 (A) to (C)) (see Fig. 11-63 (D) and Fig. 11-64 (B1 to B4)).

In addition, for the special bonus entry effect/time-saving entry effect B, the words "Enter BATTLE RUSH!!" may be displayed after the words "Extreme" or "Play/1100" are displayed.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 11-44 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the first variable start command reception flag is on or not (step 069SGS271). If the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS271; Yes), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 069SGS272). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

In addition, if the first variable start command reception flag is not on (off) in step 069SGS271 (step 069SGS271; No), it is determined whether the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS273). If the second variable start command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS273; No), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS273; Yes), the various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer is shifted up by one buffer number (step 069SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After execution of step 069SGS272 or step 069SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads out the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 069SGS275). The variation pattern designation command is stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area in response to reception of the variation pattern designation command in the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 6, and is erased when the variable display ends. The variation pattern designation command may be erased in response to reading.

Then, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 069SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. Note that in the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 6, the display result designation command received in response to reception of the display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, and is erased when the variable display ends. Note that the display result designation command may be erased upon reading.

In addition, in this feature section 069SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, from among a plurality of combinations of even number symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "222", "444", "666", and "888") as the stopping symbols. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot B, the stopping symbols are determined from a plurality of combinations of odd number symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot C, the stopping symbols are determined to be a combination of decorative symbols with three symbols aligned in "7" (jackpot symbols). Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a miss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are not aligned is determined as the stopping pattern.

In addition, in the pre-reading prediction setting process of step S161 in the performance control process processing of FIG. 10, if the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the aforementioned pattern chance prediction, it decides whether the stopped patterns of the variable display until the variable display of the target hold starts will be a combination of even patterns or a combination of odd patterns.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a rescue time reduction count A designation command that specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached is stored in the command storage area, that is, whether or not the fluctuation is a rescue time reduction reaching fluctuation (step 069SGS276A). If it is a rescue time reduction reaching fluctuation (step 069SGS276A; Yes), a shutter performance setting process is executed (step 069SGS276B), and if it is not a rescue time reduction reaching fluctuation (step 069SGS276A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS277. In the shutter performance setting process, a period until the performance start is set in the shutter performance start waiting timer, and the corresponding shutter performance starts when the performance start waiting timer times out.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS277). If the fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS277; Yes), proceed to step 069SGS283. If the fluctuation pattern is not a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), a reach notice execution decision process is executed (step 069SGS278).

In the reach notice execution decision process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for deciding whether to execute the reach notice is extracted, and a reach notice execution decision table shown in Figure 11-46 (A) is used to decide whether or not to execute the reach notice.

In the reach notice execution decision table, as shown in FIG. 11-46(A), different judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and "execution" for the game state when it is "normal state", "high probability state", "time-saving state A", and "time-saving state B", respectively, so that the judgment value numbers are as shown in FIG. 11-46(A).

Specifically, when the gaming state is in the "normal state", 50 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the gaming state is in the "high probability state", 50 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the gaming state is in the "time-saving state A", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and 40 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the gaming state is in the "time-saving state B", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 judgment values are assigned to "execution".

In this way, when comparing the three gameplay states excluding the normal state, the reach prediction is set so that its execution rate decreases in the order of the special state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (execution rate: special state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a reach notice can be executed with a probability of 20% in time-saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notice may not be executed in time-saving state B.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, in step 069SGS279A, it is determined whether or not a reach notice has been decided to be executed in step 069SGS278 (step 069SGS279A). If it is determined that a reach notice has not been decided to be executed (step 069SGS279A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS280. If it is determined that a reach notice has been decided to be executed (step 069SGS279A; Yes), a presentation control pattern (process table) corresponding to the reach notice is selected (step 069SGS279B), and then a button notice pattern decision process is executed (step 069SGS279C).

In the button preview pattern determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the button preview pattern is extracted, and the button preview pattern is determined using button preview pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in Figures 11-46 (B) to (E).

In the button preview pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-46 (B) to (E), for each of the patterns of "non-execution", "one hit", "repeated hit", and "long press", different judgment values are assigned for the variable display results of "jackpot", "missed reach", and "not missed reach", so that the judgment value numbers are as shown in Figures 11-46 (B) to (E).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-46(B), in the button preview pattern determination table A used when the game state is "normal state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 40 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "long press". Also, when the variable display result is "missed reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 15 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press". Also, when the variable display result is "not missed reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "long press".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-46(C), in the button prediction pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "high probability state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 40 judgment values are assigned to "one hit," 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits," and 20 judgment values are assigned to "long press." Also, when the variable display result is a "missed reach," 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 15 judgment values are assigned to "one hit," 10 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits," and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press." Also, when the variable display result is a "non-missed reach," 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 5 judgment values are assigned to "one hit," 10 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits," and 15 judgment values are assigned to "long press."

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-46(D), in the button preview pattern determination table C used when the game state is "time-saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 40 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "long press". Also, when the variable display result is "missed reach", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 5 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press". Also, when the variable display result is "not missed reach", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 5 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "long press".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (E), in the button preview pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time-saving state B," when the variable display result is "jackpot," 90 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "one hit." When the variable display result is "missed reach," 95 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," and 5 judgment values are assigned to "one hit." When the number of reserved memories is "0," and the variable display result is "miss," 100 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution."

In this way, when comparing the three gameplay states excluding the normal state, the button preview is set so that its execution rate decreases in the order of the special mode, time-saving mode A, and time-saving mode B (execution rate: special mode > time-saving mode A > time-saving mode B).

In particular, in the case of time-saving state B, if the variable display result is "miss" when the number of reserved memories is "0", a non-reach or SP reach variation pattern is determined, but the execution rate of the reach prediction is low, and even if the reach prediction is executed, the button prediction is not executed.

In this embodiment, when the reserved memory number is "0" in time-saving state B and the variable display result is "miss", the button notice is not executed even if the reach notice is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button notice may be executed at a rate lower than the execution rate of the button notice when the reserved memory number is "0" in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A and the variable display result is "miss".

In addition, in the example shown, when the number of reserved memories is other than "0" in the time-saving state B and the variable display result is "miss," the button prediction is executed 5% of the time in the reach prediction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button prediction may not be executed if the variable display result is "miss," regardless of the number of reserved memories.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot or a missed reach, a "one-hit" pattern that prompts the player to perform a single operation may be executed, but the execution rate is extremely low, and "repeated taps" or "long press" operations that prompt the player to perform an operation for a specified effective operation period, that is, "repeated taps" or "long press" operations that are more cumbersome to operate than "one-hit" operations that prompt the player to perform a single operation, are not promoted.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, if it is determined in step 069SGS279A that the execution of a reach prediction has not been decided (step 069SGS279A; No), or after executing the button prediction pattern determination process in step 069SGS279C, the performance control CPU 120 executes a character prediction pattern determination process (step 069SGS280). In the character prediction pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the character prediction pattern is extracted, and the character prediction pattern is determined using character prediction pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in FIG. 11-47 (A) to (D).

In the character preview pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-47(A) to (D), for each pattern of "No execution", "Line A (Reach?)", and "Line B (Maybe it's a reach!!)", different judgment values are assigned when the variable display result is "jackpot" and when it is "miss", so that the judgment value numbers are as shown in Figures 11-47(A) to (D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-47(A), in the character preview pattern determination table A used when the game state is "normal state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "line B". Also, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "line B".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-47(B), in the character preview pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "high probability state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 30 judgment values are assigned to "line A," and 50 judgment values are assigned to "line B." Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 20 judgment values are assigned to "line A," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "line B."

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-47(C), in the character preview pattern determination table C used when the game state is "Time-saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "line B". Also, when the variable display result is "miss", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "line B".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-47 (D), in the character preview pattern determination table D used when the game state is "Time-saving state B", when the variable display result is "Big hit", 90 judgment values are assigned to "No execution", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Line B". When the variable display result is "Miss", 95 judgment values are assigned to "No execution", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "Line A". When the reserved memory count is "0", and the variable display result is "Miss", 100 judgment values are assigned to "No execution".

In this way, when comparing the three gameplay states excluding the normal state, the character preview is set so that its execution rate decreases in the order of the special state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (execution rate: special state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In particular, in the case of time-saving state B, if the number of reserved memories is "0" and the variable display result is "miss," a non-reach or SP reach variable pattern is determined, but the character preview is not executed in the variable display of either variable pattern.

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a character preview is not executed when the variable display result is a "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in time-saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute a character preview at a rate lower than the execution rate of the character preview when the variable display result is a "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A.

In addition, in the example shown, in time-saving state B, when the number of reserved memories is other than "0" and the variable display result is "miss," the character announcement is executed at a rate of 5%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to not execute the character announcement if the variable display result is "miss," regardless of the number of reserved memories.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, after executing the character preview pattern determination process in step 069SGS280, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A). If the fluctuation pattern is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if it is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), proceed to step 069SGS282. If the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A; Yes), execute the movable body operation pattern determination process (step 069SGS281B).

In the movable body motion pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the movable body motion pattern is extracted, and the movable body motion pattern is determined using movable body motion pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in Figures 11-48 (A) to (D).

In the movable body operation pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-48 (A) to (D), there is a "Pattern A-1" for a jackpot where the movable body announcement is not executed and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body performance (decisive performance), a "Pattern A-2" for a jackpot where the movable body announcement is a vibration (small) and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body performance, a "Pattern A-3" for a jackpot where the movable body announcement is a vibration (large) and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body performance, and a "Pattern A-4" for a jackpot where the movable body announcement is not executed and the movable body performance of the deciding performance is a movable body performance. For each of the patterns, "Pattern B-1" for a miss in which the body 32 does not fall, "Pattern B-2" for a miss in which the moving body announcement is a vibration (small) and the moving body performance does not cause the moving body 32 to fall, and "Pattern B-3" for a miss in which the moving body announcement is a vibration (large) and the moving body performance does not cause the moving body 32 to fall, different judgment values are assigned for when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and when it is a "miss" so that the judgment value numbers are as shown in Figures 11-48 (A) to (D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-48(A), in the movable body operation pattern determination table A used when the game state is the "normal state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2," and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3." Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-3."

As shown in FIG. 11-48(B), in the movable body operation pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "high probability state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2," and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3." When the variable display result is a "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-3."

As shown in FIG. 11-48(C), in the movable body operation pattern determination table C used when the game state is "time-saving state A," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2," and 80 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3." When the variable display result is a "miss," 80 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-3."

As shown in FIG. 11-48(D), in the movable body operation pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time-saving state B," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 90 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1," 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2," and 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3." When the variable display result is a "miss," 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1."

As such, when comparing the movable body operation patterns when the variable display result is a jackpot in the three game states excluding the normal state, the execution rate of "Pattern A-2" and "Pattern A-3," in which both the movable body announcement and the movable body performance are executed, is higher in the special probability state and time-saving state A than in time-saving state B. On the other hand, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1," in which the movable body announcement is not executed and only the movable body performance is executed, is higher in time-saving state B than in the special probability state and time-saving state A.

In addition, when comparing the movable body operation patterns when the variable display result is a miss in three game states excluding the normal state, the execution rate of "Pattern B-2" and "Pattern B-3," in which only the movable body prediction is executed, is higher in the special probability state and time-saving state A than in time-saving state B (not executed).

In other words, in the case of time-saving state B, the execution rate of the moving object announcement is lower than in the special chance state and time-saving state A (execution rate of the moving object announcement: special chance state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the Super Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time-saving state B, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" in which the movable object preview is not executed and only the movable object performance is executed is 90%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be 90% or less as long as it is higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display of the Super Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the probability change state or the time-saving state A. Also, the execution rate when the variable display of the Super Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time-saving state B may be 100%.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, if it is determined in step 069SGS281A that the fluctuation pattern is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes a movable object prediction pattern determination process (step 069SGS282). In the movable object prediction pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the movable object prediction pattern is extracted, and the movable object prediction pattern is determined using movable object prediction pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (A) to (D).

In the movable object prediction pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-49 (A) to (D), for each pattern of "non-execution", "small vibration", and "large vibration", different judgment values are assigned when the variable display result is "jackpot" and when it is "miss", so that the number of judgment values shown in Figures 11-49 (A) to (D) is reached.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-49(A), in the movable object prediction pattern determination table A used when the game state is "normal state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration". Also, when the variable display result is "miss", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-49(B), in the movable object prediction pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "high probability state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration," and 60 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration." Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration."

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-49(C), in the movable body prediction pattern determination table C used when the game state is "Time-saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration". Also, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (D), in the movable body prediction pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time-saving state B", when the variable display result is "jackpot", only the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined, so no judgment value is assigned to "non-execution", "small vibration", or "large vibration". Also, when the number of reserved memories is "0" and the variable display result is "miss", if a non-reach fluctuation pattern is determined, a judgment value of 100 is assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the moving object prediction is set so that the execution rate decreases in the order of the special state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (execution rate: special state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In particular, in the case of time-saving state B, if a non-reach fluctuation pattern is determined, the moving object announcement will not be executed, even when the number of reserved memories is "0".

In this embodiment, a form in which a movable object prediction is not executed when the variable display result is "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in time-saving state B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute a movable object prediction at a rate lower than the execution rate of the movable object prediction when the variable display result is "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A.

In addition, in the time-saving state B, when the number of reserved memories is other than "0" and the variable display result is "miss", the movable object prediction is not executed as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of reserved memories is other than "0" and the variable display result is "miss", the movable object prediction may be executed.

When the execution of any of the performance patterns is determined in the above-mentioned button preview pattern determination process, character preview pattern determination process, or movable object preview pattern determination process, a period until the preview start is set in the various preview start waiting timers, and the corresponding preview starts when the various preview start waiting timers time out.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, if the fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach in step 069SGS277, if the movable body operation pattern determination process is executed in step 069SGS281B, or if the movable body preview pattern determination process is executed in step 069SGS282, then in step 069SGS283 the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the fluctuation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 069SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 069SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 069SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 069SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 069SGS288), and the processing ends.

(Variable display performance processing)
Next, FIG. 11-45 is a flow chart showing the variable display performance processing (step S172) in the performance control process processing. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer by 1 (step 069SGS301, step 069SGS302, step 069SGS303). In addition, when various performance start waiting timers are set (it is decided to perform a notice performance, etc.) or the notice performance execution flag is in an on state (a notice performance is being executed) (step 069SGS304; Y), the performance control CPU 120 executes various performance processing (step 069SGS305). When both the performance start waiting timer and the notice performance execution flag are off, the performance processing of step 069SGS305 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 069SGS306.

In step 069SGS306, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 069SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 069SGS308). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 069SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 069SGS309b).

Next, it is confirmed whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 069SGS310). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 069SGS310; Y), the performance control CPU 120 creates image data for the next display screen of the left, center, and right decorative patterns (screens that should be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative patterns) and writes it to a specified area of the VRAM (step 069SGS311). In this way, variable display control of the decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on data that superimposes image data of a specified area such as a set background image and image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the change of the decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5. In addition, a specified value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 069SGS312).

If the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 069SGS310; N), after executing step 069SGS312, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 069SGS313). If the variable display time timer has not timed out (step 069SGS313; No), it determines whether the confirmation command reception flag, which indicates that a pattern confirmation command has been received, is on (step 069SGS314). If the confirmation command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS314; No), the process ends.

If the variable display time timer has timed out in step 069SGS313 (step 069SGS313; Yes), or if the confirmation command reception flag is on in step 069SGS314 (step 069SGS314; Yes), it is determined whether the right hit LED lighting start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS315). If the right hit LED lighting start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS315; Yes), the right hit LED 069SG031 starts to light up, and right hit notification images 069SG400, 069SG401, etc. are displayed to start a right hit notification (step 069SGS316), and the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process ends.

Also, if the right-hit LED lighting start command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS315; No), it is determined whether the right-hit LED lighting end command reception flag is on (step 069SGS317). If the right-hit LED lighting end command reception flag is on (step 069SGS317; Yes), the right-hit LED 069SG031 is turned off, and the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the like are not displayed to end the right-hit notification (step 069SGS318), and the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process is terminated. Also, if the right-hit LED lighting end command reception flag is not on (step 069 SGS317; No), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069 SGS319), and the process ends.

Although not shown in detail, after the processing from step 069SGS315 to step 069SGS318 is executed, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) after the pattern determination period specified by the pattern determination command based on the determination command reception flag has elapsed.

In addition, even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern determination command is received, the control will switch to one that stops the variation. Therefore, even if, for example, a variable pattern specification command indicating a long variation time is received due to noise between boards, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern has ended).

The process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern contains the process data during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer settings of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the processing of step 069SGS306, there is no process data to switch (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the variable display control of the decorative pattern based on the process table ends.

(Examples of various actions depending on game state)
Next, various operation examples for the three game states of time-saving state B, probability-changing state, and time-saving state A will be described based on Fig. 11-50. Fig. 11-50 shows (A) an example of a variable operation for each game state, (B) an example of a presentation operation for each game state, and (C) a diagram for explaining the characteristics of time-saving state B.

First, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), we compare the contents of each item "A1" to "A5" in the three game states of "Time-saving state B", "Probable bonus state", and "Time-saving state A".

<Item A1>
Regarding the number of miss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can select, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figures 11-8 (A) (B), when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1 to 3, the number is "2", namely, "super-shortened non-reach" and "SP reach D". In the "certain variable state", as shown in Figures 11-6 (A) (B), when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the number is a maximum of "4", namely, "shortened non-reach A", "non-reach A", "SP reach C", and "SP reach D". In the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figures 11-7 (A) (B), when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the number is a maximum of "3", namely, "shortened non-reach", "non-reach", and "SP reach E".

In other words, when the variable display result is a "miss," the number of miss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., two) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., three), and is also less than the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in the "probable bonus state" (e.g., four).

The number of miss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine increases in the order of time-saving state B, time-saving state A, and high probability state, or the above number can be changed in various ways as long as the number of time-saving state B is less than at least one of time-saving state A and high probability state.

<Item A2>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figures 11-8 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 is approximately 7.54 seconds {((7 s x 97) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, and the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 is approximately 2.205 seconds {((1.5 s x 97) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 2.205}. Here, assuming that when time-saving state B begins, the first variable display has a pending memory number of 0, and that the 2nd to 1100th variable displays have a pending memory number of 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined in time-saving state B is approximately 2.2 seconds {(7.54 + (2.205 x 1099)) ÷ 1100 = 2.20985}.

As shown in Figure 11-6 (A) and (B), in the "probable bonus state", when the reserved memory number is 0, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined is about 8.2 seconds {((7s x 95) + (40s x 2) + (25s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, and when the reserved memory number is 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined is about 4.8 seconds {((3s x 85) + (7s x 10) + (40s x 2) + (25s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 4.8}. Here, assuming that the reserved memory number is 0 for the first variable display when the probable bonus state starts and the reserved memory number is 1 to 3 for the 2nd to 110th variable displays, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined in the probable bonus state is about 4.83 seconds {(8.2 + (4.8 x 109)) ÷ 110 = 4.83}.

In the "time-saving state A", as shown in Fig. 11-7 (A) and (B), when the number of reserved memories is 0, the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is about 9.15 seconds {((7s x 95) + (50s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, and when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is about 5.55 seconds {((3s x 90) + (7s x 5) + (50s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 5.55}. Here, assuming that the number of reserved memories is 0 for the first variable display when the time-saving state A starts and the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 for the 2nd to 110th variable displays, the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined in the time-saving state A is about 5.58 seconds {(9.15 + (5.55 x 109)) ÷ 110 = 5.58}.

In other words, when the variable display result is a "miss," the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., about 2.2 seconds) is shorter than the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern determined in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., about 5.58 seconds), and is also shorter than the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern determined in the "probable change state" (e.g., about 4.83 seconds).

In addition, the average time (e.g., about 7.54 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-saving state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 9.15 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing fluctuation pattern that is determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-saving state A," and is also shorter than the average time (e.g., about 8.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing fluctuation pattern that is determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "probable change state."

In addition, the average time (e.g., about 2.205 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing variable pattern that can be determined in the "time-saving state B" when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 5.55 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing variable pattern determined in the "time-saving state A" and is also shorter than the average time (e.g., about 4.8 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing variable pattern determined in the "high probability state."

According to items (A1) and (A2), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time continued in which the state was not controlled to a jackpot game state, the variable display that is not determined to be controlled to a jackpot game state has fewer types of fluctuation patterns and a shorter average time for the variable display, and therefore the speed at which the variable display is consumed is faster than in the probability variable state or the time-saving state A, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

The average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern is longer in the order of time-saving state B, high probability state, and time-saving state A, or the above time can be changed in various ways as long as time-saving state B is shorter than at least one of time-saving state A and high probability state.

<Item A3>
Regarding the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can select, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-8 (C), when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, the number is "1" of "SP reach D", and in the "certain variable state", as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, the number is a maximum of "3" of "not via SP", "SP reach C", and "SP reach D", and in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, the number is a maximum of "2" of "not via SP" and "SP reach E".

In other words, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 2), and is also less than the number of miss fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the "probable bonus state" (e.g., 3).

The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine increases in the order of time-saving state B, time-saving state A, and high probability state, or the above numbers can be changed in various ways as long as the number of time-saving state B is less than at least one of time-saving state A and high probability state.

<Item A4>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-8 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 40 seconds.

As shown in Figure 11-6 (C), in the "high probability state," the average time for the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 51.1 seconds {((22 s x 5) + (55 s x 80) + (40 s x 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}, so the average time for the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in the high probability state is approximately 51.1 seconds.

In "time-saving state A," as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 62.8 seconds {((22 s x 5) + (55 s x 95)) ÷ 100 = 62.85}.

In other words, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., about 40 seconds) is shorter than the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., about 62.8 seconds), and is also shorter than the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probable bonus state" (e.g., about 51.1 seconds).

According to items (A3) and (A4), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time continued in which the state was not controlled to a jackpot game state, the variable display that has been decided to be controlled to a jackpot game state has fewer types of fluctuation patterns and a shorter average time for the variable display, and therefore the consumption speed of the variable display is faster than in the probability variable state or the time-saving state A, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

The average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern is longer in the order of time-saving state B, high probability state, and time-saving state A, or the above time can be changed in various ways as long as time-saving state B is shorter than at least one of time-saving state A and high probability state.

<Item A5>
Regarding the determination ratio of non-reach miss fluctuation patterns determined by the CPU 103, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figures 11-8 (A) and (B), the ratio is 95% when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1 to 3, while in the "probable bonus state", as shown in Figures 11-6 (A) and (B), the ratio is 80% when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1 to 3, and in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figures 11-7 (A) and (B), the ratio is 70% when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1 to 3.

In other words, the percentage (e.g., 97%) of times that the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is a "miss" in the "time-saving state B" is higher than the percentage (e.g., 95%) of times that the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is a "miss" in the "time-saving state A," and is also higher than the percentage (e.g., 95%) of times that the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is a "miss" in the "probable win state."

According to item (A5), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued in which the state is not controlled to a jackpot game state, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control the state to a jackpot game state, the state of the variable display is set to a reach state, which makes it less likely that the player will be unnecessarily provoked, and therefore provides a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, the percentage at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variable pattern" when the variable display result is a "miss" is 97% for time-saving state B, and 95% for both the high probability state and time-saving state A, with the percentage decreasing in the order of time-saving state B, high probability state, and time-saving state A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the percentage may decrease in the order of time-saving state B (e.g., 97%), high probability state (e.g., 95%), and time-saving state A (e.g., 94%), or the percentage can be changed in various ways as long as the percentage in the case of time-saving state B is higher than at least one of the time-saving state A and the high probability state.

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the rate at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "time-saving state B" is 97%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rate at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "time-saving state B" is 100%, in other words, the reach fluctuation pattern may not be determined when the variable display result is "miss" in "time-saving state B".

In addition, the miss variation pattern (e.g., "non-reach A") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state B" when the variable display result is "miss" is the same as the miss variation pattern (e.g., "non-reach A") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state A" and the "probable win state", thereby reducing development costs and program capacity.

In addition, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the miss variation pattern (e.g., "SP Reach D") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state B" is the same as the miss variation pattern (e.g., "SP Reach D") that can be determined in the "probable win state", thereby reducing development costs and program capacity.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-50 (B), the contents of each of the items "B1" to "B10" in the three game states of "Time-saving state B", "Probable bonus state", and "Time-saving state A" are compared.

<Item B1>
Regarding the execution rate of "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" as jackpot suggestive effects in the variable display of the miss fluctuation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0, in "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-49 (D), the execution rate of "moving object prediction" is 0% (not executed), and as shown in Figure 11-47 (D), the execution rate of "character prediction" is 0% (not executed); in "probable change state", as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the execution rate of "moving object prediction" is 40%, and as shown in Figure 11-47 (B), the execution rate of "character prediction" is 30%; and in "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-49 (C), the execution rate of "moving object prediction" is 30%, and as shown in Figure 11-47 (C), the execution rate of "character prediction" is 20%.

In other words, when the variable display is executed in the miss variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-saving state A," and when the variable display is executed in the miss variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "probable bonus state," suggestive effects such as "moving object preview" and "character preview" are executed in the variable display, whereas when the variable display is executed in the miss variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-saving state B," suggestive effects such as "moving object preview" and "character preview" are not executed in the variable display.

According to item (B1), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued in which the state is not controlled to a jackpot game state, in the variable display of a variable pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 (for example, "non-reach" or "SP reach" other than the shortened non-reach), there is no unnecessary excitement due to the movable object preview or character preview, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

To explain in detail, when the control of the probability variable state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B starts, it is possible that the first reserved memory may have reserved memory stored therein, since the left-handed play was performed in the normal state up until that point, but there is no reserved memory stored in the second reserved memory. In other words, when the probability variable state or time-saving state A starts with the first hit, or when the control of time-saving state B starts with the execution of 900 variable displays, in order to buy time to store reserved memory in the second reserved memory, the probability of deciding the miss variation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 is high, which is a miss variation pattern with a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach (for example, a non-reach with a variable time of 7 seconds, or an SP reach with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). And when a miss variation pattern with a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach is decided, a suggestive performance such as a "moving object announcement" or a "character announcement" can be executed in the variable display.

However, when the control of time-saving state B begins, it is highly likely that various miss predictions have been executed over the long period of play up to now, and therefore if a "moving object prediction" or "character prediction" is also executed in time-saving state B, the player will feel annoyed. Therefore, when a variable display is executed in the miss variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B, "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" are not executed.

In this embodiment, when the variable display is executed in a miss variation pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in "time-saving state B", a form has been exemplified in which suggestive effects such as "movable object prediction" and "character prediction" are not executed in the variable display. However, for example, when the variable display is executed in a miss variation pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in "time-saving state B", it is preferable that the execution rate of suggestive effects such as "movable object prediction" and "character prediction" in the variable display is lower than the execution rate of suggestive effects such as "movable object prediction" and "character prediction" in the "probable change state" and "time-saving state A".

In addition, when a variable display is executed in a miss variation pattern that is determined when the number of reserved memories is 0, the rate at which suggestive effects such as "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" are executed can be changed in various ways, so long as the execution rate of "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" in time-saving state B is lower than the execution rate of "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" in at least one of time-saving state A and the special state.

In addition, in the time-saving state B, if the fluctuation pattern is a miss, the "moving object announcement" or "character announcement" may not be executed, and if the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot, the "moving object announcement" or "character announcement" may be executed. By doing this, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not suggestive effects such as the "moving object announcement" or "character announcement" are executed in the time-saving state B.

In addition, the suggestive effects that suggest that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state may include a "reach notice" or a "button notice" as a teasing effect that teases whether or not the variable display state will be a reach state (whether or not a reach will be achieved). By doing this, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not the "reach notice" or "button notice" will be executed in the time-saving state B.

In addition, based on the variable display results, it is possible to execute multiple types of suggestive effects, including a first suggestive effect (e.g., line A or small vibration) and a second suggestive effect (e.g., line B or large vibration) that has a higher probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, thereby drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive effect will be executed in time-saving state B, thereby increasing interest.

<Item B2>
Regarding the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss, in the "time-saving state B", none are determined, so the number is "0", as shown in Figure 11-42 (D); in the "certain bonus state", the number is "4", namely, "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice", as shown in Figure 11-42 (B); and in the "time-saving state A", the number is "3", namely, "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice", as shown in Figure 11-42 (C).

In other words, the number of types of pre-reading forecasts that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0) is less than the number of types of pre-reading forecasts that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 3), and is also less than the number of types of pre-reading forecasts that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable win state" (e.g., 4).

In this embodiment, the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" is 0, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as long as the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" is less than the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of the "time-saving state A" and the "probable bonus state", one or more types of pre-reading predictions may be executed.

In addition, the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" can be changed in various ways, as long as it is less than the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of the "time-saving state A" and the "probable bonus state."

<Item B3>
Regarding the execution rate of the "pre-reading notice" when the variable display result is a miss, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-42 (D), none of them are executed, so it is "0%". In the "high probability state", as shown in Figure 11-42 (B), the total execution rate of the "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "chance pattern notice", and "effect display notice" is "40%". In the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-42 (C), the total execution rate of the "hold change notice", "chance pattern notice", and "effect display notice" is "30%".

In other words, the execution rate of the pre-reading forecast when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0%) is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading forecast when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 30%), and is also lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading forecast when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable win state" (e.g., 40%).

According to items (B2) and (B3), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time had continued during which the state was not controlled to a jackpot game state, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control the state to a jackpot game state, the number of types of pre-reading preview performances that can be determined is small, which can reduce development costs, and there is little risk of being unnecessarily swayed by the pre-reading preview performances, making it possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in "time-saving state B" is 0%, in other words, a form in which the pre-reading prediction is not executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of "time-saving state A" and the "high probability state", the pre-reading prediction may be executed.

In addition, if the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of "time-saving state A" and the "high probability state," the above rate can be changed in various ways.

In addition, as the look-ahead preview performance patterns that can be commonly executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, there are a first look-ahead preview performance pattern (e.g., the "blue" pattern of "hold change preview", "pattern chance eye preview", and "effect display preview") and a second look-ahead preview performance pattern (e.g., the "red" pattern of "hold change preview", "pattern chance eye preview", and "effect display preview") that has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first look-ahead preview performance pattern is executed. The percentage of the first look-ahead preview performance pattern executed in the time-saving state B (e.g., 0%, see FIG. 11-43(D)) is lower than the percentage of the first look-ahead preview performance pattern executed in the time-saving state A and the special probability state (e.g., 10%, see FIG. 11-43(C)). This means that the first look-ahead preview performance is less likely to be unnecessarily aroused in the time-saving state B, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

Furthermore, as the pre-reading notice performance patterns that can be commonly executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, there are a first pre-reading notice performance pattern (e.g., the "blue" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice") and a second pre-reading notice performance pattern (e.g., the "red" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice") that has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed. The percentage of the second pre-reading notice performance pattern executed in the time-saving state B (e.g., 90%, see FIG. 11-43(D)) is higher than the percentage of the second pre-reading notice performance pattern executed in the time-saving state A and the special probability state (e.g., 50-70%, see FIG. 11-43(C)). Therefore, the second pre-reading notice performance is more likely to be executed in the time-saving state B, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, the look-ahead preview performance patterns that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A and the special probability state are common to the look-ahead preview performance patterns that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B (for example, "pattern chance eye forecast"), and by not setting look-ahead preview performance patterns that can be determined only in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B is common to the look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in at least one of the time-saving state A and the special state (for example, "pattern chance eye preview"). By not setting a look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined only in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B is common to the look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in both the time-saving state A and the special probability state (for example, "pattern chance eye forecast"). By not setting a look-ahead preview performance pattern that can only be determined in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

<Item B4>
Regarding the execution rate of the "button notice" as an action promotion effect to encourage the player to take action, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Fig. 11-46(E), it is "10%" in the case of a jackpot and "5%" in the case of a miss, while in the "probable chance state", as shown in Fig. 11-46(C), it is "80%" in the case of a jackpot and "30%" in the case of a miss, while in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Fig. 11-46(D), it is "80%" in the case of a jackpot and "20%" in the case of a miss. Note that these execution rates are the rates when the "reach notice" is executed.

In other words, the execution rate of the button notice per variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 10% for a jackpot, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 80% for a jackpot, 20% for a miss), and is also lower than the execution rate of the button notice per variable display in the "probable bonus state" (e.g., 80% for a jackpot, 30% for a miss).

According to item (B4), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, the number of times that the button preview, which is an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B in one variable display, is executed is small, so that a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution rate of the button preview per variable display in "time-saving state B" is exemplified as being lower than the execution rate of the button preview per variable display in "time-saving state A" or "high probability state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be possible to not execute the button preview in "time-saving state B" (execution rate 0%).

In addition, the execution rate of the button announcement per variable display in "Time-saving state B" can be changed in various ways, so long as it is lower than the execution rate of the button announcement per variable display in "Time-saving state A" or "Probable bonus state."

<Item B5>
In the button preview, with regard to the execution rate of the "single hit pattern" as the first action promotion effect that encourages the player to perform a single action, and the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern" as the second action promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an action over a specified period of time, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-46 (E), the execution rate of the "single hit pattern" is "10%" in the case of a jackpot and "5%" in the case of a miss, and for the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern", it is "0% (not executed)" in the case of a jackpot or a miss.

In the "high probability state," as shown in FIG. 11-46 (C), the execution rate of the "one-hit pattern" is "40%" in the case of a jackpot and "10%" on average in the case of a miss, while in the case of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern," it is "40%" in the case of a jackpot and "20%" on average in the case of a miss.

In "time-saving state A," as shown in FIG. 11-46 (D), the execution rate of the "one-hit pattern" is "40%" in the case of a jackpot and "7.5%" on average in the case of a miss, while in the case of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern," it is "40%" in the case of a jackpot and "17.5%" on average in the case of a miss.

In other words, the performance control CPU 120 can determine the execution of either the "one hit pattern" or the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern" in the "high probability state" and "time-saving state A", and can determine the "one hit pattern" in the "time-saving state B", but does not determine the execution of the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern".

In addition, the execution rate of "repeated tap patterns, long press patterns" per variable display in "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0% for jackpots and misses) is lower than the execution rate of "repeated tap patterns, long press patterns" per variable display in the "high probability state" (e.g., 40% for jackpots, 20% for misses), and is also lower than the execution rate of "repeated tap patterns, long press patterns" per variable display in "time-saving state A" (e.g., 40% for jackpots, 17.5% for misses).

According to item (B5), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued in which the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, the player is less prompted to perform cumbersome operations such as "continuous tapping patterns, long press patterns" that require the player to continue operating the push button 31B throughout the effective operation period, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of determining a "one-hit pattern" in the "time-saving state B" but is not capable of determining the execution of a "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern". However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the determination rate of the "one-hit pattern" in the "time-saving state B" is lower than the determination rate of the "one-hit pattern" in at least one of the "time-saving state A" and the "high probability state", the "one-hit pattern" may be executable.

In addition, in time-saving state B, the percentage (e.g., 10%) at which the performance control CPU 120 executes a "button announcement" when the variable display result is a jackpot is higher than the percentage (e.g., 5%) at which the performance control CPU 120 executes a "button announcement" when the variable display result is a miss, thereby drawing attention to the fact that a "button announcement" is being executed in time-saving state B and increasing interest.

In addition, the "button preview" presentation patterns include a "hit" pattern and a "repeated hit" or "long press" pattern that has a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state than when the "hit" pattern is executed. The probability that the "hit" pattern is executed in time-saving state B (e.g., 10%) is lower than the probability that the "repeated hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in time-saving state A or in a highly variable state (e.g., 40%), but the probability that the "hit" pattern is executed in time-saving state B may be higher than the probability that the "repeated hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in time-saving state A or in a highly variable state. By doing this, when an action promotion presentation is executed in time-saving state B, the "hit" pattern is often executed, which can increase interest.

In addition, the period during which the "button notice" is executed in time-saving state A and the special chance state is the same as the period during which the "button notice" is executed in time-saving state B (for example, the period during which the "reach notice" is executed), and by making the execution period of the "button notice" common between time-saving state A, the special chance state, and time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing an action promotion preparation effect (for example, not specifically shown, an effect in which the push button 31B to be operated is faded in or an effect display is displayed before the effective operation period begins) before executing the "button announcement", it is preferable that the period in which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability bonus state is the same as the period in which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the time-saving state B. This can reduce development costs and can provide an appropriate notification that the "button announcement" will be executed.

<Item B6>
Regarding the execution rate per variable display of the "moving object preview," which is a suggestive effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, in the "time-saving state B," as shown in Figure 11-49 (D), it is 0% (not executed) in the case of a jackpot or a miss, while in the "high probability state," as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), it is 90% in the case of a jackpot and 40% in the case of a miss, while in the "time-saving state A," as shown in Figure 11-49 (C), it is 90% in the case of a jackpot and 30% in the case of a miss.

In other words, the execution rate of the "moving object announcement" per variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0% jackpot, 0% miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "moving object announcement" per variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 90% jackpot, 30% miss), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "moving object announcement" per variable display in the "probable change state" (e.g., 90% jackpot, 40% miss).

According to item (B6), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times the movable object preview, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, is executed is reduced, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the execution rate of the "movable object prediction" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" is 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this.) If the execution rate of the "movable object prediction" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the "movable object prediction" per one variable display in at least one of the "time-saving state A" and the "probable bonus state", the "movable object prediction" may be made executable in the "time-saving state B".

In addition, the percentage (e.g., 0%) at which the "movable object announcement" is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot is lower than the percentage (e.g., 90%) at which the "movable object announcement" is executed in time-saving state A or in the special probability state when the variable display result is a jackpot, but the percentage at which the "movable object announcement" is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the percentage at which the "movable object announcement" is executed in time-saving state A or in the special probability state when the variable display result is a jackpot. In this way, interest can be increased by differentiating the degree of attention paid to the "movable object announcement" between time-saving state A, the special probability state, and time-saving state B.

In addition, the percentage (e.g., 0%) at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot is lower than the percentage (e.g., 30%) at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time-saving state A or in the high probability state when the variable display result is a jackpot, but the percentage at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the percentage (e.g., 30%) at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time-saving state A or in the high probability state when the variable display result is a jackpot. In this way, interest can be increased by differentiating the degree of attention to the "moving object announcement" between time-saving state A, the high probability state, and time-saving state B.

<Item B7>
Regarding the execution rate per variable display of the "character announcement" as a teasing effect to incite as to whether or not the variable display mode is to be a reach mode, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-47 (D), it is 10% in the case of a jackpot and 5% in the case of a miss, while in the "probable bonus state", as shown in Figure 11-47 (B), it is 80% in the case of a jackpot and 30% in the case of a miss, and in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-47 (C), it is 80% in the case of a jackpot and 20% in the case of a miss.

In other words, the execution rate of the "character announcement" per variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 10% for a jackpot, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "character announcement" per variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 80% for a jackpot, 20% for a miss), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "character announcement" per variable display in the "probable bonus state" (e.g., 80% for a jackpot, 30% for a miss).

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-46 (A), the execution rate per variable display of the "reach notice," which is a teasing effect to inspire whether the variable display mode will be a reach mode, is 20% in "time-saving state B," 50% in "probable win state," and 40% in "time-saving state A."

In other words, the execution rate of the "Reach Notice" per variable display in the "Time-saving State B" (e.g., 20%) is lower than the execution rate of the "Reach Notice" per variable display in the "Time-saving State A" (e.g., 40%), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "Reach Notice" per variable display in the "Probable Change State" (e.g., 50%).

According to item (B7), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of reach predictions and button predictions that indicate whether or not a reach will be achieved is reduced in consideration of the long period during which the game was not controlled to a jackpot game state, and therefore an optimal time-saving state B can be provided.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of the "character preview" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the "time-saving state A" and the "movable object preview", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution rate of the "character preview" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" may be 0%, that is, not executed. Also, as long as the execution rate of the "character preview" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the "time-saving state A" and the "movable object preview", the above rate can be changed in various ways.

<Item B8>
The movable body operation patterns of "movable body announcement" and "movable body presentation" that can be executed by the presentation control CPU 120 in one variable display include "patterns A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first presentation execution pattern)" which executes "movable body announcement" and "movable body presentation", and "pattern A-1 (second presentation execution pattern)" which executes only "movable body presentation" without executing "movable body announcement". In this case, the execution rate of "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a jackpot is 90% in "time-saving state B" as shown in Figure 11-48 (D), 20% in "probable bonus state" as shown in Figure 11-48 (B), and 10% in "time-saving state A" as shown in Figure 11-48 (C).

In other words, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state B" (e.g., 90%) is higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state A" (e.g., 10%), and is also higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Probable hit state" (e.g., 20%).

According to item (B8), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, when it is decided to control to the jackpot game state in consideration of the fact that a long period has continued during which the state is not controlled to the jackpot game state, it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B, since the movable body 32 is unlikely to be unnecessarily moved in the movable body announcement before the movable body performance in which the movable body 32 falls to notify of a jackpot is executed.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state A" or "Probable bonus state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state B" may be set to 0%, in other words, not to be executed.

In addition, the percentage (e.g., 80 to 90%) of patterns A-2, A-3, B-2, and B-3 (first performance execution pattern) being executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in time-saving state A or in the high probability state is higher than the percentage (e.g., 10%) of patterns A-2, A-3, B-2, and B-3 (first performance execution pattern) being executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in time-saving state B. This allows players to focus on whether or not the movable body 32 moves in time-saving state A or in the high probability state, increasing interest.

In addition, the frequency of execution of the "movable body effect" in time-saving state B (e.g., about 10%) is lower than the frequency of execution of the "movable body effect" in time-saving state A or in the special probability state (e.g., 80-90%), and therefore the movable body 32 is less likely to be moved unnecessarily in time-saving state B, making it possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B.

<Item B9>
The presentation mode of the "post-performance" in which the performance control CPU 120 notifies the player of the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state after notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state by the SP reach performance is common to the "time-saving state B,""high probability state," and "time-saving state A," as shown in Figure 11-60.

According to item (B9), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time had continued during which the state was not controlled to a jackpot game state, the variable display that has been decided to be controlled to a jackpot game state has a smaller variety of variable display patterns and a shorter average variable display time, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and after it has been announced that the state will be controlled to a jackpot game state, it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B, since a common presentation can be used to liven things up in both the time-saving state A and the special probability state.

In addition, the "movable body effect" that is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability bonus state is the same as the "movable body effect" that is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state B (see Figure 11-59 (D1)), which allows development costs to be reduced.

In addition, the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state A or the special probability state is the same as the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state B (e.g., light emission control data executed based on the extended command D300), thereby reducing development costs.

In addition, the vibration modes executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state A or the special probability state are the same as the vibration modes executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state B (for example, vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300), thereby reducing development costs.

<Item B10>
Regarding the "entry effect" as a special state start effect in which the effect control CPU 120 notifies the start of time-saving control by displaying an entry image 069SG470 (for example, the characters "BATTLE RUSH ENTER!!") as a special state start display when time-saving control is started, when the control of the special state starts, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the special state entry effect, and when the control of the time-saving state B starts, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry effect B, and images 069SG473A and 069SG473B for Yu-time (for example, the characters "Yu-1100") are displayed as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the special state or the time-saving state A starts (see Fig. 11-63 (D), Fig. 11-64 (A4) (B4)).

According to item (B10), in the time-saving state B, which is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which control has not been achieved in the jackpot game state, the entry performance not only displays the entry image 069SG470, which is the same as when control of the special probability state begins, but also displays the Yu-time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B, which are special displays that are not displayed when control of the special probability state begins, thereby creating excitement for the start of the time-saving state B.

The CPU 120 for controlling the effects may also be capable of determining a special variation pattern having a variable display time that can execute a "break-in effect" during a rescue time-saving reaching variation. In this way, the "break-in effect" can be executed optimally.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-50 (C), we will explain the differences between "Time-saving state B" and the "High probability state" and "Time-saving state A".

<Item C1>
As explained in each item A1 to A5 shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the number of miss fluctuation patterns and big win fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine is the smallest in the time-saving state B, and the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation patterns and big win fluctuation patterns is the shortest in the time-saving state B, and the determination rate of non-reach misses is the highest in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the average consumption time per one variable display in each of the "time-saving state B", "probable variable state", and "time-saving state A" where time-saving control is performed is the fastest in the time-saving state B, the medium speed in the probable variable state, and the slow speed in the time-saving state A.

In this way, of the time-saving state B, the probability variable state, and the time-saving state A, which have higher variable efficiency than the normal state due to the time-saving control, the probability variable state and the time-saving state A are controlled via a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, while the time-saving state B is controlled via the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) in a low probability state without the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, in the guaranteed bonus state and time-saving state A, the variable display number of times at which time-saving control is executed is a first number (e.g., 110 times), whereas in the time-saving state B, the variable display number of times at which time-saving control is executed is a second number (e.g., 1,100 times) that is greater than the first number.

In other words, in the case of time-saving states such as the probability variable state and time-saving state A, the player can enjoy the reach and various effects while waiting for the next big hit while investing less than in the normal state, whereas in the case of time-saving state B, the player is controlled after playing for a long period of time in a state that is unfavorable to the player without a big hit, and the number of variable displays of the time-saving control is greater than in the probability variable state and time-saving state A. By taking this into consideration, the number of wasted shots is reduced by increasing the variable efficiency as described above, and investment is reduced, while the priority is given to efficiently consume the losing variable displays and hit a big hit in a short period of time rather than enjoying the effects, and a decrease in the player's motivation to play can be suppressed.

<Item C2>
In addition, as explained in each item B1 to B10 shown in Figure 11-50 (B), the execution rate of the various preview effects described above is lowest in the time-saving state B, highest in the special state, and medium in the time-saving state A.

In other words, during the long period of play before being controlled to time-saving state B, various preview effects are executed and then repeatedly fail, which is likely to make the player feel quite depressed. Therefore, by making the execution rate of preview effects in time-saving state B lower than in other play states, it is possible to ideally prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to failure effects.

<Item C3>
In this way, the time-saving state B is a game state characterized by having a higher variable efficiency and by having fewer opportunities to be enticed by advance notice performances, compared to other sure-variable states and the time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is similarly performed, thereby suppressing additional investment and a decrease in desire to play, while suitably consuming the variable display and waiting for a jackpot.

In more detail, while time-saving state B shares with other probability variable states and time-saving state A the average normal pattern change time (the period during which the normal pattern changes), the probability of hitting a "normal pattern" in a normal pattern game, and the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole (high opening control, high base control), it is a time-saving state that prioritizes change efficiency over presentation by shortening the average special pattern change time (the period during which the special pattern changes) more than other probability variable states and time-saving state A, thereby increasing the change efficiency and reducing the frequency of various presentations.

In addition, by making the miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B common to the miss variable display pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the guaranteed bonus state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time-saving state B.

In addition, by making the miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B common to the miss variable display pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the guaranteed bonus state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity by not setting a variable display pattern that can only be determined in the time-saving state B.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the average time of the control period controlled to the time-saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the high probability state, and the average time of the control period controlled to the high probability state is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the time-saving state A. In this way, the average time of the control period in the time-saving state B is shorter than that in the high probability state, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided, while the average time of the control period in the time-saving state A is longer, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the number of miss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., two) is less than the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., three), and the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., three) is less than the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in the special probability state (e.g., four). This reduces the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state B to prioritize consumption of the variable display, while increasing the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in the special probability state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, by making the jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., SP Reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B common to the jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., SP Reach D) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the high probability state (e.g., the high probability state), it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time-saving state B.

In addition, by making the jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B common to the jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in both time-saving state A and the special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the average time of the control period controlled to the time-saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the high probability state, and the average time of the control period controlled to the high probability state is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the time-saving state A. In this way, the average time of the control period in the time-saving state B is shorter than that in the high probability state, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided, while the average time of the control period in the time-saving state A is longer, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., 1) is less than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 2), and the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 2) is less than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the special probability state (e.g., 3). This reduces the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state B to prioritize consumption of the variable display, while increasing the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the special probability state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B is the same as the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the special state. By not setting a non-reach miss that can be determined only in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B is the same as the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the special probability state. By not setting a non-reach miss that can only be determined in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B is the same as the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in at least one of time-saving state A and the special state, so by not setting a non-reach jackpot that can be determined only in time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B is the same as the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in both time-saving state A and the special probability state. By not setting a non-reach jackpot that can be determined only in time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the execution rate of various effects that the performance control CPU 120 can execute in time-saving state B is lower than in the probability variable state or time-saving state A. However, for example, when the remaining number of variable display times until control to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving reaching change) in normal state (low probability/low base state) becomes a predetermined number (e.g., 100 times or 50 times remaining) or less, the execution rate of various effects that the performance control CPU 120 can execute may be set to be lower than the execution rate of various effects that the performance control CPU 120 can execute in the normal state. In this case, the execution rate of one effect may be lower than the execution rate in the normal state, but higher than the execution rate in time-saving state B (execution rate of one effect; normal state (remaining number of times 101 times or more) > normal state (remaining number of times 100 times or less) > time-saving state B).

In addition, when the number of remaining variable display times until control is made to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving reaching variation) in the normal state (low probability/low base state) becomes a predetermined number (for example, 100 times or 50 times remaining) or less, the contents of the above items A1 to A5 and B1 to B10 may be changed to the contents corresponding to time-saving state B. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the inconvenience of being controlled to time-saving state B.

In addition, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if the remaining number of variable display times until the time-saving state B is controlled (rescue time-saving reaching change) is less than a specific number (e.g., 50 times or 10 times remaining) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the rate at which a low expectation effect (e.g., SP reach effect A or a weak pattern preview effect) is executed may be increased.

(Variable display mode of the design)
Next, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern and the small pattern will be explained based on Fig. 11-51 to Fig. 11-55. Fig. 11-51 is a timing chart showing the variable display mode of the pattern in (A) the probability variable state and the time-saving state A miss shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern, and (B) the time-saving state B miss shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern. Fig. 11-52 is an example of the performance operation of the probability variable state and the time-saving state A shortening non-reach miss fluctuation pattern. Fig. 11-53 is an example of the performance operation of the probability variable state and the time-saving state A shortening non-reach miss fluctuation pattern. Fig. 11-54 is an example of the performance operation of the time-saving state B shortening non-reach miss fluctuation pattern. Fig. 11-55 is an example of the performance operation of the SP reach E and the SP reach D.

In this embodiment, each decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R is composed of a number display section 069SG051 consisting of the numbers "1" to "9", and a base display section 069SG052 displayed on a lower display layer (back side) than the number display section 069SG051. On the other hand, the left small pattern, medium small pattern, and right small pattern displayed in the display area 5SL in the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5 are each composed only of the numbers "1" to "9" displayed smaller than the decorative pattern. The decorative patterns and small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special patterns.

The variable display mode of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R of the decorative pattern (for example, non-reach type miss variable pattern, etc.) is different in the normal state, the high probability state/time-saving state A, and the time-saving state B. Below, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern based on the non-reach type miss variable pattern (including shortened non-reach A and non-reach A) in the normal state, the high probability state/time-saving state A will be explained based on the timing chart in Figure 11-51 (A) and with reference to Figures 11-52 and 11-53. Note that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern of the non-reach type miss in the normal state, the high probability state/time-saving state A is the same, so in Figure 11-52, the miss variable display mode of the shortened non-reach in the high probability state will be explained as an example.

As shown in FIG. 11-51(A), at the start timing ta1 of the variable display of the shortened non-reach miss in the probability change state and time-saving state A, the variable display of the decorative patterns and small patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5R, 5R starts simultaneously (all at once) (see FIG. 11-52(A)). In other words, the start order of the variable display of each decorative pattern is the same. Also, each decorative pattern starts variable display at "low speed", becomes "medium speed" at timing ta2 when a predetermined time has elapsed, and then becomes the maximum speed "high speed" at timing ta3 when a further predetermined time has elapsed, and is then variably displayed at a constant rotation speed. On the other hand, the small pattern is variably displayed at the maximum speed "high speed" from the start timing ta1 of the variable display. Incidentally, the maximum speed "high speed" of the decorative pattern and the maximum speed "high speed" of the small pattern may be the same or different.

Next, as the end of the variable display approaches, the variable display speed of the decorative patterns changes from "medium speed" to "slow speed" in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C. Then, at timing ta4 when a predetermined decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-52 (B)). Next, a specific action display (stop display action) is performed in which the base display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size (see FIG. 11-52 (C)), and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L at the timing when it returns to its original size (see FIG. 11-52 (D)).

Next, at time ta5 when a predetermined decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R (see FIG. 11-52 (E)). Next, a specific action display (stop display action) is performed in which the base display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size (see FIG. 11-52 (F)), and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R at the time when it returns to its original size (see FIG. 11-52 (G)).

Next, at timing ta6 when a predetermined decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-53 (H)). Next, a specific action display (stop display action) is performed in which the base display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size (see FIG. 11-53 (I)), and at timing ta6 when it returns to its original size, the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 11-53 (J)). Although not shown in detail, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in a temporary stop display mode (e.g., a swinging mode, etc.) from when they are temporarily displayed until they are stopped based on the reception of a pattern confirmation command.

Then, at time ta7 (the time when the pattern confirmation command is received) when a predetermined time has elapsed from time ta6 when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, the left, middle, and right small patterns are displayed stopped simultaneously (all at once) (see FIG. 11-53 (K)). In this way, the three small patterns are displayed stopped at the same time without any specific action being displayed. Also, at time ta7 when the small pattern is displayed stopped, the three decorative patterns that were temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed stopped at the same time.

Then, at timing ta8, when the pattern determination period (e.g., 0.5 ms) has elapsed since timing ta7 when the small pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the next variable display can begin.

Next, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols of non-reach type losses in the time-saving state B will be explained based on the timing chart of FIG. 11-51(B) and with reference to FIG. 11-54. Note that the variable display mode of the decorative symbols of non-reach type losses in the time-saving state B is common, so in FIG. 11-54, the variable display mode of the shortened non-reach losses in the time-saving state B will be explained as an example.

As shown in FIG. 11-51(B), at the start timing tb1 of the variable display of the super-reduced non-reach miss in the time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative patterns and small patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5R, 5R starts simultaneously (all at once) (see FIG. 11-54(A)). In other words, the start order of the variable display of each decorative pattern is the same. Also, each decorative pattern is variably displayed at a constant rotation speed after reaching the maximum speed of "high speed" at timing tb2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display started at "medium speed". On the other hand, the small pattern is variably displayed at the maximum speed of "high speed" from the start timing tb1 of the variable display. Incidentally, the maximum speed of the decorative pattern, "high speed", and the maximum speed of the small pattern, "high speed", may be the same or different.

Next, as the end of the variable display approaches, the variable display speed of the decorative patterns in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C simultaneously (all at once) becomes "medium speed", and at timing tb3 when the decorative patterns are simultaneously (all at once) temporarily stopped in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-54 (B)). Note that the variable display speed of the decorative patterns may become "low speed" without passing through "medium speed" from "high speed". Next, a specific action display (stop display action) in which the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size is not performed, and at timing tb4 (the timing when the pattern confirmation command is received) when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing tb3 when each decorative pattern was temporarily stopped, the left, center, and right small patterns are simultaneously (all at once) stopped (see FIG. 11-54 (C)). In this way, the three small symbols are displayed simultaneously without any specific action being displayed. Also, at timing tb4 when the small symbols are displayed, the three decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed simultaneously.

Then, at timing tb5, which is the time when the pattern determination period (e.g., 0.5 ms) has elapsed since timing tb4 when the small pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the next variable display can begin.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period during which the variable display speed of the decorative pattern in the variable display is "medium speed" during acceleration or deceleration is common to the time-saving state B, the high probability state, and the time-saving state A, but it may be shorter in the time-saving state B than in the high probability state and the time-saving state A. Also, the period during which the variable display speed of the decorative pattern in the variable display is "high speed" is shorter in the time-saving state B than in the high probability state and the time-saving state A, but it may be common to the time-saving state B, the high probability state, and the time-saving state A.

In addition, in this embodiment, the stopped display mode of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is the same for the time-saving state B, the special probability state, and the time-saving state A (the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed stopped in a horizontal line), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the special probability state and the time-saving state A, the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed stopped in a horizontal line, while in the time-saving state B, the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed stopped in different positions in the vertical direction. In this way, the stopped display mode of the decorative patterns in the time-saving state B may be different from the stopped display mode of the decorative patterns in the special probability state and the time-saving state A.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is illustrated as being common (variable display in the vertical direction) to the time-saving state B, the special probability state, and the time-saving state A, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be vertical in the special probability state and the time-saving state A, while the variable display may be horizontal in the time-saving state B, or the variable display of the decorative patterns may be displayed in a reduced size in the display area 5SR, etc., and special effects by friendly characters, enemy characters, etc. may be continuously displayed on the display screen, and the variable display mode in the time-saving state B may be different from the variable display mode in the special probability state and the time-saving state A.

In this way, the start order of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the same for the non-reach miss variable pattern in the special probability state and time-saving state A, and the non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B, but the time it takes for the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C to reach maximum speed is shorter in time-saving state B than in the special probability state and time-saving state A (tb1-tb2<ta1-ta3). Therefore, different impressions can be given for each state, increasing interest.

The stopping order of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is left → right → middle in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, and left, middle, and right are stopped simultaneously in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in time-saving state B. This gives a different impression for each state, increasing interest.

The stopping order of the variable display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the same for the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A, and the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B. However, the time from when a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in one of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C until the next decorative pattern is stopped and displayed may be different for the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A, and the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B. This makes it possible to give a different impression for each state, enhancing interest.

In addition, the number of times the pattern stop sound is output in variable display 1 is three times in the case of a non-reach miss variation pattern in the probability change state or time-saving state A, because the left, center, and right are displayed stopped at different times, and once in the case of a non-reach miss variation pattern in time-saving state B, because the left, center, and right are displayed stopped at the same time. This gives a different impression for each state, increasing interest.

In addition, the number of times the pattern stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 may be the same for the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability change state and time-saving state A, and for the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B. This makes it possible to give a different impression for each state and increase interest.

In addition, in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, a specific action display (pattern stopping action) is performed, whereas in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in time-saving state B, a specific action display (pattern stopping action) is not performed. Therefore, while the special action display enhances the presentation effect in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, a smooth variable display can be achieved by not executing the special action display in time-saving state B.

In addition, the specific action display (pattern stopping action) is common to both the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A and the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in time-saving state B, thereby enhancing the presentation effect with the specific action display, while commonizing the form of the specific action display between the high probability state, time-saving state A and time-saving state B can reduce development costs.

In addition, the period from when the decorative pattern is stopped to when the small pattern is stopped is shorter in the non-reach miss variable pattern in time-saving state B than in the non-reach miss variable pattern in the sure-win state and time-saving state A {t1 (ta6-ta7) > t2 (tb3-tb4)}. Therefore, a smooth variable display can be achieved in time-saving state B.

In addition, the pattern determination period (ta7 to ta8), which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at a variable display of 1 in the probability variable state and time-saving state A until the variable display of the decorative pattern begins in the next variable display, and the pattern determination period (tb4 to tb5), which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at a variable display of 1 in time-saving state B until the variable display of the decorative pattern begins in the next variable display, are the same. Therefore, by standardizing the control that takes into account the drawing process until the decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed, it is possible to reduce development costs.

In addition, the specific action display of each decorative pattern is exemplified as an action display in which the display is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returns to the original size, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the action mode is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways. In addition, in the specific action display, only the pedestal display unit 069SG052 displays the specific action, and the number display unit 069SG051 does not display the specific action, so that the visibility of the identification information is ensured while the specific action display enhances the presentation effect, but the number display unit 069SG051 may also display the specific action as well as the pedestal display unit 069SG052. In addition, the specific action mode may be different for each decorative pattern with a different number.

In addition, in the above, an example was given in which the variable display mode is common between the abbreviated non-reach miss fluctuation pattern and the non-abbreviated non-reach miss fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display mode may be different between the abbreviated non-reach miss fluctuation pattern and the non-abbreviated non-reach miss fluctuation pattern.

In addition, the display position of the decorative pattern in time-saving state B may be made different when the variable display starts and when the variable display stops, allowing the variable display to be displayed optimally even during the short variable display period.

In addition, instead of accelerating the speed at which the decorative pattern is variable displayed until it reaches the maximum speed as in this embodiment, the decorative pattern may be changed to a form that is difficult to see (e.g., a dark form) during the variable display, and then changed from the difficult to see form to a normal form when the decorative pattern stops, thereby realizing a variable display with a sense of speed.

Next, the reach specific action display and the jackpot specific action display will be explained based on Figure 11-55.

First, in the variable display of the jackpot fluctuation pattern of SP Reach E, the variable display starts (see Figure 11-55 (A)), and after the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 11-55 (B)), the decorative pattern is displayed decelerating in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the reach notice and button notice are executed (see Figure 11-55 (C)). When the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed stationary in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the base display part 069SG052 of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returns to its original size, and a reach specific action display is performed (see Figure 11-55 (D)), and the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see Figure 11-55 (E)).

Next, although not shown, when a jackpot announcement is made after the SP reach performance, the determined decorative symbols that will be a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (see FIG. 11-55(F)). After that, the base display portion 069SG052 of the decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returns to its original size, and a jackpot specific action display is performed (see FIG. 11-55(G)), after which the determined decorative symbols are temporarily displayed (see FIG. 11-55(H)).

On the other hand, in the variable display of the jackpot fluctuation pattern of SP Reach D, the variable display starts (see FIG. 11-55 (I)), and without displaying the reach mode, the determined decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (see FIG. 11-55 (F)). After that, the base display portion 069SG052 of the decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returns to its original size, and then a jackpot specific action display is performed (see FIG. 11-55 (G)), and the determined decorative pattern is temporarily displayed (see FIG. 11-55 (H)).

In this way, in the case of the SP reach E fluctuation pattern, it is possible to execute a reach specific action display that causes the decorative symbols to perform a specific action when the variable display mode becomes a reach mode, and a second specific action display that causes the decorative symbols to perform a specific action when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination. In the SP reach E fluctuation pattern that goes through a reach, the reach specific action display and the jackpot specific action display are executed, but in the SP reach D fluctuation pattern that does not go through a reach, the reach specific action display is not executed and the jackpot specific action display is executed. Therefore, in the SP reach D that can be executed in the time-saving state B, it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B because it is less likely to be unnecessarily stirred up.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-55(I), after the variable display starts, no reach state is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 11-55(F), the fixed decorative patterns that are the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a "movable body presentation" in which the movable body 32 falls may be executed without any operation by the player between the start of the variable display and the temporary display of the fixed decorative patterns that are the predetermined jackpot combination.

(Display mode of non-reach out fluctuation pattern)
Next, compare non-reach failure variation patterns. Figure 11-56 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of non-reach failure variation patterns. Figure 11-57 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of non-reach failure variation patterns. Note that, in the following, the detailed operation example of the specific operation display that is executed when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is omitted.

As shown in Figure 11-56, comparing the non-reach missed fluctuation patterns of the shortened type, first, in the "ultra shortened non-reach" that can be determined in the time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started simultaneously (see Figure 11-56 (A1)). The variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is stopped and displayed simultaneously (see Figure 11-56 (A2)). On the other hand, in the "shortened non-reach A" that can be determined in the special probability state and the time-saving state A, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started simultaneously (see Figure 11-56 (B1)). Next, a decorative pattern is displayed statically in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 11-56 (B2)), a decorative pattern is displayed statically in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 11-56 (B3)), and a decorative pattern is displayed statically in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 11-56 (B4)).

As for the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, in the sure-win state and time-saving state A, the variable display time is shortened non-reach A of "3 seconds", and the decorative symbols are displayed in the order of left, right, and center, whereas in time-saving state B, the variable display time is super shortened non-reach of "1.5 seconds", and the decorative symbols are displayed simultaneously on the left, right, and center.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-57, comparing the non-reach missed fluctuation patterns, first, in "non-reach A" that can be determined in the probability change state, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously. At this time, a "movable body announcement" in which the movable body 32 moves up and down may be executed (see Figure 11-57 (A1)). Next, before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a "character announcement" may be executed in which a character image 069SG100C and a dialogue display 069SG431 consisting of text such as "reach?" are displayed (see Figure 11-57 (A2)).

Next, after a decorative pattern is displayed statically in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 11-57 (A3)), a "reach notice" in which the decorative pattern is displayed decelerating in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, a button image 069SG441 imitating the push button 31B, and an operation prompting display 069SG442 such as "Long press!" are displayed to prompt the operation of the push button 31B may be executed (see FIG. 11-57 (A4)). After that, a decorative pattern different from the left pattern is displayed statically in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 11-57 (A5)), and the reach mode is not entered, and the decorative pattern is displayed statically in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, ending the variable display (see FIG. 11-57 (A6)).

In addition, the "non-reach A" (see Figure 11-57 (B1) to (B6)) that can be determined in the time-saving state A has a similar flow to the non-reach missed fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the high probability state (see Figure 11-57 (A1) to (A6)), so a description will be omitted.

On the other hand, in "non-reach A" which can be determined in time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see Figure C1), and then the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stops simultaneously and the variable display ends (see Figure 11-57 (C2)).

As described above, for the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display time is the same at "7 seconds" for the special probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B, but while the execution rate of various effects such as "moving object notice", "character notice", "reach notice", and "button notice" is high in the special probability state and time-saving state A, in time-saving state B the execution rate of various effects such as "moving object notice", "character notice", "reach notice", and "button notice" is lower (or not executed) than in the special probability state or time-saving state A.

(Display mode of SP reach fluctuation pattern)
Next, the super reach fluctuation pattern is compared. Figure 11-58 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of the super reach fluctuation pattern. Figure 11-59 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of the super reach fluctuation pattern. Figure 11-60 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of the post-event performance in the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Comparing the Super Reach fluctuation patterns based on Figures 11-58 and 11-59 below, first, in the fluctuation pattern of "SP Reach E" that can be determined in time-saving state A, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see Figure 11-58 (A1)). Next, before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a "character announcement" may be executed in which a character image 069SG100C and a dialogue display 069SG431 consisting of, for example, the text "Maybe it's a reach!!" are displayed (see Figure 11-58 (A2)).

Next, the variable display state becomes the reach state (see FIG. 11-58 (A3)). Although not specifically shown, when the reach state is reached, a "reach notice" or "button notice" may be executed.

Next, a reach title image 069SG440 consisting of a character image and text such as "SP reach performance E" is displayed (see FIG. 11-58 (A4)). At this time, the decorative symbols that were variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are displayed in a reduced size in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right corner of the display screen of the image display device 5. Then, a "battle performance" begins in which the character image 069SG100C of the ally character faces off against the character image 069SG100X of the enemy character (see FIG. 11-58 (A5)).

Next, a predetermined time has passed since the start of the battle presentation, and the final showdown begins (see FIG. 11-59 (A6) (A7)). Here, a button image 069SG451 that resembles the push button 31B, an operation prompting display 069SG452 such as "Start charging!", and a gauge display 069SG453 are displayed, and a "win/lose button presentation" is executed as an operation prompting display that prompts the player to press and hold the push button 31B (see FIG. 11-59 (A8)). If a long press by the player is detected during the valid operation period in which the operation prompting display 069SG452 is displayed, the level of the gauge display 069SG453 increases (see FIG. 11-59 (A9)).

In addition, a pre-effect (such as a light gathering effect in which light gathers at the position where the button image 069SG451 is displayed) may be executed before the button image 069SG451 that resembles the push button 31B is displayed during or immediately before the performance period of the win/lose button performance. In addition, it is preferable that such a pre-effect is not executed in the time-saving state B.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the operation prompting display 069SG452, the display of the operation prompting display 069SG452 changes to "RELEASE!!" to prompt the release of the push button 31B, and the operation time for releasing the operation is displayed by the gauge display 069SG453 (see FIG. 11-59 (A10)). Then, when the release of the push button 31B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the release of the push operation being detected, an image 069SG455 indicating that an ally character has attacked is displayed, and the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to near the intermediate position (see FIG. 11-59 (A11)).

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot, a movable body presentation is executed, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the presentation position, and a movable body presentation image 069SG456 consisting of an image indicating that the ally character's attack has hit the enemy character and an effect image for highlighting the movable body 32 is displayed. After the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the presentation position (see FIG. 11-59 (D1)), a notification image 069SG457 indicating that the enemy character has been defeated and the ally character has won the battle is displayed (see FIG. 11-59 (D2)), and the fixed decorative patterns that are the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot (see FIG. 11-59 (D3)).

When a jackpot is announced, as shown in FIG. 11-60, the background image is switched to the fifth background image 069SG350, and a character image 069SG100C and a planned ball number counter display 069SG460 showing the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state are displayed, and the post-event performance begins (see FIG. 11-60 (D4)).

Next, an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball number display 069SG461 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed number of planned balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned ball number counter display 069SG460 (see FIG. 11-60 (D5)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the planned ball number counter display 069SG460 reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "300"), a button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B, an operation prompting display 069SG452 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 069SG453 showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed, and an operation prompting effect is executed to prompt a single press of the push button 31B (see FIG. 11-60 (D6)).

Next, when the pressing of the push button 31B is detected before the specified operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the pressing operation being detected, the friendly character attacks, and the counter value of the scheduled ball number counter display 069SG460 is variably displayed (see FIG. 11-60 (D7)), and the enemy character is faded out (see FIG. 11-60 (D8)). Then, the scheduled ball number counter display 069SG460 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a specified counter value (for example, "750", which is the scheduled number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "6R jackpot") is displayed frozen (see FIG. 11-60 (D9)).

In the case of jackpot A or jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the planned ball output counter display 069SG460 is not updated and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, and in the case of jackpot C (10R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the planned ball output counter display 069SG460 is updated to a predetermined counter value (e.g., "1500") (see Figure 11-60 (D10)) and then the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss, although this is not shown in detail, the attack of the ally character does not hit the enemy character, the movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position to the performance position, the enemy character is not defeated, the ally character loses the battle, and a combination of miss patterns is displayed stationary in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby informing the player that the variable display result is a miss (see FIG. 11-59 (D4)).

Returning to FIG. 11-58, in the "SP Reach C" jackpot variation pattern that can be determined in the probability change state, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see FIG. 11-58 (B1)). Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display started, a blackout effect starts in which the display screen turns into a black screen (see FIG. 11-58 (B2)). After that, the variable display mode does not become a reach mode, and the same effect as in FIG. 11-58, 50 (A3 to A7) is performed (see FIG. 11-58, 50 (B3 to B6)), and then the same effect as in FIG. 11-59 (A8 to A9) is not performed, and the same effect as in FIG. 11-59 (A10 to A11) is performed (see FIG. 11-59 (B7 to B8)). Then, the effects of FIG. 11-59 (D1 to D3) and FIG. 11-60 (D4 to D10) are performed.

Returning to FIG. 11-58, in the "SP Reach D" jackpot variation pattern that can be determined in the time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see FIG. 11-58 (C1)). Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display started, a blackout effect starts in which the display screen turns into a black screen (see FIG. 11-58 (C2)). After that, the variable display mode does not become a reach mode, and the effect of FIG. 11-58 (A4) is not performed, and after the same effect as FIG. 11-58 (A5) is performed (see FIG. 11-58 (C3)), the effect of FIG. 11-59 (A8 to A9) is not performed, and the same effect as FIG. 11-59 (A10 to A11) is performed (see FIG. 11-59 (C4 to C5)). Then, the effects shown in Figure 11-59 (D1 to D3) and Figure 11-60 (D4 to D10) are performed.

(Example of control operation of Super Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern)
Next, examples of control operations for the jackpot fluctuation patterns of SP Reach E, C, and D will be compared based on FIG. 11-61. FIG. 11-61 is a timing chart showing an example of control operations in SP Reach E, C, and D.

As shown in Figures 11-61 (A) to (C), SP Reach E, C, and D are composed of a variable display part that executes a variable display of decorative symbols, and a post-performance part that notifies the player of the expected number of balls that can be won in a jackpot game state after the variable display part ends. In the variable display part, when the variable display begins, the aforementioned "movable object preview," "character preview," "reach preview," "button preview," etc. are executed, and after the reach state is reached, a "battle performance" or "short battle performance" is executed as an SP reach performance. Then, after the "win/lose button performance" is started as an operation promotion performance in the "decisive performance" at timing ta1, the "movable object performance" is started at timing ta2. Then, after the results of the "battle performance" or "short battle performance" are announced, at timing ta3, the determined decorative symbols that will be the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a specific jackpot action display (jackpot symbol stopping action; see FIG. 11-55 (G)) is performed, and then at timing ta4, the combination of symbols that will determine the jackpot is temporarily stopped and a jackpot is announced. After that, during the period from timing ta5 to ta6, a post-performance is executed.

The variable display time (ta0 to ta5) of the variable display part is 50 seconds for SP Reach E, which can be determined in time-saving state A, 40 seconds for SP Reach C, which can be determined in the special state, and 25 seconds for SP Reach D, which can be determined in time-saving state B. On the other hand, the time of the post-performance part (ta5 to ta6) is the same for SP Reach E, C, and D, at 15 seconds.

In other words, while the variable display times of the variable display parts in time-saving state A and the special probability state are different from the variable display time of the variable display part in time-saving state B (25 seconds) (50 seconds, 40 seconds), the variable display times of the post-performance parts in time-saving state A and the special probability state are the same as the variable display time of the post-performance parts in time-saving state B (15 seconds). This allows for differences in the various performances in the variable display parts between time-saving state A and the special probability state and time-saving state B, and enhances the performance effect, while reducing development costs by standardizing the post-performance parts.

In addition, while the variable display times of the variable display parts in the time-saving state A and the probability bonus state (50 seconds, 40 seconds) are different from the variable display time of the variable display part in the time-saving state B (25 seconds), the display times of the jackpot specific action displays in the time-saving state A and the probability bonus state (ta3 to ta4) are the same as the display times of the jackpot specific action displays in the time-saving state B (ta3 to ta4). This allows for differences in the various effects in the variable display parts to be made, enhancing the effect of the effects, while reducing development costs by standardizing the display times of the jackpot specific action displays.

The execution period of the "win/lose button effect" (ta1 to ta2) is the same for SP Reach C and D, and is different only for SP Reach E.

In addition, when the display control unit 123 performs display processing to generate the image drawn in the image drawing area in the VRAM area as image data (display data) for displaying on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area, and outputs the image data (display data) of the display image creation area as a video signal, it generates extended commands (e.g., extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) as movable body control information for operating the movable body 32, push button 31B, etc., and extended commands (e.g., extended commands BXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) as lamp control information for turning on/off the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, etc., and transmits them to the performance control CPU 120.

Based on receiving the above-mentioned extended commands DXXX and SXXX, the performance control CPU 120 starts operation control to operate the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the push button 31B in an operation pattern corresponding to the extended commands DXXX and SXXX, separately from the operation control based on the operation control execution data of the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B described in the process data.

In addition, based on receiving the above-mentioned extended command BXXX, etc., the performance control CPU 120 starts control to turn on/off the movable body LED 208 in a lighting pattern corresponding to the extended command BXXX, etc. (for example, see the lighting pattern shown in Figure 13-6 (B) in feature section 018SG), separately from the control based on the lamp control execution data of the movable body LED 208 described in the process data.

In addition, control data for operating the movable body 32 and the push button 31B, and control data for turning on the movable body LED 208 are stored in the ROM 121.

Here, the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body presentation" in the event of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the special probability state (e.g., control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) is the same as the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body presentation" in the event of a jackpot in the time-saving state B (e.g., control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200), thereby reducing development costs.

In this embodiment, an example has been given in which extended commands (e.g., extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) as control information for movable bodies for operating the movable body 32, push button 31B, etc., and extended commands (e.g., extended command BXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) as control information for lamps for turning on/off the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, etc., are generated separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in a "movable body performance" or the like, the on/off control of the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, etc., and the control for movable bodies such as the movable body 32 and push button 31B may be executed based on extended command B000 as control information for lamps for turning on/off the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, etc. In other words, lighting control and operation control may be performed using common control information (extended commands).

In addition, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state A or the special probability state, and the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state B, are the same, which reduces development costs.

In addition, the control data (e.g., control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) used to control the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 that emit light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the event of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the special probability state is common to the control data (e.g., control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the event of a jackpot in the time-saving state B, thereby reducing development costs.

In addition, by making the extension command B000 a common extension command for movable body operation control and LED lighting control, it is not necessary to separate the extension commands for movable body operation control and the extension commands for LED lighting control, and therefore the program capacity for performance control can be reduced. If the extension commands used for movable body performance were divided into extension commands for movable body operation control and extension commands for LED lighting control, there is a risk that one of the extension commands will be missed due to a malfunction, but by sharing them, movable body performance can be performed optimally.

In addition, the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "moving body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state A or the special probability state (see movable body performance image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)) is the same as the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "moving body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state B (see movable body performance image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)). This allows development costs to be reduced.

(Comparison between super reach fluctuation pattern and non-reach out fluctuation pattern)
Next, a comparison between the super reach fluctuation pattern and the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to Fig. 11-62. Fig. 11-62 is a diagram comparing the super reach fluctuation pattern and the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 11-62, the variable display period (tb0 to ta4) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts to when it stops in the super reach miss variable pattern is longer than the variable display period (tb0 to tb4) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts to when it stops in the non-reach miss variable pattern.

In addition, the variable display period (tb0-tb1) of the non-reach miss variable pattern is shorter than the period (tb0-tb3) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts in the super reach miss variable pattern until the variable display state becomes a reach state, so the variable display ends in a period shorter than the period until the reach state is reached, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern, the period (tb0 to tb1) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L starts to when it stops is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb2) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L starts to when it stops in the super-reach miss fluctuation pattern, so that the variable display of the decorative pattern in a specified row ends in a short period of time, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

(Rush-in performance)
Next, an example of the performance of the entry performance will be described based on Fig. 11-63 and Fig. 11-64. Fig. 11-63 shows an example of the performance of the entry introduction performance (A) to (C), and a time-saving entry performance (D) of the time-saving entry performance A. Fig. 11-64 shows an example of the performance of the probability variable entry performance (A1) to (A4), and a time-saving entry performance (B1) to (B4) of the time-saving entry performance B.

As shown in FIG. 11-63(A) to (C), in the "introduction performance", the effect image 069SG470A is gradually enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and the message "BATTLE
A predetermined number (for example, one character) of character images 069SG470B making up "RUSH rush in!!" are framed in from the right side of the display screen of image display device 5 and moved to the center of the display screen.

Then, a "time-saving entry effect A" is performed in which an entry image 069SG470 consisting of an effect image 069SG470A that is displayed at its maximum and has a changed display color, and a text image 069SG470B consisting of the text "BATTLE RUSH ENTER!!" gathered in the center of the display screen, is displayed, thereby announcing that control of time-saving state A has begun.

In the case of a "probability bonus entry effect," after the entry image 069SG470 in FIG. 11-63 (D) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 11-64 (A1), a probability bonus image 069SG471 with a predetermined transparency consisting of the character "極" and an effect image is displayed on a display layer higher than the entry image 069SG470, and then is moved and displayed while gradually shrinking toward the bottom left of the display screen and with a decreasing transparency (see FIG. 11-64 (A2-A3)).

Then, a "probability bonus entry effect" is performed in which a probability bonus entry image 069SG472 consisting of an entry image 069SG470 and a probability bonus image 069SG471 displayed in the smallest size with 0% transparency in the bottom left of the display screen is displayed, thereby announcing that control of the probability bonus state has begun (see FIG. 11-64 (A4)).

In the case of "Time-saving entry effect B", the "entry introduction effect" described in Fig. 11-63 (A) to (C) is not executed, and when the pattern determination period (e.g., 20 seconds) begins after the 900th variable display, when the start condition for the control of time-saving state B is met, the entry image 069SG470 in Fig. 11-63 (D) is displayed, and then, as shown in Fig. 11-64 (B1), a play-time image 069SG473A having a predetermined transparency and consisting of the characters "1100" and an effect image is displayed on a display layer higher than the entry image 069SG470, and then is moved and displayed while gradually shrinking and decreasing in transparency toward the bottom left of the display screen (see Fig. 11-64 (B2 to B3)).

Then, a "time-saving entry effect B" is performed, which displays an entry image 069SG473 consisting of an entry image 069SG470, a Yu-time image 069SG473A consisting of the characters "1100" displayed at the smallest size with 0% transparency in the bottom left of the display screen, and a Yu-time image 069SG473B consisting of the character "Yu", thereby announcing that control of the time-saving state B has begun (see FIG. 11-64 (B4)).

In this way, when control of time-saving state A is started, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry performance A, and when control of the special probability state is started, the entry image 069SG472 consisting of the entry image 069SG470 and the special probability state image 069SG471 is displayed in the special probability state entry performance, while when control of time-saving state B is started, the entry image 069SG470 common to the entry image 069SG470 displayed when entering time-saving state A and the special probability state is displayed in time-saving entry performance B, and the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B are displayed as special displays that are not displayed when control of the special probability state or time-saving state A is started.

Therefore, in the time-saving state B, which is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has passed during which the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, the time-saving entry performance B not only displays the entry image 069SG470, which is the same as when the control of the special probability state or the time-saving state A starts, but also the play-time image 069SG473B, which is not displayed when the control of the special probability state or the time-saving state A starts, thereby making the start of the time-saving state B more exciting.

[Embodiment 2]
Next, the second embodiment in the feature section 069SG will be described based on FIG. 11-65 to FIG. 11-69. FIG. 11-65 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variable pattern determination table as the second embodiment in the feature section 069SG. FIG. 11-66 is a diagram showing a part of a variable display start setting process as the second embodiment in the feature section 069SG. FIG. 11-67 is a diagram showing a variable display performance pattern determination table. FIG. 11-68 is an example of the performance operation of SP Reach D. FIG. 11-69 is a diagram for explaining the features according to the game state. In the second embodiment, illustrations and detailed explanations of the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment will be omitted, and differences will be mainly described.

Figure 11-65 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state), (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0, and (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-65 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 100 judgment values are assigned to ultra-shortened non-reach. Also, as shown in Figure 11-65 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 100 judgment values are assigned to ultra-shortened non-reach.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-65 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to SP Reach E, and 90 determination values are assigned to SP Reach D.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the SP Reach D fluctuation pattern is determined in the special probability state and the time-saving state A, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "short battle effect" described in the first embodiment as the variable display effect, whereas when the variable display of the SP Reach D fluctuation pattern is determined in the time-saving state B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "instant win effect" or "full spin effect" described below as the variable display effect, rather than the "short battle effect".

The SP Reach D fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the special probability state and the time-saving state A is a reach fluctuation pattern in which a "short battle effect" is executed after the variable display starts and the variable display mode becomes a reach mode, whereas the SP Reach D fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the time-saving state B is a non-reach fluctuation pattern in which an "instant win effect" or "full spin effect" is executed without the variable display mode becoming a reach mode after the variable display starts.

Next, FIG. 11-66 is a part of a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-44. In this embodiment, after executing the processes of steps S069SGS271 to S069SGS276 in the variable display start setting process, if the CPU 120 for performance control determines in step S069SGS277 that the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area is not a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), it executes the processes of steps 069SGS277A to 069SGS277D before executing the reach notice execution decision process of step 069SGS278.

Specifically, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is an SP Reach D variation pattern (step 069SGS277A), and if it is an SP Reach D variation pattern (step 069SGS277A; Yes), determines whether the game state is time-saving state B (step 069SGS277B). Then, if it is determined that the game state is time-saving state B (step 069SGS277B; Yes), it executes a variable display presentation pattern determination process (step 069SGS277C).

In the variable display performance pattern determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the variable display performance pattern is extracted, and the variable display performance pattern is determined using the variable display performance pattern determination table shown in Figure 11-67.

In the variable display effect pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 11-67, for each of the "instant hit effect" and "full spin effect", different judgment values are assigned for the jackpot type of "jackpot C (10R)" and "jackpot A, B (6R)" so that the number of judgment values shown in FIG. 11-67 is obtained.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)", 10 judgment values are assigned to the "instant hit effect", and 60 judgment values are assigned to the "full spin effect". Also, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)", 70 judgment values are assigned to the "instant hit effect", and 30 judgment values are assigned to the "full spin effect".

In this way, when comparing the "instant win effect" and "full spin effect" in the three game states other than the normal state, they are not executed in the special probability state or time-saving state A, but are variable display effects that can only be executed in time-saving state B, and are executed by using the SP reach D variation pattern that can be determined in the special probability state and time-saving state A.

In addition, the execution rate of the "instant hit effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)" is higher than the execution rate of the "instant hit effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)", while the execution rate of the "full spin effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)" is higher than the execution rate of the "full spin effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)". In other words, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)", which has a higher expected number of balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game state than "jackpot A, B (6R)" and is more advantageous for the player, the "full spin effect" is executed at a higher rate than the "instant hit effect".

Next, examples of the "instant win effect" and "full spin effect" will be described. When the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, the variable display starts, the variable display mode becomes a reach mode, and then a "short battle effect" is executed in which the friendly character wins against the enemy character in the battle effect, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot (see Figures 11-58 to 11-59). However, when the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in time-saving state B, the variable display starts, and then an "instant win effect" or "full spin effect" is executed in which the variable display mode does not become a reach mode, and the variable display result is announced to be a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-65, in the "instant hit effect", in the SP Reach D big win variation pattern, after the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started simultaneously (see FIG. 11-68 (A1)), when a predetermined time has passed, the determined decorative symbols that are the predetermined big win combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (A2)). After that, in the "decisive effect", a button image imitating the push button 31B, an operation promotion display such as "Press!!" and a gauge display are displayed to promote the operation of the push button 31B, and instead, a "movable body effect" is executed in which the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character and the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to near the middle position (see FIG. 11-68 (A3)). Then, the fixed decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed again in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (A4)). After that, in the post-performance part, a post-performance similar to the post-performance described in FIG. 11-60 (D4 to D10) is executed (see FIG. 11-68 (C1 to C7)), and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 11-65, in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern, after a blackout effect in which the display screen is blacked out with the start of the variable display is executed for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 11-68 (B1)), the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is simultaneously started in the third background image 069SG330 (see FIG. 11-68 (B2)). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed, a full rotation display is started in which the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are variably displayed in a state where they are aligned with the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination (see FIG. 11-68 (B3)). After that, the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (B4)). After that, in the post-performance part (symbol determination period), a post-performance similar to that described in FIG. 11-60 (D4 to D10) is executed (see FIG. 11-68 (C1 to C7)), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

In this way, in time-saving state B, when the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern is determined, an "instant hit effect" or "full spin effect" is executed as a variable display effect that notifies the player that the variable display result is a jackpot after the variable display starts, without going through the reach mode, so the player can enjoy the SP reach effect with peace of mind without worrying about being provoked by the reach effect.

In addition, in the "instant win effect" or "full rotation effect", unlike the "button preview" and "win/lose button effect" described in the first embodiment, no operation promotion effect is executed that encourages the operation of the push button 31B by displaying a button image that resembles the push button 31B, operation promotion displays such as "Press!!", and gauge displays, or operation effects that require the player to operate the push button 31B, so that in the time-saving state B, the player can conveniently consume the variable display without having to perform any cumbersome operation promotions or operations.

(Examples of various actions depending on game state)
Next, various operation examples according to the three game states of the time-saving state B, the probability variable state, and the time-saving state A in this embodiment will be described based on FIG. 11-69. FIG. 11-69 is a diagram for explaining various operation examples according to the game state. Below, as shown in FIG. 11-69, the contents of each item "D1" to "D4" in the three game states of "time-saving state B", "probability variable state", and "time-saving state A" will be compared.

<Item D1>
First, with regard to the rate at which the CPU 103 determines an SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern without going through a reach mode, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-65 (C), the determination rate of "SP reach D (instant hit effect or full spin effect)" that does not go through a reach mode when the number of reserved memories is 0, 1 to 3 is "90%", in the "probable change state", as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), the determination rate of "SP non-via A (non-reach)" that does not go through a reach mode when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is "5%", and in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), the determination rate of "SP non-via A (non-reach)" that does not go through a reach mode when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is "5%".

In addition, in the special probability state and time-saving state A, "SP Reach D" is a reach fluctuation pattern in which a "short battle performance" is executed via the reach mode, and is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern that does not go through the reach mode.

In other words, the percentage (e.g., 90%) of times that an "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (instant hit effect or full spin effect)" that does not go through a reach mode is determined in time-saving state B is higher than the percentage (e.g., 5%) of times that an "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through a reach mode is determined in time-saving state A, and is also higher than the percentage (e.g., 5%) of times that an "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through a reach mode is determined in the probability variable state.

According to item (D1), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, in the variable display for which it is not decided to control the game to a jackpot game state, the state of the variable display is set to a reach state, so that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state without being unnecessarily provoked, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In this embodiment, the rate at which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (instant hit effect or full spin effect)" that does not go through the reach mode in time-saving state B is determined is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-through A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined in time-saving state A or in the high probability state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result in time-saving state B is a jackpot, the "SP reach D fluctuation pattern (instant hit effect or full spin effect)" that does not go through the reach mode may be determined 100% of the time.

<Item D2>
The presentation control CPU 120 can execute, for example, a "win/lose button presentation" in a SP reach presentation as an action-promoting presentation to encourage the player to take action, and can execute, for example, a "movable body presentation" in a SP reach presentation as a specific presentation to notify the player of the variable display result.

Then, in the probability variable state or time-saving state A, when the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes a first performance execution pattern in which a "win/lose button performance" is executed and then a "movable body performance" is executed in the "decisive performance" in the variable display of the SP Reach D, while in the time-saving state B, when the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the CPU 120 executes a second performance execution pattern in which a "movable body performance" is executed without executing a "win/lose button performance" in the "instant win performance" in the variable display of the SP Reach D.

Therefore, when the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the execution rate of the "instant hit effect" in which the "moving body effect" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button effect" is "90%" in the "time-saving state B" when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, as shown in Figure 11-65 (C); in the "probable bonus state", when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, as shown in Figure 11-6 (C); and in the "time-saving state A", when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, as shown in Figure 11-7 (C).

In other words, the execution rate (e.g., 90%) of an "instant hit effect" in which a "moving body effect" is executed without executing a "win/lose button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B is higher than the rate (e.g., 0%) of a "moving body effect" in which a "win/lose button effect" is executed without executing a "win/lose button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state A, and is also higher than the rate (e.g., 0%) of a "moving body effect" in which a "win/lose button effect" is executed without executing a "win/lose button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the probability variable state.

According to item (D2), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, when it is notified that it has been decided to control to the jackpot game state, taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued during which the game has not been controlled to the jackpot game state, the player is less likely to be prompted to operate the push button 31B, so that a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In this embodiment, the percentage of the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes the "instant hit effect" or "full spin effect" in the time-saving state B is higher than the percentage of the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes the "instant hit effect" or "full spin effect" in the time-saving state A or the special probability state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the percentage of the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes the "instant hit effect" or "full spin effect" in the time-saving state B may be 100%.

<Item D3>
The percentage at which the CPU 103 will determine a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (for example, an "ultra-shortened non-reach" with a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or an "shortened non-reach A" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds) when the number of reserved memories is 0 is "100%" in the "time-shortened state B" when the number of reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 11-65 (A); in the "probable change state," it is "0%" when the number of reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 11-6 (A); and in the "time-shortened state A," it is "0%" when the number of reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 11-7 (A).

On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the percentage at which the CPU 103 determines a miss variation pattern with a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds or SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) is "0%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-shortened state B" as shown in FIG. 11-65(A), "100%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "probable variation state" as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), and "100%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-shortened state A" as shown in FIG. 11-7(A).

In other words, when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the sure-change state or the time-saving state A, the CPU 103 can determine a miss variation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, a non-reach with a variation time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) to buy time for the reserved memories to be stored in the second reserved memory, while when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B, the CPU 103 can determine a shortened non-reach variation pattern with a shorter variable display time (for example, an ultra-shortened non-reach with a variation time of 1.5 seconds) than a miss variation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, a non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds).

According to item (D3), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued in which the state is not controlled to a jackpot game state, even if the number of reserved memories is 0, a miss fluctuation pattern with a longer variable display period than the shortened fluctuation pattern (for example, a non-reach with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds or an SP reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) is determined, and the consumption speed of the variable display does not decrease, so a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

<Item D4>
In this embodiment, the type of jackpot can be determined to be either "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot B", which involves a 6R round of play, or "Jackpot C", which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B" (e.g., has a greater number of rounds, i.e., a greater number of planned balls that can be won) (see Figure 11-3 (D)).

In addition, when the SP Reach D jackpot variable pattern is determined in the time-saving state B, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "full rotation performance" as a special variable display pattern in which the jackpot symbols are displayed variably for a predetermined period of time when they are aligned and then displayed stationary.

In addition, when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern, the percentage at which the presentation control CPU 120 executes the "full spin presentation" is "90%" in the "time-saving state B" as shown in FIG. 11-67, "0%" (the "full spin presentation" is not executed) in the "probable bonus state" as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), and "0%" (the "full spin presentation" is not executed) in the "time-saving state A" as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C).

In other words, the percentage (e.g., 100%) at which the presentation control CPU 120 executes the "full spin presentation" when the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot C (10R)" in time-saving state B is higher than the percentage (e.g., 0% (not executed)) at which the presentation control CPU 120 executes the "full spin presentation" when the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot C (10R)" in time-saving state A, and is also higher than the percentage (e.g., 0% (not executed)) at which the presentation control CPU 120 executes the "full spin presentation" when the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot C (10R)" in the probability variable state.

According to item (D4), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to jackpot C, which has more rounds and is more advantageous to the player than jackpot A or jackpot B, taking into consideration the long period during which the state is not controlled to a jackpot game state, it becomes easier to execute the "full spin effect," a special variable display that is not executed (or has a low execution rate) in the normal state, the special variable state, or the time-saving state A, and therefore it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B.

In the present embodiment, the proportion of the performance control CPU 120 executing the "full spin performance" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state B is 100%. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the proportion of the performance control CPU 120 executing the "full spin performance" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state B is higher than the proportion of the performance control CPU 120 executing the "full spin performance" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, the performance control CPU 120 may execute the "full spin performance" at a rate less than 100%. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute the "full spin performance" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state.

(Explanation of Variations and Applications of Feature 069SG)
In the feature section 069SG, a form in which a big win game state is applied is exemplified as an example of an "advantageous state advantageous to the player", but the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a sure win state, a small win game state, a reach state, a pseudo consecutive performance state, a reserved consecutive state, a chance up performance, a foresight notice performance, a miss with time reduction, a ceiling time reduction control, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic section 069SG, a form is exemplified in which a so-called type 1 pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high probability state for a predetermined period of time after the end of a jackpot game is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability state from the end of a jackpot game until it is controlled to the next jackpot when the jackpot type is a high probability jackpot, or a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability state from the end of a jackpot game until it wins a high probability drop lottery. Also, a so-called type 1/2 gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state by a V winning occurring as a result of a small win in the time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game may be applied, and the gameplay can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, the example shows a form in which the time-saving state A, the probability bonus state, and the time-saving state B are applied as special states in which the variable display is executed more frequently than in a non-special state (for example, the normal state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of game states other than the above may be applied.

In addition, in the feature part 069SG, a form is exemplified in which a low-probability, high-based time-saving state A (first special state) and a time-saving state B (rescue time-saving (second special state)) are applied as a first special state that is controlled when a favorable state controlled from a non-special state (e.g., a normal state, a low-probability/low-base state) ends, and a second special state that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays have been executed in a non-special state without being controlled to an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a high-probability, high-based probability change state (first special state) and a low-probability, high-based time-saving state B (rescue time-saving (second special state)) may also be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, a form in which a probability variable state is applied as a third special state that is controlled when an advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the case of a type 1/type 2 pachinko gaming machine, a time-saving state different from the time-saving state as the first special state (for example, a time-saving state in which the time-saving state is executed more times (has a longer control period) than the first special state) may be applied.

In addition, in the feature part 069SG, at least one of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state may have multiple types of special states that differ, for example, in the number of times the time-saving control is executed, the frequency with which the variable display is executed, etc.

In addition, in the feature part 069SG, a form in which a normal state (low probability/low base state) is applied as a non-special state is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the game state has a lower frequency of execution of the variable display than the special state, it is not limited to the low probability/low base state, and may be a high probability base state, a low probability/high base state, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, the time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) as the second special state is exemplified as being controlled on the condition that the variable display has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) without being controlled to an advantageous state in a non-special state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined number of times can be changed in various ways. Also, it may be controlled when another condition is met in addition to the above-mentioned conditions.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, in the time-saving state B, the time-saving state A, and the probability of winning, the average normal pattern change time (period for changing the normal pattern), the probability of winning the normal pattern in the normal pattern game, and the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole (high opening control, high base control) are not changed, and the average special pattern change time (period for changing the special pattern) in the time-saving state B is shortened compared to the probability of winning and the time-saving state A, without changing the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole (high opening control, high base control). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the efficiency of the change of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern) may be further improved by making at least one of the average normal pattern change time (period for changing the normal pattern), the probability of winning the normal pattern in the normal pattern game, and the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole (high opening control, high base control) in the time-saving state B different from the probability of winning and the time-saving state A.

In addition, in the feature part 069SG, an example has been given of a form in which the CPU 103 can determine, as a variable pattern, a first non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach A-E miss") in which the variable display mode is a specific mode (e.g., a reach mode) and then a miss display result, and a second non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach miss") in which the variable display mode is not a specific mode and a miss display result is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first non-specific variable display pattern and the second non-specific variable display pattern may include types of variable patterns other than those described above. In addition, as a variation pattern, a first specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP Reach A-C, E jackpot") that displays a miss display result with the variable display mode as a specific mode (for example, a reach mode) and a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP Reach D (instant hit or full spin)", "not via SP", etc.) that displays a miss display result without setting the variable display mode as a specific mode have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first specific variable display pattern and the second specific variable display pattern may include types of variation patterns other than those described above.

In addition, the "specific mode" is not limited to the "reach mode", but may include various modes such as a "chance mode (e.g., 133)", a "pseudo consecutive mode (e.g., 122)", a "normal reach mode", and a "super reach mode".

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, examples have been given of the application of "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" as indication effects that suggest that control will be made to a jackpot gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the indication is an indication that control will be made to a jackpot gaming state, it may include various indications such as, for example, a stop pattern prediction, a pseudo consecutive prediction, a dialogue prediction, an operation prediction, a reach prediction, and a look-ahead prediction effect.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, examples have been given of forms in which a "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "pattern chance notice", and "effect display notice" are applied as pre-reading notice effects that suggest that the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory will be controlled to an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to these, and may include various other pre-reading notices, such as "continuous effects" and "omen effects".

In addition, in the characteristic section 069SG, a form in which a "button preview" or a "win/lose button effect" is applied as an example of an action promotion effect that encourages the player to take action has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this and may include various effects other than those mentioned above. Furthermore, "player action" is not limited to the operation of the push button 31B, but may be an effect that encourages the operation of another operating means (such as a touch panel) provided other than the push button 31B, or an effect that encourages the player to take action (movement) rather than an operation.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, "Patterns A-2 and A-3" are applied as an example of a first effect execution pattern in which a "movable object effect" is executed as a specific effect after the "win/lose button" is executed as a movement promotion effect, and "Pattern A-1" is applied as an example of a second effect execution pattern in which a specific effect is executed without executing a movement promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other operation promotion effects such as a "button preview" may be applied as a movement promotion effect, or an effect other than a "movable object effect" (for example, a battle result in a SP reach effect) may be applied as a specific effect.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, an example was given of a form in which an operation promotion display for a "one-hit" operation is applied as the first action promotion effect that encourages the player to perform one action, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be something that encourages the player to perform not only one push operation but also one pull operation, rotation operation, back and forth operation, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, an example was given of a form in which an operation promotion display for "repeated taps" or "long press" operations was applied as a second action promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an action over a predetermined action period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may also promote pull operations, rotation operations, reciprocating operations, etc. over a predetermined action period. Furthermore, actions over a predetermined action period are not necessarily limited to actions detected continuously, and may include intermittent operations or operations according to a predetermined pattern, etc.

In addition, in the feature portion 069SG, a form in which a "character announcement" or a "reach announcement" is applied is exemplified as an effect including a teasing effect that teases whether or not the variable display state will be a specific state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may include various effects such as an effect that teases that it will be a "chance eye state (e.g., "133")", a "pseudo consecutive state (e.g., 122)", a "normal reach state", or a "super reach state".

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, in the post-performance, the expected number of balls to be dispensed is reported as the game value information that can specify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state that is notified of being controlled in the specific performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state (e.g., 6R or 10R) may be reported. In addition, in a state where jackpots are consecutive, such as when a jackpot occurs in a probability variable state, the expected total number of balls to be dispensed, which is the sum of the expected number of balls to be dispensed in the current jackpot and the total number of balls to be dispensed during a specified consecutive jackpot period, may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, when the control of the special state is started, a special state start display is displayed to notify the start of the control of the special state, and examples of the application of the entry introduction effect, the probability of entering a special state effect, the time-saving entry effect A, the time-saving entry effect B, and the shutter effect are given as examples of special state start effects, but the present invention is not limited to these, and various entry effects other than those described above may be executed. Also, the presentation form of each entry effect is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, an example was given of a form in which the special bonus entry effect and the time-saving entry effect A are separate effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special bonus entry effect and the time-saving entry effect A may be a single common entry effect.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, an example was given of a form in which the entry introduction effect is not executed when the time-saving entry effect B is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entry introduction effect may be executed instead of the shutter effect. Also, the entry introduction effect may be executed when the time-saving entry effect B is executed. In this case, in order to eliminate the hassle of the effects, it is preferable to have an entry introduction effect with a shorter effect period than when the special rate entry effect or the time-saving entry effect A is executed.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, as an example of the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, a form in which jackpots A and B (first advantageous state) and jackpot C (second advantageous state) with different numbers of play rounds in the jackpot game state are applied is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state may be not only a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player in the jackpot game state in terms of the number of play rounds or the number of expected balls that can be obtained, but also a jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game state ends is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot with a long time-saving control after the jackpot game state, or a jackpot controlled in a "small jackpot rush" in which the frequency of execution of the small jackpot game state increases after the jackpot ends, etc.).

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 099SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the characteristic part 099SG in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 12-1 to 12-22. Note that in this characteristic part 099SG, illustrations and detailed descriptions of the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the characteristic part 069SG will be omitted, and differences will be mainly described. Also, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the characteristic part 099SG described below can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the characteristic part 069SG.

In the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG, like the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 11-1, the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed as a left game area where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed as a right game area where game balls can flow down. In other words, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG, a game ball weakly shot out by the launching device because the game state is normal flows down the first path in the left game area, and a game ball strongly shot out by the launching device because the game state is either time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or probability variable state flows down the second path in the right game area. In addition, a part of the game ball flowing down the second path in the right game area can pass through a gate 41 provided on the second path (to the right of the image display device 5), and a variable display of a normal pattern is executed based on the passing of the gate 41. Then, based on the result of the variable display of the normal pattern being a win (normal pattern win), the second start winning hole provided on the second path changes from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can win in the second start winning hole. Note that in this feature part 099SG, "variable display" may be written as "variable" or "variable display".

Figure 12-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side in this feature section 099SG. As shown in Figure 12-1 (A), in this feature section 099SG, on the main board 11 side, the following numerical data is controlled so as to be countable: random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and random number value MR5 for determining the MR4 initial value. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result of a special symbol or other such in a special symbol game to a "jackpot" and to a jackpot game state, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65535", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type to be either "jackpot A", "jackpot B", or "jackpot C" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "299", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "99", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

The random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is a random number value used to determine the initial value of the random number value MR4, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "23".

Figure 12-1 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 099SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 099SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 099SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and that it is controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/80.02 in this feature part 099SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and that it is controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/319.68 in this feature part 099SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

FIG. 12-1 (C1) and FIG. 12-1 (C2) show examples of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. FIG. 12-1 (C1) is a table referenced to determine the jackpot type from jackpot A and jackpot B based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled during variable display of the first special pattern, and FIG. 12-1 (C2) is a table referenced to determine the jackpot type from jackpot B and jackpot C based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled during variable display of the second special pattern.

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 099SG will be explained with reference to FIG. 12-1 (D). In this feature section 099SG, the jackpot types provided are jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, for which time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, these jackpots A, B, and C are also jackpots for which special control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game by the game ball entering the V winning port after entering the second large winning port in the first round of the jackpot game state.

In this feature part 099SG, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) can be a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a short period of time, and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a long period of time. In the first round of the jackpot game state, the variable V winning ball device is in a short open state for jackpot A, and in the first round of the jackpot game state, the variable V winning ball device is in a long open state for jackpot B and jackpot C.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot A", the variable V prize entry ball device is in a short open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is not expected that the special bonus control will be executed, so it is essentially a normal jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot B", the variable V prize entry device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to tenth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot C", the variable V prize entry ball device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot C, are provided as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less types of jackpots, or four or more types of jackpots may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 12-3 (B1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 149 is assigned to jackpot A, and 150 to 299 is assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this feature 099SG, even if a jackpot A occurs, it is possible but extremely rare for a V entry to occur when the V lid is in a short open state, so in the case of a jackpot A, it will be described as not having a V entry and not having the variable probability control executed. Also, even if a jackpot B or jackpot C occurs, it is possible but extremely rare for a V entry not to occur when the V lid is in a long open state, so in the case of a jackpot B or jackpot C, it will be described as having a V entry and having the variable probability control executed.

In addition, in this feature part 099SG, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for determining the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the result of the special chart display.

Figure 12-2 (A) is a normal symbol hit determination table that is referenced when the game state is normal and the variable display of a normal symbol is executed to determine whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (normal symbol hit), and Figure 12-2 (B) is a normal symbol hit determination table that is referenced when the game state is either time-saving state A, special state, or time-saving state B and the variable display of a normal symbol is executed to determine whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (normal symbol hit).

The time-saving state B in this feature part 099SG is the game state that is controlled when 900 variable displays are executed without being controlled to a jackpot game state in the normal game state (a low probability/low base state in which neither special probability control nor time-saving control is executed), and is time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) in which time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 1100 variable displays.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 12-2(A), out of the range 3-13 of the random number value MR4 for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit, 3 is assigned to a hit, and 4-13 are assigned to a miss. On the other hand, in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 12-2(B), out of the range 3-13 of the random number value MR4 for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit, 3-12 is assigned to a hit, and 13 is assigned to a miss. In other words, in this feature part 099SG, the rate of normal hits when the game state is either the time-saving state A, the probability change state, or the time-saving state B is set higher than the rate of normal hits when the game state is the normal state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2(C), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds when the game state is normal, whereas the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 0.1 seconds when the game state is either time-saving state A, special probability state, or time-saving state B. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-2(D), the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal symbol hit occurs when the game state is normal is set to 0.1 seconds, whereas the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal symbol hit occurs when the game state is either time-saving state A, special probability state, or time-saving state B is set to 3 seconds.

In other words, in the time-saving state A, the probability of winning, and the time-saving state B in this feature part 099SG, compared to the normal state, the game ball is more likely to enter the second start winning hole because "the probability of winning with a normal pattern is high," "the variable display time of the normal pattern is short," and "the opening time of the second start winning hole when a winning with a normal pattern occurs is long," so that the frequency of variable display of the second special pattern is set high, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving state A, the probability of winning, and the time-saving state B may be set to have a high frequency of variable display of the second special pattern by satisfying at least one of the conditions "the probability of winning with a normal pattern is high," "the variable display time of the normal pattern is short," and "the opening time of the second start winning hole when a winning with a normal pattern occurs is long," compared to the normal state.

In the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG, like the pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 069SG (see FIG. 11-1), when the game state is normal, the player can shoot the game ball toward the left game area 2L, which allows the game ball to enter the first start winning hole, but cannot enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole or pass through the gate 41, and when the game ball is in the time-saving state A, the probability change state, or the time-saving state B, the player can shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, which allows the game ball to enter the second start winning hole and pass through the gate 41. Note that when the game state is the big win game state, the player can shoot the game ball toward the right game area, which allows the game ball to enter the second start winning hole and the large winning hole and pass through the gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 12-12(A), when the game state is normal, the game ball shot toward the left game area 2L is prevented from winning by multiple nails arranged on the game board 2, so the probability of the game ball winning in the first start winning hole is about 5.5% (condition is that the game ball is continuously shot into the left game area 2L by the player's operation of the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30). In addition, when the game state is normal, even if the player shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, the variable display time of the normal pattern due to the game ball passing through the gate 41 is extremely long at 60 seconds, and the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal winning occurs is extremely short at 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 12-2(C) and FIG. 12-2(D)), so the game ball almost never wins in the second start winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 12-12(B), when the game state is either Time-saving State A, Chance Bonus State, or Time-saving State B, the game ball shot toward the right game area 2R can pass through the gate 41, and the variable display time of the normal pattern due to passing through the gate 41 is short at 3 seconds, and the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal pattern hit occurs is 3 seconds (see FIG. 12-2(C) and FIG. 12-2(D)). Therefore, the probability of the game ball entering the second start winning hole is about 55% (condition is that the game ball is continuously shot into the right game area 2R by the player operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30).

Figure 12-3 shows the variable pattern used in the variable display of the special pattern of this feature part 099SG. In this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-3, as the variation patterns when the variable display result is a miss, there are provided the following variation patterns: super shortened non-reach miss with a special chart variation time of 1500 ms, shortened non-reach A miss with a special chart variation time of 3000 ms, shortened non-reach B miss with a special chart variation time of 5000 ms, non-reach A miss with a special chart variation time of 7000 ms, non-reach B miss with a special chart variation time of 12000 ms, super reach A miss with a special chart variation time of 45000 ms, super reach B miss with a special chart variation time of 80000 ms, super reach C miss with a special chart variation time of 4000 ms, super reach D miss with a special chart variation time of 25000 ms, and super reach E miss with a special chart variation time of 50000 ms. Furthermore, the variation pattern from Super Reach A Miss to Super Reach E Miss is also the variation pattern that executes the reach performance of the Super Reach during variable display.

In addition, the variation patterns when the variable display result is a jackpot are: a Super Reach non-via A jackpot with a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 7,000 ms in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is not executed (the special chart variation time is 7,000 ms + 15,000 ms); a Super Reach non-via B jackpot with a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 12,000 ms in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is not executed (the special chart variation time is 12,000 ms + 15,000 ms); a Super Reach A jackpot with a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 45,000 ms in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is executed (the special chart variation time is 45,000 ms + 15,000 ms); a Super Reach B jackpot with a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 80,000 ms in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is executed (the special chart variation time is 15,000 ms + 15,000 ms); The following variation patterns are provided: a Super Reach B jackpot having a jackpot notification period of 0 ms (special chart fluctuation time is 80,000 ms+15,000 ms), a Super Reach C jackpot having a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms (special chart fluctuation time is 40,000 ms+15,000 ms) after a variable display of 40,000 ms during which the Super Reach reach performance is executed, a Super Reach D jackpot having a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 25,000 ms during which the Super Reach reach performance is executed (special chart fluctuation time is 25,000 ms+15,000 ms), and a Super Reach E jackpot having a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 50,000 ms during which the Super Reach reach performance is executed (special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms+15,000 ms). The Super Reach A variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a bowling effect as a reach effect, in which an ally character and an enemy character bowl together to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won; the Super Reach B, Super Reach C, and Super Reach E variation patterns are a variation pattern that executes a battle effect as a reach effect, in which an ally character and an enemy character battle together to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won; and the Super Reach D variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a short battle effect as a reach effect, in which an ally character and an enemy character battle together for a shorter period of time than the battle effect in the Super Reach B, Super Reach C, and Super Reach E variation patterns to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 099SG is provided with a game control data holding area 099SG150 as shown in FIG. 12-4, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 099SG150 shown in FIG. 12-4 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 099SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 099SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 099SG151C, a game control flag setting section 099SG152, a game control timer setting section 099SG153, a game control counter setting section 099SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 099SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 099SG151A stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 099SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is always 4, regardless of the game status. The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and becomes reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 099SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 099SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is always 4, regardless of the game status. The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

In other words, this feature unit 099SG can store up to four reserved memories as first special chart reserved memories (reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A), and can store up to four reserved memories as second special chart reserved memories (reserved memories that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B).

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

When variable display is executed, the CPU 103 first reads out the random numbers MR1 to MR3 from the second special symbol reservation memory 099SG151B if there is a second special symbol reservation memory in the normal special symbol processing (see FIG. 6), and then shifts the contents of the second special symbol reservation memory 099SG151B. In other words, if the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored as reservation memory for reservation number 1 in the second special symbol reservation memory 099SG151B, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored as the reservation memory for reservation number 1, erases the reservation memory for reservation number 1, and re-stores the reservation memory stored as reservation memory for reservation number 2 as reservation memory for reservation number 1, the reservation memory stored as reservation memory for reservation number 3 as reservation memory for reservation number 2, and the reservation memory stored as reservation memory for reservation number 4 as reservation memory for reservation number 3.

In addition, if no reserved memory is stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special chart reserved memory exists. If the first special chart reserved memory exists, the CPU 103 reads out the random number values MR1 to MR3 from the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and then shifts the memory contents of the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A. In other words, when the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored as the reserved memory of reserved number 1 in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A, the CPU 103 reads out the values of the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored as the reserved memory of reserved number 1, erases the reserved memory of reserved number 1, and re-stores the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 2 as reserved memory of reserved number 1, the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 3 as reserved memory of reserved number 2, and the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 4 as reserved memory of reserved number 3.

Then, the CPU 103 judges the variable display result based on the random number value MR1 read from the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A or the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B (if the variable display result is a jackpot, it also judges the type of jackpot based on the random number value MR2), and then in the variable pattern judgment process (see Figure 6), it determines the variable pattern using a variable pattern judgment table that differs depending on the game state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols that perform the variable display.

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, the CPU 103 can determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process according to the number of reserved memories subtracted by 1 from the number of reserved memories immediately before the variable display.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 099SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 099SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 099SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 099SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of multiple types of flags, including the ball output state flag described above.

The game control timer setting unit 099SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 099SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 099SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 099SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

Next, we will explain the variation pattern determination table used when executing the variable display of the special symbol. As shown in Figures 12-5 to 12-11, this feature part 099SG can determine the variation pattern using different variation pattern determination tables depending on the game state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display of the special symbol.

Specifically, when the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0 to 2, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach B miss, super reach A miss, and super reach B miss using the miss variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 12-5 (A). Note that in the miss variation pattern determination table A, of the values that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take, 97 values are assigned to the non-reach B miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach A miss variation pattern, and 1 value is assigned to the super reach B miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0 to 2, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach B miss fluctuation pattern 97% of the time, a super reach A miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach B miss fluctuation pattern 1% of the time.

Also, when the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach B miss, super reach A miss, and super reach B miss using the miss variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 12-5 (B). Note that in the miss variation pattern determination table B, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 97 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach B miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach A miss variation pattern, and 1 value is assigned to the super reach B miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach B miss fluctuation pattern 97% of the time, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach A miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach B miss fluctuation pattern 1% of the time.

In addition, when the game state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories of the special symbols that execute the variable display (this also applies when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach Non-B Jackpot, the Super Reach A Jackpot, and the Super Reach B Jackpot using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 10 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach Non-B Jackpot, 40 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach A Jackpot, and 50 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach B Jackpot. In other words, when the game state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach non-through B jackpot fluctuation pattern 10% of the time, the Super Reach A jackpot fluctuation pattern 40% of the time, and the Super Reach B jackpot fluctuation pattern 50% of the time.

In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach A miss, Super reach C miss, and Super reach D miss using the miss variation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 12-6 (A). Note that in the miss variation pattern determination table C, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 95 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the Super reach C miss variation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the Super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability change state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory count for the special symbol that executes the variable display is 0, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 95% of the time, a super reach C miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach D miss fluctuation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (B), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, super reach C miss, and super reach D miss using the miss variation pattern determination table D. Note that in the miss variation pattern determination table D, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 80 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, 15 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach C miss variation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is one, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 80% of the time, a non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 15% of the time, a super reach C miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach D miss fluctuation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is two, as shown in Figure 12-6 (C), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, super reach C miss, and super reach D miss using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table E. Note that in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table E, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 90 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, 5 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach C miss fluctuation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the super reach D miss fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is two, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 90% of the time, a non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 5% of the time, a super reach C miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach D miss fluctuation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, as shown in Figure 12-6 (D), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of shortened non-reach A, Super reach C miss, and Super reach D miss using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table F. Note that in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table F, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 95 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the Super reach C miss fluctuation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the Super reach D miss fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability change state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 95% of the time, a super reach C miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach D miss fluctuation pattern 3% of the time.

As described above, for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss in the high probability state, the determination ratio of each variable pattern differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display. In other words, in the high probability state in this feature unit 099SG, the average variable display period for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that is executed (in the case of a variable display of the first special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A, and in the case of a variable display of the second special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B).

Furthermore, when the game state is a probability variable state and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of a Super Reach Non-A jackpot, a Super Reach C jackpot, and a Super Reach D jackpot using jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, as shown in Figure 12-7. In addition, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, of the possible values of random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 5 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of a Super Reach Non-A jackpot, 80 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of a Super Reach C jackpot, and 15 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of a Super Reach D jackpot. In other words, when the game state is in a probability variable state and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, there is a 5% chance that the variation pattern will be a Super Reach non-via A jackpot, an 80% chance that the variation pattern will be a Super Reach C jackpot, and a 15% chance that the variation pattern will be a Super Reach D jackpot.

Also, when the game state is the time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (A), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach A miss and super reach E miss using the variation pattern determination table G for miss. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table G for miss, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 95 values are assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach A miss, and 5 values are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach E miss. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined to be the non-reach A miss variation pattern 95% of the time, and the variation pattern is determined to be the super reach E miss variation pattern 5% of the time.

Also, when the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, as shown in Figure 12-8 (B), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, and super reach E miss using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table H. Note that in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table H, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 85 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, 10 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the super reach E miss fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 1, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 85% of the time, the non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 10% of the time, and the super reach E miss fluctuation pattern 5% of the time.

Also, when the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is two, as shown in Figure 12-8 (C), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, and super reach E miss using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table I. Note that in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table I, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 90 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, 5 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the super reach E miss fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is two, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 90% of the time, the non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 5% of the time, and the super reach E miss fluctuation pattern 5% of the time.

Also, when the game state is the time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is three, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (D), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the shortened non-reach A miss and the super reach D miss using the miss variation pattern determination table J. Note that, in the miss variation pattern determination table J, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 95 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is three, the variation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern 95% of the time, and is determined to be the super reach D miss variation pattern 5% of the time.

As described above, for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss in time-saving state A, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display. In other words, in time-saving state A in this feature part 099SG, the average variable display period for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that is executed (in the case of a variable display of the first special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the first special symbol reserved memory part 099SG151A, and in the case of a variable display of the second special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the second special symbol reserved memory part 099SG151B).

In addition, when the game state is time-saving state A and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach Non-A jackpot and the Super Reach E jackpot using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C as shown in FIG. 12-9, regardless of the number of reserved memories. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 5 values are assigned to the Super Reach Non-A jackpot fluctuation pattern, and 95 values are assigned to the Super Reach E jackpot fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the game state is time-saving state A and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach Non-A jackpot fluctuation pattern 5% of the time, and the Super Reach E jackpot fluctuation pattern 95% of the time.

Also, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 0, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (A), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the non-reach B miss and the super reach D miss using the variation pattern determination table K for misses. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table I for misses, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 97 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the non-reach B miss, and 3 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach D miss. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined to be the non-reach B miss variation pattern 97% of the time, and the variation pattern is determined to be the super reach D miss variation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the super-shortened non-reach miss and the Super Reach D miss using the miss variation pattern determination table L, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (B). In addition, in the miss variation pattern determination table L, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 97 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the super-shortened non-reach miss, and 3 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the Super Reach D miss. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one, the variation pattern is determined to be the super-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern 97% of the time, and the variation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach D miss variation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is two, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (C), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the super shortened non-reach miss and the Super Reach D miss using the variation pattern determination table M for misses. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table M for misses, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 99 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the super shortened non-reach miss, and one value is assigned to the variation pattern of the Super Reach D miss. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is two, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern of the super shortened non-reach miss 99% of the time, and the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern of the Super Reach D miss 1% of the time.

In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (D), the variation pattern is determined only from the super-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern using the miss variation pattern determination table N. In addition, in the miss variation pattern determination table N, 100 values out of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the super-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the variation pattern is determined to be the super-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern 100% of the time.

As described above, for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss in time-saving state B, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display. In other words, in time-saving state B in this feature part 099SG, the average variable display period for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that is executed (in the case of a variable display of the first special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the first special symbol reserved memory part 099SG151A, and in the case of a variable display of the second special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the second special symbol reserved memory part 099SG151B).

In addition, when the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be only the Super Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table D as shown in FIG. 12-11, regardless of the number of reserved memories. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table D, 100 values out of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to the Super Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern 100% of the time, regardless of the number of reserved memories.

Here, the period values in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG will be explained based on Figures 12-13 to 12-23.

First, as shown in Figures 12-13 (A) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is time-saving state A is taken as period value α, said period value α is calculated by the value of A x a + B x b + C x c + D x d. Here, A is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state A, a is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state A to the 110 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state A, and b is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state A to the 110 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state A. , C is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A, c is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A, D is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A, and d is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A. Note that the change display period when the change display result in this feature part 099SG becomes a miss refers to the period from the start timing of the special pattern change display to the end timing of the change display.

As shown in Figures 12-13(B) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is time-saving state B is taken as period value β, said period value β is calculated by the value of E x e + F x f + G x g + H x h. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B, e is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B to the 110 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state B, f is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state B to the 110 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state B, G is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B, g is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, H is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B, and h is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B.

As shown in Figures 12-13(C) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is the high probability state is taken as the period value γ, the period value γ is calculated by the value I×i+J×j+K×k+L×l. Here, I is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the high probability state, i is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the high probability state to the 110 fluctuation displays in the high probability state, J is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the high probability state to the miss, j is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the high probability state to the 110 fluctuation displays in the high probability state, K is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the special chance state, k is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the special chance state out of 110 change displays in the special chance state, H is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the special chance state, and l is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the special chance state out of 110 change displays in the special chance state.

As described above, from Fig. 12-13(A) to Fig. 12-13(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra A to L and a to l to calculate the period value α in the time-saving state A, the period value β in the time-saving state B, and the period value γ in the special state, the period value α will be greater than the period value β, and the period value γ will be greater than the period value β (α>β, γ>β).

Furthermore, attention is paid to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state each reach 1,100 times by controlling the game to be in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state multiple times. As shown in Figures 12-14(A) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of 1,100 fluctuations when the game state is in time-saving state A is taken as period value α', the period value α' is calculated by the value of A x a' + B x b' + C x c' + D x d'. Here, A is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A, a' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, B is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A, b' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, C is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A, c' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, D is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A, and d' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A.

As shown in Figures 12-14(B) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is time-saving state B is taken as period value β', said period value β' is calculated by the value of E x e' + F x f' + G x g' + H x h'. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B, e' is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B to the 1100 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state B, f' is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state B to the 1100 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state B, G is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B, g' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, H is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B, and h' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B.

As shown in Figures 12-14(C) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is the high probability state is taken as the period value γ', the period value γ' is calculated by the value I x i' + J x j' + K x k' + L x l'. Here, I is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the high probability state, i' is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the high probability state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the high probability state, J is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the high probability state to the miss, j' is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the high probability state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the high probability state, K is the average time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the variable state, k' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the variable state to the 1100 variable displays in the variable state, H is the average time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the variable state, and l' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the variable state to the 1100 variable displays in the variable state.

As described above, from Fig. 12-14(A) to Fig. 12-14(C) and Fig. 12-23, if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra A to L and a' to l' to calculate the period value α' in the time-saving state A, the period value β' in the time-saving state B, and the period value γ' in the special state, the period value α' is greater than the period value β', and the period value γ' is greater than the period value β (α'>β', γ'>β').

Next, let us look at the case where 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability bonus state. First, as shown in Figures 12-15(A) and 12-23, if the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., to execute 110 fluctuations in the time-saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of reserved second special symbols being three, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value δ, which is calculated as D x 110. Here, D is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state A, as described above.

As shown in Figures 12-15(B) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in time-saving state A with three second special reserved memories by the player continually shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R, the period value ε is calculated as H x 110. Here, H is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in time-saving state B, as described above.

As shown in Figures 12-15(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the probability variable state with three second special reserved memories, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ζ, which is calculated as L x 110. Here, L is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the probability variable state, as described above.

As described above, from Figures 12-15(A) to 12-15(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra D, H, and L to calculate the period value δ in time-saving state A, the period value ε in time-saving state B, and the period value ζ in the special state, the period value δ is greater than the period value ε, and the period value ζ is greater than the period value ε (δ>ε, ζ>ε).

In addition, we will focus on the average change time when the number of change displays in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state reach 1100 times by controlling the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state multiple times. First, as shown in Figures 12-16 (A) and 12-23, if the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and executes 1100 changes in the time-saving state A with each change and the number of second special symbol reserved memories being 3, the average change time is taken as the period value δ', and the period value δ' is calculated as D x 1100. Here, D is the average change time at which the change display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A, as described above.

As shown in Figures 12-16(B) and 12-23, if the player constantly and continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 1100 fluctuations are performed in time-saving state B with three second special reserved memories, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ε', and the period value ε' is calculated as H x 1100. Here, H is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in time-saving state B, as described above.

As shown in Figures 12-16(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in the special chance state with three second special reserved memories, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ζ', which is calculated as L x 1100. Here, L is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the special chance state, as described above.

As described above, from Figures 12-16(A) to 12-16(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra D, H, and L to calculate the period value δ' in time-saving state A, the period value ε' in time-saving state B, and the period value ζ' in the special state, the period value δ' will be greater than the period value ε, and the period value ζ' will be greater than the period value ε' (δ'>ε', ζ'>ε').

As shown in Figures 12-17(A) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in time-saving state A with two second special reserved memory items, the period value η is the average fluctuation time. The period value η is calculated by the value of C x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-17(B) and 12-23, when the player constantly and continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, etc., 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with each fluctuation and the number of second special pattern reserved memories being 2. If the average fluctuation time of the 110 fluctuation displays when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is always 2 when the fluctuation display is executed is the period value θ, the period value θ is calculated by the value of G x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-17(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the probability fluctuation state with two second special reserved memory items, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ι, which is calculated as K x 110.

As described above, from Figures 12-17(A) to 12-17(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra C, G, and K to calculate the period value η in time-saving state A, the period value θ in time-saving state B, and the period value ι in the special state, the period value η is greater than the period value θ, and the period value ι is greater than the period value θ (η>θ, ι>θ).

Furthermore, we will focus on the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state reach 1100 times each by controlling the game multiple times in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state. First, as shown in Figures 12-18 (A) and 12-23, if the player constantly and continuously shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and executes 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 2, the period value η' is taken as the average fluctuation time, and the period value η' is calculated by the value of C x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-18(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state B with each fluctuation and the number of second special chart reserved memories being 2, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value θ', and the period value θ' is calculated as the value of G x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-18(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 1,100 fluctuations in the special probability state with two second special reserved memories, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ι', which is calculated as K x 1,100.

As described above, from Figures 12-18(A) to 12-18(C), when the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra C, G, and K to calculate the period value η' in the time-saving state A, the period value θ' in the time-saving state B, and the period value ι' in the special state, the period value η' is greater than the period value θ, and the period value ι' is greater than the period value θ' (η'>θ', ι'>θ').

As shown in Figures 12-19(A) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in time-saving state A with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value κ, and the period value κ is calculated as B x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-19(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in time-saving state B with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value λ, and the period value λ is calculated as F x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-19(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the probability fluctuation state with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value μ, and the period value μ is calculated as J x 110.

As described above, from Figures 12-19 (A) to 12-19 (C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra B, F, and J to calculate the period value κ in time-saving state A, the period value λ in time-saving state B, and the period value μ in the special state, the period value κ will be greater than the period value λ, and the period value μ will be greater than the period value λ (κ>λ, μ>λ).

Furthermore, we will focus on the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state reach 1100 times each by controlling the game multiple times in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state. First, as shown in Figures 12-20(A) and 12-23, if the player constantly and continuously shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and executes 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state A with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value κ', which is calculated by the value of B x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-20(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state B with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value λ', and the period value λ' is calculated as F x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-20(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in the special probability state with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value μ', and the period value μ' is calculated as J x 1100.

As described above, from Figures 12-20(A) to 12-20(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra B, F, and J to calculate the period value κ' in the time-saving state A, the period value λ' in the time-saving state B, and the period value μ' in the special state, the period value κ' is greater than the period value λ, and the period value μ' is greater than the period value λ' (κ'>λ', μ'>λ').

As shown in Figures 12-21(A) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the time-saving state A with 0 second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ν, and the period value ν is calculated as A x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-21(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the time-saving state B with 0 second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ξ. The period value ξ is calculated as E x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-21(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the probability fluctuation state, with the number of reserved second special patterns being 0, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value π, which is calculated as I x 110.

As described above, from Figures 12-21(A) to 12-21(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra A, E, and I to calculate the period value ν in the time-saving state A, the period value ξ in the time-saving state B, and the period value π in the special state, the period value ν is greater than the period value ξ, and the period value π is greater than the period value ξ (ν>ξ, π>ξ).

Furthermore, we will focus on the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state reach 1100 times each by controlling the game multiple times in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state. First, as shown in Figures 12-22 (A) and 12-23, if the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and executes 1100 fluctuations in the time-saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of reserved second special charts is 0, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value v', which is calculated by the value of A x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-22(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state B with 0 second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ξ', and the period value ξ' is calculated as E x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-22(C) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the high probability state by the player constantly and continuously shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the number of second special reserved patterns is 0, the period value π' is calculated as I x 1100.

As described above, from Fig. 12-22(A) to Fig. 12-22(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra A, E, and I to calculate the period value v' in the time-saving state A, the period value ξ' in the time-saving state B, and the period value π' in the special state, the period value v' will be greater than the period value ξ, and the period value π' will be greater than the period value ξ' (v'>ξ', π'>ξ').

Next, Figures 12-24(A) and 12-24(B) show the actual shooting values (number of fired game balls, number of times that the special chart 1 start hole is entered, number of times that the special chart 2 start hole is entered, number of times that the special chart 1 change display is displayed, number of times that the special chart 2 change display is displayed, total special chart 1 change time, total special chart 2 change time) in the normal state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state when a test firing test of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG was conducted for 10 hours, and the design values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 obtained from these actual shooting values. Note that, as shown in Figure 12-24(A), the reason the total test firing test time in the normal state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state is less than 10 hours is because the remaining time is in a jackpot gaming state. In addition, the actual shot value in the normal state is based on the condition that the game ball is continuously shot into the left game area 2L by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30, and the actual shot value in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state is based on the condition that the game ball is continuously shot into the right game area 2R by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30.

As shown in Figure 12-24 (A), in the normal state, the test firing time is 346.08 minutes, the number of balls fired is 34,580, the number of times that the special chart 1 start port wins is 1,939, the number of times that the special chart 2 start port wins is 0, the number of times that the special chart 1 change display is 1,883, the number of times that the special chart 2 change display is 0, the total special chart 1 change time is 23,840 seconds, and the total special chart 2 change time is 0 seconds. Also, in the time-saving state A, the test firing time is 77.00 minutes, the number of balls fired is 7,676, the number of times that the special chart 1 start port wins is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 start port wins is 4,371, the number of times that the special chart 1 change display is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 change display is 658, the total special chart 1 change time is 0 seconds, and the total special chart 2 change time is 3,548 seconds. In the time-saving state B, the test shot time is 14.96 minutes, the number of balls fired is 1494, the number of times that the special chart 1 start hole is won is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 start hole is won is 821, the number of times that the special chart 1 change display is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 change display is 594, the total special chart 1 change time is 0 seconds, and the total special chart 2 change time is 954 seconds. In the probability change state, the test shot time is 116.00 minutes, the number of balls fired is 11515, the number of times that the special chart 1 start hole is won is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 start hole is won is 6556, the number of times that the special chart 1 change display is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 change display is 987, the total special chart 1 change time is 0 seconds, and the total special chart 2 change time is 4387 seconds.

From the above actual shooting values, the design values for the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG are calculated as follows, as shown in Fig. 12-24 (B): the number of game balls fired per minute in the normal state is 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 1 is 5.6 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 2 is 0 balls/minute, the average special chart 1 fluctuation time is 12.661 seconds, and the average special chart 2 fluctuation time is 0 seconds. Also, the number of game balls fired per minute in time-saving state A is calculated as 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 1 is 0 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 2 is 56.7 balls/minute, the average special chart 1 fluctuation time is 0 seconds, and the average special chart 2 fluctuation time is 5.393 seconds. In addition, the number of balls fired per minute in time-saving state B is calculated to be 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 1 is 0 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 2 is 54.8 balls/minute, the average special chart 1 fluctuation time is 0 seconds, and the average special chart 2 fluctuation time is 1.607 seconds. In addition, the number of balls fired per minute in the probability change state is calculated to be 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 1 is 0 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 2 is 56.7 balls/minute, the average special chart 1 fluctuation time is 0 seconds, and the average special chart 2 fluctuation time is 4.445 seconds.

When comparing the winning rates of Special Chart 2 in Time-Saving State A, Time-Saving State B, and the Special Chance State, only the winning rate of Special Chart 2 in Time-Saving State B is different in value, but this is due to an error caused by the number of game balls released in Time-Saving State B being less than the other two states.

Here, the average fluctuation time in the normal state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special state is actually calculated based on the numerical values obtained from the design values shown in Figure 12-24.

First, as shown in Figure 12-25 (A), in the normal state, the average change time at which the change display result becomes a miss when the first special chart reserved memory number is 0, the average change time at which the change display result becomes a miss when the first special chart reserved memory number is 1, and the average change time at which the change display result becomes a miss when the first special chart reserved memory number is 2 are calculated as 12,000 (ms) x 97/100 + 45,000 (ms) x 2/100 + 80,000 (ms) x 1/100 = 13,340 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the first special chart reserved memory number is 0 to 2 and the determination ratios of these change patterns (see Figure 12-5 (A)). In addition, the average change time at which the change display result is a miss when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 3 is calculated as 5000 (ms) x 97/100 + 45000 (ms) x 2/100 + 80000 (ms) x 1/100 = 6550 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 3 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see Figure 12-5 (B)).

In addition, based on the normal state shown in Figure 12-24 (A), when calculating the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 0 to 3, as shown in Figure 12-25 (B), the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 0 is 10%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 1 is 40%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 2 is 40%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 3 is 10%.

As a result, as shown in Figure 12-25 (C), the average fluctuation time in the normal state is calculated as 13,340 (ms) x 10/100 + 13,340 (ms) x 40/100 + 13,340 (ms) x 40/100 + 6,550 (ms) x 10/100 = 12,661 (ms).

As shown in FIG. 12-26(A), in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time A at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0 is calculated as 7000 (ms) x 95/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 9150 (ms) from the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 12-8(A)), and the average fluctuation time B at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 1 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 85/100 + 7000 (ms) x 10/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = The average change time C at which the change display result is a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 2 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 90/100 + 7000 (ms) x 5/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 5550 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 2 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-8 (C)). The average change time D at which the change display result is a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 3 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 95/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 5350 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 3 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-6 (D)).

In addition, based on the time-saving state A shown in Figure 12-24 (A), when calculating the percentage of variable displays executed in each of the cases where the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 to 3 in the 110th and 1100th variable displays in the time-saving state A, as shown in Figure 12-26 (B), the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 (a and a') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 (b and b') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 2 (c and c') is 2.7272727%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 3 (d and d') is 95.4545455%.

As a result, as shown in Figure 12-26 (C), the average fluctuation time (α and α') for one fluctuation in time-saving state A is calculated as 9150 (ms) x 0.9090909 + 5750 (ms) x 0.9090909/100 + 5550 (ms) x 2.7272727/100 + 5350 (ms) x 95.4545455/100 = 5393.636 (ms).

As shown in FIG. 12-27(A), in the time-saving state B, the average change time E at which the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0 is calculated as 5000 (ms) x 97/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 = 5600 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-10(A)), and the average change time F at which the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 1 is calculated as 1500 (ms) x 97/100 + 25000 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 1 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-10(B)). x 3/100 = 2205 (ms), and the average change time G at which the change display result becomes a miss when the second special pattern reserved memory number is 2 is calculated from the change patterns that can be selected when the second special pattern reserved memory number is 2 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-10 (C)) as 1500 (ms) x 99/100 + 25000 (ms) x 1/100 = 1735 (ms), and the average change time H at which the change display result becomes a miss when the second special pattern reserved memory number is 3 is calculated from the change patterns that can be selected when the second special pattern reserved memory number is 3 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-10 (D)) as 1500 (ms) x 100/100 = 1500 (ms).

In addition, based on the time-saving state B shown in Figure 12-24 (A), when calculating the percentage of variable displays executed in each of the cases where the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 to 3 in the 110th and 1100th variable displays in the time-saving state B, as shown in Figure 12-27 (B), the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 (e and e') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 (f and f') is 1.8181818%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 2 (g and g') is 24.5454545%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 3 (h and h') is 72.7272727%.

As a result, as shown in Figure 12-27 (C), the average fluctuation time (β and β') of one fluctuation in time-saving state B is calculated as 5600 (ms) x 0.9090909 + 2205 (ms) x 1.8181818/100 + 1735 (ms) x 24.5454545/100 + 1500 (ms) x 72.7272727/100 = 1607.773 (ms).

Also, as shown in Figure 12-28 (A), in the probability variable state, the average variable time I at which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special patterns is 0 is calculated from the variable patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special patterns is 0 and the determination ratio of these variable patterns (see Figure 12-6 (A)). The average change time J at which the change display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special patterns is 1 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 80/100 + 7000 (ms) x 15/100 + 40000 x 2/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 = 50 from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special patterns is 1 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-6 (B)). The average change time K at which the change display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 90/100 + 7000 (ms) x 5/100 + 40000 (ms) x 2/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see Figure 12-6 (C)). = 4600 (ms), and the average fluctuation time L at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 3 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 95/100 + 40000 x 2/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 = 4400 (ms) from the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 3 and the determination ratios of these fluctuation patterns (see Figure 12-6 (D)).

In addition, based on the probability of a special chance state shown in Figure 12-24 (A), when calculating the percentage of variable displays executed in each of the cases where the number of second special reserved memories is 0 to 3 in the 110th and 1100th variable displays in the probability of a special chance state, as shown in Figure 12-28 (B), the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 (i and i') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 (j and j') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 (k and k') is 2.7272727%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 (l and l') is 95.4545455%.

As a result, as shown in Figure 12-28 (C), the average fluctuation time (γ and γ') of one fluctuation in the high probability state is calculated as 8200 (ms) x 0.9090909 + 5000 (ms) x 0.9090909/100 + 4600 (ms) x 2.7272727/100 + 4400 (ms) x 95.4545455/100 = 4445.455 (ms).

In view of the above, when comparing the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-29, the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state B (β and β') is shorter than the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state A (α and α') (α>β and α'>β'), and the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state B (β and β') is set shorter than the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the special probability state (γ and γ') (γ>β and γ'>β').

Next, the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state A, the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state B, the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the high probability state, the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state A, the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state B, and the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the high probability state are calculated.

12-30(A) and 12-35, if the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in time-saving state A is taken as period value χ, then the period value χ is calculated as α (or α') x 110 = 5393.633 (ms) x 110 = 593299.63 (ms). If the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in time-saving state B is taken as period value ψ, then the period value ψ is calculated as β (or β') x 110 = 1607.773 (ms) x 110 = 176855.03 (ms). In addition, if the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the high probability state is taken as the period value ω, the period value ω is calculated as γ (or γ') x 110 = 4445.455 (ms) x 110 = 489000.05 (ms).

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time-saving state B by 110 is set to be smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time-saving state A by 110, and the period value ψ is set to be smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the high probability state by 110 (χ>ψ and ω>ψ).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-31(A) and 12-36, if the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in time-saving state A is taken as period value χ', the period value χ' is calculated as α (or α') x 1100 = 5393.633 (ms) x 1100 = 5932996.3 (ms). Also, if the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in time-saving state B is taken as period value ψ', the period value ψ' is calculated as β (or β') x 1100 = 1607.773 (ms) x 1100 = 1768550.3 (ms). In addition, if the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the high probability state is taken as the period value ω', the period value ω' is calculated as γ (or γ') x 1100 = 4445.455 (ms) x 1100 = 4890000.5 (ms).

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time-saving state B by 1100 is set to be smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time-saving state A by 110, and the period value ψ' is set to be smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the high probability state by 110 (χ'>ψ' and ω'>ψ').

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with 3 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (A), the period value δ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 3 second special reserved memories, is calculated as D×110=5350 (ms)×110=588500 (ms). In addition, the period value ε, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 3 second special reserved memories, is calculated as H×110=1500 (ms)×110=165000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 3, is calculated as L x 110 = 4400 (ms) x 110 = 484000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-15, the period value δ is greater than the period value ε, and the period value ζ is greater than the period value ε (δ > ε, ζ > ε).

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability of a change state with 3 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (B), the period value δ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 3 second special reserved memories, is calculated as D x 1100 = 5350 (ms) x 1100 = 5885000 (ms). In addition, the period value ε', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 3 second special reserved memories, is calculated as H x 1100 = 1500 (ms) x 1100 = 1650000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 3, is calculated as L x 1100 = 4400 (ms) x 1100 = 4,840,000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-16, the period value δ' is a value larger than the period value ε', and the period value ζ' is a value larger than the period value ε' (δ' > ε', ζ' > ε').

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with 2 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (A), the period value η, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 2 second special reserved memories, is calculated as C×110=5550 (ms)×110=610500 (ms). In addition, the period value θ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 2 second special reserved memories, is calculated as G×110=1735 (ms)×110=190850 (ms). Then, the period value ι, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 2, is calculated as K x 110 = 4600 (ms) x 110 = 506000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value η is greater than the period value θ, and the period value ι is greater than the period value θ (η>θ, ι>θ).

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with 2 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (B), the period value η', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 2 second special reserved memories, is calculated as C x 1100 = 5550 (ms) x 1100 = 6105000 (ms). In addition, the period value θ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 2 second special reserved memories, is calculated as G x 1100 = 1735 (ms) x 1100 = 1908500 (ms). Then, the period value ι', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 2, is calculated as K x 1100 = 4600 (ms) x 1100 = 5,060,000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-18, the period value η' is a value greater than the period value θ', and the period value ι' is a value greater than the period value θ' (η' > θ', ι' > θ').

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with one second special reserved memory is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (A), the period value κ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with one fluctuation and one second special reserved memory, is calculated as B x 110 = 5750 (ms) x 110 = 632500 (ms). In addition, the period value λ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with one fluctuation and one second special reserved memory, is calculated as F x 110 = 2205 (ms) x 110 = 242550 (ms). Then, the period value μ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with one second special reserved memory, is calculated as J x 110 = 5000 (ms) x 110 = 550000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SF, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value κ is greater than the period value λ, and the period value μ is greater than the period value λ (κ>λ, μ>λ).

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with one second special reserved memory is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (B), the period value κ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with one fluctuation and one second special reserved memory, is calculated as B x 1100 = 5750 (ms) x 1100 = 6325000 (ms). In addition, the period value λ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with one fluctuation and one second special reserved memory, is calculated as F x 1100 = 2205 (ms) x 1100 = 2425500 (ms). Then, the period value μ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with one second special reserved memory, is calculated as J x 1100 = 5000 (ms) x 1100 = 5500000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SF, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value κ' is a value larger than the period value λ', and the period value μ' is a value larger than the period value λ' (κ' > λ', μ' > λ').

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with 0 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (A), the period value ν, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 0 second special reserved memories, is calculated as B×110=9150 (ms)×110=1006500 (ms). In addition, the period value ξ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 0 second special reserved memories, is calculated as E×110=5600 (ms)×110=616000 (ms). Then, the period value π, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 0, is calculated as I x 110 = 8200 (ms) x 110 = 902000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SE, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ν is greater than the period value ξ, and the period value π is greater than the period value ξ (ν>ξ, π>ξ).

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability of a special bonus state with 0 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (B), the period value ν', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 0 second special reserved memories, is calculated as B x 1100 = 9150 (ms) x 1100 = 10,065,000 (ms). In addition, the period value ξ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 0 second special reserved memories, is calculated as E x 1100 = 5,600 (ms) x 1100 = 6,160,000 (ms). Then, the period value π', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 0, is calculated as I x 1100 = 8200 (ms) x 1100 = 9020000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SE, as shown in Figure 12-22, the period value v' is a value greater than the period value ξ', and the period value π' is a value greater than the period value ξ' (v' > ξ', π' > ξ').

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, when comparing the time required for 110 fluctuations to be displayed in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state, as shown in FIG. 12-30(A), the time required for the 110 fluctuations to be displayed is set to be the shortest in time-saving state B (χ>ψ, ω>ψ). Also, when comparing the time required for 1100 fluctuations to be displayed in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state, as shown in FIG. 12-30(B), the time required for the 1100 fluctuations to be displayed is also set to be the shortest in time-saving state B (χ'>ψ', ω'>ψ').

When comparing the time required to display 110 changes in the case where 110 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and the probability change state, and the number of second special reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 12-34 (A), the time required to display the 110 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (ν>ξ, π>ξ). When comparing the time required to display 1100 changes in the case where 1100 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and the probability change state, and the number of second special reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 12-34 (B), the time required to display the 1100 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (ν'>ξ', π'>ξ').

When comparing the time required to display 110 changes in the case where 110 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability change state, and the number of second special chart reserved memories is one, as shown in Figure 12-33 (A), the time required to display the 110 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (κ>λ, μ>λ). When comparing the time required to display 1100 changes in the case where 1100 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability change state, and the number of second special chart reserved memories is one, as shown in Figure 12-33 (B), the time required to display the 1100 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (κ'>λ', μ'>λ').

When comparing the time required to display 110 changes in the case where 110 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability of a special bonus state, and the number of second special reserved memories is two, as shown in Figure 12-32 (A), the time required to display the 110 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (η>θ, ι>θ). When comparing the time required to display 1100 changes in the case where 1100 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability of a special bonus state, and the number of second special reserved memories is two, as shown in Figure 12-32 (B), the time required to display the 1100 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (η'>θ', ι'>θ').

When comparing the time required to display 110 changes in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variable state when 110 changes are performed every time and the number of second special reserved memories is three, as shown in Figure 12-31 (A), the time required to display the 110 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (δ>ε, ζ>ε). When comparing the time required to display 1100 changes in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variable state when 1100 changes are performed every time and the number of second special reserved memories is three, as shown in Figure 12-31 (B), the time required to display the 1100 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (δ'>ε', ζ'>ε').

In other words, in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B and special probability state in this feature part 099SG, when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 and 110 or 1100 changes are made, when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 and 110 or 1100 changes are made, when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 2 and 110 or 1100 changes are made, and when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 3 and 110 or 1100 changes are made, the time-saving state B is set to have the highest special symbol change efficiency (the average change display time required per change is shortest). In addition, even when the player plays in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or special chance state without worrying about the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (when the display changes 110 or 1,100 times at each reserved memory number at the ratios shown in Figure 12-26 (B), Figure 12-27 (B), and Figure 12-28 (B)), time-saving state B is set to have the highest special symbol change efficiency (the average display time required for one change is the shortest).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 099SG, in addition to the time-saving state (time-saving state A) and the probability variable state of conventional pachinko gaming machines, it is possible to control the time-saving state B, which has a higher fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern than the time-saving state A and the probability variable state, making it possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

For example, in a conventional pachinko game machine, even if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times when the jackpot probability is about 1/300, which is about three times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled to a jackpot in a low probability state (e.g., normal state (low probability/low base state)) after the jackpot is reached, the machine is not controlled to time-saving state B like the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature part 099SG. Since the player is already stuck at about three times the jackpot probability denominator at this point, the player continues playing without a jackpot for a long time and is making a lot of investment. However, this normal state (low probability/low base state) continues until a jackpot occurs, and further investment is required, which could significantly reduce the player's motivation to play.

On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG that can be controlled to the time-saving state B, after the end of the jackpot, if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., about 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled to a jackpot in the low probability state (e.g., normal state (low probability/low base state)), the machine is controlled to the time-saving state B, and the variable display is controlled to the time-saving state B for a specific number of times (e.g., 1100 times, or up to about 3.8 times the jackpot probability denominator). At this point, the player is already stuck at about three times the jackpot probability, so the player has been playing for a long time without a jackpot, and has invested a lot. However, by being controlled to the time-saving state B, additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of a jackpot occurring increases, so the decrease in motivation to play can be suppressed.

In particular, in feature 099SG, the player has already invested a great deal of time and money by the time the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, so time-saving state B functions as a game state that rescues the player, so to speak, by executing the variable display of a miss in as short a time as possible to shorten the period until the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in feature part 099SG, regardless of whether the number of reserved memories is fixed and consumed in any state between 0 and 3, in the case of time-saving state B, the fluctuation efficiency is the highest compared to time-saving state A or the special probability state, and in addition, the execution rate of the various effects (for example, pre-reading preview effects such as countdown preview, reserved change preview, pattern chance preview, effect display preview, and preview effects such as moving object preview, character preview, reach preview, and button preview) described in Figure 11-36 of feature part 069SG (and a drawing showing the feature points related to said Figure 11-36) is lower than the execution rate of the various effects in time-saving state A or the special probability state (the execution rate of the various effects in feature part 099SG is the same as the execution rate of the various effects described in Figure 11-36 of feature part 069SG). Therefore, even if a player continues playing for a long time without hitting a jackpot and is feeling depressed due to increased investment, when controlled to time-saving state B, even if the number of reserved memories is fixed at any state between 0 and 3, or the fluctuation is absorbed at any state between 0 and 3, the fluctuation can be efficiently absorbed with little unnecessary excitement, so that an optimal time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Fig. 12-15, Fig. 12-17, Fig. 12-19, Fig. 12-21, the average fluctuation time in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the high probability state is multiplied by 110 to calculate and compare the values. This indicates that the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays (total time of 110 fluctuation displays) out of the 1100 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B is shorter than the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state A or the high probability state. If the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B is the same (or approximately the same) period as the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state A or the high probability state, the consumption time of 1100 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B will take several times the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B, and it is considered that when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B, the consumption time will be prolonged, causing discomfort and dissatisfaction to the player. Therefore, the present invention aims to prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when controlled to time-saving state B by increasing the fluctuation efficiency in time-saving state B more than time-saving state A or the high probability state, and as a result, to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can conveniently control the gaming state to time-saving state B.

Furthermore, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Fig. 12-16, Fig. 12-18, Fig. 12-20, Fig. 12-22, the average fluctuation time in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the high probability state are multiplied by 1100 to calculate and compare the values. This is because, by controlling the time-saving state A or the high probability state multiple times, the fluctuation display in the time-saving state A or the high probability state is executed 1100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of fluctuation display times in the time-saving state B, and by comparing the fluctuation time of 1100 times in the time-saving state A, the fluctuation time of 1100 times in the time-saving state B, and the fluctuation time of 1100 times in the high probability state, it is shown that the time-saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency, and it is shown that the fluctuation display can be suitably controlled to the time-saving state B so as not to cause dissatisfaction to the player.

This shows that by controlling the time-saving state A or the high probability state multiple times, when the fluctuation display in the time-saving state A or the high probability state is executed 1,100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B, the time-saving state B is designed to have the highest fluctuation efficiency, and therefore the time-saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency even when compared to the time-saving state A or the high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to avoid dissatisfaction with the fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and as a result, it is preferably controlled to the time-saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the time-shortened state B, by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the time-shortened state A, by 110, and the period value ψ is set to be smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the special probability state, by 110. Therefore, since the fluctuation efficiency of the time-shortened state B is higher than the fluctuation efficiency of the time-shortened state A and the special probability state, the period until control is exerted into the jackpot game state can be shortened, thereby reducing the player's dissatisfaction in the time-shortened state B, and as a result, a preferable time-shortened state B can be provided. In particular, in this feature section 099SG, as described above, in time-saving state B, by increasing the fluctuation efficiency more than in time-saving state A or the high probability state, the period until control is made to the jackpot game state can be shortened, reducing the player's dissatisfaction, and in time-saving state A or the high probability state controlled via the jackpot game (time-saving state A or the high probability state in which a fluctuation display with a longer special chart fluctuation time is more likely to be executed than in time-saving state B), a predetermined presentation that suggests that control will be made to the jackpot game state during the fluctuation display can be executed for an appropriate period of time.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (B), the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the time-shortened state B, by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the time-shortened state A, by 1100, and the period value ψ' is set to be smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the special probability state, by 1100. Therefore, since the fluctuation efficiency of the time-shortened state B is higher than the fluctuation efficiency of the time-shortened state A and the special probability state, the period until the game is controlled to a jackpot game state can be shortened, thereby reducing the player's dissatisfaction in the time-shortened state B, and as a result, a preferable time-shortened state B can be provided. In particular, in this feature section 099SG, as described above, in time-saving state B, by increasing the fluctuation efficiency more than in time-saving state A or the high probability state, the period until control is made to the jackpot game state can be shortened, reducing the player's dissatisfaction, and in time-saving state A or the high probability state controlled via the jackpot game (time-saving state A or the high probability state in which a fluctuation display with a longer special chart fluctuation time is more likely to be executed than in time-saving state B), a predetermined presentation that suggests that control will be made to the jackpot game state during the fluctuation display can be executed for an appropriate period of time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state B by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state A by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value ξ is set to be smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the high probability state by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state B by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state A by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value ξ' is set to be smaller than the period value π' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the high probability state by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value λ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the time-saving state B by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the time-saving state A by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value λ is set to be smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the high probability state by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value λ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the time-saving state B by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B is set smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the time-saving state A by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value λ' is set smaller than the period value μ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the high probability state by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value θ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the time-saving state B by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the time-saving state A by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value θ is set to be smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the high probability state by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 12-18, the period value θ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the time-saving state B by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B is set smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the time-saving state A by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value θ' is set smaller than the period value ι' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the high probability state by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the period value ε obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state B by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B is set smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state A by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value ε is set smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the high probability state by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state B by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B is set smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state A by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value ε' is set smaller than the period value ζ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the probability variable state by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the probability variable state, and the interest in playing the time-saving state B can be improved.

The pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG can display the normal symbol as well as the special symbol, and when the normal symbol display result is a win (normal symbol win), a game ball can enter the second start winning port that has changed from a closed state to an open state. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 has a first special symbol reservation memory part 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation memory part 099SG151B that can display the first special symbol based on the game ball entering the first start winning port, and can display the second special symbol based on the game ball entering the second start winning port, and can store information on the special symbol display that has not yet been executed as reservation memory. The maximum number of reserved memories is set to four for both the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B, and the upper limit of the maximum number of reserved memories does not change depending on the game status.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 12-2 (B) and Fig. 12-2 (D), the probability of a normal winning pattern occurring in the variable display of the normal pattern is the same whether the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B, and the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal winning pattern occurs is set to 3 seconds, which is the same whether the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B, and when the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B, the game ball launched by the launching device toward the second path in the right game area can win (enter) the gate 41 or the second start winning hole. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG, many of the gameplay characteristics can be made common whether the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused due to the large difference in gameplay between time-saving state A and time-saving state B.

In addition, in this feature section 099SG, when the game state is either the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, or the special probability state, the average fluctuation time is calculated as the period from the start timing of the special pattern fluctuation display to the end timing of the fluctuation display when the fluctuation display result is a miss, and each period value is calculated by multiplying the calculated average fluctuation time by "110" or "1100", which is the number of fluctuation displays when the game state is either the special probability state, the time-saving state B, or the special probability state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The average fluctuation time may be calculated as the period from the time when the game ball is shot out or the time when the shot game ball enters the start winning slot to the end timing of the fluctuation display based on the start winning, and each period value may be calculated by multiplying the calculated average fluctuation time by "110" or "1100", which is the number of fluctuation displays when the game state is either the special probability state, the time-saving state B, or the special probability state. By doing this, it is possible to obtain the period value for each game state more appropriately through measurement.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of reserved data (reserved memories) that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is four regardless of the game state, and as shown in Figure 12-13, each period value in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state is calculated by the total value obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed by each reserved memory number out of 110 variable displays by the average variable time of each reserved memory number, so that an accurate period value can be obtained corresponding to the reserved memory number.

In particular, if the game state is time-saving state A and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state A is α, the period value α is calculated by the value of A×a+B×b+C×c+D×d. Here, A is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A, a is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A, B is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A, and b is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A. , C is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the time-saving state A, c is the proportion of the change display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A, D is the average change time when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A, and d is the proportion of the change display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A. By calculating the period value α in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α of the time-saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, if the game state is time-saving state B and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state B is β, the period value β is calculated by the value of E x e + F x f + G x g + H x h. Here, E is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B, e is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B, F is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B, and f is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B. , G is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the time-saving state B, g is the proportion of the change display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, H is the average change time when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and h is the proportion of the change display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. By calculating the period value β in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β of the time-saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, if the game state is a probability variable state and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the probability variable state is γ, the period value γ is calculated by the value of I×i+J×j+K×k+L×l. Here, I is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state, i is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state to 110 variable displays in the probability variable state, J is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state to 100, and j is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state to 110 variable displays in the probability variable state. , K is the average time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the variable state, k is the proportion of the variable display when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the variable state of the 110 variable displays of the variable state, L is the average time when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three in the variable state of the 110 variable displays of the variable state of the variable state of the 110 variable displays of the variable state of the variable state of the 110. By calculating the period value γ in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value γ of the variable state corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of reserved data (reserved memories) that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is four regardless of the game state, and as shown in Figure 12-14, each period value in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state is calculated by the total value obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed by each reserved memory number out of 1,100 variable displays by the average variable time of each reserved memory number, so that an accurate period value can be obtained corresponding to the reserved memory number.

In particular, if the game state is time-saving state A and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state A is α', the period value α' is calculated by the value of A x a' + B x b' + C x c' + D x d'. Here, A is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A, a' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A, B is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A, and b' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A. , C is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the time-saving state A, c' is the proportion of the change display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, D is the average change time when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, and d' is the proportion of the change display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A. By calculating the period value α' in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α' of the time-saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, if the game state is time-saving state B and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state B is β', the period value β' is calculated by the value of E x e' + F x f' + G x g' + H x h'. Here, E is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B, e' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B, F is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B, and f' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B. , G is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B, g' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, H is the average change time when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and h' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. By calculating the period value β' in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β' of the time-saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, if the game state is a probability variable state and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the probability variable state is γ', the period value γ' is calculated by the value of I x i' + J x j' + K x k' + L x l'. Here, I is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state, i' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state, J is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state to become a miss, and j' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state. , K is the average time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the variable state, k' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the variable state of the 1100 variable displays of the variable state, L is the average time when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three in the variable state of the 1100 variable displays of the variable state, and l' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three in the variable state of the 1100 variable displays of the variable state. By calculating the period value γ' in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value γ' of the variable state corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

As described above, in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B and special probability state in this feature part 099SG, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 1, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 2, and when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 3, time-saving state B is set to have the highest special pattern fluctuation efficiency (the average fluctuation display time required per fluctuation is shortest). In addition, even when the player plays in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or special chance state without worrying about the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (when the display changes 110 or 1,100 times at each reserved memory number at the ratios shown in Figure 12-26 (B), Figure 12-27 (B), and Figure 12-28 (B)), time-saving state B is set to have the highest special symbol change efficiency (the average display time required for one change is the shortest).

In addition, in this feature part 099SG, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the high probability state are multiplied by 110 or 1100 to compare the values obtained, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the values multiplied by the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the high probability state may be values other than 110 or 1099, such as 109 or 1099. The reason for multiplying the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the high probability state by 109 or 1099 is that the first fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the high probability state almost always starts with the number of reserved memories at 0. In addition, if the final 5 fluctuations of the 3 states of time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and high probability state, or the 2 states of time-saving state A and high probability state are to be fluctuations with a higher percentage of longer special chart fluctuation times than other fluctuations, the value may be multiplied by 104 or 1094, etc., excluding the total of 6 fluctuations, the first fluctuation and the final 5 fluctuations of each state.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 018SG)
Next, an embodiment of the characteristic part 018SG will be described based on Fig. 13-1 to Fig. 13-23. Fig. 13-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern in the characteristic part 018SG. Fig. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a low base state (A), and a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a high base state (B). Note that in this characteristic part 018SG, illustrations and detailed explanations of the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic parts 069SG and 099SG are omitted, and differences are mainly described. In addition, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 018SG described below can be applied to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 069SG or the characteristic part 099SG.

Figure 13-1 shows the variation patterns in this feature part 018SG. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided, just like the super reach fluctuation pattern, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be different. In addition, while super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type, just like the normal reach fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 13-1, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. Also, among the super reach variation patterns, the variable display period of the super reach β variation pattern is set to be longer (80 seconds) than that of the super reach α miss variation pattern (45 seconds). On the other hand, the super reach γ miss variation pattern is a miss variation pattern for a high base as described below, so the variable display period is set to be shorter (40 seconds) than that of the super reach α miss variation pattern (45 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 13-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a fluctuation pattern when the game state is normal (low base state). When the variable display result is "jackpot" in the normal state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach α jackpot), and PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 97 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 600 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. In other words, when the game state is low base state and the variable display result is "jackpot", the determination rate increases in the order of normal reach, Super Reach α, and Super Reach β.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern). Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, 600 judgment values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B. Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 judgment values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

Figure 13-2 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a fluctuation pattern when the game state is in a time-saving state (high base state). When the variable display result is a "jackpot" in the time-saving state (high base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (the fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot) and PB1-4 (the fluctuation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 197 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 800 determination values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, when the game state is in a high base state and the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination rate increases in the order of normal reach, followed by super reach γ.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is "miss", then miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and using that miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern). Specifically, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, and 97 judgment values are assigned to PA2-4.

(About the various performances)
Next, various effects executed in the super reach effect will be explained based on Fig. 13-3 to Fig. 13-5. Fig. 13-3 is a diagram showing the execution period of various effects in the jackpot fluctuation patterns of the super reach α, β, and γ. Fig. 13-4 is a diagram showing the execution period of various effects in the miss fluctuation patterns of the super reach α, β, and γ. Fig. 13-5 (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the character types.

Although not specifically shown, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the normal reach variation pattern, after starting the variable display, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes a normal reach performance (hereinafter abbreviated as "N reach performance") as a variable display performance based on the fact that the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode. After that, the CPU 120 ends the variable display of decorative symbols without progressing to a super reach performance (hereinafter abbreviated as "SP reach performance").

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 13-3 and 13-4, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the Super Reach variable pattern, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C during the period (ta0 to ta1) from the timing ta0 at which the variable display begins until a predetermined period has elapsed (see Figure 13-9 (N1)). Note that, as the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 during this period (ta0 to ta1), in the low base state, the light emission patterns correspond to multiple types of normal background effects, and in the high base state, the light emission patterns correspond to multiple types of music. By combining the light emission patterns corresponding to the multiple types of normal background effects and the light emission patterns corresponding to the multiple types of music with light emission patterns corresponding to various SP Reach effects, the performance effect can be enhanced by a variety of light emission patterns.

At timing ta1, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since timing ta0 when the variable display started, the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach display mode, and an "N reach effect" is executed as a variable display effect for the predetermined period (ta1 to ta2). After that, at timing ta2, the variable display mode is changed to the super reach display mode, and an "SP reach effect" is executed as a variable display effect for the predetermined period (ta2 to ta5).

In this way, the "N reach performance" is a common performance that is executed in both the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, and in the case of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, it ends without progressing to the "SP reach performance", while in the case of the super reach fluctuation pattern, it progresses to the "SP reach performance". Therefore, even in the case of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the player can expect the "N reach performance" to progress to the "SP reach performances A to E" described below by executing the "N reach performance".

As shown in Figures 13-3 and 13-4, "SP Reach Effects A to E" are effects that notify whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not, that is, whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss", and during the SP Reach effect period, a "decisive effect" described below is executed for a predetermined period (ta3 to ta4). Then, as shown in Figure 13-3, if the variable display result is a jackpot, after the end of "SP Reach Effects A to E", a "post-effect" described below is executed for a predetermined period (ta5 to ta7), and then the variable display ends. In this way, the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern of SP Reach α, β, and γ is composed of a variable display part (ta0 to ta5) that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern, and a post-effect part (ta5 to ta7) that notifies the expected number of balls that can be won in the jackpot game state after the variable display part ends.

As shown in FIG. 13-4, if the variable display result is a miss, the variable display ends with the end of "SP Reach Effects A to E". After the miss notification ends (ta5 to ta5A), the screen returns to the normal background screen with the fixed decorative pattern of the specified reach combination that is not a jackpot combination temporarily stopped (shaking) and temporarily stopped until the pattern fixed period begins.

Next, we will explain the various effects executed in the super reach fluctuation pattern. As shown in Figure 13-5 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach α fluctuation pattern, "SP reach effect A" is executed as the SP reach effect, when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach β fluctuation pattern, "SP reach effect B" or "SP reach effect C" is executed as the SP reach effect, and when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach α fluctuation pattern, "SP reach effect D" or "SP reach effect E" is executed as the SP reach effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13-5 (B), in "SP reach performances B to E" other than "SP reach performance A", ally character A-1, ally character A-2 different from ally character A-1, enemy character X-1, and enemy character X-2 different from enemy character X-1 can appear. Note that the number of types of ally characters and enemy characters is not limited to the above, and ally characters and enemy characters other than those described above may also be allowed to appear. Also, even for the same character, the expectation level may differ depending on the display mode.

"SP Reach Presentation A" is executed when the SP Reach α fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is normal (low base state), and is a presentation in which a video image of a bowling challenge is displayed. When all the pins fall, a "jackpot" is announced, and when all the pins do not fall, a "miss" is announced. Note that the friendly characters A-1 and A-2 and the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are not displayed in the bowling challenge video.

"SP Reach Presentation B" is executable when the SP Reach β fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is normal (low base state), and is a presentation in which a moving image of "Battle A" in which ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 face off in the city is displayed. When ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-1 and wins, a "jackpot" is announced, and when ally character A-1 fails to defeat enemy character X-1 and is defeated, a "miss" is announced.

"SP Reach Presentation C" is executable when the SP Reach β fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is normal (low base state), and is a presentation in which a moving image of "Battle A" in which ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 face off in the city is displayed. When ally character A-2 defeats enemy character X-2 and wins, a "jackpot" is announced, and when ally character A-2 fails to defeat enemy character X-2 and is defeated, a "miss" is announced.

"SP Reach Presentation D" is executable when the SP Reach γ fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is either Time-saving State A, High-variable State, or Time-saving State B (high base state), and is a presentation that displays a moving image of "Battle B" in which ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 face off in the wilderness. When ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-1 and wins, a "jackpot" is announced, and when ally character A-1 fails to defeat enemy character X-1 and is defeated, a "miss" is announced.

"SP Reach E" is executable when the SP Reach γ fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is in either the time-saving state A, the probability change state, or the time-saving state B (high base state), and is an effect that displays a moving image of "Battle B" in which ally character A-1 and enemy character X-2 face off in the wilderness. When ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-2 and wins, a "jackpot" is announced, and when ally character A-1 fails to defeat enemy character X-2 and is defeated, a "miss" is announced.

In addition, since the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern has a higher chance of winning than the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern, the SP Reach performance B and SP Reach performance C have a higher chance of winning than SP Reach performance A (jackpot expectation: SP Reach performance A < SP Reach performance B < SP Reach performance C).

The "decisive effect" is an effect that is executed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., ta3 to ta5) from the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the SP reach effects A to E (e.g., timing ta3 when the final bowling or battle showdown begins just before the end of the SP reach effect). Specifically, it includes a "win/lose button effect" that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B during the effective operation period when operation of the push button 31B is effectively detected, and a "movable body effect" that is executed when operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period ends without operation of the push button 31B being detected.

The "movable body effect" is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, and is an effect in which the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected. If the variable display result is a miss, it is not executed when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected.

In addition, in response to the execution of the movable body effect (the fall of the movable body 32), an effect image related to the movement of the movable body 32 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and a light effect is performed in which the movable body LED 208 and the game effect lamp 9 are illuminated in a predetermined light color (for example, in rainbow colors), a vibration effect is performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B, and a sound effect is performed in which a predetermined sound effect is output.

In addition, in SP Reach performance A, friendly characters and enemy characters are not displayed in the bowling showdown, so no characters are displayed in the moving body performance, whereas in SP Reach performances B to E, friendly characters and enemy characters are displayed in the battle showdown, so the enemy characters displayed in the battle showdown are displayed in the moving body performance.

In this way, in the "decisive effect," if the variable display result is a jackpot, the hit/lose button effect is performed, followed by the execution of the movable body effect to notify the jackpot, and if the variable display result is a miss, the hit/lose button effect is performed, followed by the execution of the movable body effect to notify the miss.

"Post-performance A" is executed after the SP reach performances A to C notify that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state when the variable display result is a jackpot in the normal game state (low base state). Specifically, in the SP reach performances A to C, the determined decorative symbols that are predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R to notify the determined jackpot, and then the determined decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed again in a re-selection variable part (ta5 to ta6), and the display result is notified by the determined decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R after the re-variable display is executed in the re-selection variable part (ta6 to ta7). The execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-performance A is set to "10 seconds".

In this embodiment, in the SP reach performances A to C, a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of even numbers (such as 666) is temporarily displayed, and after the re-variable display begins in the re-draw variable part, a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of even numbers or a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of odd numbers is displayed in the re-draw result part. If a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of even numbers is displayed in the re-draw result part, it is announced that there is a "jackpot A" that will be controlled to the time-saving state A after the jackpot game state ends, and if a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of odd numbers is displayed (pattern upgrade), it is announced that there is a "jackpot B" that will be controlled to the probability variable state after the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, in the post-performance A of SP reach performance A, since no characters appear in SP reach performance A, no characters appear in post-performance A either. In addition, in the post-performance A of SP reach performances B and C, characters appear in SP reach performances B and C, but no characters appear in post-performance A. By doing this, even when an SP reach performance A in which no characters appear is executed, the post-performance A is executed in a manner in which no characters appear, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

"Post-performance B" is executed after it is notified that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state in the SP reach performances D and E when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A, the probability change state, or the time-saving state B (high base state). Specifically, in the SP reach performances D and E, the fixed decorative symbols that are predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R to notify the confirmed jackpot, and then the planned ball output addition part (ta5 to ta6) in which the number of planned balls is added and displayed as the ally character that appeared in the SP reach performances D and E attacks the enemy character, and the planned ball output notification part (ta6 to ta7) in which the planned ball output number is displayed and notified after the ally character delivers a final blow to the enemy character, and then the fixed decorative symbols that are the jackpot combination are displayed and notified, and the variable display ends. Furthermore, the execution period of post-performance B (ta5 to ta7) is set to 15 seconds, which is longer than the execution period of post-performance A.

Also, as shown in Figures 13-3 and 13-4, the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach α is 45 seconds, the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach β is 80 seconds, and the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach γ is 40 seconds. In other words, the variable display part periods are shorter in the order of SP reach β, SP reach α, and SP reach γ (variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A); SP reach β > SP reach α > SP reach γ).

In addition, the period (ta0 to ta1) from when the variable display starts to when N reach occurs is different for SP Reach α, β, and γ, and the period (ta0 to ta1) from when the variable display starts to when N reach occurs for SP Reach γ is shorter than the period (ta0 to ta1) from when the variable display starts to when N reach occurs for SP Reach α and β (ta0 to ta1; SP Reach γ < SP Reach α, β).

In addition, the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach performance in SP Reach α, β, and γ is different, and the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach performance in SP Reach γ is shorter than the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach performance in SP Reach α and β (ta1 to ta2; SP Reach γ < SP Reach α, β).

In addition, the execution periods (ta2 to ta5) of SP reach effects A to E in SP Reach α, β, and γ are different, with the execution periods being longer in the order of SP reach γ (SP reach effects D, E), SP reach α (SP reach effect A), and SP reach β (SP reach effects B, C) {ta2 to ta5; SP reach γ (SP reach effect D, E) < SP reach α (SP reach effect A) < SP reach β (SP reach effect B, C)}.

In addition, the variable display part period of SP Reach γ (40 seconds) is shorter than the variable display part period of SP Reach α (45 seconds) and the variable display part period of SP Reach β (80 seconds) (variable display period; SP Reach β > SP Reach α > SP Reach γ), while in SP Reach γ (SP Reach performances D and E), after the final performance ends, the fixed decoration patterns that are the predetermined jackpot combinations are displayed in each decoration pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. The execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-event performance B until the winning combination is reached is longer than the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-event performance A from the end of the deciding performance in SP reach α (SP reach performance A) and SP reach β (SP reach performance B, C) until the fixed decorative patterns that are the predetermined winning combination are stopped and displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R (ta5 to ta7; SP reach γ (15 seconds) > SP reach α, β (10 seconds)).

In addition, the execution period (ta3 to ta5) of the "decisive performance" in SP reach performances A to E is common to SP reach performances A to E (ta3 to ta5; SP reach performance A = SP reach performance B = SP reach performance C = SP reach performance D = SP reach performance E). Therefore, the control data of the movable body 32, movable body LED 208, etc. in SP reach performances A to E can be common, which reduces manufacturing costs. Furthermore, the execution period of the "win/lose button performance" in the "decisive performance" and the execution period of the "movable body performance" are also common to SP reach performances A to E.

The execution period of "Post-performance A, B" in SP Reach α, β, γ is the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols, from timing ta5 when the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the jackpot confirmation notification of SP Reach performances A to E, to timing ta7 when the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped (the variable display ends) (ta5 to ta7). This makes it easier to recognize the timing when the post-performance is executed, and an example of a form that can increase attention to post-performance A and B is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "Post-performance A, B" may be executed during the pattern determination period that begins after the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, or during the jackpot fanfare period.

The variable display period of the SP Reach γ for a high base is shorter than that of the SP Reach β for a low base (ta0 to ta7: SP Reach γ < SP Reach β), and the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body performance" ends in the SP Reach γ to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that is the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed in the SP Reach γ is longer than the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body performance" ends in the SP Reach β to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that is the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed in the SP Reach β (ta4 to ta7; SP Reach γ > SP Reach β). In this way, in the SP Reach γ that is executed in a short variable display period, the impression of the variable display can be enhanced by lengthening the period after the end of the "movable body performance".

In addition, the execution periods (ta5-ta7) of the "post-performance A" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances A to C are all the same, and the execution periods (ta5-ta7) of the "post-performance B" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances D and E are all the same. By doing this, it is easier to reuse the control data for post-performances A and B, and especially the character movement control data for post-performance B, which helps reduce manufacturing costs.

In addition, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-performance A" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances A to C is all the same, and the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-performance B" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances D and E is all the same, but the execution period of "post-performance A" (10 seconds) is different from the execution period of "post-performance B" (15 seconds). By making the execution period of post-performance A corresponding to each of the SP reach performances A to C common, it is easier to standardize the performance content and control, which reduces manufacturing costs, and by executing post-performance B, which has a different execution period, it is possible to prevent post-performances A and B from becoming monotonous, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the post-performances.

(SP Reach Effects A to E and Post Effects A and B Operation Modes)
Next, the operation of the SP reach performances A to E and the post-performances A and B when the variable display result is a jackpot will be explained with reference to Fig. 13-6. Fig. 13-6 shows (A) the display mode of the characters in the SP reach performances A to E, (B) the lighting patterns of the LEDs in the SP reach performances A to E, and (C) the output patterns of the background music and sound effects in the SP reach performances A to E.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (A), the display mode of characters in SP reach performances A to E will be explained. During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling competition or battle competition in the SP reach performance, no characters are displayed in SP reach performance A, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance B, ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are displayed in SP reach performance C, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance D, and ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance E. In this way, SP reach performance A is a performance in which no characters are displayed, whereas SP reach performances B to E are performances in which characters are displayed.

In addition, during the execution period of the "win/lose button effect" of the deciding effect in the SP reach effect, no characters are displayed in any of the SP reach effects A to E, while during the execution period of the "moving body effect", no characters are displayed in SP reach effect A, the enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed in SP reach effect B, the enemy character X-2 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed in SP reach effect C, the enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed in SP reach effect D, and the enemy character X-2 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed in SP reach effect E.

In addition, during the execution period (ta4 to ta5) of the jackpot confirmation notification in the SP reach performance, no characters are displayed in SP reach performance A, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance B, ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are displayed in SP reach performance C, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance D, and ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance E.

In addition, in the re-drawing variable part (ta5-ta6) and the re-drawing result part (ta6-ta7) in the post-performance A corresponding to the SP reach performances A-C, in the SP reach performance A, no characters are displayed, in the SP reach performance B, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are not displayed, and in the SP reach performance C, the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 are not displayed.

In addition, in the planned ball output addition part (ta5-ta6) and the planned ball output notification part (ta6-ta7) in the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performances D and E, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed in the SP reach performance D, and the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed in the SP reach performance E.

In this way, in SP Reach Performance A, characters are not displayed in the bowling showdown, so characters are not displayed in the moving body performance or post-performance A either, whereas in SP Reach Performances B to E, enemy characters who face off against friendly characters in the battle showdown are displayed in the moving body performance and post-performances A and B.

In other words, in SP reach performance A, an image related to the bowling showdown (an image in which no character is displayed) is displayed in the moving body performance before the jackpot confirmation notification is made, and in SP reach performances B to E, an image related to the battle showdown (an image of the enemy character being faced off against) is displayed in the moving body performance before the jackpot confirmation notification is made, thereby enhancing the correlation between SP reach performances A to E and the moving body performances executed during the performance period of the SP reach performances A to E.

In addition, in SP reach performance A, an image of a mode related to SP reach performance A (an image in which characters are not displayed) is displayed in post-performance A, and in SP reach performances D and E, an image of a mode related to SP reach performances D and E (images of the friendly character and enemy character that were facing off) is displayed in post-performance B, thereby enhancing the correlation between SP reach performances A, D, and E and post-performances A and B which are executed after the end of SP reach performances A, D, and E.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-6 (B), the light emission patterns of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in SP reach performances A-E will be explained. The numbers in parentheses for each pattern (e.g. B100, etc.) indicate the extended commands explained in feature section 069SG. Furthermore, the various light emission patterns explained below differ from the other light emission patterns in at least one of multiple elements, such as light color, brightness, lighting timing, lighting duration, lighting timing, lighting duration, blinking cycle, etc., and each light emission pattern can be modified in various ways.

During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling showdown or battle showdown in the SP reach performance, in SP reach performance A, lighting is performed in light pattern LP1-1 based on extension command B100, in SP reach performance B and C, lighting is performed in light pattern LP1-2 based on extension command B101, and in SP reach performance D and E, lighting is performed in light pattern LP1-3 based on extension command B102.

In addition, during the execution period of the "Win/Loss Button Presentation" in the SP Reach Presentation, one of the lighting patterns LP2-1 to LP2-4 common to the SP Reach Presentations A to E is lit based on the extended commands B200 to B203. Note that one of the lighting patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4 is selected based on the variable display result, with the lighting patterns LP2-2, LP2-3, and LP2-4 having increasing expectations in that order.

In addition, during the execution period of the "movable body performance" and "jackpot notification" in the SP reach performance, the SP reach performances A to E are lit up with the common light pattern LP3-1 based on the extension command B000.In addition, during the execution period of the "miss notification" in the SP reach performance, the SP reach performances A to E are lit up with the common light pattern LP3-1 based on the extension command B300.

In addition, in the re-drawing variation part in post-performance A and the planned ball addition part in post-performance B (ta5 to ta6), in SP reach performances A to C, the lights are lit with the common lighting pattern LP4-1 based on the extension command BA00, and in SP reach performances D and E, the lights are lit with the common lighting pattern LP4-4 based on the extension command BB00.

In addition, in the re-draw result part in post-performance A and the planned ball release notification part in post-performance B (ta6 to ta7), in SP reach performances A to C, the lights are lit in the common lighting pattern LP4-2 based on the extension command BA01, or the common lighting pattern LP4-3 based on the extension command BA02, and in SP reach performances D and E, the lights are lit in the common lighting pattern LP4-5 based on the extension command BB01, or the common lighting pattern LP4-6 based on the extension command BB02.

The above-mentioned light emission patterns LP1-1 to 3, LP2-1 to 4, LP3-1 to 2, and LP4-1 to 6 are patterns that emit light in different light emission modes based on the light emission control data described below, and an overview of each light emission pattern is given below. Note that the parentheses corresponding to each light emission pattern indicate the extended commands.

As shown in FIG. 13-7(A), in the "Bowling/Battle" game, the lighting pattern LP1-1 (B100) is a pattern in which the frame LEDs (frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12) and the LEDs on the game board (movable body LED 208) light up in accordance with the introduction of the reach title and the video image of the bowling showdown (see FIG. 13-10). The lighting pattern LP1-2 (B101) is a pattern in which the frame LEDs and the LEDs on the game board light up in a color based on the color of the town background when the reach title is introduced, and further in accordance with the color of the allies A-1/A-2 , in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the actions (attack moves, etc.) of enemies X-1/X-2 (see Figs. 13-11 (A2) and (A3)), and in lighting pattern LP1-3 (B102), the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in colors based on the title introduction and the colors of the wilderness background, and further in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the actions (attack moves, etc.) of ally A-1 and enemies X-1/X-2 (see Figs. 13-12 (A4) and (A5)).

In the "Win/lose button presentation," lighting pattern LP2-1 (B200) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the message "Keep pressing the button to build up power!", and then the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in the default white color (see Figure 13-13), lighting pattern LP2-2 (B201) is for powering up when the button is pressed (first stage), and the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in "blue" (see Figure 13-13), lighting pattern LP2-3 (B202) is for powering up when the button is pressed (second stage), and the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in "green" (see Figure 13-13), and lighting pattern LP2-4 (B203) is for powering up when the button is pressed (third stage), and the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in "red" (see Figure 13-13). The light emission patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4 change in stages from blue to green to red (MAX) depending on the player's long press operation (the amount of fill in the gauge display).

In the "Miss Notification" mode, the light-emitting pattern LP3-1 (B300) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board emit a low-luminance white light when a "Miss" is notified in the result notification, and continues until the next variation starts even after the display screen returns to the normal background (see Figure 13-16).

In "movable body presentation & jackpot notification", the light-emitting pattern LP3-2 (B000) is a pattern in which, when a "jackpot" is notified in the result notification, in the movable body presentation (first period), the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in a color that matches the background during the movable body presentation, and in the movable body presentation (second period), the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in a rainbow color during the jackpot notification (see Figures 13-14 and 13-15). Note that the extended command (B000), unlike other extended commands, has both operation control data (setting the number of steps, speed, and time related to motor drive) for operating the movable body 32 and gradation control data for lighting the frame LED and the LED on the game board.

In addition, by making the extension command B000 a common extension command for movable body operation control and LED lighting control, it is not necessary to separate the extension commands for movable body operation control and the extension commands for LED lighting control, and therefore the program capacity for performance control can be reduced. If the extension commands used for movable body performance were divided into extension commands for movable body operation control and extension commands for LED lighting control, there is a risk that one of the extension commands will be missed due to a malfunction, but by sharing them, movable body performance can be performed optimally.

In addition, by controlling the movement of the moving body and the lighting of the LEDs with a single extended command rather than separating the extended commands for "moving body performance" and "jackpot notification", it is no longer necessary to separate the extended commands according to the performance, and the program capacity for performance control can be reduced. If the extended commands for "moving body performance" and "jackpot notification" were separate, there would be a risk that one of the extended commands would be missed due to a malfunction, but by sharing them, it is possible to optimally perform "moving body performance" and "jackpot notification".

In "redraw variation/planned ball addition," lighting pattern LP4-1 (BA00) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the moving image in the background (round and round) (see Figure 13-17 (F1)), and lighting pattern LP4-4 (BB00) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the KED on the game board light up in a color based on the color of the space background, and the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the actions of ally A-1 (such as an attacking move) (see Figure 13-18).

In the "Redraw Result/Scheduled Ball Release Notification", the light-emitting pattern LP4-2 (BA01) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up when an even number symbol combination (e.g., 666, etc.) is displayed (see FIG. 13-17 (F2)), the light-emitting pattern LP4-3 (BA02) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up with a higher brightness and a faster gradation cycle than the light-emitting pattern LP4-2 when an odd number symbol combination (e.g., 333, etc.) is displayed (see FIG. 13-17 (F3)), and the light-emitting pattern LP4-5 (BB01) is for the scheduled ball release notification "750", The frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in accordance with the display of "750", and until "750" is displayed, this is a pattern in which the same gradation control data as "1500" is used (see Figure 13-19 (G1-3) to (G3)). The light-emitting pattern LP4-6 (BB02) is for the expected ball release notification "1500", and the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in accordance with the display of "1500" with a higher brightness and a faster gradation cycle than when "750" is displayed, and until "1500" is displayed, this is a pattern in which the same gradation control data as "750" is used (see Figure 13-19 (G1-4) to (G4)).

In addition, during the execution of SP reach performances A to E, in the later period after the movable body performance, it is possible to execute a jackpot confirmation notification as a later period performance, and in the jackpot confirmation notification, the light emission pattern of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 and the movable body LED 208 is common (for example, light emission pattern LP3-2) regardless of the type of SP reach performances A to E, so that the jackpot confirmation notification is executed with a common light emission pattern regardless of the type of SP reach performances A to E, further reducing manufacturing costs.

The light emission pattern may be different depending on the type of SP reach performance A to E. For example, the light emission pattern LP3-1 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of SP reach performance A may be the rainbow lighting pattern (smooth rainbow lighting) shown in FIG. 13-21, the light emission pattern LP3-2 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of SP reach performance B and C may be the rainbow blinking pattern (flash rainbow lighting) shown in FIG. 13-22, and the light emission pattern LP3-3 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of SP reach performance D and E may change from the rainbow blinking pattern (flash rainbow lighting) shown in FIG. 13-22 to the rainbow lighting pattern (smooth rainbow lighting) shown in FIG. 13-21.

In addition, the lighting patterns of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 in the planned ball output addition part of post-performance B are common to SP reach performance D and SP reach performance E (lighting pattern LP4-4), so the lighting patterns can also be standardized, further reducing manufacturing costs.

In addition, the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in the planned ball release notification part of post-performance B corresponding to SP reach performance D and SP reach performance E are the same, while the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-2, LP4-3) of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in post-performance A corresponding to SP reach performance A are different from the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in post-performance B corresponding to SP reach performance D and SP reach performance E. This further reduces manufacturing costs, and by executing post-performance A with a different light emission pattern, the performance effect of the post-performance can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, the illumination pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the same illumination pattern LP3-2 even when the "movable body effect" is executed at any timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed, or when the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 may be made to illuminate in different illumination patterns depending on the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed. In this way, the illumination state can be changed depending on the timing of the player's operation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (B), the LED lighting pattern in the SP reach performance is shared between SP reach performances B and C, with lighting pattern LP1-2 being used in common. For example, SP reach performance B uses lighting pattern LP1-2-1 (B200: city background color + image color of enemy character X-1, lights up in accordance with the action) and SP reach C uses lighting pattern LP1-2-2 (B200: city background color + image color of enemy character X-2, lights up in accordance with the action). By using the same brightness data for part of the LED lighting pattern (city background color part) for SP reach performances B and C to reduce development costs, while using dedicated brightness data for the parts relating to enemy characters X-1 and X-2, it is possible to create a difference in appearance at a minimum cost.

SP Reach performances D and E share the same lighting pattern LP1-3, but for example, SP Reach performance D uses lighting pattern LP1-3-1 (B300: wilderness background color + enemy character X-1's image color, lights up in accordance with the action) and SP Reach E uses lighting pattern LP1-3-2 (B300: wilderness background color + enemy character X-2's image color, lights up in accordance with the action). By using the same brightness data for part of the LED lighting patterns for SP Reach performances D and E (town background color part) to keep development costs down, while using dedicated brightness data for the parts related to enemy characters X-1 and X-2, it is possible to create a difference in appearance at the lowest possible cost.

In addition, one of the SP reach performances B and C in the low base state and the SP reach performances D and E in the high base state (for example, SP reach performances D and E) may be a common lighting pattern, and the other (for example, SP reach performances B and C) may be a different lighting pattern. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing costs of one while favorably showing the difference in the performances in the other.

(Gradation control data)
Here, we will briefly explain the control data for realizing the light emission performance. Figure 13-21 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in a lighting pattern of smooth rainbow light emission. Figure 13-22 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in a lighting pattern of flash rainbow light emission.

As shown in FIG. 13-21, the "RGB" data output to each LED in the frame LED is sparsely specified with various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) at 40 msec intervals. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on a data table for smooth rainbow light emission, causing the frame lamps to light up smoothly in the colors of the rainbow.

As shown in FIG. 13-22, the "RGB" data output to each LED included in the frame LED is specified as brightness data corresponding to a 20 msec off period between various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) at 30 msec intervals. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on a data table of flash rainbow light emission, causing the frame lamps to light up intensely in rainbow colors.

The ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a light emission control table that the performance control CPU 120 uses to control the light emission of each LED. The light emission control table defines, for example, the correspondence between light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP1-1 to 2, LP2-1, LP3-1 to 3, LP4-1 to 4, etc.), driver IDs, output terminal numbers, electrical components, and light emission control generation data.

For example, the driver ID associated with the light emission pattern stores an ID as identification information for identifying the light emitter driver, the output terminal number stores the number of the light emitter driver output terminal, the electrical component stores the light emitter driver and the electrical component corresponding to the output terminal number (e.g., frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, movable body LED 208, etc.), and the light emission control generation data stores data for controlling a serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light emitter driver, and data used to generate light emission control data based on a control data format.

Each light emission control generation data includes, for example, a data name, a format type, an address, a data transmission period, a unit light emission time, a light emission control period, and format data. For example, the data name stores the data name of the format generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern of the light emission control table, the format type stores identification information ("basic" or "extended") indicating which format is to be applied between the basic format (EX = 0) and the extended format (EX = 1), the address stores an address to be set in the serial-parallel conversion circuit to be applied to the light emitter driver, the data transmission period stores the period for transmitting light emission control data from the performance control board 12 to the light emitter driver of the lamp board 14, and the unit light emission time stores the unit time for causing the LED 9 corresponding to the light emitter driver to emit light. In this embodiment, the data transmission period is described as 10 ms (milliseconds).

The light emission control period stores the time that is the control unit for one period of light emission (hereinafter, this period will be referred to as the "light emission control period"). This light emission control period differs depending on the light emission type. Specifically, if the light emission type is "continuous" or "blinking", a time such as "100 ms" can be set, and if the light emission type is "switching" (such as light emission of a special light color (rainbow color) with multiple color changes), a time such as "1800 ms" can be set.

The format data stores time-series Q data to be included in the light emission control data by applying the format of the format type. Specifically, the format data defines a correspondence between the light emission sequence and the Q data corresponding to the RGB values corresponding to the light emission sequence.

In this embodiment, the light emission of the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 is controlled by Q data (color hexadecimal, RGB color value) expressed in hexadecimal. In color hexadecimal, RGB is expressed as two digits each for a total of six hexadecimal digits (0-F) to represent "16 x 16 = 256 gradations." However, in this specification, the two digits for each of RGB are the same value, and the notation is abbreviated to three digits, with one digit for each of RGB. For simplicity, the notation "0x" that represents hexadecimal is omitted in the illustrations and explanations.

The Q data includes Q data for group 1, Q data for group 2, and Q data for group 3, which are output to the serial-parallel conversion circuit that constitutes the light emitter driver corresponding to the address. The Q data corresponding to each group stores the RGB values to be output from the four output terminals Q included in that group.

A more specific explanation will be given. For example, if the data transmission cycle is "10 ms", it is stipulated that data is transmitted from the performance control board 12 to the light emitter driver every 10 ms. Also, if the unit light emission time is "100 ms", it is stipulated that the target LED emits light for a unit light emission time of 100 ms. Also, if the light emission control cycle is "100 ms", the light emission type of the light emission pattern is "continuous", and in order to cause continuous light emission of a specific color, the same time as the unit light emission time is stipulated as the light emission control cycle.

For example, in the format data, the light emission sequence is set to "1" through "N," and if the Q data (RGB values) for each group is set to "0, 0, F" for each of the light emission sequences "1" through "N," then the R and G values of the Q data are set to "0," and the B value is set to "F" for all light emission sequences, achieving continuous blue light emission.

Next, we will explain the control data for controlling the gradation of the LED to achieve light emission by mixing colors. The Q data (RGB values) in the gradation control data explained here can be directly applied to the Q data of the format data included in the light emission control generation data described above.

Figure 13-22 shows an example of gradation control data, which is control data for performing gradation control to achieve rainbow-colored blinking in frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 (corresponding to flash rainbow light emission, light emission pattern LP3-2, etc.). Note that the gradation control data for frame LEDs 9R1-9R12 is not shown because it is the same as frame LEDs 9L1-9L12. In this gradation control data, the left column shows the switching unit light emission time Δtn, and the right column shows the Q data (RGB values) corresponding to each group (group 1 (9L1), group 2 (9L2), group 3 (9L3), group 4 (9L4), ...) expressed in hexadecimal.

In addition, in the light emission sequence 2 of the gradation control data shown in Figure 13-22, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 20 ms, and the Q data (RGB values) of groups 1 to 12 (9L1 to 9L12) is set to "0, 0, 0", thereby turning off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12.

In addition, in the light emission sequence 1 of the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-22, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 30 ms, and the Q data (RGB values) of groups 1 and 2 are "0, 4, F", the Q data (RGB values) of group 3 is "0, 8, F", the Q data (RGB values) of group 4 is "0, C, F", the Q data (RGB values) of group 5 is "0, F, D", the Q data (RGB values) of group 6 is "0, F, 9", and the Q data (RGB values) of group 7 is "0". , F, 5", the Q data (RGB values) of group 8 is "0, F, 1", the Q data (RGB values) of group 9 is "2, F, 0", the Q data (RGB values) of group 10 is "6, F, 0", the Q data (RGB values) of group 11 is "A, F, 0", and the Q data (RGB values) of group 12 is "F, F, 0", thereby achieving emission of different emission colors (different from the emission color of emission order 3) from frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12.

In this way, by controlling the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 to switch between multiple colors in sequence over a short switching unit light emission time Δts, and by interposing control to turn off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, the colors can be visually perceived as flashing in rainbow colors by humans. Note that the interposing mode is not limited to turning off the lights, and can be, for example, white, which does not constitute a rainbow color. When emitting white light, low luminance RGB values such as "1, 1, 1" can be set so as not to impede the recognition of the colors that constitute the rainbow.

Figure 13-21 illustrates an example of gradation control data, which is control data for performing gradation control to achieve rainbow lighting of frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 (corresponding to smooth rainbow emission, emission pattern LP3-1, etc.).

Unlike the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-21, the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-21 does not include a control to turn off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. This allows the human eye to visually perceive the lights as if they were lit in rainbow colors. In the light emission sequence 1 of the gradation control data, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 40 ms, and the same light emission colors as those of the light emission sequence 2 of the gradation control data are achieved. Also, with the gradation control data, the light emission colors emitted by the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are controlled to be switched between multiple colors in sequence in the short switching unit light emission time Δts, allowing the human eye to visually perceive the lights as if they were lit in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-6 (C), the output patterns of background music and sound effects in SP reach performances A to E will be explained. Furthermore, the various sound patterns explained below differ from other sound patterns in at least one of multiple elements such as volume, sound quality, rhythm, tempo, and music, and each sound pattern can be modified in various ways.

During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling showdown or battle showdown in the SP reach performance, in SP reach performance A, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-1, in SP reach performance B, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-2, in SP reach performance C, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-3, in SP reach performance D, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-4, and in SP reach performance E, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-5.

In addition, during the execution period of the "Win/Loss Button Presentation" in the SP Reach Presentation, common sound patterns BP2-1 to BP2-4 are output for SP Reach Presentations A to E. Note that one of sound patterns BP2-2 to BP2-4 is selected based on the variable display result, with the expected results increasing in the order of sound patterns BP2-2, BP2-3, and BP2-4.

In addition, during the execution period of the "moving body effect" and "jackpot notification" in the SP reach performance, background music and sound effects are output in sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3-3 in the SP reach performances A to E. In addition, during the execution period of the "miss notification" in the SP reach performance, the common sound patterns BP3-1 to BP3-3 are lit up in the SP reach performances A to E.

In addition, in the re-drawing variation part in post-performance A and the planned ball addition part in post-performance B (ta5 to ta6), sound pattern BP4-1 is output in SP reach performances A to C, and background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP4-4 in SP reach performances D and E.

In addition, in the re-draw result part in post-performance A and the planned ball payout notification part in post-performance B (ta6 to ta7), background music and sound effects are output using sound pattern BP4-2 or sound pattern BP4-3 in SP reach performances A to C, and background music and sound effects are output using sound pattern BP4-5 or sound pattern BP4-6 in SP reach performances D and E.

The above sound patterns BP1-1 to 4, BP2-1 to 4, BP0-1 to 3, BP3-1 to 3, and BP4-1 to 4 are patterns that output sounds in different ways based on the sound control data, and an overview of each sound pattern is provided below.

As shown in Figure 13-7 (B), in "Bowling/Battle", sound pattern BP1-1 is a pattern in which the voice when the reach title for SP reach performance A is introduced, the voice "Knock down the pins!", and the background music for SP reach performance A are output (see Figure 13-10), sound pattern BP1-2 is a pattern in which the voice when the reach title for SP reach performance B is introduced, the voice "Fight!", the voice of ally A-1 saying "It'll be decided next time!", the background music for SP reach performance B, and battle sound effects are output (see Figure 13-11 (A2)), and sound pattern BP1-3 is a pattern in which the voice when the reach title for SP reach performance C is introduced, the voice "Fight!", and the voice of ally A-1 saying "It'll be decided next time!" sound pattern BP1-4 is a pattern in which the voice of ally A-2 at the introduction of the reach title for SP reach performance D, the voice of ally A-1 saying "Fight!", the BGM for SP reach performance D, and battle sound effects are output (see FIG. 13-12 (A4)), and sound pattern BP1-5 is a pattern in which the voice of ally A-2 at the introduction of the reach title for SP reach performance E, the voice of ally A-1 saying "Fight!", the BGM for SP reach performance E, and battle sound effects are output (see FIG. 13-12 (A5)).

In the "win/lose button effect," sound pattern BP2-1 is a pattern in which a voice saying "keep pressing the button to build up power" and a sound effect of power level 0 are output (see Figure 13-13), sound pattern BP2-2 is a pattern in which a sound effect of power level 1 is output, sound pattern BP2-3 is a pattern in which a sound effect of power level 2 is output, and sound pattern BP2-4 is a pattern in which a voice of power level 3 (MAX) and a sound effect of power level 3 (MAX) are output.

In the "miss notification," sound pattern BP3-1 is a pattern in which a sound effect of failure is output (see FIG. 13-16 (H1)), sound pattern BP3-2 is a pattern in which a defeat (unfortunate) voice of ally A-1 and background music for a battle defeat are output (see FIG. 13-16 (H2) (H4) (H5)), and sound pattern BP3-3 is a pattern in which a defeat (unfortunate) voice of ally A-2 and background music for a battle defeat are output (see FIG. 13-16 (H3)).

In the "moving object effect & jackpot notification", sound pattern BP0-1 is a pattern in which the sound effects of the moving object effect, the sound effects of success, and the background music of success are output (see Fig. 13-15 (E1)), sound pattern BP0-2 is a pattern in which the sound effects of the moving object effect, the victory voice of ally A-1, and the background music of battle victory are output (see Fig. 13-15 (E2) (E4) (E5)), and sound pattern BP0-3 is a pattern in which the sound effects of the moving object effect, the victory voice of ally A-2, and the background music of battle victory are output (see Fig. 13-15 (E3)).

In "redraw variation/planned ball output addition," sound pattern BP4-1 is a pattern in which the background music for the redraw variation is output (see Figure 13-17 (F1)), and sound pattern BP4-4 is a pattern in which the background music for the planned ball output addition, the sound effect (attack) for the planned ball output addition, teammate A-1's voice for the planned ball output addition, and the voice "Push!" are output (see Figure 13-18).

In the "redraw result/planned ball release notification", sound pattern BP4-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect for even-numbered symbols and background music for the redraw result are output (see FIG. 13-17 (F2)), sound pattern BP4-3 is a pattern in which the sound effect for odd-numbered symbols and background music for the redraw result are output (see FIG. 13-17 (F3)), sound pattern BP4-5 is a pattern in which background music for the planned ball release notification and the sound effect of 750 are output (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-3) to (G3)), and sound pattern BP4-6 is a pattern in which background music for the planned ball release notification, the sound effect of 1500, and the voice of MAX are output (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-4) to (G4)).

In addition, the sound patterns during the execution period of the movable body performance are the same for all types of SP reach performances A to E (sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3), which further reduces manufacturing costs.

In this embodiment, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the same sound patterns BP2-1 to BP2-4 even when the "movable body effect" is executed at any timing when operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed, or when the effective operation period ends without detection of operation of the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and sound effects may be output in different sound patterns depending on the timing when operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed. In this way, it becomes possible to change the sound effects depending on the timing of the player's operation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(SP Reach Performance A to E Flow)
Next, the flow of the SP reach effects A to E will be described with reference to Fig. 13-8. Fig. 13-8 is a tree diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effects A to E.

As shown in FIG. 13-8, in the case of SP Reach α, β, and γ, when the SP Reach performance develops from the N Reach performance, in the case of SP Reach performance A, the start image of bowling is displayed as shown in (A1), in the case of SP Reach performance B, the start image of battle A between ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in (A2), in the case of SP Reach performance C, the start image of battle A between ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 is displayed as shown in (A3), in the case of SP Reach performance D, the start image of battle B between ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in (A4), and in the case of SP Reach performance E, the start image of battle B between ally character A-1 and enemy character X-2 is displayed as shown in (A5). In this way, the performance style of the first half in each of the SP Reach performances A to E is different.

Then, at a predetermined timing towards the end of the SP reach performance, the win/lose button performance begins. Specifically, as shown in (B1), a first operation prompting performance is started to prompt the player to press and hold the push button 31B, and then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the first operation prompting performance, a second operation prompting performance is started to prompt the player to release the long press of the push button 31B, as shown in (B2). In this way, the performance format of the win/lose button performance is the same for SP reach performances A to E.

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot, an image showing the final throw in bowling or the final blow in battle is displayed as shown in (C) when the release operation of the long press of push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period of the hit/miss button presentation, or when the effective operation period has elapsed without the release operation of the long press of push button 31B being detected.

Next, in the case of SP reach performance A, as shown in (D1), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that the ball has hit the pin; in the case of SP reach performance B, as shown in (D2), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that enemy character X-1 has been attacked; in the case of SP reach performance C, as shown in (D3), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that enemy character X-2 has been attacked; in the case of SP reach performance D, as shown in (D4), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that enemy character X-1 has been attacked; and in the case of SP reach performance E, as shown in (D5), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that enemy character X-2 has been attacked. In this way, the presentation style of the movable body presentation differs between SP reach presentation A, SP reach presentation B and D, and SP reach presentation C and E.

Next, in the case of SP reach performance A, as shown in (E1), a result image indicating that the pins have fallen is displayed, in the case of SP reach performance B, as shown in (E2), a result image indicating that battle A has been won is displayed, in the case of SP reach performance C, as shown in (E3), a result image indicating that battle A has been won is displayed, in the case of SP reach performance D, as shown in (E4), and in the case of SP reach performance E, as shown in (E5), a result image indicating that battle A has been won is displayed. Note that the presentation mode of the result announcement differs for each of the SP reach performances A to E.

Next, in the case of SP reach effects A to C, post-effect A begins, and in the re-draw variable part shown in (F1), an image is displayed in which the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped in (E1 to E3) are re-variably displayed, and then in the re-draw result part shown in (F2) and (F3), the fixed decorative symbols that will be the predetermined jackpot combination are displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, in the case of SP Reach performance D, post-performance B is started, and in the planned ball output addition part shown in (G1), an image is displayed of ally character A-1 displayed in (A4) attacking enemy character X-1 and adding up the planned balls, and in the case of SP Reach performance E, post-performance B is started, and in the planned ball output addition part shown in (G2), an image is displayed of ally character A-1 displayed in (A5) attacking enemy character X-2 and adding up the planned balls. Next, in the case of SP Reach performance D and E, the planned number of balls is displayed in the planned ball output notification part shown in (G3) and (G4).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, then at the timing when the release operation of the long press of push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period of the win/lose button effect, or at the timing when the effective operation period has elapsed without the release operation of the long press of push button 31B being detected, the images shown in (C) (D1 to D5) are not displayed, and in the case of SP reach effect A, a result image indicating a failed strike is displayed as shown in (H1), in the case of SP reach effect B, a result image indicating a loss in battle A is displayed as shown in (H2), in the case of SP reach effect C, a result image indicating a loss in battle A is displayed as shown in (H3), in the case of SP reach effect D, a result image indicating a loss in battle B is displayed as shown in (H4), and in the case of SP reach effect E, a result image indicating a loss in battle A is displayed as shown in (H5). The presentation style of the result announcement differs between SP reach presentation A, SP reach presentation B and D, and SP reach presentation C and E.

Next, in the case of SP reach effects A to E, as shown in (I1), the fixed decorative pattern of a specified reach combination that is not a jackpot combination (also called a "missed reach") is displayed.

(Examples of SP reach effects A to E)
Next, an example of the performance operation of the SP reach performances A to E executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Figs. 13-9 to 13-20. Fig. 13-9 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation from the start of the variable display of the SP reach α, β, and γ to the development into the SP reach performance. Fig. 13-10 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the SP reach performance A. Fig. 13-11 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the SP reach performances B and C. Fig. 13-12 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the SP reach performances D and E. Fig. 13-13 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the hit/miss button performance. Fig. 13-14 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the movable body performance. Fig. 13-15 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the big hit notification of the SP reach performances A to E. Fig. 13-16 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the miss notification of the SP reach performances A to E. Fig. 13-17 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the post-event performance A. 13-18 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation of the post-performance B. FIG. 13-19 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation of the post-performance B.

In the following explanation, the commonly executed SP reach effects A to E will be explained together, and the different effects will be explained separately. In addition, some of the numbers (e.g. A to I) given to each frame will correspond to the numbers given to the frames shown in Figure 13-8.

As shown in FIG. 13-9 (N1), when a starting winning occurs, the variable display of the decorative symbols begins in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the determination of one of the SP Reach α, β, or γ as the variable pattern.

In the following, active display area 018SG013 corresponding to active display area 069SG013 of feature part 069SG displays active display 018SG003 corresponding to active display 069SG003, first hold display area 018SG011 corresponding to first hold display area 069SG011 displays hold display 018SG001 corresponding to hold display 069SG001, and second hold display area 018SG012 corresponding to second hold display area 069SG012 displays hold display 018SG002 corresponding to hold display 069SG002.

After the variable display has started, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (N2), if the variable display mode becomes a reach mode, a normal reach performance is started as a variable display performance of the decorative symbols. As shown in FIG. 13-9 (N3), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reach mode was entered, a decorative symbol with a number different from the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R is temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (N4), the variable display of the decorative symbol display area 5C is resumed, progressing to an SP reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1), when the SP reach performance A is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced in size in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01A is displayed, indicating that the SP reach performance A is about to begin. The reach title image 018SG01A has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach performance A) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expectation of a jackpot, and a content display 018SG102 representing bowling.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-1), an image 018SG103 is displayed, indicating that pins are lined up on the bowling lane and the challenge is about to begin, and as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-2), an image 018SG104 is displayed of the ball hitting a pin and knocking it down, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-3), an image 018SG105 is displayed, indicating that the next throw will be the last one, with an image of one pin remaining on the bowling lane and the words "One left!". In addition, as a light-emitting effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-1, and as a sound effect, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-1.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2), when the SP reach performance B is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced in size in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01B is displayed indicating that the SP reach performance B is about to start. The reach title image 018SG01B has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach performance B) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expectation of a big hit, and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-1. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-2, and as a sound performance, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-1), an image 018SG202 is displayed, which has a background image 018SG201 showing a town, a character image 018SGA1 showing friendly character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 showing enemy character X-1, indicating that a showdown is about to begin. As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-2), an image 018SG203 showing friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-1 fighting is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-3), an image 018SG204 is displayed, which has character image 018SGA1 and character image 018SGX1, indicating that the next blow will be the final blow.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3), when the SP reach performance C is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced in size in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01C is displayed to indicate that the SP reach performance C is about to begin. The reach title image 018SG01C has a title display 018SG100 (e.g., SP reach performance C) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (e.g., the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expectation of a big hit, and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-2. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-2, and as a sound performance, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-1), an image 018SG212 is displayed, which has a background image 018SG201 showing a town, a character image 018SGA2 showing friendly character A-2, and a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, indicating that a showdown is about to begin. As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-2), an image 018SG213 showing friendly character A-2 and enemy character X-2 fighting is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-3), an image 018SG214 is displayed, which has character image 018SGA2 and character image 018SGX2, indicating that the next blow will be the final blow.

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4), when the SP reach performance D is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced in size in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01D is displayed to indicate that the SP reach performance D is about to begin. The reach title image 018SG01D has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach performance D) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expectation of a big hit, and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-1. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-3, and as a sound performance, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-1), an image 018SG222 is displayed, which has a background image 018SG221 showing a wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 showing friendly character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 showing enemy character X-1, indicating that a showdown is about to begin. As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-2), an image 018SG223 showing friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-1 fighting is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-3), an image 018SG224 is displayed, which has character image 018SGA1 and character image 018SGX1, indicating that the next blow will be the final blow.

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5), when the SP reach performance E is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced in size in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01E is displayed to indicate that the SP reach performance E is about to begin. The reach title image 018SG01E has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach performance E) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expectation of a big win, and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-1. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-3, and as a sound performance, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-1), an image 018SG232 is displayed, which has a background image 018SG221 showing a wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 showing friendly character A-1, and a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, indicating that a showdown is about to begin. As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-2), an image 018SG233 showing friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-2 fighting is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-3), an image 018SG234 is displayed, which has character image 018SGA1 and character image 018SGX2, indicating that the next blow will be the final blow.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1), when the win/lose button presentation starts, a button image 018SG241 that resembles the push button 31B and an operation prompting display 018SG242 such as "Keep pressing the button to build up power!" are displayed, and the operation prompting presentation that encourages the long press of the push button 31B starts. In addition, as a light-emitting presentation, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up based on the light-emitting pattern LP2-1, and as a sound presentation, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP2-1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-1), the operation prompt display 018SG242 switches to "Start charging!", the gauge display 018SG243 indicating the power level and the effect image 018SG244 are displayed, and when a long press operation is detected, the display state of the gauge display 018SG243 and the effect image 018SG244 changes. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up based on the light emission patterns LP2-2-4, and as a sound effect, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound patterns BP2-2-4.

As shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-2), when a long press operation is detected for a predetermined period of time, the gauge display 018SG243 becomes MAX, and the operation prompting display 018SG242 switches to "Power MAX!" and is displayed. Even when a long press operation is detected for a predetermined period of time, the gauge display 018SG243 may not become MAX depending on the variable display result. Also, the manner in which the power level changes may differ depending on the variable display result.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the hit/lose button presentation, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-3), the operation prompting display 018SG242 switches to "Let go!", prompting the player to release the long press of the push button 31B, and the gauge display 018SG243 switches to a gauge showing the remaining valid operation period. Also, the presentation operations in FIG. 13-13 (B1) to FIG. 13-13 (B1-3) are common to SP reach presentations A to E.

In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 13-13 (B1) to Fig. 13-13 (B1-2), an example is given of a form in which a prompt to operate to accumulate power is displayed during the win/lose button presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prompt to operate does not have to be displayed.

Then, when the release of the long press of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period of the hit/miss button presentation, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without the release of the long press of the push button 31B being detected, if the variable display result is a hit, the movable body presentation shown in Figures 13-14 will start.

During the first period from when the movable body performance begins until a predetermined time (e.g., 1 to 3 seconds) has elapsed, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position, and an attack image 018SG250 showing the final throw or final blow is displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-14(C). The attack image 018SG250 is made up of an object image 018SG250A that imitates the spherical operating part of the push button 31B, and an effect image 018SG250B that shows the object moving toward the back of the screen. In addition, as the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in a color that matches the background based on the light emission pattern LP3-2 as a light effect, sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound patterns BP0-1-3 as a sound effect, and the push button 31B vibrates due to the vibration motor 61 as a vibration effect.

As described above, during the first period of the movable body performance, a common performance is executed for SP reach performances A to E, but during the second period after the first period ends, different performances are executed for SP reach performances A to E, as follows:

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (D1), in the case of SP reach performance A, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the performance position, and an impact image 018SG251 showing an object hitting something is displayed, which has an object image 018SG250A and an effect image 018SG250B showing an impact.

In the present embodiment, the impact image 018SG251 does not display the object (e.g., pins) that the object (ball) hits, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an image showing bowling pins may be displayed in the impact image 018SG251.

Also, as shown in Figures 13-14 (D2) and (D4), in the case of SP reach performance B and SP reach performance D, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the performance position, and an impact image 018SG252 is displayed, which has an object image 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B indicating an impact, and a character image 018SGX1 indicating enemy character X1, and indicates that an attack has hit enemy character X-1.

Also, as shown in Figures 13-14 (D3) and (D5), in the case of SP reach performance C and SP reach performance E, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the performance position, and an impact image 018SG253 is displayed, which has an object image 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B indicating an impact, and a character image 018SGX2 indicating enemy character X2, and indicates that an attack has hit enemy character X-2.

In addition, during the second period of the movable body performance shown in Figures 13-14 (D1) to (D5), common display performance, light emission performance, sound performance, and vibration performance are performed. In detail, the effect image 018SG250B is alternately displayed and hidden in response to the vibration of the movable body 32 (hide when the movable body 32 moves upward, display when it moves downward, etc.), and as a light emission effect, based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 basically emit light in a light emission pattern in which orange and red light flows outward from the movable body LED 208 to the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in that order, in accordance with the background of the movable body and the effect image 018SG250B, and when the effect image 018SG250B is displayed, light is emitted in a light emission pattern in which it flashes intensely white, and as a sound effect, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound patterns BP0-1 to 3, and as a vibration effect, the push button 31B vibrates due to the vibration motor 61. In addition, in Figures 13-14 (D1) to (D5), displays may be performed using a light guide plate display device.

In addition, in FIG. 13-14 (D2 to D5), the effect image 018SG250B displayed in response to the vibration of the movable body 32 is displayed in a display color that is the same as or similar to the display color of the character images 018SGX1, 018SGX2 displayed at the same time (for example, a similar color). By doing so, the relationship between the character images 018SGX1, 018SGX2 showing enemy characters and the effect image 018SG250B can be improved, thereby improving the presentation effect of the movable body presentation.

After the movable body performance ends, as shown in FIG. 13-15, a jackpot is announced. Specifically, in the case of SP Reach performance A, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E1), a result image 018SG260A is displayed, which includes an image 018SG261 showing a fallen bowling pin, a text display 018SG262 showing "Success!", and an effect image 018SG263, and indicates that the bowling challenge has been successful, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-1, and the vibration performance ends.

In the case of SP Reach performance B, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E2), a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX1Z showing enemy character X-1, a text display 018SG262 showing "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263 are displayed, and a result image 018SG260B showing that ally character A-1 has won the battle against enemy character X-1 is displayed, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-2, and the vibration performance ends. Furthermore, character image 018SGX1Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-1 fades out and becomes invisible. By displaying character image 018SGX1Z in this way, the end of the series of effects can be conveniently notified.

In the case of SP reach performance C, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E3), a character image 018SGA2 showing ally character A-2, a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, a text display 018SG262 showing "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263 are displayed, and a result image 018SG260C showing that ally character A-2 has won the battle against enemy character X-2 is displayed, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-3, and the vibration performance ends. Furthermore, character image 018SGX2Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-2 fades out and becomes invisible. By displaying character image 018SGX2Z in this way, the end of the series of effects can be conveniently notified.

In the case of SP reach performance D, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E4), a result image 018SG260D is displayed, which includes a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX1 showing enemy character X-1, a text display 018SG262 showing "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263, and indicates that ally character A-1 has won the battle against enemy character X-1, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-2, and the vibration performance ends.

In the case of SP Reach E, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E5), a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, a text display 018SG262 showing "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263 are displayed, and a result image 018SG260E showing that ally character A-1 has won the battle against enemy character X-2 is displayed, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-2, and the vibration performance ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the result images 018SG260A-018SG260E, the result images 018SG260A-018SG260E are hidden, and as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E6), a fixed decorative pattern (such as 666) that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the word "jackpot" is displayed, thereby issuing a confirmed jackpot notification indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed.

On the other hand, when the release of the long press of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period of the win/lose button presentation shown in Figures 13-13 (B1) to 13-13 (B1-3), or when the effective operation period has elapsed without the release of the long press of the push button 31B being detected, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body presentation is not executed, and a miss confirmation notification is executed to indicate that a miss has been confirmed, as shown in Figure 13-16.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H1), in the case of SP reach performance A, the movable body 32 remains at the origin position without moving, and a result image 018SG270A is displayed that has an image 018SG271 showing the bowling pins that remain unfallen and a text display 018SG272 showing "Failed...", indicating that the bowling challenge has failed. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in low-luminance white based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a sound effect of failure is output from the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound pattern BP3-1, and the vibration performance ends.

In the case of SP Reach performance B and SP Reach performance D, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H2) (H4), the movable body 32 is maintained at the origin position without moving, and a result image 018SG270B is displayed, which has a character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X-1, and a text display 018SG262 showing "Defeat...", and indicates that the ally character A-1 has been defeated in the battle against the enemy character X-1. In addition, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in low-luminance white based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a sound effect of failure is output from the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound pattern BP3-2, and the vibration effect ends.

In the case of SP reach performance C, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H3), the movable body 32 remains at the origin position without moving, and a result image 018SG270C is displayed, which has a character image 018SGA2 showing ally character A-2, a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, and a text display 018SG262 showing "Defeat...", and indicates that ally character A-2 has been defeated in the battle against enemy character X-2. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in low-luminance white based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a sound effect of failure is output from speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound pattern BP3-3, and the vibration performance ends.

In the case of SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H5), the movable body 32 remains at the origin position without moving, and a result image 018SG270E is displayed, which has a character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X-2, and a text display 018SG262 showing "Defeat...", and indicates that the ally character A-1 has been defeated in the battle against the enemy character X-2. In addition, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in a low-luminance white color based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a sound effect of failure is output from the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound pattern BP3-2, and the vibration effect ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the result images 018SG270A-018SG270E, the result images 018SG270A-018SG270E are no longer displayed, and as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H6), a confirmed decorative pattern (such as 676) of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "missed reach") that is not a jackpot combination is statically displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby issuing a confirmed miss notification indicating that a miss has been confirmed.

Next, if a jackpot confirmation notification is executed in SP reach effects A to C, the post-event effect A shown in Figure 13-17 will be executed.

Specifically, after the determined decorative symbols (such as 666) that are a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the jackpot confirmation notification, the decorative symbols are re-variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the re-lottery variation part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F1). In addition, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 are lit up based on the light emission pattern LP4-1, and as a sound effect, background music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-1.

In the re-draw result part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F2), if the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probable jackpot), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the re-variable display started, a combination of even numbers (such as 666) is displayed as a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination, and the variable display ends. In addition, as a light-emitting effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-2, and as a sound effect, BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-2.

In addition, in the re-draw result part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F3), if the jackpot type is jackpot B (probable win), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the re-variable display, a combination of odd numbers (such as 333) is displayed as a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination, and the variable display ends. In addition, as a light-emitting effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-3, and as a sound effect, background music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-3.

Next, if a jackpot confirmation notification is executed in SP reach performances D and E, the post-performance B shown in Figure 13-18 is executed.

Specifically, in the big win confirmation notification, after the fixed decorative pattern (for example, 666, etc.) that is a predetermined big win combination is temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the planned ball output addition part shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1-1) displays a background image 018SG280 representing space, a character image 018SGA1 representing the ally character A-1, and a planned ball output counter display 018SG281 representing the planned ball output number that will be awarded in the big win game state that displays the planned ball output number, and the post-event performance B begins. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-4, and as a sound performance, BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-4.

Next, in the case of SP reach performance D, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1), a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1 and a character image 018SGX1 showing enemy character X-1 are displayed, an image of ally character A-1 attacking enemy character X-1 is displayed, and an additional ball count display 018SG282 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned number of balls counter display 018SG281.

In the case of SP reach performance E, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G2), a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1 and a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2 are displayed, an image of ally character A-1 attacking enemy character X-2 is displayed, and an additional ball count display 018SG282 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned number of balls counter display 018SG281.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1-2), when the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 018SG281 reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "300"), a button image 018SG283 that resembles the push button 31B, an operation prompt display 018SG284 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 018SG285 showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed, and an operation prompt display that encourages a single press of the push button 31B is executed.

Next, in the case of SP Reach performance D, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-3), when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected before the specified operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the pressing operation being detected, the character image 018SGA1 and the character image 018SGX1 are displayed, and the friendly character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-1, while the counter value of the expected ball number counter display 018SG281 is variably displayed. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-5, and as a sound performance, background music and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-5.

On the other hand, in the case of SP Reach performance E, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-4), when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected before the specified operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the pressing operation being detected, the character image 018SGA1 and the character image 018SGX2 are displayed, and the friendly character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-2, while the counter value of the expected ball number counter display 018SG281 is variably displayed. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-6, and as a sound performance, background music, sound effects, and voices are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-6.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-5), a character image 018SGA1 and a special image 018SGXZ in which the attacked enemy character X-2 disappears and becomes a star after being blown away are displayed, and a planned ball number counter display 018SG281 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750", which is the planned number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "6R jackpot") is displayed frozen.

As shown in Figure 13-19 (G3), in the case of a jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 018SG281 is not updated and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G4), in the case of a jackpot C (10R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the expected ball count counter display 018SG281 is updated to a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500"), and then the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

(SP reach performance type determination table)
Next, the SP reach performance type determination table used in determining the SP reach performance type in the SP reach performance type determination process executed by the performance control CPU 120 when the determined variation pattern is the SP reach variation pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Fig. 7 will be described. Fig. 13-20 shows (A) the SP reach performance type determination table A, (B) the SP reach performance type determination table B, and (C) the SP reach performance type determination table C.

In the SP reach performance type determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the SP reach performance type is extracted, and the SP reach performance type is determined using one of the SP reach performance type determination tables A to C shown in Figure 13-20.

In the SP reach performance type determination table, as shown in Figures 13-20 (A) to (C), different judgment values are assigned to each of the SP reach performance types for "jackpot C (10R)", "jackpot B (6R)", "jackpot A (6R)", and "miss", so that the number of judgment values shown in Figures 13-20 (A) to (C) is the number.

When the fluctuation pattern is SP Reach α, the SP Reach performance type determination table A shown in Figure 13-20 (A) is used. Specifically, in the case of "jackpot B (6R)", 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PA-1". In the case of "jackpot A (6R)", 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PA-1". In the case of "miss", 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PA-2".

When the fluctuation pattern is SP Reach β, the SP Reach performance type determination table B shown in FIG. 13-20 (B) is used. Specifically, in the case of "Big Hit B (6R)", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PB-1", and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PC-1". In the case of "Big Hit A (6R)", 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PB-1", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PC-1". In the case of "Miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PB-2", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PC-2".

In other words, when the SP Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, if the jackpot type is "Jackpot B (6R)," which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot A (6R)," SP Reach presentation C is determined at a higher rate than SP Reach presentation B.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is SP Reach γ, the SP Reach performance type determination table C shown in FIG. 13-20 (C) is used. Specifically, in the case of "Big Hit C (10R)", 40 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PD-1", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PE-1". In the case of "Big Hit B (6R)", 60 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PD-1", and 40 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PE-1". In the case of "Miss", 60 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PD-2", and 40 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PE-2".

In other words, when the SP Reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, if the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)," which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B (6R)," SP Reach performance E is determined at a higher rate than SP Reach performance D.

(Action and Effects)
As described above, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a first specific performance (for example, SP reach performance B) that displays the enemy character X-1 and notifies whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state using the enemy character X-1, and a second specific performance (for example, SP reach performance A) that notifies whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state without displaying an enemy character, and when a jackpot is notified in the SP reach performance, it can execute a "movable body performance" as a special performance during the execution period of the SP reach performance, and the execution of the movable body performance in the SP reach performance B can be executed. During this period, a character image 018SGX1 is displayed together with an effect image 018SG250B related to the movement of the movable body 32, and during the period in which the movable body performance in SP reach performance A is executed, an effect image 018SG250B in a manner common to SP reach performance B is displayed while the character image 018SGX1 is not displayed, and the lighting pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body performance is lighting pattern LP3-2 which is common to both the case in which the movable body performance is executed in SP reach performance B and the case in which the movable body performance is executed in SP reach performance A.

By doing this, the operation mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body performance and the light emission mode of the movable body LED 208 are made common between SP reach performance B, in which an enemy character is displayed, and SP reach performance A, in which an enemy character is not displayed, thereby reducing manufacturing costs, while increasing the correlation between the SP reach performance and the movable body performance depending on whether or not an enemy character is displayed during the execution period of the movable body performance, thereby improving the performance effect.

More specifically, in the case of SP reach performance B and SP reach performance A, which have different performance modes, the execution timing and the operation mode of the movable body 32 for the movable body performance performed during the SP reach performance are common, while the display mode for the effect image 018SG250B corresponds to each SP reach performance, thereby preventing the flow of the SP reach performance from being interrupted by the movable body performance.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which SP reach performance B is applied as the first specific performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can also be applied to any of SP reach performances C to E.

The period during which the movable body performance is performed includes a first period and a second period that follows the first period, and while the performance mode in the first period is common to SP reach performances B to E and SP reach performance A (the attack image 018SG250 in FIG. 13-14(C) is common), the performance mode in the second period is different between SP reach performances B to E and SP reach performance A (the image shown in FIG. 13-14(D1) is different from the image shown in FIG. 13-14(D2 to D5)). By doing this, the performance mode is common up until the first period, which further reduces manufacturing costs, while it is unclear until the first period whether it is SP reach performance B to E or SP reach performance A, which increases the performance interest of the SP reach performance.

In addition, as an SP reach performance, it is possible to execute an SP reach performance E in which an enemy X-2 different from enemy character X-1 is displayed, and the rate at which it is controlled to the jackpot state differs when SP reach performance B is executed and when SP reach performance E is executed. In other words, when the variable display result is a jackpot in a low base state, the determination rate of the SP reach β fluctuation pattern that can execute the SP reach performance B is 300/997, and when the variable display result is a jackpot in a high base state, the determination rate of the SP reach γ fluctuation pattern that can execute the SP reach performance E is 800/997. In the SP reach performance C, during the execution period of the movable body performance executed when a jackpot is announced, an effect image 018SG250B common to the SP reach performance B according to the movement of the movable body 32 is displayed, and a character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X2 is displayed, and the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body performance executed in the SP reach performance C is the light emission pattern LP3-2 common to the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body performance executed in the SP reach performance B.

By doing this, the operating mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body performance and the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 can be standardized to reduce manufacturing costs, while increasing the number of SP reach performances with different rates of control to the jackpot state, allowing players to focus on which SP reach performance will be executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, the enemy character X1 displayed in the movable body performance executed in the SP reach performance B is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image, thereby enhancing the relationship between the enemy character and the effect image, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the movable body performance.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a presentation in which an enemy character is displayed and whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot using the enemy character in a first mode (e.g., SP reach presentation B) and a second mode (e.g., SP reach presentation D), and can execute a movable body presentation during the execution period of the SP reach presentations B and D (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5), and during the execution period of the movable body presentation, in both the SP reach presentation B and the SP reach presentation D, a common event related to the movement of the movable body 32 is displayed. Character image 018SGX1 is displayed along with the usual effect image (for example, effect image 018SG250B), and in the case of SP reach performance B, post performance A in which no enemy character is displayed is executed instead of post performance B using enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the SP reach performance (see Figure 13-17), while in the case of SP reach performance D, post performance B using enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the SP reach performance (see Figures 13-18 and 13-19) is executed.

By doing this, the enemy characters and the movable body 32 in the movable body performance are made common between SP reach performance B and SP reach performance D, thereby reducing manufacturing costs, while displaying the common enemy character X-1 in different performances increases the correlation between the SP reach performances B, D and the movable body performance, and between the SP reach performances B, D and the post-performances A, B, improving the performance effect.

More specifically, even in the post-performance after the SP reach performance notifies the player of a confirmed jackpot, the character displayed in the SP reach performance is used to notify the player of the results of the re-change of the decorative pattern and the planned number of balls to be dispensed. Therefore, regardless of the type of SP reach performance, notifications such as the re-change result notification and the planned number of balls to be dispensed are made in common, while the display content corresponds to the type of SP reach performance, making it possible to show the SP reach performance to the post-performance as a continuous performance.

The performance control CPU 120 can also execute a special performance (for example, a performance in which the enemy character disappears) that changes the enemy character X-1 into a special form after the movable body performance executed in the SP reach performance. In the SP reach performance B, in the jackpot announcement before the post-performance A, a character image 018SGX1Z is displayed in which the defeated enemy character X-1 fades out and becomes invisible (see FIG. 13-15 (E2)). In the SP reach performance D, in the post-performance B, a special image 018SGXZ is displayed in which the attacked enemy character X-2 disappears and becomes a star after being blown away (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-5)). In this way, the timing at which the special performance is executed changes depending on the type of SP reach performance, improving the performance effect.

In the present embodiment, examples of special effects are given in which a defeated enemy character X-1 fades out and becomes invisible, and an attacked enemy character X-2 disappears and becomes a star after being thrown away, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect may be an enemy character that is framed out and becomes invisible, or an image (such as a star or effect image) that indicates that the character has become invisible. Also, various modifications are possible as long as the effect does not make the character invisible, but rather increases transparency, decreases brightness, or changes the image, so long as the appearance changes without becoming invisible.

In addition, if SP reach performance B is executed when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, the probability that it will be controlled to "jackpot B (6R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 30%, and if SP reach performance D is executed when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, the probability that it will be controlled to "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 40%. By doing this, it is possible to draw attention to whether SP reach performance B or D is executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 is capable of executing a first specific presentation (e.g., SP reach presentation D) that displays an enemy character X-1 and an ally character A-1 and notifies the player whether or not the player will be controlled to a jackpot game state using the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1, and a second specific presentation (e.g., SP reach presentation E) that displays an enemy character X-2 different from the enemy character X-1 and an ally character A-1 and notifies the player whether or not the player will be controlled to a jackpot game state using the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A-1, and when a movable body presentation is executed in the SP reach presentation D, the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 displayed in the SP reach presentation D are displayed and operated. By this, it is possible to execute a post-performance B which announces the number of balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state which has been notified that it will be controlled in the SP reach performance D, and when a movable body performance is executed in the SP reach performance E, it is possible to execute a post-performance B which announces the number of balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state which has been notified that it will be controlled in the SP reach performance E by displaying and moving the enemy character X-2 and ally character A-1 displayed in the SP reach performance E, and at least the movement mode of the ally character A-1 is common between the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance D and the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19).

By doing this, by using a common ally character in the SP reach performance and the post-performance, it is possible to reduce manufacturing costs while also making it easier to understand the relationship between the SP reach performance and the post-performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, the background image 018SG280 representing space is common to the post-performance B of SP reach performance D and the post-performance B of SP reach performance E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19), so the background image can also be made common, further reducing manufacturing costs.

Also, ally character A-1 is common to both post-show B of SP reach show D and post-show B of SP reach show E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19), which allows the special characters to be common as well, further reducing manufacturing costs.

In addition, in post-performance B corresponding to SP reach performance D, images of enemy character X-1 and ally character A-1 fighting are displayed simultaneously, and in post-performance B corresponding to SP reach performance E, images of enemy character X-2 and ally character A-1 fighting are displayed simultaneously (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19). As each character is displayed simultaneously, the impression of post-performance B is enhanced and the performance effect is improved.

The performance control CPU 120 can also execute, as post-performances, a first post-performance (e.g., post-performance B) of a performance aspect associated with the SP reach performance D when a movable body performance is executed in the SP reach performance D, a second post-performance (e.g., post-performance B) of a performance aspect associated with the SP reach performance E when a movable body performance is executed in the SP reach performance E, and a third post-performance (e.g., post-performance A) of a performance aspect associated with the SP reach performance A when a movable body performance is executed in the SP reach performance A, and the proportion controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on whether the SP reach performance D, SP reach performance E, or SP reach performance A is executed.

In other words, when the SP Reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, the percentage of the jackpot being controlled to "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 40% when SP Reach performance D is executed, and 60% when SP Reach performance E is executed, and when the SP Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, the percentage of the jackpot being controlled to "jackpot B (6R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 100% when SP Reach performance A is executed.

By doing this, not only is a jackpot notified by the SP reach performance, but the proportion of the player controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on which SP reach performance is executed, so that the player's attention to the SP reach performance can be appropriately increased, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, the ally character and enemy character displayed in the SP reach performance D are displayed as the first post-performance of the performance aspect related to the first specific performance, so that the first post-performance is related to the first specific performance, the ally character and enemy character displayed in the SP reach performance E are displayed as the second post-performance of the performance aspect related to the second specific performance, so that the second post-performance is related to the second specific performance, and the ally character and enemy character are not displayed in the SP reach performance A and the third post-performance is related to the third specific performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third post-performance may be related to the third specific performance by displaying the character displayed in the SP reach performance as the third post-performance of the performance aspect related to the third specific performance.

In other words, a post-performance related to a specific performance is a performance that has at least some of the display aspects in common with the specific performance, and the common performance aspects are that a character is displayed or not displayed, and the type of character displayed in the specific performance and the post-performance may be different. Also, there may be four or more types of specific performance and post-performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the first and second specific effects are executable in a low base state, and the third specific effect is executable in a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first, second, and third specific effects may all be effects that can be executed in a low base state, or may all be effects that can be executed in a high base state. In other words, the first, second, and third specific effects may be effects that can be determined regardless of the game state.

In addition, as the third specific effect, it may be possible to execute an SP reach effect F (for example, a battle effect with an enemy character X-3 different from enemy characters X-1 and X-2) performed in a high base state, in which case the proportion controlled to a jackpot C (10R) may be SP reach effect F (50%) > SP reach effect E (35%) > SP reach effect D (15%). Furthermore, the post-effect C (third post-effect) performed when a jackpot is announced in the SP reach effect F may have a longer effect period than the post-effects A and B.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned SP reach performance F, for example, it is preferable that the light emission pattern of the movable body performance shown in FIG. 13-6 (B) is the light emission pattern LP3-2 common to the SP reach performances A to E, and the sound pattern of the movable body performance shown in FIG. 13-6 (C) is the sound pattern BP0-1 to BP3 common to the SP reach performances A to E.

In the above embodiment, as a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, for example, an advantageous state in which the jackpot game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, a 10R jackpot C with a larger number of balls expected to be dispensed) or an advantageous state in which the control state after the jackpot game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot B or jackpot C that is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot ends) is applied is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second advantageous state may include a state in which the number of balls dispensed, the number of game rounds, the control period of the high probability state, the time-saving state, or the small jackpot state, the fall rate of the probability fluctuation, etc. are more advantageous than the first advantageous state. It may also be an advantageous state in which the presentation mode of the jackpot game state or the end of the jackpot game state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, when applying a pachinko gaming machine 1 with characteristic part 018SG to a pachinko gaming machine 1 with characteristic parts 069G and 099G, for example, it is possible to apply the SP reach performance A in characteristic part 018SG to the SP reaches A and B in characteristic parts 069G and 099G, apply the SP reach performances B and C in characteristic part 018SG to the SP reach C in characteristic parts 069G and 099G, and apply the SP reach performances D and E in characteristic part 018SG to the SP reach D in characteristic parts 069G and 099G.

(Explanation of Variations and Applications of Feature 018SG)
In the above-mentioned characteristic section 018SG, an example is given of a form in which a big win game state is applied as an advantageous state for the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a small win game state, a time-saving state (high base state), a special state, etc. may also be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, a form in which the movable body 32 is applied is exemplified as an example of a movable body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a movable body other than the movable body 32 provided on the game board, a movable body provided on the game machine frame 3, etc. may be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, as a specific effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, the SP reach effects A to E that notify whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot game state are applied as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and normal reach effects, post-event effects, etc. may also be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example is given in which enemy characters X-1 and X-2, who face off against friendly characters A-1 and A-2, are used as specific characters or special characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and enemy characters other than those mentioned above, or other characters that do not face off against friendly characters, etc. may also be applicable. Also, characters made up of images of real people may be used.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example is given in which ally characters A-1 and A-2 who face off against enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are used as special characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and ally characters other than those mentioned above, other characters that do not face off against enemy characters, etc. may also be applicable. Also, characters made up of live-action images of people may also be used.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, as a specific effect in which a character is displayed, an example is given of a form in which SP reach effects A to E are applied in which a special character (ally character) faces off against a specific character or special character (enemy character), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special character, specific character, or special character may be multiple ally characters or enemy characters that cooperate with each other without facing off against each other, or multiple characters that do not face off against each other.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example is given of a form in which a movable body effect is applied as a special effect in which a movable body is moved and an illuminator is illuminated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect in which a movable body other than the movable body 32 is moved may be applied. Also, the operating mode of the movable body 32 can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, the timing of the movable body performance was set to be before the big win confirmation notification in the latter stages of the SP reach performances A to E, but this can be changed in various ways, such as to the middle stages of the SP reach performances A to E. Also, the movable body performance could be started in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, but it may also be started at a predetermined timing regardless of operation.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, in the movable body performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 emit light, sound effects are output, and the push button 31B vibrates in response to the movement of the movable body 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute a light guide plate light emitting performance using a light guide plate device in response to the movement of the movable body 32. In this case, it is preferable that the light emitting pattern of the light guide plate device is common to the SP reach performances A-E, like the light emitting pattern of the LEDs.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example is given of an effect image 018SG250B representing an "impact" applied as an effect image related to the movement of the movable body 32, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be, for example, an effect image of a mode (such as a mode representing an impact) related to the movement mode (such as vibration) of the movable body 32, or an effect image of a mode emphasizing the vibrating movable body 32.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, as a post-effect executed after the movable body effect as a special effect, a post-effect A that executes a re-variable display of the confirmed decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a post-effect B that notifies the number of balls expected to be awarded in the jackpot game state that is notified using the friendly characters and enemy characters that appeared in the SP reach effect are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect is not limited to the above-mentioned post-effect as long as it is executed after the special effect, and for example, a jackpot mid-effect executed in the jackpot game state or a small jackpot mid-effect executed in the small jackpot game state may be applied.

Specifically, in the above embodiment, before the variable display ends, a post-event effect B is executed to announce the number of balls scheduled to be awarded in the notified jackpot game state, but it may be possible to execute a post-event effect to announce the number of balls scheduled to be awarded in the notified jackpot game state during the fanfare period from the start of the jackpot game state to the start of the round game, or during the round interval between game rounds.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, in the post-performance B, the expected number of balls to be awarded in a jackpot is reported in an identifiable manner as the game value information that can identify the amount of game value to be awarded in the jackpot game state that is notified to be controlled by the SP reach performances D and E, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of game rounds, etc. may also be reported.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, a form in which the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state that is notified to be controlled by the SP reach effects D and E in the post-performance B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot is consecutively won a predetermined number of times (e.g., 2 times) or more, the total number of balls won from the first jackpot game state to the current time may be announced instead of or in addition to the planned number of balls. Furthermore, when the total number of balls is added in the planned ball addition part in the post-performance B or when the planned number of balls is announced in the planned ball announcement part, it may be possible to announce that the total number of balls has exceeded a predetermined number (e.g., 2500 balls, 5000 balls, 7500 balls, 10000 balls, etc.).

In addition, in the characteristic section 018SG, an example was given of a form in which the types of friendly and enemy characters faced in the SP reach performances A to E are different, but the movement mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body performance and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B are common; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background image in the SP reach performances A to E, the type and execution rate of various preview performances such as chance up, the battle period, the movement mode and display mode of the characters, etc. may be varied depending on the variable display result, and even in this case, it is preferable that the movement mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body performance and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B are common.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example was given in which the execution period of the planned ball output addition part and the planned ball output notification part in the post-event performance B is common to the SP reach performances D and E, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the planned ball output addition part and the planned ball output notification part may be made different depending on the type of jackpot, that is, the size of the planned number of balls to be output.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, the SP reach effects A to C are executable in a low base state, and the SP reach effects D and E are executable in a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the various specific effects (SP reach effects) described above may all be effects that can be executed in a low base state, or may all be effects that can be executed in a high base state. In other words, they may be executable in any type of game state.

The characteristic features 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG of the embodiment of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is given as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called sealed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these sealed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general gaming machine.

Below, we will explain another embodiment, a group preview effect that was not implemented in the above embodiment.

The correspondence with the claims is as follows.
The non-special state is the normal state (low probability low base state). The first special state is a time-saving state that is controlled after the favorable state (jackpot) ends. The second special state is a time-saving state that is controlled by executing a predetermined number of miss variations without being controlled by the favorable state.

In the other embodiments below, the low base state is a non-special state, and the group preview performance is executed. In the second special state, the group preview performance is not executed.

(Another embodiment characteristic part 092F)
14 and 15 are front views of a pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. In Fig. 14 and Fig. 15, the layout of the main components of a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is shown. The pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the game is played by displaying special symbols in a variable manner. The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. The variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a flashing manner. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

In addition, two types of special symbols are provided as special symbols that are variably displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also called the "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also called the "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." In addition, a special symbol game using the first special symbol is also called the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also called the "second special symbol game."

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A character called Yume Yume-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is drawn on the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5. Yume Yume-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, a character called Jam-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is drawn on the game board 2 on the lower right side of the image display device 5. Jam-chan is a character who appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yume Yume-chan is the main character, so she has the highest importance of all the characters and appears more frequently (number of times) in the performance than other characters including Jam-chan. Also, Jam-chan has the highest importance of all the characters other than the main character Yume Yume-chan and appears more frequently (number of times) in the performance than other characters other than Yume Yume-chan. Also, a character with a higher priority than other characters, such as Yume Yume-chan or Jam-chan, may be the character that appears first in the scene where a character is selected, the character that is placed in the most prominent position, or the character that is ranked highest among all selected characters.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole (electric chute) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 21). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, equipped with an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 14, three locations at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are general winning openings 10 that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 21), and the large winning opening door forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a regular large winning opening) as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a large prize opening door in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 16) located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and this large prize opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front sides of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the path for the game ball to the normal large prize opening. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large prize opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large prize opening, and the game ball cannot enter (pass) through the normal large prize opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the large prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large prize opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the regular large prize opening, it is detected by the count switch 23 as it passes through an area provided inside the regular large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 21), a number of game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters the regular large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10. When the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches an upper limit (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the regular large prize opening is controlled to a closed state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V-variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V-variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 21), and the large winning opening door forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a V-large winning opening) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning port door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning port door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the path for the game ball to the V large winning port. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the off state, the large winning port door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, closing the V large winning port and preventing the game ball from entering (passing through) the V large winning port. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the large winning port door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the V large winning port and allowing the game ball to enter the V large winning port more easily.

The game ball that enters the V large prize opening is detected by the V prize opening switch 24 (see FIG. 21) as it passes through a specific area (also called the V prize opening area) provided inside the V large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the V prize opening switch 24, the game state is controlled to a high probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V prize occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V large prize opening during a round of the high probability game state, and the game state is controlled to a high probability state. The normal high probability prize opening and the V large prize opening are collectively referred to as high probability prize openings. The high probability prize opening is also referred to as an attacca.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

In the pachinko game machine 1, normal symbols are variably displayed as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 to play and output sound effects, etc.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 14). The movable body 32 is configured so that a member with the letter "POWER" is located in front of a member with the letter "2". This forms the letter "POWER2". "POWER2" may be the model name of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be a name representing the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime or the name of a singer). The letter attached to the movable body 32 may also represent the name of the main character or the character with the second highest priority after the main character (for example, "Yume Yume" representing the main character Yume Yume-chan) that appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1. In this embodiment, the model name of the pachinko game machine 1 (Powerful 2) is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14 and a position covering the front of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 15. Specifically, of the component bearing the word "POWER" and the component bearing the word "2," only the component bearing the word "POWER" falls from the position shown in FIG. 14, and the movable body 32 stops at a position covering the front of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 15. The movable body 32 is also referred to as a role-playing object.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed (or depressed) by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 21).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined command operation by pressing it. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 21).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special symbol LED board 20 at the bottom left of the game board 2. The special symbol LED board 20 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. In the special symbol LED board 20, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021, for example, as shown in FIG. 29(a) described later, in the special symbol LED board 20, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022.

The pachinko game machine 1 further includes a fourth symbol unit 50 at the bottom left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 50 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies the change in the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-hit display, and the like by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. In the fourth symbol unit 50, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by the multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9053, for example, as shown in FIG. 29(b) described later, in the fourth symbol unit 50, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by the multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9054, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by the multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9054.

The pachinko game machine 1 has a game board 2 and a game machine frame 3 with multiple lamps. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a role lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, a board-top lamp 9C provided above the game board 2, an attacca lamp 9E provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B, a V attacca lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, a V lamp 9G that notifies the player that a round of a big win game state in which a V big winning hole is open and a V winning can occur, or that a V winning has occurred, an electric chute lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, a stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A, a trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3. The V lamp may be for notifying the player that a big win has occurred.

The reel lamp 9A is composed of multiple lamps, namely reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, a component labeled "POWER" and included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, with reel lamp 9A1 located behind the "P" and "O" parts, reel lamp 9A2 located behind the "W" and "E" parts, reel lamp 9A3 located behind the "R" and "F" parts, and reel lamp 9A4 located behind the "U" and "L" parts. As a result, when reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (emit light) behind the component labeled with the word "POWER", "POWER" lights up (emits light).

The left board lamp 9B is made up of multiple lamps, such as left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5. The main character (for example, "Yume Yume", which refers to the main character Yume Yume-chan) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is depicted on the left side of the game board 2, and the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are each positioned behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted. As a result, when the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (emit light) behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted, the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted lights up (emits light).

As shown in FIG. 15, the board lamps 9C are composed of multiple lamps such as the board lamps 9C1 to 9C13. The upper side of the game board 2 is divided into three areas, left, center, and right, and the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2. The parts of the game board 2 where the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are arranged are made of a transparent material that can transmit light, so that when the board lamps 9C1 to 9C13 light up (emit light) on the back side of the upper part of the game board 2, the upper part of the game board 2 lights up (emits light) in white, red, or the like.

The attacca lamp 9E is located on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, when the attacca lamp 9E lights up (emits light) on the back side of the game board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B. In addition, the V attacca lamp 9F is located on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, when the V attacca lamp 9F lights up (emits light) on the back side of the game board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7A.

The V lamp 9G is located behind the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V". As a result, when the V lamp 9G lights up (emits light) behind the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V", the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V" lights up (emits light). The electric chute lamp 9H is located near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when it lights up (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when it is turned on (lights up), it lights up (lights up) the stick controller 31A. The trigger button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when it is turned on (lights up), it lights up (lights up) the push button 31B.

The left frame lamp 9L is composed of multiple lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 17) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp is turned on (lights up), the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on (lights up). The right frame lamp 9R is composed of multiple lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 17) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp is turned on (lights up), the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on (lights up). The left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as frame lamps. The role lamp 9A, the left board lamp 9B, the top board lamp 9C, the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, the V lamp 9G, the electric chute lamp 9H, the stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K, the left frame lamp 9L, and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9.

Figure 16 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. The main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see Figure 21).

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 21) is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

Figure 17 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamps. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps, frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12, arranged counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L lights up or blinks each of the multiple lamps (12 lamps in this example), causing the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to glow. Meanwhile, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps, frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12, arranged clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R lights up or blinks each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example), causing the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to glow.

18 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol LED board 20 and the fourth symbol unit 50. As shown in FIG. 18(a), the special symbol LED board 20 includes a special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 showing the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 9022 showing the variable display of the second special symbol, a special symbol 1 memory display section 9023 showing the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 9024 showing the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a regular symbol memory display section 9025 showing the regular symbol reserved memory number, a regular symbol display section 9026 showing the variable display of the regular symbol, a right-hit display section 9030 encouraging the player to hit the right, a special symbol display section 9028 showing the presence or absence of a special symbol state, a time-saving display section 9029 showing the presence or absence of a time-saving state, and a round display section 9027 showing the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each display unit can inform the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special or normal symbols, the results, the current game status, the number of reserved symbols, etc., by lighting or blinking with a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

Furthermore, the special chart LED board 20 can prompt the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9030. In this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9030 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit to the right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit to the left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9030 turns off. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display lighting designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns on the right hit display unit 9030, and after the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, it transmits a right hit display turning off designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right hit display unit 9030. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 9030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right-hit display unit 9030.

Here, right-hand hit refers to operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the second flow-down path, which is one of the first and second flow-down paths through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided on the game board 2. The first flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the left area of the game area, and beyond which there is a first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, but there is no second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. The second flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the right area of the game area, and beyond which there are a second start winning hole and a large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows toward the first start winning hole through the first flow-down path. When a player shoots a game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path and flows toward the second start winning hole or the big winning hole (normal big winning hole, V big winning hole).

In this embodiment, during the jackpot game after the jackpot occurs and during the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state or probability change state), the player hits the right to cause the game ball to enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole provided on the right side of the game area, and during that time, the right-hit display unit 9030 encourages the player to hit the right. By hitting the right while the display encouraging the player to hit the right is being displayed, the player can make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 3 balls) are paid out and the player can obtain the right to play the second special game, or the game ball can enter the normal large winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out. Furthermore, as will be described in more detail later, during a round of a guaranteed jackpot, the V-large winning hole opens, and by hitting the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right, the player can gain the right to enter the game ball into the V-large winning hole and be controlled into a guaranteed jackpot state. Therefore, hitting to the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right can give the player an overall advantage. Note that, unlike hitting to the right, operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hitting style) is also called hitting to the left.

As shown in FIG. 18(b), the fourth symbol unit 50 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 9051 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 9052 that indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a special symbol 1 variable display section 9053 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 9054 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a right hit display section 9055 that encourages the player to hit to the right. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of a special symbol, the reserved number, and a right hit instruction by lighting/blinking/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9053 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 9054 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

In the following, the display of the change in the stopped pattern of the first special pattern by lighting means such as LEDs in the special pattern 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special pattern 1 variable display unit 9053 is also referred to as the change display (variable display) of the first special pattern. Also, the display of the change in the stopped pattern of the second special pattern by lighting means such as LEDs in the special pattern 2 variable display unit 9022 and the special pattern 2 variable display unit 9054 is also referred to as the change display (variable display) of the second special pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 50 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9055 is turned off. The performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit display unit 9055 based on receiving a right hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined, and turns off the right hit display unit 9055 based on receiving a right hit display turning off command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled to the high base after the big hit game state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right hit display unit 9055 only during the big hit round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right-hit display unit 9055 based on receiving a jackpot end command from the CPU 103.

Figure 19 is a view looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in Figure 14, the game board 2 is fixed so that it covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in Figure 19, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the rear side of the game board 2 can be seen.

Figure 20 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 is used to display images such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a first pending memory display area 5D capable of displaying the first pending memory number by the number of circular pending displays, a second pending memory display area 5U capable of displaying the second pending memory number by the number of circular pending displays, and an active display area 5A for displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as the active display.

At the top right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth pattern 5J is displayed, indicating that the special pattern is being variably displayed, and indicating the first and second reserved memory counts. At the left edge of the screen of the image display device 5, small patterns 5M, which are smaller than the decorative patterns, are displayed. The small patterns are arranged vertically in a row, corresponding to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. Furthermore, the small patterns 5M are never made invisible during the variably displayed state, and are also the patterns that are always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 20, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is arranged at the left end of the screen of the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), the screen of the image display device 5 is rectangular or nearly rectangular, but as described above, the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edges of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20(b), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, part of the screen of the image display device 5 (especially the edges) cannot be seen or is difficult to see because of the game board 2.

[Board configuration]
21 is a diagram for explaining various boards mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. As shown in FIG. 21, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. The various control boards are a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 20, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23, V winning switch 24) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The fourth pattern unit 50 is connected to the performance control board 12, and each display section can be lit (blinked) under the control of the control CPU 120.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko game machine 1 having the above-mentioned configuration, the game proceeds as follows. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started by the special game 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special game LED board 20.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special game is started by the special chart 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special chart LED board 20.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, a "big hit" occurs when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special symbol LED board 20 corresponds to a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big hit described below). The lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) in the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special symbol LED board 20 is also referred to as a "specific display result". In addition, a "small hit" occurs when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special symbol LED board 20 corresponds to a specific special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol. In addition, when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided in the special chart 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special chart 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special chart LED board 20 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a special pattern (missing pattern) different from the big win pattern and the small win pattern, it is a "miss". In addition, the lighting mode corresponding to a special pattern (missing pattern) different from the big win pattern and the small win pattern in the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided in the special chart 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special chart 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special chart LED board 20 is also called a "miss display result".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state. Note that a small win does not necessarily have to be set as a win type.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small prizes."

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as a predetermined number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. A state in which the end condition is that a predetermined number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, a reach performance is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach state being reached during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of types of reach performances are executed with different rates (also called the reliability of a big hit or the expectation of a big hit) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) becoming a "big hit" according to the performance state. The reach performances include, for example, a normal reach, a super reach with a higher reliability of a big hit than a normal reach, and a strongest reach with an even higher reliability of a big hit than a super reach. In addition, even among the super reaches, they are divided into the first half of the super reach and the second half of the super reach. In this embodiment, the reliability of a big hit is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the normal reach. In addition, the reliability of a big hit is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. In addition, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the strongest reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach. Note that, below, "Super Reach" is also referred to as "SP Reach," "the first half of the Super Reach" as "the first half of the SP," and "the second half of the Super Reach" as "the second half of the SP."

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "jackpot" (the specific display result described above), a confirmed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (such as "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (such as "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as in a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "miss" (the miss display result described above), the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss", after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, other effects, such as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect may be executed that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. As a jackpot performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade performance to indicate that the value of the jackpot game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small jackpot game state, a small jackpot performance to notify the player of the small jackpot game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small jackpot game state and a jackpot game state for some jackpot types (jackpot types for jackpot game states in the same manner as a small jackpot game state, for example, jackpot types for which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot tell whether he is currently in a small jackpot game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of a small jackpot game state and after the end of a jackpot game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

[Various tables related to jackpots]
Various tables relating to jackpots will be explained with reference to Figures 22 and 23.

(Winning type)
22 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning. As shown in FIG. 22, the winning type table shows the probability of winning after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot for each type (kind) of winning in the jackpot.

Specifically, there are three types of jackpots: normal jackpot 1 and 2, and special jackpot 1 to 9. In the following, each round may be indicated with the letter "R." For example, the first round is also called the 1st round, and the second round is also called the 2nd round.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of a 3-round jackpot game state. In normal jackpot 1, this low probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of three rounds. In normal jackpot 2, this low probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot play. In variable jackpot 1, this high probability, high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the probability of a jackpot 6, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of 7 rounds. In the probability of a jackpot 7, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot being 8 or 9 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In the probability of a jackpot being 8 or 9, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

(each random number)
Fig. 23 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in Fig. 23, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not a jackpot is reached. Random 1 is, for example, incremented by one from 1 until it reaches its upper limit of 65536, after which it is incremented again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of jackpot) that determines the type of jackpot.

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining the later fluctuation pattern) that determine the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as the later fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the later fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern. Later fluctuation refers to the latter part of the fluctuation of the special pattern. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the later fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a miss, and for example, is updated by 1, and is incremented from 1 to its upper limit of 65519, and then is incremented again from 1. Random 4 is a random counter that determines the later fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a win, and for example, is incremented by 1, and is incremented from 1 to its upper limit of 239, and then is incremented again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining a previous fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as a previous fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the previous fluctuation among the fluctuation patterns. A previous fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the special pattern fluctuation. For example, Random 5 is incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 251, and then incremented again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining a normal pattern hit) that determines whether or not a hit based on a normal pattern will occur. For example, Random 6 is incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 201, and then incremented again from 1.

In this embodiment, whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot determination (Random 1). Then, which of the multiple types of jackpots will be the jackpot is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot type determination (Random 2). At this time, the jackpot pattern can also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

First, the random number for determining the subsequent fluctuation pattern (Random 3, 4) is used to determine the subsequent fluctuation pattern depending on whether the result is a hit or a miss, and then the random number for determining the previous fluctuation pattern (Random 5) is used to determine the previous fluctuation pattern. In this way, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

(Big hit determination table, big hit type determination table)
24 is a diagram for explaining the big win determination table and the big win type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 24 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with Random 1 is set. There are two types of jackpot determination tables: a normal (non-high probability) jackpot determination table used in the normal state (a game state that is not in the high probability state, i.e., a non-high probability state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

The normal jackpot determination table has jackpot determination values set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 24(a), and the special jackpot determination table has jackpot determination values set for the number of determination values listed in the lower column of FIG. 24(a). The special jackpot determination table has a greater number of jackpot determination values than the normal jackpot determination table, as it is a combination of the jackpot determination values common to the normal jackpot determination table and the jackpot determination values specific to the special jackpot state. This means that in the special jackpot state, a jackpot determination is made with a higher probability than in the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot. If the random number value for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 24(a), it decides to determine a jackpot (normal jackpot or special jackpot) for the special symbol. Note that FIG. 24(a) shows the probability (percentage) of a jackpot or the probability (percentage) of a miss.

Figures 24(b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing jackpot type determination tables. Figure 24(b) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special pattern. Figure 24(c) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the second special pattern.

The first special chart jackpot type determination table in FIG. 24(b) has a number of determination values set for normal jackpots 1 and 2 and special jackpots 1 to 4, which are numerical values to be compared with the random 2 value for jackpot type determination. For example, as shown in FIG. 24(b), for the first special chart, normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, normal jackpot 2 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, special jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, special jackpot 2 is assigned 37 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, special jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and special jackpot 4 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values.

The second special symbol jackpot type judgment table in FIG. 24(c) has judgment values set for the number of judgment values corresponding to each of the special jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2. For example, as shown in FIG. 24(c), for the second special symbol, special jackpot 5 is assigned 10 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 6 is assigned 5 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 7 is assigned 5 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 8 is assigned 70 of 100 Random 2 values, and special jackpot 9 is assigned 10 of 100 Random 2 values.

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 2 matches. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

[Performance control command]
FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining an example of a presentation control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main control board, transmits various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The presentation control command is, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command form shown in FIG. 25 is an example, and other command forms may be used. Note that, in the following, "(H)" indicates hexadecimal, but may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (previous variation pattern) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the previous variation pattern). The previous variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the first half of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of the multiple types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the previous variation patterns identified by that number.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance control CPU 101 receives command 8101 (H) or command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The post-variation on the sub side refers to the latter half of the variation of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of the multiple types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the post-variation patterns identified by that number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (miss designation command) indicating that a miss has been determined. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that a normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that a normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07(H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability change jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08(H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability change jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09(H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability change jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability change jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11(H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability change jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12(H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability change jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 9 has been determined. The miss designation command, normal jackpot 1, 2 designation command, and special jackpot 1-9 designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8C commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the first special pattern. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the second special pattern. The first pattern change designation command and the second pattern change designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern determination designation command that specifies the end of the variation of the first special pattern and/or the second special pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization command that specifies initialization (specifies that the initial screen at power-on is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery command that specifies power outage recovery (specifies that the power outage recovery screen is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state command that specifies the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state command that specifies the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a special-variable state command that specifies the background of the special-variable state. Each of the normal state command, time-saving state command, and special-variable state command, or these are collectively referred to as 95 series commands or background command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a special jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a special jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a special jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a special jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a special jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a special jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a special jackpot start 9 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a special jackpot start 10 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a special jackpot start 11 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1-11 commands, or all of them collectively, are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A1 series command. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying after the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is closed for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying after the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1-11 commands, or all of them collectively, are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command that specifies that a V win has occurred. The high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V large winning port enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command B200(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved memory number designation command that designates that the first reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second reserved memory designation command that designates that the second reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C2 series command.

Commands C4XX(H) and C6XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a variation pattern type judgment, when a starting winning is made at the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port. Of these, command C4XX(H) is a design designation command that indicates the winning judgment results, such as whether or not a winning will occur and the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a special prize opening entry designation command that indicates the passage of the game ball through the special prize opening on the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-hit display off command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned off. A command in which MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT data is 1 is a right-hit display on command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned on. In this embodiment, the right-hit display on command is also referred to as an FD command.

At the time of start winning, the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether or not a jackpot will be reached, the type of jackpot, and the value of the random number for judging the type of fluctuation pattern, which range of judgment values it will be. Then, it sets a value specifying a jackpot and a value specifying the type of jackpot in the EXT data of the designation command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The game control microcomputer 100 also sets a value specifying the range of judgment values as the judgment result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the designation command, and can recognize the type of fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type command.

[Fluctuation pattern]
The contents of the variation patterns and how the variation patterns are determined will be described with reference to Figures 26 to 32.

In this embodiment, multiple types of variation patterns are set by the main game control microcomputer 100. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number and is composed of a combination of a front variation pattern that is a variation pattern corresponding to a front variation and a back variation pattern that is a variation pattern corresponding to a back variation, and each combination contains different contents. The front variation pattern corresponds to the front variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described using FIG. 25, and the back variation pattern corresponds to the back variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described using FIG. 25.

(Main side front fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of previous fluctuation patterns each assigned with a previous fluctuation number, previous fluctuation number 1 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8000(H)) that specifies a normal fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 13 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 2 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8001(H)) that specifies a shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 3 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8002(H)) that specifies a super shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

Previous change number 4 is a previous change pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (reel ×) (a reach that is in reach mode but the movable body 32 does not move). Previous change number 5 is a previous change pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (reel ○) (a reach that is in reach mode and the movable body 32 moves). Previous change number 6 is a previous change pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that is in reach mode and develops into a final reach).

Previous change number 7 is a previous change pattern command (8006 (H)) that specifies that a normal reach (character ×) is executed after one pseudo change. A pseudo change is a variable display (variable display) in which the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and then resumed from the start of the variable display (variable display) to the derived display of the display result of the variable display. Such a performance in which pseudo changes are repeated is also called a pseudo consecutive. By executing a pseudo consecutive, a variable display based on one reserved memory can be made to look like multiple variable displays to the player in a pseudo manner. Note that a variable display that is temporarily stopped and then resumed is also called a "re-variable display". Previous change number 8 is a previous change pattern command (8007 (H)) that specifies that a normal reach (character ○) is executed after one pseudo change. Previous change number 9 is a previous change pattern command (8008 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo change.

Previous change number 10 is a previous change pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (character ×) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 11 is a previous change pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (character ○) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 12 is a previous change pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after two pseudo changes.

A change time is specified for each previous change pattern, and an animation (video) is displayed on the image display device 5 for each change time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (called a frame) that makes up the video. For example, for patterns with previous change numbers 7 to 9, the change time is set to 41,500 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,246. For patterns with previous change numbers 10 to 12, the change time is set to 62,000 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,861.

(Main side rear fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of post-fluctuation patterns each assigned with a post-fluctuation number, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 2 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 3 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 4 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8403(H)) that specifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive fake. A pseudo consecutive fake is a performance that appears to execute a pseudo consecutive but does not execute the pseudo consecutive after all.

Later change number 5 is a later change pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state but does not develop into an SP reach and becomes a miss state). Later change number 6 is a later change pattern command (8405(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach but becomes a miss state in the first half of the SP reach). Later change number 7 is a later change pattern command (8406(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach but becomes a miss state in the second half of the SP reach). Later change number 8 is a later change pattern command (8407(H)) that specifies a final reach (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach but becomes a miss state in the final reach).

Later change number 9 is a later change pattern command (8408(H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state and then a hit state). Later change number 10 is a later change pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the first half of the SP reach). Later change number 11 is a later change pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the second half of the SP reach). Later change number 12 is a later change pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies a final reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach and then becomes a hit state in the final reach).

(Determination of subsequent fluctuation pattern)
The after-variation pattern is determined by using different random counters depending on whether the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot or a miss in the jackpot determination. FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining the after-variation pattern determination table in the case of a miss. As shown in FIG. 28, when the jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination, the after-variation pattern is determined by using the random 3 described in FIG. 23. Furthermore, when the jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination, the after-variation pattern is determined by using different judgment value numbers according to the number of reserved memories after consumption, and the after-variation number determined is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28(a), when the number of reserved memories after consumption is 0, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. Note that the probability of determining one of the post-change numbers 6 to 8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When there is only one reserved memory after consumption, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5-8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6-8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6-8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after consumption is two, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 2, 4, and 5-8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6-8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6-8) is approximately 1/102.

If the number of reserved memories after consumption is three, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 3, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6 to 8 that develops into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the subsequent variation pattern is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, and further, the subsequent variation number is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, so the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, which adds variety to the game and increases the interest of the game.

Figure 29 is a diagram for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. As shown in Figure 29, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using Random 4 described in Figure 23. Furthermore, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using different determination value numbers depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(a), when a normal jackpot 1 or 2 or a special jackpot 1, 2, or 5 to 8 is determined, a post-change pattern is determined from post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability of determining one of post-change numbers 10 to 12, which develops into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

If either the guaranteed jackpot 3 or 9 is determined, one of the post-change patterns is determined from the post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value number is set for each of the post-change patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-change numbers 10 to 12 that develop into the SP reach or final reach (selection rate of the post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

If the probability of winning jackpot 4 is reached, one of the post-change patterns is selected from post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value is set for each of the post-change patterns. The probability of being selected as one of the post-change numbers 10 to 12, which develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, the subsequent fluctuation pattern is determined using different judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, so the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, which adds variety to the game and makes it more interesting.

Also, as shown in FIG. 28, the probability of being determined to be one of the variable numbers 6 to 8 after developing into the SP Reach or Final Reach is approximately 1/102 when there is a miss, but is higher at approximately 1/1.1 when there is a jackpot, so if there is a development into the SP Reach or Final Reach, the player can be made to look forward to the occurrence of a jackpot.

(Determination of previous fluctuation pattern)
30 is a diagram for explaining the previous fluctuation pattern determination table. The previous fluctuation pattern is determined by using the number of random 5 determination values that differ according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that is determined first. Furthermore, the previous fluctuation number that is determined also differs according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that is determined first.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30(a), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 30(b), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 30(c), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 30(d), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 4 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 30(e), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 5 or 9 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 4 or 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 30(f), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 6 or 10 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 4, 7, or 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 30(g), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 7 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 30(h), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 11 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 5, 8, or 11. As shown in FIG. 30(i), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 8 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 6, 9, or 12. As shown in FIG. 30(j), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 12 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 6, 9, or 12.

(All fluctuation patterns)
Fig. 31 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total fluctuation pattern on the main side. When the rear fluctuation pattern and the front fluctuation pattern are determined as described in Fig. 28 to Fig. 30, it becomes one of the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in Fig. 31.

Figure 32 is a diagram for explaining an example of all fluctuation patterns on the sub side. Furthermore, on the sub side, fluctuation patterns of sub fluctuation numbers 1 to 26 are also defined so as to correspond to each of the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 1 to 26.

[Each preview performance]
FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the lottery table in each advance notice performance. In this embodiment, an advance notice performance may be executed that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol will become a predetermined jackpot symbol. The advance notice performance is a performance that suggests or predicts the occurrence of a jackpot, and is also a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot. The advance notice performance includes a group advance notice performance (also called a group advance notice or a group performance) and a SP first half title advance notice performance (also called a SP first half title advance notice).

The group preview performance is a performance that displays an image of multiple objects progressing in a group. The multiple objects include any object that progresses, such as characters such as people, fish, and animals, or machines such as airplanes and cars. There may be one type of object such as a character, or multiple types. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of group preview performances are provided. Specifically, a six-person group preview in which six characters dressed as maids progress in a group, a Bakuchu group preview in which a mouse character with a bomb body named Bakuchu progresses in a group, and a Boingo group preview in which a character named Boingo progresses in a group can be executed.

In this embodiment, when a post-change pattern of post-change numbers 6-8 and 10-12 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined, whether or not the group preview performance will be performed is determined by a group preview lottery, and the type of group preview performance to be performed is determined.

Figure 33(a) shows a lottery table for executing a group preview lottery on stage A. In this embodiment, even if a variable display is performed based on the same fluctuation pattern, multiple types of stages are provided, each with a different presentation style (background image, BGM, sound effects, characters that appear, etc.). As will be described in more detail later, in this embodiment, stage A is a stage where a presentation is performed by a character called Yume Yume, who is one of six characters dressed as maids.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), if the after-change pattern of after-change numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to a miss is determined, the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 15%, of which the six-person group preview is determined with a probability of 13%, and the Boingo group preview is determined with a probability of 2%. Also, if the after-change pattern of after-change numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to a win is determined, the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 85%, of which the six-person group preview is determined with a probability of 55%, and the Boingo group preview is determined with a probability of 30%.

Considering that the probability of a miss is about 319/320 and the probability of the subsequent variation pattern of subsequent variation numbers 6 to 8 being determined is about 1/102, the probability of the subsequent variation pattern of variation numbers 6 to 8 being determined when a miss is about 1/102. In this case, the probability of the group forecast being executed is about 15%, so the probability of the group forecast being executed when a miss is about 0.15%. On the other hand, considering that the probability of a jackpot is about 1/320 and the probability of the subsequent variation pattern of subsequent variation numbers 10 to 12 being determined is about 1/1.1, the probability of the subsequent variation pattern of variation numbers 10 to 12 being determined when a hit is about 1/320. In this case, the probability of the group forecast being executed is about 85%, so the probability of the group forecast being executed when a hit is about 0.27%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a jackpot when the group forecast is executed is about 64%. The reliability (expectation) of the group forecast is not limited to 64%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be executed to give the player hope that a jackpot will occur.

Figure 33(b) shows a lottery table for executing a group preview lottery on stage B. As will be described in more detail later, in this embodiment, stage B is a stage where a performance is performed by a character called Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), if the after-variation pattern of after-variation numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to a miss is determined, the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 10%, of which the group preview is determined to be the Bakuchu group preview with a probability of 8%, and the Boingo group preview with a probability of 2%. Also, if the after-variation pattern of after-variation numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to a win is determined, the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 90%, of which the group preview is determined to be the Bakuchu group preview with a probability of 60%, and the Boingo group preview with a probability of 30%.

As mentioned above, the probability that the subsequent variation pattern of variation numbers 6 to 8 is determined when a player misses is approximately 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group forecast is executed is approximately 10%, so the probability that the group forecast is executed when a player misses is approximately 0.10%. On the other hand, the probability that the subsequent variation pattern of variation numbers 10 to 12 is determined when a player wins is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group forecast is executed is approximately 90%, so the probability that the group forecast is executed when a player wins is approximately 0.28%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a jackpot occurring when the group forecast is executed is approximately 74%. Note that the reliability (expectation) of the group forecast is not limited to 74%, and as long as it exceeds 50%, the player can expect a jackpot to occur when the group forecast is executed.

The SP First Half Title Preview is an effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur if the game develops into an SP Reach, based on the display mode of the text image showing the title of the first half of the SP Reach. In this embodiment, the display of the text image of the SP First Half Title is executed on both Stage A and Stage B, but the preview effect that changes the display mode of the text image of the SP First Half Title is executed only on Stage B. Note that a preview effect that changes the display mode of the text image of the SP First Half Title may also be executed on Stage A.

In this embodiment, when a post-change pattern of post-change numbers 6 to 12 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined, the SP first half title preview lottery determines whether or not it will be executed, and the type of SP first half title preview to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 33(c), if the after-change pattern of after-change numbers 6 to 8, which correspond to a miss, is determined, there is a 20% probability that the SP first half title announcement will be made, and if the after-change pattern of after-change numbers 10 to 12, which correspond to a win, there is an 80% probability that the SP first half title announcement will be made.

As mentioned above, the probability that the subsequent variation pattern of the variation numbers 6 to 8 is determined when the player loses is approximately 1/102. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title announcement is executed is approximately 20%, so the probability that the SP first half title announcement is executed when the player loses is approximately 0.20%. On the other hand, the probability that the subsequent variation pattern of the variation numbers 10 to 12 is determined when the player wins is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title announcement is executed is approximately 80%, so the probability that the SP first half title announcement is executed when the player wins is approximately 0.25%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a jackpot when the SP first half title announcement is executed is approximately 56%. Note that the reliability (expectation) of the SP first half title announcement is not limited to 56%, and if it exceeds 50%, the player can expect a jackpot to occur when it is executed.

Thus, the reliability (expected jackpot) of the group preview is 64% (in the case of stage A) or 74% (in the case of stage B), while the reliability (expected jackpot) of the SP first half title preview is 56%, making the group preview more reliable than the SP first half title preview. For this reason, when the group preview is executed, it is more advantageous for the player than when the SP first half title preview is executed, and players tend to expect the group preview to be executed more than the SP first half title preview.

In addition, the Boingo Group Forecast in Stage A is executed with only a 2% probability when it is a miss, but with a 30% probability when it is a hit, so when the Boingo Group Forecast is executed, it is highly likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the Six-person Group Forecast in Stage A is executed with a 13% probability when it is a miss, but with a 55% probability when it is a hit, so even if the Six-person Group Forecast is executed, it is more likely to be a miss than the Boingo Group Forecast. For this reason, when the Boingo Group Forecast is executed, it is more advantageous for the player than when the Six-person Group Forecast is executed, and players tend to expect the Boingo Group Forecast to be executed more than the Six-person Group Forecast.

Similarly, the Boingo Group Forecast in Stage B is executed with only a 2% probability on a miss, but with a 30% probability on a hit, so when the Boingo Group Forecast is executed, it is highly likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the Bakuchu Group Forecast in Stage B is executed with an 8% probability on a miss, but with a 60% probability on a hit, so even if the Bakuchu Group Forecast is executed, it is more likely to be a miss than the Boingo Group Forecast. For this reason, when the Boingo Group Forecast is executed, it is more advantageous for the player than when the Bakuchu Group Forecast is executed, and players tend to expect the Boingo Group Forecast to be executed more than the Bakuchu Group Forecast.

Furthermore, the six-person group announcement in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% when it is a miss, but with a probability of 55% when it is a hit. On the other hand, the explosive chocolate group announcement in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% when it is a miss, but with a probability of 60% when it is a hit. For this reason, the explosive chocolate group announcement in stage B is executed more frequently when it is a hit than the six-person group announcement in stage A. As a result, when the explosive chocolate group announcement is executed in stage B, it is more advantageous for the player than when the six-person group announcement is executed in stage A, and players tend to expect the six-person group announcement to be executed more than the six-person group announcement.

The reliability of the group preview in stage A and the reliability of the group preview in stage B may be designed to be the same. In this case, it is sufficient that both the group preview in stage A and the group preview in stage B are more reliable than the SP first half title preview, and the Boingo group preview is more reliable than the 6-person group preview and the Bakuchu group preview.

[Action]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern processing)
34 is a flow chart showing an example of a game control main process. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started up, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 judges whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it is sufficient to judge in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is sufficient to check or inspect the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors to judge whether the recovery condition can be satisfied.

When the restoration condition is met (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes a restoration process (step S4) and then executes a setting confirmation process (step S5). The restoration process in step S4 causes the CPU 103 to set a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process (step S6) and then executes a setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by the operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc., are stopped, and control may be performed such that a missing symbol or the like is frozen and a display corresponding to a game stop state other than a missing symbol is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when the power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102, and turns off the display monitor 29. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, a specific image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a specific sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting confirmation state. When the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or if the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). The CPU 103 then sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt process.

(Game control timer interrupt processing)
Fig. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of a game control timer interrupt process. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flow chart of Fig. 35. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 35 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main side error process to perform an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output process to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots that have occurred), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the special state has been entered) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display unit 26, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting up the normal symbol memory display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. The special symbol process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 35. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 35 after the special pattern process is completed.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as whether or not there is a reach), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as the type of reach presentation), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process of making settings to change the special pattern in the special pattern 1 variable display section 21 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 22, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22, and setting the special symbol to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for opening the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when the set value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the start winning judgment process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning judgment process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 36. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (step S51). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step S52 (N in step S52), the storage value of a start port buffer provided in a game control buffer setting section (not shown), for example, is set to "1" (step S53).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step S52 (Y in step S52), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown. If the number of reserved second special charts is not the upper limit in step S55 (N in step S55), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (step S56).

After executing either step S53 or step S56, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. Also, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory count is also updated to add 1 (step S58). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM 1 for determining a jackpot, the random number value RANDOM 2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number values RANDOM 3 and RANDOM 4 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown) (step S59). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit (not shown), while when the start port buffer value is "2", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM1 for determining a jackpot and the random number value RANDOM2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the result of the variable display of the special and decorative patterns is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the result of the variable display is a "jackpot". The random number values RANDOM3 and RANDOM4 for determining the variable pattern are used to determine the variable pattern including the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns.

Following the processing of step S59, the start port winning designation command is set to be sent according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is made to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is made to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 35 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of step S60, the CPU 103 stores a random number value in a storage area corresponding to the reserved memory (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start winning determination processing. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start winning of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal special symbol processing. As shown in FIG. 38, in the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 judges whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the second special symbol) (step S1001). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (N in step S1001), it judges whether a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step S1002), the normal special symbol processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step S1003), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing is executed after the next timer interruption after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is set, so that the customer waiting demo designation command is not transmitted again. Such a customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

When there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines whether the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (step S1004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating "second" (i.e., data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (a flag indicating whether the special pattern process is being performed on the first special pattern or the second special pattern) (step S1005). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special pattern pointer (step S1006).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the second special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the display of the second special symbol changes based on the data in the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the display of the first special symbol changes based on the data in the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 indicated by the special pattern pointer based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (step S1009). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (step S1010), reads out Random R (random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot) from the reserved memory buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot that was extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 23) with the random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot, and if they match, determines that there is a jackpot. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of determining whether or not there is a jackpot.

In the process of determining whether or not a jackpot is to be obtained, when the game state is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the game state is in a non-probability variable state (normal game state and time-saving state). Specifically, a probability variable jackpot determination table (table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 24(a) are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and a normal time jackpot determination table (table in which the numbers in the upper column of FIG. 24(a) are set) in which a smaller number of jackpot determination values are set than in the probability variable jackpot determination table are provided. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the game state is in a probability variable state, and when the game state is in a probability variable state, performs the process of determining whether or not a jackpot is obtained using the probability variable jackpot determination table, and when the game state is in a normal state or time-saving state, performs the process of determining whether or not a jackpot is obtained using the normal time jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining a jackpot (RANDOM 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 24(a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it determines that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012. Note that determining whether or not to determine whether or not to determine a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also means determining whether or not to determine whether or not the stopped symbol in the special symbol is a jackpot symbol.

Whether the current game state is in a high probability state is confirmed by checking whether the high probability state flag is set. The high probability state flag is set when the game state transitions to a high probability state, and is reset when the high probability state ends. Specifically, the high probability state flag is set in the process of ending a jackpot game, and is then reset at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stopped pattern is displayed stationary when either the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) or the next jackpot has been determined, whichever occurs first, is met.

If the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S1011), proceed to step S1015 described below.

If the value of the random number (RANDOM 1) for determining a jackpot in step S1011 matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table to be used to determine the jackpot type as one of the multiple types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 24(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 24(c) are selected. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 24(b). Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 24(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining the type of jackpot extracted during the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and uses the selected jackpot type determination table to determine the type of jackpot and the jackpot pattern that correspond to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 2) stored in the reserved memory buffer (step S1013).

The CPU 103 also sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol to be stopped (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, the special symbol is set to a "-" symbol, which is a losing symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the special symbol is set to the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 sends a display result designation command (step S1016) and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 39, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on Random 3 and Random 4 according to the number of reserved memories and the presence or absence of a jackpot (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a miss, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 28 according to the number of reserved memories, and determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 3. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 29 according to the type of jackpot, and determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 4.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the front fluctuation pattern based on RANDOM 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects a front fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 30 according to the front fluctuation pattern determined in S1102, and determines the front fluctuation pattern based on the selected front fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of RANDOM 5.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a change pattern command corresponding to the determined change pattern (front change pattern and rear change pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern in the change time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a pattern change designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern change process (step S112) (step S1106).

(Special pattern variation processing)
Fig. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in Fig. 40, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). When the variation time timer does not time out (N in step S1202), the processing ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 41, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets an end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and performs control to derive and display the stop symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 (step S1301). If data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 is ended, and if data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 is ended. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big win flag is set (step S1303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability bonus flag and the time-saving flag (step S1304). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start command and a right-hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

Also, by referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROM 101, data indicating the opening mode of the normal large prize winning port and the V large prize winning port, such as the number of times to open (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time between rounds (for example, 0.5 seconds), are set in a predetermined memory area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal jackpot of 3R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In the case of a jackpot of 5R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 3R and 5R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 4R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a jackpot of 10R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 8R and 10R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 9R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. The data on the number of times it was opened (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening counter to count the number of times it was opened.

The large prize opening control timer is also set to a value equivalent to the fanfare time, which is the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the large prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large prize opening is opened and the round begins. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the game is in a time-saving state is set (step S1309). If the time-saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1316. If the time-saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving state (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (step S1311). If the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (Y in step S1311), the CPU 103 determines that the duration of the time-saving state has ended and resets the time-saving flag (step S1312). As a result, when a fluctuation display that results in a miss display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time-saving state, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In step S1311, if the time-saving counter value is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not a high probability flag indicating a high probability state is set (step S1313). If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S1313), the high probability flag is reset (step S1314). Next, in response to the game state transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1315) and proceeds to step S1316. If the high probability flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process of step S1314 is not performed and the process proceeds to step S1315. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Pre-opening process for big win)
Fig. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening pre-processing. As shown in Fig. 42, in the big win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by -1 (subtract update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big win opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big win opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is terminated.

If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a command to specify that the large prize opening is open is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the regular large prize opening (step S1404). As a result, the regular large prize opening is opened in the first round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the large prize opening control timer to a large prize opening opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) corresponding to the maximum time that the large prize opening can be opened (large prize opening opening time) based on the opening pattern data (e.g., data stored in RAM 102 by step S1306) (step S1405). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large prize opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and ends the process.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
43 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening process. As shown in FIG. 43, in the big win opening process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the big win opening control timer (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (step S1502). If the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. If the value of the large prize opening control timer has not reached 0 (N in step S1502), the process determines whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (step S1503). Whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open can be determined from the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V prize switch 24 is on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (Y in step S1504), the prize number counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the high probability determination flag is set (step S1506). The high probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the machine will be controlled to the high probability state when a V win occurs. If the high probability determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the high probability determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step S1507), the high probability determination flag is set (step S1508), a high probability determination device pass command is sent (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter has not reached the predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 performs either control to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large prize opening, or control to drive the solenoid 83 to close the V large prize opening (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates (step S1513) the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-large prize opening process (step S116), and ends the process.

(Post-opening processing)
44 is a flow chart showing an example of a big win release post-processing. As shown in FIG 44, in the big win release post-processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the opening number counter is 0 or not (step S1601).

If the value of the opening count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (the time at which the jackpot game is notified, for example, on the image display device 5 that the jackpot game has ended) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (step S1603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), and the process ends.

In step S1601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the large prize opening control timer is set to a value equivalent to the interval time from the end of a round to the start of the next round (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is before the round in which the V large prize opening is opened (also called the V opening round), i.e., whether the next round is a V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal large prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 to open the V large prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify whether the jackpot opening is in progress (step S1610). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 45, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer in which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the jackpot control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the high probability flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. If the high probability flag is set in step S1704 (Y in step S1704), the high probability flag indicating that the game is in a high probability state is set (step S1707). Next, a high probability state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), the high probability flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time-saving flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is active (step S1710), and the time-saving count counter is set to 150 (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, if the probability of a bonus has not been set in step S1704 (N in step S1704), then in step S1705, a time-saving flag is set indicating that the game is in a time-saving state (step S1705), the time-saving counter is set to 100 (step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time-saving state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 is able to recognize whether the game is in a special, time-saving, or normal state based on the special state designation command sent from the CPU 103.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described.

(Performance control main processing)
When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control main process. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 46 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L, 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

(Performance control process)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control process. The performance control process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 46. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 47, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a judgment, decision, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice performance is performed based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the reserved display is executed based on the reserved memory number specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Fig. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in Fig. 48, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a miss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a miss, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variable pattern has been received as a variable pattern command (step S7103).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a command corresponding to a non-reach fluctuation pattern, it uses the data table for determining a losing symbol to determine the display result of a losing symbol that does not result in a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol (step S7105), and proceeds to step S7106.

If the process of step S7103 determines that the pattern is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern (if the pattern is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern), the stopping patterns of the performance patterns that make up the reach pattern combination are determined (step S7104), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Also, if the processing in step S7101 does not determine a miss (if a jackpot is determined), the CPU 101 for controlling the presentation determines the stopping patterns of the presentation patterns that make up the combination of jackpot patterns according to the type of jackpot (step S7102), and proceeds to step S7106.

Next, a performance setting process (step S7106) is executed to set various performances in the variable display (for example, group preview setting process), and then the process proceeds to step S7107.

In step S7107, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of performance control patterns. In step S7107, depending on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command and the various performance control (performance operation) patterns specified by the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the processing of step S7106, one of the multiple pattern variation control patterns stored in the pattern variation control pattern table that corresponds to the various specified performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in ROM 121 stores multiple types of pattern change control patterns that indicate the control contents of various performance operations, such as the display operation of the changing performance patterns in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from when the change in the performance patterns begins to when the final performance pattern is stopped and displayed, the display operation in a reach performance, the display operation due to a pseudo consecutive performance, and the display operation in a preview performance.

In addition, each pattern change control pattern includes control data for controlling various performance operations according to the display change of the performance pattern, such as a performance control process timer setting value, a performance control process timer judgment value, performance display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and an end code, and the contents of various performance controls and the switching timing of the performance controls are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the processing of step S7109, control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) is started (step S7110) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data). For example, a command is output to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a performance pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern according to the display control execution data. Also, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 to control the turning on/off of light-emitting elements such as various LEDs. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step S7112), and the variable display start setting processing ends.

(Group advance notice setting process)
49 is a flowchart showing an example of the group advance notice setting process. The group advance notice setting process is a process included in the variable display start setting process (step S171).

As shown in FIG. 49, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has received a variation pattern command capable of executing a group preview (step S7061). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has received a variation pattern command including a subsequent variation pattern of subsequent variation numbers 6 to 8 when it loses, and whether or not it has received a variation pattern command including a subsequent variation pattern of subsequent variation numbers 10 to 12 when it wins. Note that the variation pattern including the subsequent variation pattern of subsequent variation numbers 6 to 8 is the variation pattern of main variation numbers 8 to 15, and the variation pattern including the subsequent variation pattern of subsequent variation numbers 10 to 12 is the variation pattern of main variation numbers 18 to 26.

If the CPU 120 for controlling the performance does not receive a fluctuation pattern command capable of executing a group preview (N in step S7061), it ends the process. On the other hand, if the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a fluctuation pattern command capable of executing a group preview (Y in step S7061), it converts the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command into the number of frames (step S7062). For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 22, the previous fluctuation time is 41,500 msec, so the number of frames is about 1,246, and the subsequent fluctuation time is 91,900 msec, so the number of frames is about 3,000. Also, for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26, the previous fluctuation time is 62,000 msec, so the number of frames is about 1,861, and the subsequent fluctuation time is 142,800 msec, so the number of frames is about 4,288.

The performance control CPU 120 executes a group preview lottery (step S7063). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses the group preview lottery table shown in Figures 33 (a) and (b) to determine whether or not to execute a group preview based on the post-variable number, and the type of group preview to execute.

The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group preview lottery has been won. If the performance control CPU 120 has not won the group preview lottery (N in step S7064), it ends the process. On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 has won the group preview lottery (Y in step S7064), it extracts a performance control pattern for executing the group preview according to the stage (step S7065) and ends the process.

For example, as shown in Example 1, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 22 and stage A, the performance control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 985th frame of the 1246 frames in the previous fluctuation. Also, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 22 and stage B, the performance control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 1385th frame of the 3000 frames in the later fluctuation.

For example, as shown in Example 2, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26 and stage A, the performance control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 1600th frame of the 1861 frames in the previous fluctuation. Also, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26 and stage B, the performance control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 2000th frame of the 4288 frames in the later fluctuation.

In this way, in this embodiment, in the case of stage A, the group announcement is executed in the pre-change, whereas in the case of stage B, the group announcement is executed in the post-change.

(Group notice execution processing)
50 is a flowchart showing an example of the group advance notice execution process. The group advance notice execution process is a process included in the variable display performance process (step S172).

As shown in FIG. 50, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts one frame from the number of frames corresponding to the performance control pattern set in the variable display start setting process (step S7201). For example, when a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of main variation number 26 is set, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts one frame from the total number of frames, which is frame 6149.

If the performance control CPU 120 has not set a performance control pattern for executing the group preview (N in step S7202), it ends the process. On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 has set a performance control pattern for executing the group preview (Y in step S7202), it determines whether or not the frame for the execution timing of the group preview has been reached (S7203). For example, in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 26 and stage A, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 1600th frame has been reached.

If the frame for the execution timing of the group announcement has not yet been reached (N in step S7203), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, if the frame for the execution timing of the group announcement has been reached (Y in step S7203), the performance control CPU 120 controls various performance devices to execute the group announcement (step S7204). For example, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to light, blink, or turn off based on the group announcement lighting table shown in Figures 65 to 71, which will be described later, and controls the speakers 8R and 8L to output sound. After that, the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko game machine 1 configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the ball from the left to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left side of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started. When the first special symbol game results in the display mode of the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 showing the big win symbol, a big win occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the first special symbol game are normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hit promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to make a right hit. The right-hit promotion effect is executed by displaying text (for example, "right hit") and a graphic image (for example, an arrow pointing in the right direction, which is the direction of the second flow path) on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage a right hit, and also by lighting up the right-hit display unit 9030 of the special symbol LED board 20 and the right-hit display unit 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 50 with lighting means such as LEDs to encourage a right hit. This causes the player to make a right hit from that point on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, three times for a 3R regular jackpot, and ten times for a 10R special jackpot). The jackpot opening is continued until a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), whichever comes first.

When the ending performance following the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times). Furthermore, if a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is controlled to a high probability state for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) of fluctuations that are controlled to the time-saving state.

Even in the special probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round, the right-hit promotion effect continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 9030, and the right-hit display unit 9055. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also called the first hit) occurs, the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion effect, even in the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the time-saving state, control is performed to shorten the average special chart change time (period during which the special chart changes) more than in the normal state, and control is performed to shorten the average regular chart change time (period during which the regular chart changes) more than in the normal state, and further control is performed to increase the probability of a "regular chart hit" in the regular chart game more than in the normal state. Also, in the time-saving state, electric chute support control may be performed to increase the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second start winning port is opened, thereby increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters the second start winning port, making it easier to win in the second start winning port (high entry, high frequency).

In the time-saving state after the jackpot round, the released game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, starting the second special game. If the result of the second special game is that the special game 2 variable display section 9022 shows a jackpot pattern, a jackpot (also called a consecutive win) occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the second special game include guaranteed jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 9030, and right-hit display unit 9055 continues from the first jackpot.

During a round in which a jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot opening opens a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Each opening of the jackpot opening continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first.

Then, when the ending presentation after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state and the probability variable state (high probability, high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) in the same way as the first hit. Even in the probability variable state after the jackpot round in a consecutive hit, the right-hit promotion presentation continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 9030, and the right-hit display unit 9055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, consecutive hits occur in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends, and the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion presentation, even in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends in the consecutive hit.

When the probability variable state or time-saving state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the probability variable state or time-saving state after the first jackpot round ends, or the probability variable state or time-saving state after the consecutive jackpot round ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 9030, and right-hit display unit 9055 also ends. As a result, the player will again use the left hit to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area.

[Swarm preview production design]
Next, the design of the group preview performance during the development stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Group advance notice work process)
Fig. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of a group advance notice work process. As shown in Fig. 51, the group advance notice work process includes, in the order of work, a summary creation process (step S901), an animation creation process (step S902), a main video production process (step S903), an authoring process (step S904), a sound creation process (step S905), a lottery incorporation process (step S906), a video incorporation process (step S907), a sound incorporation process (step S908), a lamp data creation process (step S909), and a lamp incorporation process (step S910).

In the outline creation process of step S901, an outline is created for newly designing a group preview for the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the animation production process in step S902, storyboards for the animation used in the group previews are created, characters and backgrounds to be used in the animation are designed, a video storyboard is created that serves as a script for creating the animation, CG is produced for the animation, and the actual animation is produced.

In the main video production process of step S903, the video data used in the group preview is created using the animation created in the animation production process. The video data used in the group preview is created in this main video production process, but the playback time of the created video data is created longer than the execution time of the group preview actually executed in the pachinko game machine 1. As a result, even if the execution time of the group preview is extended due to a design change, the video data created in this video production process can be used as is without being changed. In addition, in this video production process, the playback timing is also designed for each video data so that the video data is played at a timing predetermined for each performance. For example, in the variation pattern of main variation number 22, the group preview animation of stage A is incorporated into the main video so that the group preview is executed from the 985th frame, and the group preview animation of stage B is incorporated into the main video so that the group preview is executed from the 1385th frame. Additionally, in the variation pattern of main variation number 26, the swarm preview animation for stage A is incorporated into the main video so that it is executed from the 1600th frame, and the swarm preview animation for stage B is incorporated into the main video so that it is executed from the 2000th frame.

In the authoring process of step S904, the video data created in this video production process is used to create software (program) for video playback to be executed on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the sound creation process of step S905, various sound data such as background music (BGM) and sound effects used in the group preview are created to match the video of the group preview.

In the lottery incorporation process of step S906, data is created for various lotteries related to the group notice, such as the group notice lottery. In addition, in this lottery incorporation process, the expectation level (reliability) of the group notice, etc. is designed. The created lottery data is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as lottery software executed in the pachinko game 1.

In the video embedding process of step S907, the video playback software created in the authoring process is embedded in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as video playback software executed in the group preview.

In the sound incorporation process of step S908, the sound data created in the sound creation process is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as software for sound playback executed by the group preview.

In the lamp data creation process of step S908, various lighting data such as lighting, blinking, and extinguishing for lighting means (light-emitting means) such as lamps and LEDs used in group warnings is created.

In the lamp installation process of step S910, the data for various lamps, LEDs, etc., such as turning on, blinking, and turning off, created in the lamp data creation process, is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as software for lamp playback executed in the pachinko game 1.

Through the work in each of these processes, data such as lottery, video, and sound related to the group preview performance is created and incorporated as software to be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(This video was produced by)
The actual video production process for the group preview will be specifically described with reference to Figures 52 to 55. Figures 52 to 55 are diagrams for explaining an example of the actual video production process.

As shown in FIG. 52, first, in STEP 1, character images to be used in the group preview are prepared. For example, a main character named Yume Yume is used in the group preview, and four images g1 to g4 are prepared to show Yume Yume's running style. Note that such character images are created in the animation production process.

Next, in STEP 2, a video creation tool is used to create a video of a character stamping its feet using four character images g1 to g4. For example, when the video creation tool is started, a timeline screen 710 is displayed. In the timeline screen 710, one or more layers are arranged on the vertical axis, and the horizontal axis is the time axis. The layers are arranged in numerical order from the top, such as layer 1, 2, 3, etc., and the higher an image is placed (i.e., the lower the number), the closer it is to the back on the screen of the image display device 5. The number of layers and the width of the time axis can be set to the user's desired value.

In STEP 2, each character image g1 to g4 is arranged in a column of a specific layer. For example, in the example shown in (a), character images g1 to g4 are arranged on the timeline corresponding to layer 1, constituting video data A1 to A4. Video data A1 to A4 results in a stepping video pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4.

By repeatedly placing the set of stepping video data A1 to A4 created as described above on a timeline, a video of the character stepping is repeated. For example, in the example shown in (b), the video data A1 to A4 are repeated for three periods. This stepping video data is then output. In this manner, stepping videos are created for other characters in a similar manner.

As shown in FIG. 53, in STEP 3, a video in which a character progresses is created. First, the screen size of the image display device 5 is set to a predetermined size. For example, in the example shown in (a), the width of the X axis along the horizontal direction on the screen is set to 800, and the widths of the X and Y axes along the vertical direction on the screen are set to 640. Note that the value corresponding to the center position on both the X and Y axes is 0. Therefore, the screen size is -400≦X≦400, -320≦Y≦320.

Using the setting screen 730 of the video creation tool, it is possible to set the width of movement of the video data. For example, in the example shown in (b), one period of the stepping video data A1 to A4 of the pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4 is set to 500, and it is set to move linearly on the X axis in the range of -1000≦X≦500.

As shown in FIG. 54, in STEP 4, a video is created in which multiple characters progress. For example, in the example shown in (a), video data is created using a similar creation procedure in which a character called Jam-chan, used in the group preview, moves in a straight line on the X-axis in the range of -1000≦X≦500.

As described above, when video data is created for multiple characters moving in a straight line on the X-axis in the range of -1000≦X≦500, the video data for each character is placed on a different layer, as shown in (b). Also, by shifting the time axis between characters, the timing of their appearance can be shifted. Furthermore, by shifting the Y-axis positions between characters, the positions on the Y-axis at which characters appear can be shifted. The Z-axis is the axis between the front side (near side) and back side (depth side) of the screen, and by inputting a value, the performance of the group preview (the Boingo group preview in this embodiment) can be designed so that the characters move between the front side (near side) and back side (depth side) of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 55, in STEP 5, the group preview video is finally created. For example, as shown in (a), the group preview video is completed by arranging the video data of six types of characters, characters A to F, on the timeline of the layer.

Also, by changing the length of the video data on the timeline, the speed at which the characters move can be changed while maintaining the animation itself, which is a repeat of three periods of a pattern of character images g1-g4. For example, the video data of character C placed on layer 10 is the same as the video data of character C placed on layer 9, in which a repeat of three periods of a pattern of character images g1-g4, but the length on the timeline of the video data of character C placed on layer 10 is shorter than the length on the timeline of the video data of character C placed on layer 9. As a result, character C placed on layer 10 progresses on the screen at a faster speed than character C placed on layer 9, while maintaining the same animation as character C placed on layer 9.

In the six-person group preview, multiple characters are not placed at the same timing and speed in the coordinates arranged on the screen. For example, in the example shown in Figure 55(a), video data for multiple characters is not placed on the timeline at the same timing and for the same length.

Furthermore, as shown in (b), by placing video data of dust clouds on layer 1, which is the layer furthest from the back, it is possible to combine video of multiple characters progressing with the dust cloud video.

In this way, video data for a group preview in which multiple characters progress can be created. Note that, in the actual creation of the video data for the group preview, it is assumed that the game board 2 will cover the edge of a screen of a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches), and the video data for the group preview is created with a mask covering the area of the screen where the game board 2 will cover. Furthermore, so that it can be applied to sizes larger than the predetermined screen size (for example, 19 inches) (for example, 20 inches), the video data for the group preview is created up to the area corresponding to the larger size.

(Group advance notice work process)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the overall image of the six-person group notice. As shown in FIG. 56, in the six-person group notice included in the group notice performance, an image of six characters such as maid A to maid F progressing in a group is displayed. The group notice performance is not limited to six characters, and multiple characters of each character appear, making it the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed in the pachinko game machine 1. Since maid A to maid F are all wearing the same or almost the same maid clothes, it is difficult to distinguish the types of characters except by recognizing them by their faces. In this embodiment, the patterns of the aprons worn by each character are different for each character, but it is difficult to recognize the difference at first glance. Note that maid A is Yume Yume-chan, the main character, and maid B is Jam-chan, the character with the next highest priority after Yume Yume-chan, the main character.

In the six-person group preview, the character image may fit within the display area of the image display device 5, or part of the character image (for example, the face or legs) may not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and may extend beyond it. For example, of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, there are six maids A (Yume Yume-chan), but five of them have their faces visible. In other words, of the six maids A who appear, one has a face that does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, there are five maids B (Jam-chan), but four of them have their faces visible. In other words, of the five maids B who appear, one has a face that does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, there are five maids C who appear, but three of them have their faces visible. In other words, of the five maids C who appear, two have their faces that do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, five maids D appear, but the faces of three of them are visible. In other words, of the five maids D who appear, the faces of two do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, five maids E appear, but the faces of three of them are visible. In other words, of the five maids E who appear, the faces of two do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, five maids F appear, but the faces of three of them are visible. In other words, of the five maids F who appear, the faces of two do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5.

In this way, the multiple characters displayed in the group preview performance include characters whose entire bodies are displayed to fit within the display area of the screen, and characters whose entire bodies are displayed to fit within the display area of the screen, with only a portion of the entire body (e.g., the face) not fitting within the display area of the screen, and other portions of the entire body (e.g., parts other than the face) fitting within the display area of the screen.

The multiple characters displayed in the group preview performance include characters with low importance in the content of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as Maids C to F, and characters with higher importance than Maids C to F in the content of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as Maid A (Yume Yume-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan), and Maid A and Maid B are less likely to have their faces displayed within the display area of the screen and the rest of their body displayed within the display area of the screen than Maids C to F. In other words, the six-person group preview is designed so that Maid A and Maid B are more likely to appear with their faces visible than Maids C to F.

(Auxiliary display)
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the auxiliary display used in the group preview performance. As shown in FIG. 57, in the group preview performance, an auxiliary display is performed to emphasize that the character is moving forward. In this embodiment, an image of dust cloud is displayed as the auxiliary display. If the image of dust cloud is displayed near the character, or more effectively, so as to follow behind the moving character, the player can be made to think that dust cloud is generated by the character's movement, and thus the manner in which the character runs through can be emphasized. As shown in FIG. 55(b) above, the image of dust cloud as the auxiliary display is arranged on layer 1 located at the rearmost side. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 57, the image of dust cloud is arranged to be located behind any of the characters that appear.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57, the layer on which maid E's image is placed is in front of the layer on which maid C's image is placed, so maid E's image is displayed in front of maid C's image. On the other hand, the auxiliary display image corresponding to maid E is positioned behind both maid E's image and maid C's image.

In this way, when the display of maid E and the display of maid C overlap, the display of that maid E takes priority over the display of the other maid C, whereas when the auxiliary display corresponding to that maid E and the display of maid C overlap, the display of that maid C takes priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to that maid E.

(Motion Blur Processing)
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the motion blur processing used in the group preview performance. As shown in FIG. 58, in the group preview performance, the motion blur processing is applied to the advancing character. The motion blur processing is a processing for displaying an object (for example, a character) as an afterimage, and the motion blur processing is applied to the display of the advancing character, so that the afterimage of the character is displayed behind the advancing character. This makes it possible to create a dynamic group preview performance. In addition, when an image obtained by the motion blur processing for one character overlaps with an image obtained by the motion blur processing for another character, the image obtained by the motion blur processing for the one character becomes transparent so as not to impede the visibility of the other character.

(Contours of overlapping characters)
Fig. 59 is a diagram for explaining the outline of characters when they overlap in the group preview performance. As shown in Fig. 59, in the group preview performance, one character may overtake another character. In that case, when the display of the overtaking character overlaps with the display of the other character, the outline of the overtaking character is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character.

For example, in the example shown in (a), maid B, who is positioned in front of maid A, is shown overtaking maid A, but in this case, the outline of maid B is thicker than the outline of maid A, and maid B is displayed more emphasized than maid A. Also, maid A, who is positioned in front of maid F, is shown overtaking maid F, but in this case, the outline of maid A is thicker than the outline of maid F, and maid A is displayed more emphasized than maid F.

Furthermore, in the example shown in (b), maid B, who is positioned in front of maid A, is shown overtaking maid A, but in this case, the outline of maid B is thicker than the outline of maid A, and maid B is displayed more emphasized than maid A. Also, maid A, who is positioned in front of maid D, is shown overtaking maid D, but in this case, the outline of maid A is thicker than the outline of maid D, and maid A is displayed more emphasized than maid D.

When a character overtakes another character, the outline of the character is not limited to being thicker, but the character may be displayed more emphasized than the other characters by increasing the size of the character, making the character brighter than the other characters, or making the contrast of the character clearer than the other characters.

(Display on the screen of the image display device)
Fig. 60 is a view of the gap between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 during the execution of the group advance notice performance. As shown in Figs. 57 to 59 above, the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, so when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front, the part of the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 that is covered by the game board 2 cannot be seen. However, as shown in Fig. 60, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be seen.

Here, in Figure 60, the six-person group preview shows a change from a first situation as shown in (a) in which the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is not yet displayed in her entirety, but only part of her (in this example, part of her face) is displayed, to a second situation as shown in (b) in which Maid A, who is displayed first, is not yet displayed in her entirety, but only part of her is displayed more than in the first situation, and Maid B (Jam-chan), who is displayed second, is not yet displayed in her entirety, but only part of her (in this example, part of her face) is displayed. Also, the first character displayed (Maid A) and the second character displayed (Maid B) have different position coordinates on the Y axis along the vertical direction of the screen.

Such a change from the first situation to the second situation occurs whether the image display device 5 is viewed with the game board 2 covering the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 or when the image display device 5 is viewed while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. That is, FIG. 60 shows the case where the image display device 5 is viewed while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, but as shown in FIG. 20(b), even when the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, the first situation in which the main character Maid A (Yume Yume-chan) is not yet displayed in its entirety but part of the maid A (in this example, part of her face) is displayed in the six-person group preview changes to a second situation in which the first maid A is not yet displayed in its entirety but part of the maid A is more visible than in the first situation, and the second maid B (Jam-chan) is not yet displayed in its entirety but part of the maid B (in this example, part of her face) is displayed.

(Full image of the Bakuchugun trailer)
61 is a diagram showing an overall image of the Bakuchu group preview. As shown in Fig. 61, in the Bakuchu group preview included in the group preview performance, an image of Bakuchu characters progressing in a group is displayed.

In the Bakuchu Group Preview, the character image may fit within the display area of the image display device 5, but in other cases, part of the character image (for example, ears or feet) may not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and may extend beyond it.

In this way, in the Bakuchu Group Preview, the video data for the Bakuchu Group Preview is created by arranging on the screen an animated image of one type of character moving in a progressing manner. Note that the video data for the Bakuchu Group Preview is also created in the same manner as the video data for the 6-person Group Preview, based on the work process shown in Figures 51 to 55.

(Volume change and brightness data table for group preview performance)
Fig. 62 is a diagram for explaining the change in volume and the brightness data table in the group preview performance. As shown in Fig. 62, the group preview performance (6-person group preview, Bakuchu preview, Boingo group preview) is divided into a first display period (1000 msec), a second display period (1310 msec), and a third display period (830 msec).

The first display period is the period from when the display of the characters first starts in the group preview performance to when the display of the characters first ends. More specifically, the first display period is the period from when any character first appears in the group preview performance to when any character first disappears. For example, if a character appears first in the group preview performance and the first character continues to progress at the top, the first display period is the period until the first character disappears. Alternatively, if a character appears first in the group preview performance and is overtaken by another character, the first display period is the period until the other character disappears from the edge of the screen. Note that in this embodiment, the display of the second character displayed in the first display period ends before the display of the first character ends. That is, in the first display period, the first character appears, the first character is overtaken by the second character, and the second character disappears from the edge of the screen first.

The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period during which the state in which the display of new characters begins and ends continues. More specifically, the second display period is the period from when any character first disappears in the group preview performance, during which new characters continue to appear one after another, until the last character appears. Note that the second display period is a period longer than both the first display period and the third display period. Also, the number of characters appearing in the second display period is greater than in both the first display period and the third display period.

The third display period is a period during which the display of characters ends without the start of the display of new characters. More specifically, the third display period is the period from when the last character appears in the group preview performance until all characters disappear. Note that the last character to disappear is not limited to the last character to appear, but may be the character overtaken by the last character to appear. Note that the third display period is a period longer than the first display period.

Regarding changes in the volume during the group preview performance, speakers 8L and 8R start outputting a performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance at a timing related to the start of the first display period, increase the volume of the performance sound to a specific volume during the first display period, maintain the volume of the performance sound at the specific volume during the second display period, and decrease the volume of the performance sound during the third display period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61, for the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, the volume is minimum (e.g., mute or minimum volume) at the beginning of the first display period, then gradually increases in stages until it reaches a specified value, and thereafter is maintained at the specified value (e.g., set volume or maximum volume). The volume also remains at the specified value during the second display period. Then, during the third display period, the volume is maintained at the specified value, and then gradually decreases in stages until it reaches the minimum.

The gradual increase in volume from the minimum to the specified value during the first display period is referred to as a volume fade-in. The gradual decrease in volume from the specified value to the minimum during the third display period is referred to as a volume fade-out. In this embodiment, the fade-in time from when the sound effect is output during the first display period until the volume of the sound effect increases from the minimum to the specified value is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the sound effect starts to decrease during the third display period until the volume of the sound effect reaches the minimum.

The brightness data table is composed of a plurality of brightness data for lighting each of a plurality of lighting means. The plurality of lighting means include game effect lamps such as the frame lamp 9 (frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R), role lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board top lamp 9C, attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric chute lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, and trigger button lamp 9K. The brightness data table includes a first brightness data table corresponding to the first display period, a second brightness data table corresponding to the second display period, and a third brightness data table corresponding to the third display period. In other words, during the first display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data contained in the first brightness data table, during the second display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data contained in the second brightness data table, and during the third display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data contained in the third brightness data table.

(Timing of the six-person group announcement in Stage A)
63 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of the six-person group announcement in stage A. As described above, in stage A, the six-person group announcement is executed from the 1600th frame during the previous change.

For example, as shown in FIG. 63, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9, which is a miss in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames), and the six-person group announcement starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9, which is a miss in the first half of the SP reach, the timing when the six-person group announcement is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the latter half of the total fluctuation time (2984 frames). In other words, in the case of a miss in the first half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (2984 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a miss display result, the first display period of the six-person group announcement starts in the latter half of the specified period (1600th frame).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 20, which hits in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames), and the six-person group announcement starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 20, which hits in the first half of the SP reach, the timing when the six-person group announcement is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (4662 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the six-person group announcement starts in the first half of the specified period (1600th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the six-person group announcement is made (1600th frame) is in the first half of the total change time (4662 frames), close to halfway (2331st frame) of the total change time (4662 frames) (the latter half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames), and the six-person group announcement starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) when the six-person group announcement is executed belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (4861 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the six-person group announcement starts in the first half of the specified period (1600th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the six-person group announcement is made (1600th frame) is in the first half of the total change time (4861 frames), close to halfway (approximately 2430th frame) of the total change time (4861 frames) (the latter half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 26 that hits in the final reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames), and the six-person group forecast starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 26 that hits in the final reach, the timing (1600th frame) when the six-person group forecast is executed belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the final reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, in the predetermined period (6149 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the six-person group forecast starts in the first half of the predetermined period (1600th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the six-person group announcement is made (1600th frame) is in the first half of the total change time (6149 frames), close to halfway (approximately the 3074th frame) of the total change time (6149 frames) (the latter half).

In this embodiment, in the case of a variable number 10 to 15 fluctuation pattern that results in a miss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-fluctuation time is set to be longer, so the first display period of the six-person group preview is not configured to start in the first half of the specified period (1600th frame) from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a miss. However, even in the case of a variable number 10 to 15 fluctuation pattern that results in a miss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the first display period of the six-person group preview may be configured to start in the first half of the specified period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a miss.

Figure 64 is a diagram to explain the timing of the occurrence of the Bakuchu Group Notice in Stage B. As mentioned above, in Stage B, the Bakuchu Group Notice is executed from the 2000th frame during the post-change.

For example, as shown in FIG. 64, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 9 which is a miss in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames), and the Bakuchu group announcement starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 9 which is a miss in the first half of the SP reach, the timing when the Bakuchu group announcement is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the latter half of the total fluctuation time (2984 frames). In other words, in the case of a miss in the first half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (2984 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a miss display result, the first display period of the Bakuchu group announcement starts in the latter half of the specified period (2000th frame).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 20, which is a hit in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames), and the Bakuchu group notice starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 20, which is a hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing when the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (4662 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half of the specified period (2000th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the Bakuchu Group Announcement is executed (2000th frame) is in the first half of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames), close to halfway (2331st frame) of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames) (the latter half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 23, which hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames), and the Bakuchu group notice starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 23, which hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing when the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (4861 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half of the specified period (2000th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the Bakuchu Group Announcement is executed (2000th frame) is in the first half of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames), close to halfway (approximately the 2430th frame) of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames) (the latter half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 26, which hits in the latter half of the final reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames), and the Bakuchu group notice starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 26, which hits in the final reach, the timing (2000th frame) when the Bakuchu group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the final reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (6149 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half of the specified period (2000th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the Bakuchu Group Announcement is executed (2000th frame) is in the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames), close to halfway (approximately the 3074th frame) of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames) (the latter half).

In this embodiment, in the case of a variable number 10-15 fluctuation pattern that results in a miss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-fluctuation time is set to be longer, so the first display period of the Bakuchu group prediction is not configured to start in the first half (2000th frame) of the specified period from when the variable display starts until when it is suggested that the variable display is a miss. However, even in the case of a variable number 10-15 fluctuation pattern that results in a miss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the first display period of the Bakuchu group prediction may be configured to start in the specified period from when the variable display starts until when it is suggested that the variable display is a miss.

[Brightness data]
With reference to Figs. 65 to 89, the brightness data referred to by the performance control CPU 120 when controlling various lighting means in the pachinko game machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. These brightness data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the lighting (light-emitting) location of the game effect lamp in accordance with the display in the group notice based on the brightness data stored in the brightness data table. In this embodiment, the lighting location literally refers to a location that is lit, and for example, the location where a lit lamp is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the lighting location, and the location where other lamps that are not lit (i.e., lamps that are turned off) are located is not called the lighting location. Note that in another example, the lighting location refers to a location that is lit with high brightness, and for example, the location where a lamp that is lit with high brightness is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the lighting location, and the location where a lamp that is lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located in the lighting location is not called the lighting location.

More specifically, the data (also called elements) for turning on or off the lamps is specified by a brightness data table, and if data of 0 (for example, data of "000" corresponding to RGB) is stored in the storage area of the data referenced by a specific lamp in such a brightness data table, the specific lamp will be turned off. Also, if there is no storage area of the data referenced by a specific lamp in the brightness data table, or if the brightness data table itself does not exist, the specific lamp will be turned off. On the other hand, if there is a brightness data table referenced by a specific lamp, and one or more data (for example, "100", "010", "001" corresponding to RGB) is stored in the storage area of the data referenced by the specific lamp, the specific lamp will be turned on. Note that, for example, when a specific performance such as a big win notice performance is executed during a performance corresponding to a normal background, even if the data of the specific lamp is not specified in the brightness data table referenced in the specific performance, if the data of the specific lamp is specified in the brightness data table referenced in the performance corresponding to the normal background, the specific lamp will be turned on.

(Parent table in group preview brightness data table)
Fig. 65 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the group notice brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 65, in the parent table in the group notice brightness data table, the performance time of each of the group notice performances is specified for each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attack lamp 9E.

For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over a period of 3140 msec to match the group preview performance.

(Child table in group preview brightness data table)
Fig. 66 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group notice brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 66, in the child table in the group notice brightness data table, the time of the group notice performance is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table (also called a brightness data table) to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the first display period when the group preview performance is executed (the performance period shown in Figures 98 to 99 and 154 to 156 described below), grandchild tables W1 for the frame lamp, Y1 for the reel lamp 9A, L1 for the left panel lamp 9B, U1 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A1 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables used during the first display period correspond to the first brightness data table shown in Figure 62.

During the second display period (the period of the performance shown in Figures 100, 101, 157, and 158 described below) when the group preview performance is executed, grandchild tables W2 for the frame lamp, Y2 for the reel lamp 9A, L2 for the left panel lamp 9B, U2 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A2 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables used in the second display period correspond to the second brightness data table shown in Figure 62.

During the period when the group preview performance is executed, in the third display period (the period of the performance shown in Figures 102, 103, 159, and 160 described below), grandchild tables W3 for the frame lamp, Y3 for the reel lamp 9A, L3 for the left panel lamp 9B, U3 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A3 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables used in the third display period correspond to the third brightness data table shown in Figure 62.

As shown in FIG. 66, six types of brightness data tables are provided for the brightness data tables referenced in the group preview performance in the first, second, and third display periods: the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attacca lamp.

The V lamp 9G is located in a position related to the direction in which the character moves in the group preview performance (for example, near where the character appears in the group preview performance), but since it is not used in the group preview performance, its grandchild table is not prepared. The V lamp 9G is a lamp that notifies the player that a round of jackpot gameplay in which a V win can occur is in progress, or that a V win has occurred, or that a jackpot has occurred. If it is lit in the group preview performance, the player will mistakenly think that a V win or jackpot has occurred. In order to avoid such inconvenience, the V lamp 9G is not used in the group preview performance. The V lamp 9G may be located in other positions, such as near the left panel lamp 9B, as a position related to the direction in which the character moves in the group preview performance, but even in this case, it should not be used in the group preview performance.

The stick controller lamp 9J on the stick controller 31A and the trigger button lamp 9K on the push button 31B are located in a position related to the direction in which the character moves in the group preview performance (for example, directly below the direction in which the character moves in the group preview performance), but since they are not used in the group preview performance, their grandchild tables are not prepared. The stick controller lamp 9J is lit to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A in the operation performance (the performance shown in FIG. 135 (c91) described later), and the trigger button lamp 9K is a lamp that is lit to encourage the player to press the push button 31B in the PUSH performance (the performance shown in FIG. 96 (a19) described later), so if they were lit in the group preview performance, the player would mistakenly think that he or she could operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In order to avoid such inconvenience, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are not used in the group preview performance. The stick controller lamp 9J and trigger button lamp 9K may be located in other positions, such as near the left panel lamp 9B, as positions related to the direction in which the characters move during the group preview performance, but even in this case, they should not be used during the group preview performance.

The features of grandchild tables W1 to W3 used as grandchild tables in group preview performances can be summarized as follows. Specifically, W2 has a greater number of high-brightness lit spots than W1. As for the switching interval, W1 controls the lighting at equal intervals of 100 msec, while W2 controls the lighting at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec, which is shorter than W1, and W3 controls the lighting at a short interval of 10 msec for the frame left lamp 9L, but a long interval of 80 msec for the frame right lamp 9R.

For the lighting pattern, the brightness data for W1 is specified so that the lighting location moves in accordance with the direction of the group notice and lights up at high brightness, while the brightness data for W2 is specified so that the lighting is done at multiple locations and the brightness data for W3 is specified so that both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or turned on at low brightness in accordance with the direction of the group notice. For the first brightness data, the brightness data for W1 is specified so that all lamps are turned off or turned on at low brightness, while the brightness data for W2 and W3 is specified so that the specified lighting locations are illuminated at high brightness. On the other hand, for the last brightness data, the brightness data for W3 is specified so that both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or turned on at low brightness.

Regarding the luminance data loop, W1 and W3 do not specify that the same luminance data is used repeatedly, whereas W2 specifies that the same luminance data is used repeatedly. Regarding the 10-minute luminance data for troubleshooting purposes, W1 and W3 are specified, whereas W2 is not.

(Grandchild table for frame lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a group notice brightness data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is expressed as data in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), in the grandchild table W1 used in the first display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is defined for malfunction countermeasures. In addition, in W1, the first luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or turning on each lamp included in the frame lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness for each time, and the combination of data for turning off or turning on each lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness is composed of second luminance data different from the first luminance data. For example, if the collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T1-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T1-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also defined for each other time.

In W1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, a "1" indicating low brightness is set for "R" for all lamps included in the frame lamp, and a "0" indicating extinguishment is set for "G" and "B". As a result, as shown in Figures 97 (a22) and 154 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all lamps included in the frame lamp are extinguished or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for players to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed. In this embodiment, in order to make the effect more effective by lighting each lamp mainly in red, "R" is assigned a "1" indicating low brightness, and "G" and "B" are assigned a "0" indicating off. However, for example, if each lamp is mainly lit in green, "G" can be assigned a "1" indicating low brightness, and "R" and "B" can be assigned a "0" indicating off. If each lamp is mainly lit in blue, "B" can be assigned a "1" indicating low brightness, and "R" and "G" can be assigned a "0" indicating off.

In addition, in W1, as shown by the dotted arrow, the brightness data is specified so that the location of the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves at equal intervals of 100 msec from near the frame right lamps 9R5-9R8 to the frame left lamp from T1-2 to T1-10. Here, the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5-9R8 corresponds to the location where the characters appear in the group preview, and the brightness data is specified so that the location of the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the characters move. As for the frame left lamp, the brightness data is specified so that it is initially turned off or turned on at a low brightness, and as the location of the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the characters move, it gradually lights up at a high brightness in stages. On the other hand, the brightness data is specified so that the frame right lamps 9R5-9R8, which were initially turned on at high brightness, are turned off or turned on at a low brightness as the location of the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the characters move. As a result, as shown in Figures 97 to 99 and Figures 154 to 156 described below, in the group preview, the frame lamps will change position to light up at high brightness from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the performance in which the characters appear from the right edge of the screen and progress.

W1 also includes data for turning on one frame lamp at high brightness and turning off other frame lamps adjacent to that one, and the brightness data is specified so that the location of the lit lamps moves in stages. This makes it possible for W1 to move the location of the lamp that is lit at high brightness in accordance with the direction the character is moving.

In addition, in W1, luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the luminance data is specified so that the frame lamps are lit sparsely at high luminance in accordance with the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the frame lamps when moving to the next second display period.

If this 10-minute data were not provided, when lighting control was performed using W1 and the transition to W2 did not occur due to some abnormality, the lighting control of the lamps would be performed again from T1-1, and even though the group preview character had already appeared and progressed, the location of the lamps that are lit with high brightness would move again from near the frame right lamps 9R5-9R8 from T1-2 to T1-10, as shown by the dotted arrow, causing the player to feel uncomfortable. However, in this embodiment, since 10 minutes of data is provided at T1-11, even if lighting control was performed using W1 and the transition to W2 did not occur due to some abnormality, the frame lamps can be lit in a light emission mode that matches the grandchild table W2 for 10 minutes, so that a sense of discomfort is not created. And if the abnormality is resolved during these 10 minutes, the player can continue playing without feeling particularly uncomfortable.

In W1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

The brightness data for troubleshooting a 10-minute malfunction specified in W1 is brightness data that turns on adjacent frame lamps in a regular order so that the lighting locations are shifted from the previous T1-10 state.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), in the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-uniform intervals of 50 to 80 msec. In addition, in W2, the first luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or turning on each lamp included in the frame lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness for each time period, and second luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or turning on each lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness that is different from the first luminance data. For example, if the collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T2-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T2-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also defined for each of the other times.

In W2, the brightness data is specified so that the lamps that are lit at high brightness vary sparsely (randomly), including brightness data that lights up one frame lamp at high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to that one frame lamp at high brightness. For example, in W2, sparse high brightness data (e.g., "A") is specified so that the lamps are lit at high brightness in multiple locations. As a result, as shown in Figures 100, 101, 157, and 158 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the frame lamps are lit at high brightness sparsely in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance. Furthermore, W2 is designed to light more frame lamps at high brightness than W1.

In addition, because W2 does not have brightness data for troubleshooting purposes like W1, lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T2-1 to T2-10. If lighting control is performed using W2 and some abnormality prevents transition to W3, and the lamp lighting control is performed again from T2-1, the frame lamps will simply be repeatedly lit sporadically at high brightness, so the player will not feel uncomfortable.

Also, unlike W2, it is possible to provide all the data referenced at each time over the entire time without repeating the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10, but it takes time to create each piece of data and time to confirm that the created data is correct, which is very inefficient. On the other hand, as in W2 of this embodiment, by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10 to control the lighting, it is only necessary to create one set of data that is repeatedly referenced, and time efficiency can be improved. The reason why one set of data is repeatedly used to control the lighting during the second display period in the group preview performance is that the second display period in the group preview performance is longer than the first display period and the third display period, and the second display period in the group preview performance is a time period in which the screen is filled with multiple characters and the multiple characters progress as a group, so that the lighting mode corresponding to such a performance can be achieved by simply repeating the same lighting.

As shown in FIG. 67(c), in the grandchild table W3 used in the third display period, RGB data is defined for the frame left lamp and frame right lamp over T3-1 to T3-6 at 80 msec intervals. After that, RGB data is defined for the frame left lamp over T3-7 to T3-38 at a short interval of 10 msec, and RGB data is defined for the frame right lamp over T3-7 to T3-38 at a subsequent longer interval of 80 msec.

In addition, in W3, as shown by the dotted arrows, the number of lamps that are turned off or turned on at low brightness is increased from T3-2 to T3-30, so that the lamps that were lit at high brightness near the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are gradually turned off or turned on at low brightness in stages. In addition, for T3-7 to T3-38, the brightness data is specified at 80 msec intervals for the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, while the brightness data is specified so that the frame left lamps 9L5 to 9L12 located in the direction in which the characters move in the group preview go from high brightness to off or low brightness at short intervals of 10 msec. As a result, as shown in Figures 102, 103, 159, and 160 described later, the frame lamps also change their positions from the right to the left of the pachinko game machine 1 to match the performance in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview.

In addition, in W3, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness during the transition to T3-30. Furthermore, in W3, like W1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the final 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the frame lamps when transitioning to the next performance.

In W3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

(Sub-table for feature lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a group advance notice brightness data table. As described above, the reel lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4, and in the brightness data table shown in FIG. 68, the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are sequentially represented as "RRRR" corresponding to the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Each of the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented as data "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. When turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Note that a monochromatic LED has fewer filters that block light than a full-color LED, and therefore emits a stronger spectrum. For this reason, the brightness data corresponding to high brightness for a single-color LED is smaller than that for a full-color LED.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the grandchild table Y1 used in the first display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

In Y1, during the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, a "1" indicating low brightness is specified for all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIG. 97 (a22) and FIG. 154 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A are turned off or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed.

In addition, in Y1, luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the luminance data is specified so that the reel lamps 9A are lit sparsely at high luminance in accordance with the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the reel lamps 9A when moving to the next second display period.

In Y1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes of malfunction countermeasures described above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

As shown in FIG. 68(b), in the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the accessory lamp 9A over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equidistant intervals of 50 to 80 msec.

In Y2, the brightness data is specified so that one lamp is lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to that lamp are also lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). As a result, as shown in Figures 100, 101, 157, and 158 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the role lamps 9A are lit sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance.

Note that Y2 does not have the same luminance data for troubleshooting purposes as Y1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 68(c), in the grandchild table Y3 used in the third display period, brightness data is specified for the accessory lamp 9A from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. Then, brightness data is specified from T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in Y3, like Y1, luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the luminance data is specified so that the reel lamp 9A lights up at a low luminance so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the reel lamp 9A when moving to the next performance.

In Y3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes of malfunction countermeasures described above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the group notice brightness data table. As described above, the left panel lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5, and in the brightness data table shown in FIG. 69, the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are sequentially represented as "WWWWW" corresponding to them. Each of the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single-color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented as data "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. When turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In the case of the above-mentioned role lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even in the case of an LED that is only white, such as the left panel lamp 9B, the value representing high brightness is set to a maximum of "6".

As shown in FIG. 69(a), in the grandchild table L1 used in the first display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

In L1, during the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, a "1" is set to indicate low brightness for all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B. As a result, as shown in FIG. 97 (a22) and FIG. 154 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are turned off or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for players to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed.

In addition, in L1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the left panel lamps 9B light up sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the left panel lamps 9B when moving to the next second display period.

In L1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

As shown in FIG. 69(b), in the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the left panel lamp 9B over the range T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equidistant intervals of 50 to 80 msec.

L2 includes brightness data that lights one lamp at high brightness and also lights other lamps adjacent to that lamp at high brightness, and the brightness data is specified so that the lamps that light up at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). As a result, as shown in Figures 100, 101, 157, and 158 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the left lamp 9B on the board lights up sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance.

Note that L2 does not have the same luminance data for troubleshooting purposes as L1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 69(c), in the grandchild table L3 used in the third display period, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B from T3-1 to T3-6 at 80 msec intervals. After that, brightness data is specified from T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in L3, like L1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the left panel lamp 9B lights up at a low brightness so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the left panel lamp 9B when moving to the next performance.

In L3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

(Sub-table for on-board lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the on-board lamp in the group notice brightness data table. As described above, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13, and each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is a multi-colored (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)) LED, and the brightness is represented as data in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a single-colored (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented as data in "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low brightness, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high brightness. If off is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In this way, the high brightness value used in a multi-color LED is greater than the high brightness value used in a single-color LED. Note that, while the above-mentioned role lamp 9A was only a red LED, even in the case of a board lamp 9C that is only a white LED, the value representing high brightness is set to a maximum of "6".

As shown in FIG. 70(a), in the grandchild table U1 used in the first display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

In U1, during the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, all lamps included in the role lamps 9A are set to "1" or "0", indicating low brightness. As a result, as shown in Figures 97 (a22) and 154 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C are turned off or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for players to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed.

In addition, in U1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the panel lamps 9C are lit sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the panel lamps 9C when moving to the next second display period.

In U1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), in the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the on-panel lamp 9C over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equidistant intervals of 50 to 80 msec.

In U2, the brightness data is specified so that one lamp is lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to that lamp are also lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). As a result, as shown in Figures 100, 101, 157, and 158 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the lamps 9C on the board are lit sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance.

Note that U2 does not have the same luminance data for troubleshooting purposes as U1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 70(c), in the grandchild table U3 used in the third display period, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. Then, brightness data is specified from T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in U3, similar to U1, luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the luminance data is specified so that the on-board lamp 9C is turned off or lit at a low luminance so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the on-board lamp 9C when moving to the next performance.

In U3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

In addition, in U1, U2, and U3, only the data "0" is specified for the single-colored on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8. In other words, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are not used in the group preview performance.

(Grandchild table for Attacka lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the group notice brightness data table. Each of the attacca lamp 9E and the electric chute lamp 9H is a multi-colored LED (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is represented as data in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, the V attacca lamp 9F is a single-colored (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented as data in "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of the "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If the concept of low brightness also includes off, then "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In this way, the high brightness value used in multi-color LEDs is greater than the high brightness value used in single-color LEDs. Note that while the above-mentioned feature lamp 9A has only red LEDs, even in the case of a white-only LED such as the V-attacker lamp 9F, the value representing high brightness is set to a maximum of "6".

As shown in FIG. 71(a), in the grandchild table A1 used in the first display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

In A1, during the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, all lamps are set to "1" or "0", indicating low brightness. As a result, as shown in Figures 97 (a22) and 154 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, the attacca lamp 9E, electric chute lamp 9H, and V attacca lamp 9F are turned off or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for players to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed.

Also, in A1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the lamps are lit sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity in the lighting state of the lamps when moving to the next second display period.

In A1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes of malfunction countermeasures described above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

As shown in FIG. 71(b), in the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equidistant intervals of 50 to 80 msec.

A2 includes brightness data that lights one lamp at high brightness and also lights other lamps adjacent to that one at high brightness, and the brightness data is specified so that the lamps that light up at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). As a result, as shown in Figures 100, 101, 157, and 158 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the attacca lamp 9E, electric chute lamp 9H, and V attacca lamp 9F light up sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance.

Note that A2 does not have the same luminance data for troubleshooting as A1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 71(c), in the grandchild table A3 used in the third display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. Then, brightness data is specified from T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in A3, like A1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the attacca lamp 9E, electric chute lamp 9H, and V attacca lamp 9F are turned off or lit at a low brightness so that there is no sense of incongruity in the lighting state of the attacca lamp 9E, electric chute lamp 9H, and V attacca lamp 9F when moving to the next performance.

In A3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions as described above, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

(Parent table in reach line luminance data table)
72 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the reach line brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 72, in the parent table in the reach line brightness data table, the presentation time of each of the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attack lamp 9E, is specified.

The reach line effect differs from the group preview effect in that it is an effect that predicts that the display result of the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols will result in the display result of a jackpot symbol stopping, and is an effect that suggests (or informs) the player that a reach has been reached. In the reach line effect, as shown in Figures 92 to 95 and Figures 142 to 145 described below, a line of light (also called a reach line) appears with a flash of light from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward (left and right) to connect the left and right decorative symbols that make up the reach, and then the reach line disappears.

In the parent table of the reach line brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over a period of 1500 msec to match the reach line presentation.

(Child table in reach line data table)
73 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the reach-line brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 73, in the child table in the reach-line brightness data table, the reach-line performance time is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table (also called a brightness data table) to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the period when the reach line performance is executed and a flash occurs (the period of the performance shown in Figures 92 (a8), (a9) and Figures 142 (a8), (a9) described below), grandchild tables W11 for the frame lamp, Y11 for the role lamp 9A, L11 for the left lamp 9B of the board, U11 for the top lamp 9C, and A11 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

During the period when the reach line performance is being executed, grandchild tables W12 are provided for the frame lamp, Y12 for the role lamp 9A, and L12 for the left panel lamp 9B during the period when the reach line occurs (period of performance shown in Figures 93 and 143 described below). Note that during the period when the reach line occurs, the top panel lamp 9C and the attacca lamp 9E are not used, so no grandchild tables are provided.

During the period when the reach line performance is being executed, during which the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward while widening (the performance period shown in Figures 94 (a13) to 95 (b17) and Figures 144 (a13) to 145 (b17) described below), grandchild tables W13 for the frame lamp, Y13 for the role lamp 9A, L13 for the left lamp 9B of the board, U13 for the upper lamp 9C of the board, and A13 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

During the period when the reach line performance is being executed, and the reach line disappears (the performance period shown in Figures 95 (a18) and 145 (b18) described below), grandchild tables W14 are provided for the frame lamp, Y14 for the reel lamp 9A, L14 for the left lamp 9B, U14 for the upper lamp 9C, and A14 for the attacca lamp 9E.

As shown in FIG. 73, six types of brightness data tables are provided for the brightness data tables referenced in the reach line performance during the period when a flash occurs, the period when the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward, and the period when the reach line disappears: the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attacca lamp. On the other hand, four types of brightness data tables are provided for the brightness data tables referenced in the reach line performance during the period when the reach line occurs: the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the role lamp 9A, and the board left lamp 9B.

In this way, in the reach line performance, a brightness data table is provided for the same number of lamps as in the group preview performance or for a smaller number of lamps than in the group preview performance.

(Grandchild table for frame lamps in reach line brightness data table)
74 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a reach line brightness data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is a multi-colored LED (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data represents brightness in hexadecimal numbers "0" to "F.""0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F,""1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), in the grandchild table W11, only the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R uses common data symmetrically to the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. The reach line effect is an effect that suggests to the player that a reach has been reached, and is not an effect that stimulates the player's sense of expectation by suggesting a jackpot, as in the group notice effect. For this reason, the reach line effect does not perform elaborate lighting control such as setting different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controlling each lamp individually, as in the group notice effect, but sets common brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controls each lamp together. Furthermore, because the reach line effect has a shorter execution time than the group preview effect, instead of using elaborate lighting control such as setting different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controlling each lamp individually as in the group preview effect, common brightness data is set for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and the lamps are controlled together.

In W11, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T11-1 to T11-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in Figures 92(a8) and 142(b8) described below, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the frame lamp are lit at high brightness when a flash occurs.

As shown in FIG. 74(b), in the grandchild table W12, only the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W12, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T12-1 to T12-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in Figures 93 and 143 described below, while a reach line is occurring, the brightness data is specified so that, of the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74(c), in the grandchild table W13, only the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W13, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T13-1 to T13-4 at 60 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in Figures 94 and 144 described below, while a reach line is occurring, the brightness data is specified so that, of the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74(d), in the grandchild table W14, only the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W14, brightness data is specified for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, the frame lamp goes out when the reach line disappears, as shown in FIG. 95 (a18) and FIG. 145 (b18) described later.

(Subtable for accessory lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a reach line brightness data table. Each of the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a single-color (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F.""0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F,""1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), in the grandchild table Y11, brightness data is specified for the reel lamp 9A from T11-1 to T11-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 92(a8) and FIG. 142(b8) described later, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A are lit at high brightness when a flash occurs.

As shown in FIG. 75(b), in the grandchild table Y12, brightness data is specified for the reel lamp 9A from T12-1 to T12-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 93 and FIG. 143 described later, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A are lit at high brightness while the reach line is occurring.

As shown in Figure 75 (c), in the grandchild table Y13, brightness data is specified for the reel lamp 9A from T13-1 to T13-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in Figures 94 and 144 described below, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A are lit at high brightness while a reach line is occurring.

As shown in FIG. 75(d), in the grandchild table Y14, brightness data is specified for the reel lamp 9A for 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, as shown in FIG. 95(a18) and FIG. 145(b18) described later, the reel lamp 9A also goes out when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in reach line brightness data table)
76 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the reach line brightness data table. Each of the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single-color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F.""0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F,""1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), in the grandchild table L11, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B over the period T11-1 to T11-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 92(a8) and FIG. 142(b8) described below, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit at high brightness when a flash occurs.

As shown in FIG. 76(b), in the grandchild table L12, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B from T12-1 to T12-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 93 and FIG. 143 described later, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit at high brightness while a reach line is occurring.

As shown in FIG. 76(c), in the grandchild table L13, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B over T13-1 to T13-4 at 60 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 94 and FIG. 144 described later, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit at high brightness while a reach line is occurring.

As shown in FIG. 76(d), in the grandchild table L14, brightness data is specified for the board left lamp 9B for 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, as shown in FIG. 95(a18) and FIG. 145(b18) described later, the board left lamp 9B also goes out when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for on-board lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in a reach line brightness data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is a multi-color (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)) LED, and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". Each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a single-color (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. When turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 77(a), in the grandchild table U11, brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T11-1 to T11-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 92(a8) and FIG. 142(b8) described below, the brightness data is defined so that at the timing when a flash occurs, the lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C, other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 77(b), in the grandchild table U13, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C over T13-1 to T13-4 at 60 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 94 and FIG. 144 described later, the brightness data is specified so that, while a reach line is occurring, the lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C, other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 77(d), in the grandchild table L14, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C for 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, as shown in FIG. 95(a18) and FIG. 145(b18) described later, the on-board lamp 9C also goes out when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for Attacka lamps in Reach Line Brightness Data Table)
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the Attacca lamp in the reach line brightness data table. Each of the Attacca lamp 9E and the electric chute lamp 9H is a multi-colored (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)) LED, and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". The V Attacca lamp 9F is a single-colored (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), in the grandchild table A11, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T11-1 to T11-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 92(a8) and FIG. 142(b8) described later, the brightness data is specified so that the attacca lamp 9E, the electric tube lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F light up at high brightness when a flash occurs.

As shown in Figure 78 (b), in the grandchild table A13, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T13-1 to T13-4 at 60 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in Figures 94 and 144 described below, the brightness data is specified so that the attacca lamp 9E, the electric chute lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F are lit at high brightness while the reach line is occurring.

As shown in FIG. 78(d), in the grandchild table A14, brightness data is specified for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, as shown in FIG. 95(a18) and FIG. 145(b18) described later, the attacca lamp 9E, the electric chute lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F also go out in conjunction with the disappearance of the reach line.

(Parent table of background preview brightness data table)
Fig. 79 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the background notice brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 79, in the parent table in the background notice brightness data table, the performance time of each of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attack lamp 9E, is specified.

The background preview effect is different from the group preview effect in that it predicts that the display result of the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns will result in a jackpot pattern stopping, and is an effect in which a specific character (for example, Jam-chan) is displayed with a specific background (for example, a starry sky background).

In the parent table of the background preview brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over a period of 5,500 msec to match the background preview performance.

(Child table of background preview brightness data table)
80 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background notice brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 80, in the child table in the background notice brightness data table, the time of the background notice performance is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table (also called a brightness data table) to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the first 2000 msec of the period during which the background preview performance is executed, grandchild tables W21 for the frame lamp, Y21 for the reel lamp 9A, L21 for the left lamp 9B, U21 for the top lamp 9C, and A21 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

During the period of time during which the background preview performance is being performed, in the middle 100 msec, grandchild tables W22 for the frame lamp, Y22 for the reel lamp 9A, L22 for the left lamp 9B, U22 for the upper lamp 9C, and A22 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

During the final 600,000 msec period during which the background preview performance is executed, grandchild tables W23 for the frame lamp, Y23 for the reel lamp 9A, L23 for the left lamp 9B, U23 for the upper lamp 9C, and A23 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

As shown in FIG. 80, six types of brightness data tables are provided for the first 200 msec, the middle 100 msec, and the final 600,000 msec of the background preview performance: the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attacca lamp.

In this way, in the background preview performance, a brightness data table is provided for the same number of lamps as in the group preview performance.

(Sub-table for frame lamps in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a background advance luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data represents luminance in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high luminance lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), in the grandchild table W21, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W21, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T21-1 to T21-4 at 50 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 81(b), in the grandchild table W22, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W22, luminance data is specified for each lamp from T22-1 to T22-2 at 20 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 81(c), in the grandchild table W23, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W23, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T23-1 to T23-6, alternating between 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Subtable for feature lamps in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a background notice brightness data table. Each of the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a single-color (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F.""0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F,""1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), in the grandchild table Y21, brightness data is specified for the accessory lamp 9A over T21-1 to T21-4 at 50 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), in the grandchild table Y22, brightness data is specified for the accessory lamp 9A from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 82(c), in the grandchild table Y23, brightness data is specified for the accessory lamp 9A over T23-1 to T23-6, alternating between 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Background preview brightness data table for left side lamp)
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the background notice brightness data table. Each of the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single-color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), in the grandchild table L21, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B over T21-1 to T21-4 at 50 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), in the grandchild table L22, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B from T22-1 to T22-2 at 20 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 83(c), in the grandchild table L23, brightness data is specified for the left lamp 9B over T23-1 to T23-6, with 240 msec and 230 msec being repeated.

(Sub-table for on-board lamps in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the on-board lamp in the background notice brightness data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9 to 9C13 is a multi-colored (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)) LED, and the brightness is represented as data "0" to "F". Each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a single-colored (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented as data "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. When turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 84(a), in the grandchild table U21, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C over T21-1 to T21-4 at 50 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 84(b), in the grandchild table U22, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 84(c), in the grandchild table U23, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C over T23-1 to T23-6, repeating between 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Background preview brightness data table for Attacka lamp)
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the Attacca lamp in the background notice brightness data table. Each of the Attacca lamp 9E and the electric chute lamp 9H is a multi-colored (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)) LED, and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". The V Attacca lamp 9F is a single-colored (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), in the grandchild table A21, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the attacca lamp 9E, the electric tube lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F from T21-1 to T21-2 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 85(b), in the grandchild table A22, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the attacca lamp 9E, the electric tube lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 85(c), in the grandchild table A23, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the attacca lamp 9E, the electric tube lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F over T23-1 to T23-6, repeating between 240 msec and 230 msec.

(All lights on brightness data table)
Fig. 86 is a diagram for explaining an example of a data table of luminance when all lights are on. As shown in Fig. 86(a) to (h), in the data table of luminance when all lights are on, high luminance data (maximum value "F" in this example) is specified for each of the game effect lamps 9 such as the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the left panel lamp 9B, the upper panel lamp 9C, the attack lamp 9E, the V attack lamp 9F, the electric chute lamp 9H, the V lamp 9G, the stick controller lamp 9J, and the trigger button lamp 9K.

(Push effect brightness data table)
87 is a diagram for explaining an example of a luminance data table during a PUSH effect. The PUSH effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 96 (a19) described later.

Figure 87 (a) shows the brightness data table S41 for the stick controller lamp 9J. In S41, brightness data is specified for the stick controller lamp 9J over T41-1 to T41-4 at 20 msec intervals. Note that the lighting color of the stick controller lamp 9J during a PUSH performance is the same color (red in this example) as the lighting color of the frame lamps and the like during the group preview performance.

Figure 87 (b) shows the brightness data table T41 for the trigger button lamp 9K. In T41, brightness data is specified for the trigger button lamp 9K over T51-1 to T512 at intervals of 150 msec. The color of the trigger button lamp 9K during a PUSH performance is the same color (red in this example) as the color of the frame lamps and the like that are lit during the group preview performance.

(Child Table in Group Preview Luminance Data Table According to Modification)
Fig. 88 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group notice brightness data table according to the modified example. As shown in Fig. 88, in the child table in the group notice brightness data table according to the modified example, the time of the group notice performance is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table (also called a brightness data table) to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the period in which the group preview performance is executed, up to the middle of the first display period (2000 msec), grandchild tables are provided for the frame lamp W101, the role lamp 9A Y101, the left panel lamp 9B L101, the top panel lamp 9C U101, and the attacca lamp 9E A101. These grandchild tables correspond to the first brightness data table in the modified example.

During the period in which the group preview performance is executed, the remainder of the first display period, the second display period, and partway through the third display period (2790 msec), grandchild tables W102 for the frame lamp, Y102 for the reel lamp 9A, L102 for the left panel lamp 9B, U102 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A102 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables correspond to the second brightness data table in the modified example.

During the remaining period (150 msec) of the third display period during which the group preview performance is executed, grandchild tables W103 for the frame lamp, Y103 for the reel lamp 9A, L103 for the left panel lamp 9B, U103 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A103 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables correspond to the third brightness data table in the modified example.

In this way, in the group preview brightness data table relating to the modified example, in the first brightness data table, control of the game effect lamp 9 begins at a timing related to the start of the first display period and control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the first display period, in the second brightness data table, control of the game effect lamp 9 begins during the first display period and control of the game effect lamp 9 continues during the second display period, control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the third display period, and in the third brightness data table, control of the game effect lamp 9 begins during the third display period.

(Frame Lamp Grandchild Table in Group Pre-announcement Brightness Data Table According to Modification)
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a group notice brightness data table according to a modified example. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is expressed as data in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), in the grandchild table W101, RGB data is specified for each lamp over T101-1 to T101-10 at equal intervals of 20 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T101-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

As shown in FIG. 89(b), in the grandchild table W102, RGB data is specified for each lamp over T102-1 to T102-10 at non-uniform intervals of 50 to 80 msec. In W102, the brightness data is specified so that the lamps that are lit at high brightness vary sparsely (randomly), including brightness data that lights up one frame lamp at high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to that frame lamp at high brightness. For example, in W102, sparse high brightness data (e.g., "A") is specified so that the lamps are lit at high brightness over multiple locations. As a result, in the group preview performance, the frame lamps are lit at high brightness sparsely in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance. In addition, W102 is designed to light more frame lamps at high brightness than W101.

As shown in FIG. 89(c), in the grandchild table W103, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp and frame right lamp over T103-1 to T103-6 at intervals of 14 msec. After that, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp over T103-7 to T103-38 at a short interval of 2 msec, and RGB data is specified for the frame right lamp over T103-7 to T103-38 at a subsequent long interval of 14 msec.

In addition, in W103, from T103-2 to T103-30, the number of lamps that are turned off or turned on at low brightness is increased so that the lamps that were lit at high brightness near the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are gradually turned off or turned on at low brightness in stages. Also, for T103-7 to T103-38, the brightness data is specified at 14 msec intervals for the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, while the brightness data is specified so that the frame left lamps 9L5 to 9L12, which are located in the direction in which the characters move in the group preview, go from high brightness to off or low brightness at short intervals of 2 msec. This causes the frame lamps to change their positions from the right to the left of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to match the performance in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview.

In addition, in W103, brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness during the transition to T103-30. Furthermore, in W103, similar to W101, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the final 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T103-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the frame lamps when transitioning to the next performance.

[Presentation Mode of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
Next, the performance of the pachinko game machine 1 during play will be described with reference to Figures 90 to 175. In this embodiment, the performance will be described when one of the main variation patterns 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26, in which pseudo variations are performed twice, is selected. In the figures, the lighting and blinking of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is indicated by hatching.

(Performance on Stage A)
The performance aspects on stage A will be described with reference to Figures 90 to 112.

As shown in FIG. 90(a1), when the variable display starts based on one reserved memory, on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during the variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Maid A (Yume Yume-chan) flying is displayed as the character appearing on stage A. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and the performance sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 90(a2), when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed and the character "x2" is displayed, indicating that the second variable display will be performed, the second variable display will be performed as shown in FIG. 90(a3).

As shown in FIG. 91(a4), a pseudo consecutive performance is performed, and when the letters "x3" are displayed, indicating that a third variable display will be performed, as shown in FIG. 91(a5), a third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 91(a6), when a "3" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and also in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the variable display mode becomes a reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a7), a decorative pattern for the reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 92 (a8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 are lit in a mode corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIG. 72 to FIG. 78. In the state shown in FIG. 92 (a8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. During the reach line effect, a performance sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R.

As shown in Figure 92 (a9), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen begins to rotate left and right, and the flashes of light get larger.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate left and right, the flash of light gets larger, and a reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (a ray of light) that connects the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach state, and is colored a specific color such as blue or red. The display of the reach line can indicate to the player that the state of the variable display has become a reach state, or that it will become a reach state.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a11), the decorative symbol in the center of the screen continues to rotate left and right, the flash of light gets larger, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 93 (a12), the decorative symbol in the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 93, during the reach line performance, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen light up at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen gradually expands in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 94 (a14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen expands further, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 94 (a15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen expands further, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 94, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen are lit up at high brightness.

As shown in Figure 95 (a16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen now gradually shrinks in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink left and right (inward) of the screen. As shown in Figure 95 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen shrinks further, and the reach line in the center of the screen shrinks further left and right (inward) of the screen, stopping in its original position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen light up with high brightness. After that, as shown in Figure 95 (a18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 also goes out.

After the reach line performance ends as shown in FIG. 95 (a18), if a group of six is announced, the performance will transition to that shown in FIG. 96 (a19); if a background is announced, the performance will transition to that shown in FIG. 105 (a101); and if a lamp is announced, the performance will transition to that shown in FIG. 106 (a111).

As mentioned above, the six-person group preview is a presentation that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special pattern or decorative pattern will be a predetermined jackpot pattern, and is a presentation in which six characters dressed as maids proceed in a group. The background preview is a presentation that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special pattern or decorative pattern will be a predetermined jackpot pattern, and is a presentation in which a specific character (for example, a main character, a rare character, etc.) is displayed with a specific background (for example, a starry sky background). The lamp preview is a presentation that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special pattern or decorative pattern will be a predetermined jackpot pattern, and is a presentation in which a specific lamp (for example, the role lamp 9A, etc.) included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes. In the lamp preview, one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 may light up or flash, or a lamp other than the game effect lamp 9 may light up or flash.

In stage A, a group announcement (for example, a six-person group announcement or a Boingo group announcement) is executed after the reach line performance of the previous change. For example, when a six-person group announcement is executed after the reach line performance, a PUSH performance is executed as shown in FIG. 96 (a19). When the PUSH performance is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for the pressing operation are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a text image of "PUSH!!" is displayed. Furthermore, during the PUSH performance, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the PUSH performance based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 87. For example, during the PUSH performance, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are lit or flashing. Note that during the PUSH performance, a sound effect urging the player to press the push button 31B may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, in the PUSH presentation, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by an image display, a lit or blinking lamp, or a sound.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a20), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an effect occurs in which the image showing the push button 31B, the meter image, and the text image of "PUSH!!" that were displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 disappear. In addition, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. By the output of the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that the push button 31B has been effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends before the group preview effect (in this example, a group of six) begins. In addition, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all the frame lamps light up at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a21), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 temporarily returns to displaying the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner that corresponds to the background.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a22), the six-person group preview begins, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 goes out. This draws the player's attention to the fact that the group preview performance is about to begin.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a23), in the first display period, the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), appears as the first (initial) character. Note that the state shown in FIG. 97 (a23) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 60 (a), and represents the first situation in which the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is not yet displayed in its entirety, but only part of maid A (in this example, part of her face) is displayed.

During the execution of the 6-person group preview, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are lit in a manner corresponding to the group preview performance based on the brightness data table shown in Figures 65 to 71. For example, in the first display period shown in Figures 97 to 99, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the location where the character appears in the group preview begin to light up at high brightness, and then the location of the lamps that are lit up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the character moves. Note that when a group preview performance (6-person group preview, Bakuchu preview, Boingo preview described below) is executed, the brightness of images other than the images related to the group preview performance (for example, background images and images related to the SP reach first half preview performance) is reduced. The brightness of other images that has been reduced during the group preview performance gradually returns to its original brightness in stages during the third display period. On the other hand, the display of information related to games that are important to the player in terms of winning or losing or the degree of advantage, such as the fourth pattern 5J and small pattern 5M indicating the first and second reserved memory counts, and the first reserved memory display area 5D, the second reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5A, is given a high priority and is not lowered in brightness even when the group preview performance is performed.

During the group preview performance, a performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 62, the volume of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance starts to be output at a timing related to the start of the first display period, the volume of the performance sound is increased to a specific volume during the first display period, the volume of the performance sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the performance sound is decreased during the third display period. When the group preview performance starts, a start sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, but the output of the start sound stops by the time the second character appears.

As shown in Fig. 97 (a24), the second character appears shortly after the first character appears. Note that the state shown in Fig. 97 (a24) corresponds to the state shown in Fig. 60 (b), and represents a second situation in which maid A, who is displayed first, is not yet displayed in its entirety, but part of said maid A is more visible than in the first situation, and maid B (Jam-chan), who is displayed second, is not yet displayed in its entirety, but part of said maid B (part of her face in this example) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a25), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. As shown in FIG. 98 (a26), an animation is displayed in which the second character to appear overtakes the first character to appear. As shown in FIG. 98 (a27), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a28), the characters continue to progress, and eventually the second character to appear, who is running at the top (leading), reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 99 (a29), the second character to appear, who is running at the top (leading), begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 99 (a30), the second character to appear, who is running at the top, is the first to disappear from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 100 (a31), during the second display period, an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. During the second display period shown in FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, the frame lamps are lit sparsely with high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance. This causes the frame lamps to light up or flash in accordance with the animation display of the characters forming a group and running through. In addition, the performance sound corresponding to the group preview output from speakers 8L, 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display of the characters running through. After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (a32) to FIG. 101 (a36), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run through the screen from the left side to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 102 (a37), in the third display period, the last character appears and an animation of the last character running from the left side of the screen to the right side with the other characters is displayed. Note that no new characters appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, in line with the performance in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview, the frame lamps also change position from the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the left side, where they are turned off or lit at a low brightness. Note that, as shown in FIG. 102 (a37), when the third display period begins, all of the game effect lamps 9 are temporarily lit at a high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 102 (a38), the frame lamps begin to go out as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (a38), some of the right frame lamps 9R are out because no characters are displayed in the right half of the screen. As shown in FIG. 102 (a39), the number of right frame lamps 9R that are out increases as the character continues to disappear to the left edge of the screen.

As shown in Fig. 103 (a40) and (a41), the number of game effect lamps 9 that are turned off increases as the characters gradually disappear in stages. As shown in Fig. 103 (a42), when the last character disappears, the group preview performance ends.

Now, referring to FIG. 104, a comparative example of a six-person group preview will be compared with the six-person group preview of this embodiment. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 104 (a201), similar to this embodiment shown in FIG. 97 (a23), the first situation is reached in which the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is not yet entirely displayed, while part of maid A (part of her face in this example) is displayed.

In the present embodiment shown in FIG. 97 (a24), the first maid A is not yet entirely displayed, but part of her is more visible than in the first situation, and the second maid B (Jam-chan) is not yet entirely displayed, but part of her (part of her face in this example) is displayed. In contrast, in the comparative example shown in FIG. 104 (a202), the second maid B does not appear, but continues to run, and the whole of maid A is displayed. And in the comparative example shown in FIG. 104 (a203), the second maid B finally appears after the first maid A runs past the left side of the center of the screen. In this comparative example, only one character appears, and it does not look like a group preview performance.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 97 to 103, an animation is displayed in which multiple characters appear and run one after the other without any gaps, so that multiple characters progress as a group, creating a powerful presentation. Also, the number of characters overtaking other characters is smaller than the number of other characters that are overtaken by the overtaking character, which prevents the group preview presentation from becoming too complicated. Note that the number of characters overtaking other characters may be greater than the number of other characters that are overtaken by the overtaking character. In this case, a dynamic group preview presentation can be shown to the player.

When a background preview is executed after the reach line effect, a PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 105 (a101). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for the pressing operation are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, along with an image of the text "PUSH!!" Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect, based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 87.

As shown in FIG. 105 (a102), when push button 31B is pressed during a PUSH effect, the image indicating push button 31B, the meter image, and the text image of "PUSH!!" that were displayed in the center of the screen of image display device 5 disappear. In addition, when push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. When push button 31B is pressed, game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. In this example, all frame lamps light up at high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (a103), a specific character (in this example, Maid B (Jam-chan)) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 together with a specific background (in this example, a starry sky background) as a background preview effect. Furthermore, during the background preview effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 are lit up in a manner corresponding to the background preview effect, based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 71. In addition, sound effects are also output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the background preview effect.

When a lamp notice is executed after the reach line effect, a PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 106 (a111). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for which the push operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, along with an image of the text "PUSH!!" Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are lit up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect, based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 87.

As shown in FIG. 106 (a112), when push button 31B is pressed during a PUSH effect, the image indicating push button 31B, the meter image, and the text image of "PUSH!!" that were displayed in the center of the screen of image display device 5 disappear. In addition, when push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. When push button 31B is pressed, game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. In this example, all frame lamps light up at high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (a113), a lamp preview is executed, and a specific lamp (such as a role lamp 9A) included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes. In addition, a performance sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance of the lamp preview.

After the third display period of the group notice ends as shown in FIG. 103 (a42), or after the background notice shown in FIG. 105 (a103) or the lamp notice shown in FIG. 106 (a113) ends, the symbol forwarding effect is executed as shown in FIG. 107 to FIG. 111. The symbol forwarding effect is an effect that encourages the player to see whether the variably displayed decorative symbol (in this embodiment, the decorative symbol in the central decorative symbol display area 5C) will stop in the decorative symbol that has become a reach state, and whether the decorative symbol that stops is a decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot symbol. During the symbol forwarding effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the symbol forwarding effect based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, a performance sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the symbol forwarding effect.

As shown in FIG. 107 (a43), when the symbol advance performance starts, the variably displayed decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed large and begins to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). At this time, the symbol advance performance starts from the same decorative symbol (i.e., the decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot) as the decorative symbols located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that are in a reach state, but the starting position is a position below and away from the decorative symbol that is in a reach state.

After that, as shown in Fig. 107(a44) to Fig. 108(a48), the decorative pattern in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (e.g., a slow speed). Then, as shown in Fig. 109(a49) to Fig. 110(a54), the speed of the variably displayed decorative pattern increases as the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed, and finally, as shown in Fig. 111(a55) to (a57), the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (e.g., a speed faster than the first speed). As shown in Fig. 111(a57), when the decorative pattern in the middle has been variably displayed for roughly two revolutions, the pattern advance performance ends.

After the symbol forwarding performance is completed, as shown in Fig. 112 (a58) and (a59), the color of the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" that has entered the reach state gradually turns white due to a performance effect called whiteout, and eventually the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" that has entered the reach state becomes completely invisible. After that, as shown in Fig. 112 (a59), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that has turned white due to whiteout is gradually increased, the performance image for the later change that was switched to on the back side appears on the screen.

(SP Reach First Half Presentation Mode)
With reference to Figures 113 to 121, the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach will be explained.

As shown in Fig. 113 (a61) and (a62), after the transition to the post-variation, a character animation is displayed until the title image of the SP Reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as the main character, or a character that appears in the SP Reach. As shown in Fig. 113 (a63), the title of the SP Reach is displayed. In this embodiment, the SP Reach is performed in such a way that a maid character such as Yume Yume-chan catches a Bakuchu, so the title "Catch a Bakuchu!" is displayed. During the first half of the SP Reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP Reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, a performance sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP Reach.

As shown in Figure 114 (c1), when the first half of the SP reach is performed, an image of Maid A (Yume Yume-chan) standing with her legs apart is displayed. After that, as shown in Figure 114 (c2), an image of the opposing character (enemy character), Bakuchu, looking surprised is displayed. After that, as shown in Figures 114 (c3) to 115 (c5), an animation of Maid A chasing a fleeing Bakuchu is displayed.

As shown in Figure 115 (c6), after an animation of Maid A jumping on the Bakuchu is displayed, if there is a miss (if the fluctuation pattern is main fluctuation number 9), the presentation shown in Figure 116 (c11) will be displayed, if there is a jackpot (if the fluctuation pattern is main fluctuation number 20), the presentation shown in Figure 118 (c21) will be displayed, and if there is a transition to the latter half of the SP reach (if the fluctuation pattern is main fluctuation number 12, 23) or the final reach (if the fluctuation pattern is main fluctuation number 15, 26), the presentation shown in Figure 121 (c31) will be displayed.

If a miss is confirmed in the first half of the SP Reach, the effect shown in FIG. 115(c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 116(c11). In the effect shown in FIG. 116(c11), an image of Maid A looking depressed after not being able to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and the missing symbol "4" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, as shown in FIG. 116(c12), the color of the image including the character image and the missing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" gradually turns black due to a performance effect called blackout, and finally, as shown in FIG. 116(c13), the image including the character image and the missing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" completely disappears.

After that, as shown in Fig. 117 (c14) and (c15), by gradually increasing the transparency of the entire front screen that has turned black due to the blackout, the normal background effect image that was switched to on the back side becomes visible. Then, as shown in Fig. 117 (c16), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and the loss is confirmed.

If a jackpot is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, after the presentation shown in FIG. 115 (c6), the presentation will transition to that shown in FIG. 118 (c21). In the presentation shown in FIG. 118 (c21), an image of Maid A catching a Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and the jackpot symbol "3" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C.

After that, a fanfare effect is executed. In the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (c22), the decorative pattern of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in FIG. 118 (c23), the decorative pattern is displayed so that it extends beyond the top of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (c24) and (c25), an animation of the decorative pattern moving is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (c26), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and the big win is confirmed.

After that, as shown in Fig. 120 (c27) to (c29), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is displayed large, and an animation of the words "FEVER!" appears.

When moving to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c31) is displayed after the effect shown in FIG. 115 (c6). In the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c31), an image of maid A being depressed because she was unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and the losing symbol "4" stops as a decorative symbol located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the center. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (c32), the color of the image including the character image and the losing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" gradually becomes black due to a blackout. Up to this point, the effect is the same as when the first half of the SP reach is a miss as shown in FIG. 116 (c11) and (c12). However, when moving to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach, as shown in FIG. 121 (c33), an effect is executed in which the movable body 32 falls, which did not occur when the first half of the SP reach is a miss.

After the effect of the movable body 32 falling is executed, if the game moves to the second half of the SP reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation numbers 12 and 23), the effect shown in FIG. 122 (c41) will be displayed, and if the game moves to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26), the effect shown in FIG. 129 (c71) will be displayed. In this way, the fluctuation patterns that result in a jackpot include a fluctuation pattern that initially appears to confirm a miss in the first half of the SP reach, and then transitions to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach. This allows the player to think that a miss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, and then transitions to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach through rescue, which can increase the excitement of the game.

(SP Reach Second Half Presentation Mode)
With reference to Figures 122 to 128, the presentation style in the latter half of the SP reach will be explained.

When moving to the second half of the SP reach, after the performance shown in FIG. 121 (c33), the performance will move to that shown in FIG. 122 (c41). In the performance shown in FIG. 122 (c41), the character image and background image, etc., will become completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (c42), as the transparency of the entire front screen that has turned black due to the blackout is gradually increased, the image of the latter half of the SP Reach that was switched to on the rear side becomes visible. During the latter half of the SP Reach performance, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 light up in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP Reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, performance sounds are also output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP Reach.

As shown in Fig. 122 (c42), when the latter half of the SP reach is performed, an image is displayed of Maid A (Yume Yume-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan) standing with their arms folded and declaring war on Bakuchu. After that, as shown in Fig. 122 (c43) to Fig. 123 (c45), an animation is displayed in which Maid A and Maid B chase after the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in Figure 122 (c46), after an animation of Maid A and Maid B jumping on the explosive chu is displayed, if there is a miss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 12), the presentation shown in Figure 124 (c51) will be displayed, if there is a jackpot (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 23), the presentation shown in Figure 126 (c61) will be displayed, and if there is a transition to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 15, 26), the presentation shown in Figure 129 (c71) will be displayed.

If a miss is confirmed in the latter half of the SP Reach, the effect shown in FIG. 123 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 126 (c51). In the effect shown in FIG. 126 (c51), an image of Maid A and Maid B looking depressed after failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and the missing symbol "4" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (c52), the color of the image including the character image and the missing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" gradually turns black due to a blackout, and finally, as shown in FIG. 124 (c53), the image including the character image and the missing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" becomes completely invisible.

After that, as shown in Fig. 125 (c54) and (c55), as the transparency of the entire front screen that has turned black due to the blackout is gradually increased, the normal background effect image that was switched to on the back side becomes visible. Then, as shown in Fig. 125 (c56), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, confirming the loss.

If a jackpot is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, after the presentation shown in FIG. 123 (c46), the presentation will transition to that shown in FIG. 126 (c61). In the presentation shown in FIG. 126 (c61), an image of Maid A and Maid B catching Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and the jackpot symbol "3" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C.

After that, a fanfare effect is executed. In the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 126 (c62), the decorative pattern of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in FIG. 126 (c63), the decorative pattern is displayed so that it extends beyond the top of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (c64) and (c65), an animation of the decorative pattern moving is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (c66), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and the big win is confirmed.

After that, as shown in Figure 128 (c67) to (c69), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is displayed large, and an animation of the words "FEVER!" appears.

(Performance in the final reach)
With reference to Figures 129 to 139, the presentation mode in the final reach will be described.

When moving to the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 129(c71) is displayed after the effect shown in FIG. 123(c46). When moving to the final reach, as shown in FIG. 129(c71), the entire screen suddenly goes black, and as shown in FIG. 129(c72), a cross-shaped light effect is displayed in the center of the screen. After that, as shown in FIG. 129(c73), an effect is executed to notify the start of the final reach, and the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is displayed on the entire screen, along with a text image saying "Let's go!". The light effect display effect as shown in FIG. 129(c72) is intentionally inserted between the blackout effect shown in FIG. 129(c71) and the effect in which the face image of the main character is displayed as shown in FIG. 129(c73). This makes it easier for the player to understand that the final reach is about to develop by the effect shown in FIG. 129(c72).

After that, the final reach performance is executed. During the second half of the final reach performance, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 are lit in a manner corresponding to the second half of the final reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, performance sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the second half of the final reach.

As shown in Fig. 130 (c74), an image of Maid A giving a peace sign is displayed. After that, as shown in Fig. 130 (c75) to Fig. 130 (c78), images of one character are displayed at multiple timings, and as shown in Fig. 130 (c79), an image of the entire sentence is displayed to indicate the theme of the performance that will be executed in the final reach. In this example, it is displayed as "Everyone gather together."

After that, as shown in Figures 132 (c80) to 133 (c85), animations are displayed at multiple timings to introduce the characters that will appear in the final reach performance. For example, in this example, supporting characters appear in order, such as Maid F, Maid E, Maid D, Maid C, Maid B, and Maid A, and high priority characters such as the main character appear near the end (or in the latter half). Note that characters with high priority such as the main character may also appear in order. In other words, it is preferable for high priority characters such as the main character to appear at the beginning (or in the first half) or near the end (or in the second half) so that they stand out more than low priority characters such as supporting characters.

After that, as shown in Figure 134 (c86), when the final reach performance is executed, an image is displayed of the six characters who appeared in the six-person group preview standing with their arms around each other and declaring war on Bakuchu. After that, as shown in Figures 134 (c87) to 135 (c89), an animation is displayed in which the six characters chase after the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in Fig. 135 (c90), an animation of six characters chasing each other is displayed, and then, as shown in Fig. 135 (c91), a trigger effect is executed. When the trigger effect is executed, an image showing the stick controller 31A and a meter image showing the time limit for which the stick controller 31A can be operated are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, along with an image of the text "GET OUT!!"

After the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 135 (c91), if there is a miss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 15), the effect will transition to that shown in FIG. 136 (c101), and if there is a jackpot (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26), the effect will transition to that shown in FIG. 137 (c111).

When a loss is confirmed in the final reach, the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger performance shown in FIG. 135 (c91), and then the performance shown in FIG. 136 (c101) is transitioned to. In the performance shown in FIG. 136 (c101), an image of six characters feeling down after failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and the losing symbol "4" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, as shown in FIG. 136 (c102), the color of the image including the character image and the losing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" gradually becomes black due to a blackout, and finally, as shown in FIG. 136 (c103), the image including the character image and the losing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" completely disappears.

After that, although not shown in the diagram, the transparency of the entire front screen, which has turned black due to the blackout, is gradually increased, and the normal background effect image that was switched to on the back side becomes visible. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, confirming the loss.

If a jackpot is confirmed at the final reach, the presentation shown in FIG. 135 (c91) is followed by the presentation shown in FIG. 137 (c111). In the presentation shown in FIG. 137 (c111), an image of six characters catching Bakuchu is displayed, and the jackpot symbol "3" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C.

After that, a fanfare effect is executed. In the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 137 (c112), the decorative pattern of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in FIG. 137 (c113), the decorative pattern is displayed so that it extends beyond the top of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (c114) and (c115), an animation of the decorative pattern moving is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (c116), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and the big win is confirmed.

After that, as shown in Figure 139 (c117) to (c119), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is displayed large, and an animation of the words "FEVER!" appears.

(Performance on Stage B)
The presentation on stage B will be described with reference to Figures 140 to 160.

As shown in FIG. 140 (b1), when the variable display starts based on one reserved memory, on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during the variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Bakuchu is displayed as the character appearing in stage B. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and the performance sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 140(b2), when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed and the character "x2" is displayed indicating that the second variable display will be performed, the second variable display will be performed as shown in FIG. 140(b3).

As shown in FIG. 140(b4), a pseudo consecutive performance is performed, and when the letters "x3" are displayed, indicating that a third variable display will be performed, a third variable display is performed, as shown in FIG. 141(b5). After that, as shown in FIG. 141(b6), when a "3" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and also in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the variable display mode becomes a reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 142(b7), a decorative pattern for the reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 142(b8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are lit in a mode corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 72 to FIG. 78. Note that the brightness data table shown in FIG. 72 to FIG. 78 is the same as the brightness data table used in the reach line effect of stage A. In the state shown in FIG. 142(b8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit at high brightness. Note that during the reach line effect, a performance sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figure 142 (b9), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen begins to rotate left and right, and the flashes of light get larger.

As shown in FIG. 143 (b10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate left and right, the flash of light gets larger, and a reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (ray) connecting the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach state, and is colored a specific color such as blue or red. The display of the reach line can indicate to the player that the state of the variable display has become a reach state, or that it will become a reach state. The reach line that appears in stage B may be the same as the reach line that appears in stage A, or may be different in color, shape, size, etc., for example.

As shown in FIG. 143 (b11), the decorative symbol in the center of the screen continues to rotate left and right, the flash of light gets larger, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 143 (b12), the decorative symbol in the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 143, during the reach line performance, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen light up at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 144 (b13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen gradually expands in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 144 (b14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen expands further, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 144 (b15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen expands further, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 144, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen are lit up at high brightness.

As shown in Figure 145 (b16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen now gradually shrinks in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink left and right (inward) of the screen. As shown in Figure 145 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen shrinks further, and the reach line in the center of the screen shrinks further left and right (inward) of the screen, stopping in its original position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen light up with high brightness. After that, as shown in Figure 145 (b18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 also goes out.

After the reach line effect ends as shown in FIG. 145 (b18), the symbol forwarding effect is executed as shown in FIG. 146 to FIG. 150. During the symbol forwarding effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 are lit in a manner corresponding to the symbol forwarding effect based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the symbol forwarding effect.

As shown in FIG. 146 (b19), when the symbol advance performance starts, the variably displayed decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed large and begins to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). At this time, the symbol advance performance starts from the same decorative symbol (i.e., the decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot) as the decorative symbols located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that are in a reach state, but the starting position is a position below and away from the decorative symbol that is in a reach state.

After that, as shown in Fig. 146 (b20) to Fig. 147 (b24), the decorative pattern in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (e.g., a slow speed). Then, as shown in Fig. 148 (b25) to Fig. 149 (b30), the speed of the variably displayed decorative pattern increases as the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed, and finally, as shown in Fig. 150 (b31) to (b33), the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (e.g., a speed faster than the first speed). As shown in Fig. 150 (b33), when the decorative pattern in the middle has been variably displayed for roughly two revolutions, the pattern advance performance ends.

After the symbol forwarding effect has ended, as shown in Fig. 151 (b34) and (b35), the color of the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" that has entered the reach state gradually turns white due to whiteout, and eventually the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" that has entered the reach state becomes completely invisible. After that, as shown in Fig. 151 (b36), the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that has turned white due to whiteout is gradually increased, and the post-changing effect image that was switched to on the back side appears on the screen.

As shown in Figures 152 (b37) and (b38), after the transition to post-variation, character animation is displayed until the title image of the SP Reach is displayed. The character in question may be a high-priority character such as the main character, or a character that appears in the SP Reach. As shown in Figure 152 (b39), the title of the SP Reach ("Catch the Bakuchu!") is displayed. During the performance of the first half of the SP Reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP Reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, performance sounds are also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP Reach.

In stage B, a group notice (for example, a Bakuchu notice or a Boingo group notice) is executed during the period when the title display of the first half of the SP reach of the later change is being performed. For example, when a Bakuchu group notice is executed during the period when the title display of the first half of the SP reach is being performed, a PUSH performance is executed as shown in FIG. 153 (b40). When a PUSH performance is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the push operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH!!" is displayed. Furthermore, during a PUSH performance, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the PUSH performance based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 87. For example, during a PUSH performance, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are lit or flash. Note that during a PUSH performance, a sound effect urging the player to press the push button 31B may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, in the PUSH presentation, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by an image display, a lit or blinking lamp, or a sound.

As shown in FIG. 153 (b41), when the push button 31B is pressed during a PUSH effect, the image indicating the push button 31B, the meter image, and the text image of "PUSH!!" that were displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 disappear. When the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. The output of the PUSH sound allows the player to recognize that the push button 31B has been effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L, 8R ends before the group preview effect (in this example, the Bakuchu group preview) begins. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamps 9 light up or flash in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. In this example, all the frame lamps light up at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 153 (b42), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 temporarily returns to displaying the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 154 (b43), the Bakuchu group announcement starts, but before the character appears, the game effect lamp 9 goes out. This draws the player's attention to the fact that the group announcement performance is about to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 154 (b44), the first character appears in the first display period. Note that the state shown in FIG. 154 (b44) represents a first situation in which the entirety of the character displayed first is not yet displayed, but part of the character displayed first (part of the face in this example) is displayed.

When the Bakuchu group preview is being performed, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 light up in a manner that corresponds to the group preview performance, based on the brightness data table shown in Figures 65 to 71. For example, in the first display period shown in Figures 154 to 156, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near where the character appears in the group preview start to light up at high brightness, and then the location of the lamps that are lit at high brightness moves in the direction the character is moving.

During the group preview performance, a performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 62, the volume of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance starts to be output at a timing related to the start of the first display period, the volume of the performance sound is increased to a specific volume during the first display period, the volume of the performance sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the performance sound is decreased during the third display period. When the group preview performance starts, a start sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, but the output of the start sound stops by the time the second character appears.

As shown in FIG. 154 (b45), the second character appears shortly after the first character appears. Note that the state shown in FIG. 154 (b45) represents a second situation in which the first character is not yet entirely displayed, but part of the first character is more visible than in the first situation, and the second character is not yet entirely displayed, but part of the second character is visible (in this example, part of the face).

As shown in Figure 155 (b46) to (b48), characters appear one after another, and an animation of them running from the left side of the screen to the right side is displayed. Note that the display area on the screen used in the group preview performance is larger than the display area for "Catch the Bakuchu!" in the SP first half title preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 156 (b49), the characters continue to progress, and eventually the first displayed character running in the lead (in the lead) reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 156 (b50), the first displayed character running in the lead (in the lead) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 156 (b51), the first displayed character running in the lead is the first to disappear from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b52), during the second display period, an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. During the second display period shown in FIG. 157 and FIG. 158, the frame lamps are lit sparsely with high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance. This causes the frame lamps to light up or flash in accordance with the animation display of the characters forming a group and running through. In addition, the performance sound corresponding to the group preview output from speakers 8L, 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display of the characters running through. After that, as shown in FIG. 157 (b52) to FIG. 158 (b57), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run through the screen from the left side to the right side.

When the characters run in a group from the left side of the screen to the right side, they cover the entire screen, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see the title display "Catch the Bakuchu!".

As shown in FIG. 159 (b58), in the third display period, the last character appears and an animation of the last character running from the left side of the screen to the right side with the other characters is displayed. Note that no new characters appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIG. 159 and FIG. 160, in line with the performance in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview, the frame lamps also change position from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, either turned off or lit at a low brightness. Note that, as shown in FIG. 159 (b58), when the third display period begins, all of the game effect lamps 9 are temporarily lit at a high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 159 (b59), the frame lamps begin to go out as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen. In the example shown in FIG. 159 (b59), some of the right frame lamps 9R are out because no characters are displayed in the right half of the screen. As shown in FIG. 159 (b60), the number of right frame lamps 9R that are out increases as the character continues to disappear to the left edge of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 159, as the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen, the title display "Catch a Bakuchu!" gradually reappears in stages. At this time, if the SP first half title preview lottery is won, the display mode (e.g., color, pattern, shape, etc.) of the title display "Catch a Bakuchu!" changes, and the SP first half title preview is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 152 (b39), before the Bakuchu group preview is executed, the text "Catch a Bakuchu!" in the title display in the first half of the SP reach is white, but as shown in FIG. 158 (b56), when the character image in the group preview is displayed on the layer in front of the layer in which the title display is being performed, the title display becomes difficult to see or becomes invisible. While the entire screen is covered by the character images in the group preview, the text "Catch the Bakuchu!" in the title display turns red, and as the characters in the group preview disappear to the left edge of the screen, the red title display gradually appears in stages, as shown in Figures 159 (b59) and (b60).

As shown in Figures 160 (b61) and (b62), the number of game effect lamps 9 that are turned off increases as the characters gradually disappear in stages. As shown in Figure 160 (b63), when the last character disappears, the group preview performance ends. After that, the performance transitions to the first half of the SP reach, as shown in Figure 114 (c1).

(Boingo Group Trailer)
The presentation of the Boingo Group announcement will be described with reference to Figures 161 to 170.

In the 6-person group preview and Bakuchu group preview mentioned above, multiple characters progress in groups from the right edge of the screen to the left edge. In this way, the 6-person group preview and Bakuchu group preview are presentations in which the characters progress in the X-axis direction on the X-Y plane shown in Figure 53. On the other hand, the Boingo group preview allows the character (Boingo) to move in the Z-axis direction of the screen as well. In other words, the Boingo group preview is a 3D presentation in which the character progresses in a three-dimensional, X-Y-Z space.

Figures 161 to 166 are diagrams for explaining the presentation mode when the Boingo Group Pre-Announcement is executed on Stage A. Note that when the Boingo Group is executed on Stage B, the presentation mode is the same as that shown in Figures 161 to 166. Also, although not shown, the Boingo Group Pre-Announcement performance also has a first display period, second display period, and third display period, just like the 6-person Group Pre-Announcement performance and the Bakuchu Group Pre-Announcement performance.

As shown in FIG. 161 (d1), the Boingo Swarm Prediction starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 goes out. This draws the player's attention to the upcoming execution of the Swarm Prediction performance.

When the Boingo Group Preview is being performed, for example, based on the brightness data tables shown in Figures 65 to 71, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 light up in a manner corresponding to the group preview performance. For example, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the location where the characters appear in the group preview start to light up at high brightness, and then the location of the lamps that light up at high brightness moves in the direction the characters move in. Also, in the group preview performance, the frame lamps light up sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters move forward in a group. This allows the frame lamps to light up or flash in accordance with the animation display of the characters running through in a group. Also, the performance sounds corresponding to the group preview output from speakers 8L, 8R include, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display of the characters running through.

As shown in FIG. 161 (d2), a preliminary image with light effects is displayed as a preliminary performance before a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen. The specific position is a group appearance point where a group of characters appears. After that, as shown in FIG. 161 (d3), the first character appears from the specific position that has been made difficult to see by the preliminary image with light effects.

Then, as shown in Fig. 162 (d4) and (d5), the second and third characters appear, and an animation is displayed in which each character gradually progresses toward the screen in stages. As shown in Fig. 162 (d6), as the first character displayed (the first character) is enlarged, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen due to the first character.

After that, as shown in Fig. 163 (d7) to (d9), the characters move in groups from the depth of the screen to the front, so that the entire screen is covered with characters. As shown in Fig. 164 (d10) to (d12), the last character appears and moves from the depth of the screen to the front.

After that, as shown in Fig. 165 (d13) and (d14), the last character moves from the depth of the screen to the front, covering most of the screen. Then, as shown in Fig. 165 (d15), the last character is enlarged and displayed over a range from one end of the screen to the other, until the entire screen is covered by the last character.

After that, as shown in Figures 166 (d16) and (d17), the original background image is displayed as the last character disappears from the screen, and as shown in 153 (d18), the group preview performance ends when the last character disappears.

Figure 167 is a diagram for explaining the details of the Boingo Group Prediction. Figures 167 (A) to (F) correspond to Figures 161 (d3) to 162 (d6), 163 (d8), and (d9), respectively.

As shown in Figure 167 (A), the first character appears from the group emergence point, and as shown in Figures 167 (B) to (F), characters appear one after another from the group emergence points. Here, as the first character displayed (the first character) is enlarged, the specific position where the characters appear becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen due to the first character. For this reason, as shown in Figures 167 (E) and (F), even if a subsequent character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it will not be visible, so there is no need to place the subsequent character image.

Now, with reference to Figures 168 and 169, a comparative example of the Boingo swarm announcement will be compared with the Boingo swarm announcement of this embodiment. In the comparative example shown in Figure 168, a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen (the swarm appearance point), but a prelude image with a light effect as shown in Figure 161 (d2) is not displayed. For this reason, in order to eliminate the sense of incongruity caused by the character suddenly appearing large, an animation must be created in which the character is displayed small and then gradually becomes larger in stages, as shown in Figures 168 and 169.

In the comparative example, the character must go through animation displays as shown in Fig. 168 (d101) to Fig. 169 (d105) before it can be displayed at the size shown in Fig. 161 (d3) as shown in Fig. 169 (d106), which takes extra time and requires the creation of images for the animation. In contrast, in the case of the embodiment, as shown in Figs. 161 (d2) and (d3), a pre-image with a light effect is displayed as a pre-image before the character appears, and by displaying the first character from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the display of the pre-image with this light effect, the character can be displayed from the beginning at a certain size (the size shown in Fig. 161 (d3) or Fig. 169 (d106)).

(A variation of the Boingo Group preview)
FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode when the Boingo group preview according to the modified example is executed. The example shown in FIG. 170 may be replaced with the example shown in FIG. 166. For example, as shown in FIG. 170 (d101) to (d103), the title image of the first half of the SP may be displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 161 (d1), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview performance on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the image of the normal background is displayed, as shown in FIG. 170 (d103), the image of the normal background may be switched to the title image of the first half of the SP. In this way, the group preview performance may be executed during the execution of the preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance.

The title image in the first half of the SP in the Boingo Group Preview may also be displayed in a different way to predict a big win, as shown in FIG. 160. Also, instead of the final character being enlarged to cover the entire screen, the background image used in the group preview performance may be animated to roll up like a scroll, switching to the next performance.

(Dog Pack Announcement)
The presentation of the dog pack announcement will be described with reference to Figures 171 to 173.

In this embodiment, the six-person group announcement, the Bakuchu announcement, and the Boingo group announcement are given as examples of group announcement effects, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 may also execute a group announcement effect called a dog group announcement, as shown in Figures 171 to 173.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (e1), the first character is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 171 (e2), multiple dog characters appear one after another, until the screen area is covered by the characters, as shown in FIG. 171 (e3).

After that, as shown in Figure 172 (e4) to (e6), as the last character displayed disappears, the title image of the first half of the SP is displayed. That is, while the entire screen is covered by character images in the group preview performance on the layer in front of the layer displaying the normal background image as shown in Figure 171 (e3), the normal background image is switched to the title image of the first half of the SP as shown in Figure 172 (e6). Then, on the screen after the multiple characters located at the very end have passed, the title image of the first half of the SP, which corresponds to the performance of the first half of the SP reach, is displayed.

In addition, the title image in the first half of the SP in the dog pack prediction may predict a jackpot by changing the display mode as shown in FIG. 160.

As shown in FIG. 173, when comparing the six-person group forecast and the dog group forecast, the distance X2 between the first and last characters displayed in the dog group forecast (the length between them on the X-axis) is shorter than the distance X1 between the first and last characters displayed in the six-person group forecast (the length between them on the X-axis). Also, since the execution time is the same or approximately the same for both, the speed V2 at which the characters advance in the dog group forecast is slower than the speed V1 at which the characters advance in the six-person group forecast. Furthermore, the density D2 of multiple characters in the dog group forecast is greater than the density D1 of multiple characters in the six-person group forecast. Also, the dog group forecast performance has a higher expectation (reliability) of a jackpot than the six-person group forecast performance, and the dog group forecast performance has a lower appearance rate (execution probability) than the six-person group forecast performance.

(Execution of group preview performance during reach line performance)
With reference to Figures 174 and 175, we will explain the presentation mode when a group preview presentation is executed during a reach line.

As shown in FIG. 174(f1), when a reach line effect is executed, a group preview effect is executed as shown in FIG. 174(f2)-(f4), and then a symbol advance effect is executed as shown in FIG. 175(f5) and (f6).

[Main components and effects]
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are listed individually.

(1-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 50, the six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 97 to FIG. 103),
a congratulatory effect execution means (for example, a process for executing a fanfare effect by the effect control CPU 120) for executing a congratulatory effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for displaying an image for congratulating the fact that the display result of the variable display has become the specific display result;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 62 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a23) to FIG. 99 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 100 (a31) to FIG. 101 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 102 (a37) to FIG. 103 (a42)),
The celebration performance can be executed after the group performance (for example, the fanfare performance shown in FIG. 118 to FIG. 120 is executed after the six-person group notice performance shown in FIG. 97 to FIG. 103 is executed),
When the display result of the variable display is suggested to be a failure display result different from the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variable pattern of variable number 9), during a first predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is the failure display result (for example, the period T1 + T2 shown in Figure 63), the first display period starts in the latter half of the first predetermined period (for example, the examples shown in Figures 63 and 64),
When the display result of the variable display is suggested to be the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variable patterns of variable numbers 20, 23, and 26), in a second specified period from the start of the variable display to the time when it is suggested that the variable display is the specific display result (for example, the period T3+T4, the period T5+T6, or the period T7+T8), the first display period starts in the first half of the second specified period (for example, the examples shown in Figures 63 and 64).

In this way, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another is designed to be longer than the first display period from when the display of the characters first starts to when the display of the characters first ends, thereby providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, while the sense of elation may fade over time until the result of the variable display is determined, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a losing display result, the sense of elation can be sustained or reawakened by executing the group preview performance in the latter half of the variable display time. On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a winning display result, a fanfare performance, which is a celebration performance, is executed, so that a sense of elation can be provided by executing the group preview performance in the first half of the variable display time, and even if the sense of elation fades over time, the sense of elation can be sustained or reawakened by the celebration performance.

The "specific display result" is a display result that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. In other words, even if the specific display result is derived, it is a display result for controlling the game state to an advantageous state. In this embodiment, a jackpot occurs when the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special chart LED board 20 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the jackpot becomes the specific display result. Also, a jackpot occurs when the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special chart LED board 20 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the jackpot becomes the specific display result. Furthermore, a jackpot occurs when the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 becomes a specific special pattern (for example, a jackpot pattern combination such as "3, 3, 3" or "7, 7, 7") and stops, and the display of the specific special pattern becomes the specific display result.

A "missing display result" is a display result that is different from the specific display result, and is a display result that is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display has become the missing display result. In other words, even if a missing display result is derived, the game state is not controlled to an advantageous state. In this embodiment, when the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special chart LED board 20 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a miss, the result of the game becomes a miss, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the miss becomes the missing display result. Also, when the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special chart LED board 20 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a miss, the result of the game becomes a miss, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the miss becomes the missing display result. Furthermore, when the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 stop as a specific predetermined pattern (for example, a losing pattern combination such as "3, 2, 3"), the result of the game is a loss, and the display of the predetermined pattern becomes a losing display result.

An "advantageous state" is a state that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state that is controlled to provide a gaming value award rate (for example, a payout rate of gaming balls) of 1 or more or exceeds 1. In this embodiment, examples of advantageous states include a jackpot gaming state that is controlled when a normal jackpot 1 or 2 or a special jackpot 1 to 9 occurs. The advantageous state may also be a small jackpot gaming state that is controlled when a small jackpot occurs, or a special jackpot state or a time-saving state.

The "new display of a character" may be the same type of character as the character first displayed in the group preview performance, or it may be a different type of character than the character first displayed in the group preview performance.

A "congratulatory effect" is an effect that displays an image to congratulate the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result, and is also an effect that displays an image to congratulate the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result and will be controlled to an advantageous state based on that. "Congratulating" includes suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or that it will be controlled to an advantageous state. "Congratulating" also includes increasing the player's anticipation of the advantageous state by suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or that it will be controlled to an advantageous state. For example, the congratulatory performance includes displaying an image that suggests or informs the player that the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 1 variable display section 9021 of the special chart LED board 20 has become a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, that the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 2 variable display section 9022 of the special chart LED board 20 has become a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, or that the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 have become specific special patterns (jackpot patterns), or that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

"The congratulatory performance can be executed after the group performance" includes a group preview performance being executed within a variable display based on one reserved memory, and then a congratulatory performance being executed within the variable display based on that one reserved memory. Also, "The congratulatory performance can be executed after the group performance" includes when a group preview performance is executed as a look-ahead performance that suggests or predicts that the display result of the variable display based on one reserved memory will be a specific display result before the display result of the variable display based on that one reserved memory begins, the group preview performance is executed, and then the variable display based on that one reserved memory begins and a congratulatory performance is executed within the variable display based on that one reserved memory.

The "first predetermined period" is the period from when the variable display starts until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result, and in this embodiment, it is exemplified by the period T1 + T2 shown in Figures 63 and 64. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result" includes the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 1 variable display section 9021 of the special chart LED board 20 becoming a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss, the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 2 variable display section 9022 of the special chart LED board 20 corresponding to a jackpot becoming a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss, and the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 becoming a specific predetermined pattern (losing pattern combination) and stopping. In addition, if the movable body 32 does not move at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a losing display result, but moves at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a winning display result, "suggesting that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result" includes suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result by the movable body 32 not moving at the specific timing. Note that the specific timing may be a timing when an effect is performed that prompts the player to operate the operating means, such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, and the movable body 32 moves when a jackpot is hit by the player operating the operating means.

The "second predetermined period" is the period from the start of the variable display until the display result of the variable display is suggested to be a specific display result, and in this embodiment, is exemplified by the periods T3+T4, T5+T6, and T7+T8 shown in Figures 63 and 64. "Suggestion that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" includes the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 1 variable display section 9021 of the special chart LED board 20 becoming a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 2 variable display section 9022 of the special chart LED board 20 becoming a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 becoming and stopping as a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern combination). In addition, if the movable body 32 does not move at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a losing display result, but moves at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a winning display result, "suggesting that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" includes suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result by the movable body 32 moving at the specific timing. Note that the specific timing may be a timing when an effect is performed that prompts the player to operate the operating means, such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, and the movable body 32 moves when the player operates the operating means to hit the jackpot.

(1-2) The second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period, and the third display period is longer than the first display period (for example, each display period shown in FIG. 62).

As a result, by making the second display period during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance the longest period, the group preview performance can be made more powerful. Furthermore, by making the first display period from when the first character appears to when the first character leaves the shortest period, it is possible to prevent the group preview performance that is suddenly executed from becoming boring.

(1-3) The character that is displayed first during the first display period is a character with a high priority in the content of the gaming machine (for example, Yume Yume, the main character).

As a result, the first character to appear in the group preview performance is a high priority character such as the protagonist, and is a character that the player is familiar with, but then characters that appear less frequently than the protagonist in other performances appear in the group preview performance, giving the player a sense of surprise about the group preview performance or making the player feel that it is a rare performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

"High priority characters" include the main character and characters other than the main character who appear in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that have the highest priority, and also include characters that appear more frequently (number of times) in the performances executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 than other characters.

(1-4) When the display result of the variable display is suggested to be the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variation patterns of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), the timing at which the display of the characters first starts in the group performance is close to the halfway point of the second specified period within the first half of the second specified period (for example, the examples shown in Figures 63 and 64).

As a result, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a winning display result, even if the group preview performance is executed in the first half of the variable display time, the group preview performance can be executed near the latter half of that first half, so that the aftertaste of the group preview performance can be extended even a little later.

(1-5) A pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, a variable pattern of variable numbers 20, 23, and 26) includes a rescue pattern (for example, a variable pattern of variable numbers 23 and 26) in which the display result of the variable display is made to look like the failure display result, and then the variable display result becomes the specific display result,
Even in the rescue pattern, during the second specified period from when the variable display starts until it is suggested that the variable display is the specific display result, the first display period starts in the first half of the second specified period (for example, the examples shown in Figures 63 and 64).

As a result, even in the case of a rescue pattern in which the display result of the variable display appears to be a losing display result and then the display result of the variable display becomes a winning display result, a fanfare effect, which is a celebratory effect, is executed, so that a sense of elation is created by executing the group preview effect in the first half of the variable display time, and even if the sense of elation fades over time, the sense of elation can be maintained or rekindled by the celebratory effect.

(1-6) In a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the aforementioned bad display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of main variable numbers 9, 12, 15) and a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the aforementioned specific display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of main variable numbers 20, 23, 26), a common display is performed until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the aforementioned bad display result or the aforementioned specific display result (for example, the examples shown in Figures 90 to 139).

As a result, for example, a common presentation is executed between the variation pattern of variation number 9 and the variation pattern of variation number 20 until the display result is determined, a common presentation is executed between the variation pattern of variation number 12 and the variation pattern of variation number 23 until the display result is determined, and further, a common presentation is executed between the variation pattern of variation number 15 and the variation pattern of variation number 26 until the display result is determined, so that the player can be drawn to the fact that a group preview presentation is being executed while a common presentation is being executed.

In addition, a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the losing display result (for example, a fluctuation pattern of main variable numbers 9, 12, 15) and a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, a fluctuation pattern of main variable numbers 20, 23, 26) may be displayed differently until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the losing display result or the specific display result.

This allows players to focus on the fact that a group preview effect is being performed while different effects are being performed.

(1-7) The execution period of the group performance may overlap with the execution period of a preview performance (for example, a preview performance of the first half of the special program title) that is a performance different from the group preview and that predicts that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result.
The preview performance ends after the third display period ends,
The display in the group performance has a larger display area than the display in the preview performance (for example, the examples shown in Figures 154 to 160).

This allows the player to see the SP first half title preview performance even if a group preview performance is executed while a preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance is being executed.

(1-8) While the preview performance is being performed, the group performance is executed (for example, the examples shown in Figures 154 to 160).

This allows players to focus on the fact that the group preview performance will be executed when a preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance is being executed. Note that the preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance and the group preview performance will not start execution at the same time.

(1-9) When the group performance is executed, the probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result is higher than when the preview performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the group preview is more reliable than the SP first half title preview).

As a result, other preview effects that have a lower expectation of a jackpot than the group preview effect are not displayed in the foreground layer, which has a higher priority than the group preview effect, so that a jackpot can be appropriately hinted to the player. In this way, in this embodiment, effects with a low expectation of a jackpot are not overlaid on top of effects with a high expectation of a jackpot.

(1-12) While the group performance is being performed, the brightness of both the background display and the display in the preview performance is reduced, but the brightness of the display of information related to the game (for example, the fourth pattern 5J and small pattern 5M indicating the first and second reserved memory counts, and the first reserved memory display area 5D, second reserved memory display area 5U, and active display area 5A) is not reduced.

As a result, when a group preview performance is executed, the brightness of the background display and images related to other preview performances (for example, images related to the SP first half title preview performance, which has a lower expectation level than the group preview performance) is lowered, while the display of information related to the game that is important to the player in terms of winning or losing the game or the degree of advantage is given a higher priority, and the brightness is not lowered even when a group preview performance is executed, so that important information can be shown to the player as much as possible.

(2-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 50, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 97 to FIG. 103) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 62 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a23) to FIG. 99 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 100 (a31) to FIG. 101 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 102 (a37) to FIG. 103 (a42)),
During the first display period, a first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed changes to a second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed further than the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in Figures 60 and 97).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another can be designed to be longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display first ends, thereby providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, since there is no situation in the group preview performance where only one person is displayed, it is possible to prevent doubts as to whether or not it is a group preview performance, or the misconception that only one person will appear.

The "first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed" includes a situation in which the initially displayed character is not yet entirely displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, but part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 60(a), or a situation in which the initially displayed character is not yet entirely displayed in the display area visible to the player when the gaming machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, but part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area visible to the player, as shown in FIG. 97(a). In other words, the second situation includes a situation in which the initially displayed character is not completely visible, but part of the initially displayed character is visible.

The "second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed" includes a situation in which, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the first displayed character is not yet entirely displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, while a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and the second displayed character is not yet entirely displayed, while a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or a situation in which, as shown in FIG. 97(b), the first displayed character is not yet entirely displayed in the display area visible to the player when the gaming machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, while a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation at the edge of the display area visible to the player, and the second displayed character is not yet entirely displayed, while a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area visible to the player. In other words, the second situation includes a situation in which the second character appears following the first character before the first character is completely visible.

(2-2) In the group performance, the first character displayed and the second character displayed have different position coordinates on the Y axis along the vertical direction on the screen.

This ensures that the first and second characters do not overlap on the Y axis, preventing the mistaken impression that only one character is appearing.

(2-3) Motion blur processing is applied to the display of characters in the group performance (for example, the example shown in Figure 58).

This has the effect of making each character appear as multiple characters, making it less likely that there will be a mistaken impression that only one character is appearing.

(2-4) The sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output while the first character in the group performance is being displayed, but ends before the second character begins to be displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 97).

This allows the player to be notified that the group preview performance has been executed by outputting a sound indicating the start of the group preview performance and the appearance of the first character, while at the same time providing an optimal group preview performance by ending the starting sound before the second character appears.

The start sound may be output before the first character appears, or may be output at the same time as the first character appears, but it will end before the second character appears.

(2-5) The multiple characters displayed in the group performance include characters whose entire bodies are displayed within the display area of the screen, and characters whose entire bodies are displayed such that some parts do not fit within the display area of the screen, but other parts do fit within the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 56).

This allows more characters to appear in the group preview performance in a limited display area.

(2-6) The plurality of characters displayed in the group performance include a first character (e.g., maid A) and a second character (e.g., maid B) of a different type from the first character,
In each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, a mixture of the first character whose entire body is displayed to fit within the display area of the screen and the first character whose entire body is displayed to fit within the display area of the screen but whose other parts do not fit within the display area of the screen are displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 56).

This creates the illusion that a larger variety of characters are appearing in the group preview performance in a limited display area.

(2-7) A part of the screen is covered by an obstruction (for example, a gaming machine frame 3), and the display of the character to be displayed first in the group presentation starts at the position where the obstruction is covering, and then the display of the character to be displayed second starts,
Even when the screen is viewed with the obstruction covering it, the first situation changes to the second situation during the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 60).

This means that there will be no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group preview performance, even in the display area of the screen that the player actually sees, so it is possible to prevent questions as to whether or not it is a group preview performance, or the mistaken impression that only one person will appear.

(2-8) When the gaming machine is viewed from the side, facing between the screen and the obstruction, it is possible to see the edge of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 60).

As a result, even if a player views the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the side and sees the edge of the screen, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group preview performance, so there is no doubt as to whether or not it is a group preview performance, or the mistaken idea that only one person will appear.

(2-9) In the design stage, a display relating to the group performance is created on a screen of a specified size with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position of the obstruction, and further, a display relating to the group performance is created up to the area corresponding to the larger size so that it can be applied to a size larger than the specified size of the screen (e.g., 19 inches) (e.g., 20 inches).

This allows the created group preview performance data to be applied even if the design of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suddenly changed to use a size larger than the specified size.

(2-10) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include low importance characters (e.g., maids C to F) that are low in importance in the content of the gaming machine, and high importance characters (e.g., maids A and B) that are more important in the content of the gaming machine than the low importance characters,
The high importance characters are less likely to have their faces not fit within the display area of the screen and the rest of their bodies fit within the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 56) than the low importance characters.

This makes it easier to recognize the faces of characters with high importance, such as the protagonist, in the group preview performance than characters with low importance, such as supporting characters, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

(3-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A performance execution means for executing a performance (for example, a performance control CPU 120 for executing a group notice execution process shown in FIG. 50) is provided,
The performance executed by the performance execution means includes a group performance (for example, a group preview performance shown in FIG. 97 to FIG. 103) in which an image of a plurality of characters proceeding in a group is displayed,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 62 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a23) to FIG. 99 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 100 (a31) to FIG. 101 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 102 (a37) to FIG. 103 (a42)),
The group presentation is a presentation that has the largest number of characters displayed among the presentations that can be executed by the presentation execution means.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another is designed to be longer than the first display period from when the display of the characters first starts to when the display of the characters first ends, making it possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. Also, since the group preview performance features the largest number of characters out of all the performances, it is possible to make the player aware that a variable display that is likely to lead to a jackpot is being performed.

"The group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on one screen among all the performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 being the group preview performance. Also, "The group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among all the performances executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on one screen among the performances executed during the period when variable display based on one reserved memory is being performed, such as the performance during variable display of decorative patterns, the performance during reach, the pseudo consecutive performance, and the performance when a jackpot occurs, among all the performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, "The group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on one screen among the performances executed during the jackpot game state and the subsequent probability change state and time-saving state being the group preview performance. In the above example, the group preview effect does not have to be the effect with the greatest number of different characters displayed.

Furthermore, "the group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance among all performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is the group preview performance. Also, "the group performance is the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed among the performances executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance among all performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is the group preview performance among the performances executed during the period when variable display based on one reserved memory is being performed, such as the performance during variable display of decorative patterns, the performance during reach, the pseudo consecutive performance, and the performance when a jackpot occurs. Also, "the group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance among the performances executed during the jackpot game state and the subsequent probability change state and time-saving state, which is the group preview performance. In the above example, the group preview effect does not have to be the effect with the greatest number of different characters displayed.

(3-2) A specific effect in which a number of characters are displayed is executed, in which a smaller number of characters are displayed than in the group effect (for example, the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach effect).

This allows for a wide variety of effects to be performed, with the largest number of characters appearing in the group preview effects.

Note that the specific effect may display a greater number of different characters than the group preview effect.

(3-3) The number of characters displayed during the second display period of the group performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the specific performance.

This allows players to see a powerful presentation during the second display period, which is the longest period of the group preview presentation.

The number of character types displayed during the second display period of the group preview performance may be greater than the number of character types displayed in the specific performance.

(4-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 50, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 97 to FIG. 103) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 62 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a23) to FIG. 99 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 100 (a31) to FIG. 101 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 102 (a37) to FIG. 103 (a42)),
In the group performance,
A help message will be displayed to show that the character is progressing.
When the display of a first character and the display of a second character overlap, the display of the first character is given priority over the display of the second character, whereas when the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character and the display of the second character overlap, the display of the second character is given priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 57).

This allows the second display period, during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance, to be longer than the first display period, which is from when the display of the character first starts to when the display of the character first ends, providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, by displaying auxiliary characters for the characters, a more dynamic group preview performance can be shown to the player, but because the auxiliary display does not impede the visibility of other characters, more characters can be clearly seen by the player.

An "auxiliary display" may be any display that indicates that a character is progressing, such as an image display that emphasizes that a character is progressing as shown in FIG. 57 (for example, an image display of dust), an image display that shows traces of a character's passage (for example, an image display of a character's footprints), or an image display attached to the character itself (for example, an image display that shows the character's aura). An "auxiliary display" may be any image display that is displayed in the vicinity of a character in relation to the character's progression.

(4-2) The characters displayed in the group performance and the auxiliary display in the group performance are displayed on different layers on the screen (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, the image of the dust is placed on layer 1, and the character images are placed on layers 2 and onwards).

This allows the character images and auxiliary displays to be displayed optimally to the player during group preview performances.

(4-3) The plurality of characters displayed in the group performance include a plurality of characters of the same type (for example, character C of layers 9 and 10),
The video data corresponding to the group performance includes first character data (e.g., video data of character C on layer 9) and second character data (e.g., video data of character C on layer 10) corresponding to each of a plurality of characters of the same type,
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values relating to the character's moving speed, but have the same animation parameter values relating to the character's actions.

This allows the animation parameter values related to character movements to be standardized even when changing the character's movement speed, reducing the amount of work required to design group preview effects.

(4-4) In the group performance, multiple characters are not placed at the same timing and speed at coordinates arranged on the screen (for example, the example shown in Figure 55).

This ensures that multiple characters do not move in the same way in the same position, allowing the group preview performance to be shown to players in an optimal way.

(5-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 50, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 97 to FIG. 103) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 62 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a23) to FIG. 99 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 100 (a31) to FIG. 101 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 102 (a37) to FIG. 103 (a42)),
During the first display period, the display of a newly displayed character (e.g., the second displayed character) ends before the display of the first displayed character ends (e.g., the examples shown in Figures 98 and 99).

The "newly displayed character" may be the second character to appear in the group preview performance as shown in Figures 97 to 99, or it may be the third or subsequent character to appear in the group preview performance. Considering that the group preview performance is a performance in which multiple characters progress as a group, it is preferable for the "newly displayed character" to be the second character to appear in the group preview performance, positioned immediately after the first character displayed, and for the second character to overtake the first character displayed, which creates a sense of dynamism and realism.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another can be designed to be longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display first ends, providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, because the second character to appear overtakes the first character to appear and disappears at the top, the player can see a dynamic group preview performance.

(5-2) The plurality of characters displayed in the group performance include a character that overtakes another character,
The number of the overtaking characters is either greater than or less than the number of the other characters to be overtaken by the overtaking character.

This makes it possible to present the group preview performance to players in an optimal way, such as preventing the group preview performance from becoming too complicated and presenting a dynamic group preview performance to players.

(5-3) When the overtaking character overtakes the other character, and the display of the overtaking character overlaps with the display of the other character, the outline of the overtaking character is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 59).

This allows the player to easily see how one character overtakes another.

(6-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image of a group of characters proceeding (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 50, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 97 to FIG. 103),
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a process for executing a PUSH effect by the effect control CPU 120) that executes a suggestion effect (for example, a PUSH effect) that displays a suggestion image (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!") that suggests the execution of the group effect,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 62 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a23) to FIG. 99 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 100 (a31) to FIG. 101 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 102 (a37) to FIG. 103 (a42)),
The display of the suggestive image ends before the first display period in the group performance begins (for example, the example shown in Figure 96).

The "suggestion image" may be any image that suggests the execution of a group preview performance, and may be an image that prompts the player to operate the operating means as shown in FIG. 96, or an effect image such as a light or pattern that is executed before suggesting the execution of a group preview performance, or a clock image in a timer performance that measures the time until the group preview performance is executed, or a text image that suggests the execution of a group preview performance (for example, the text image of "group"). In addition, a timer performance may use a clock image to measure the time until the group preview performance is executed, and when the measured time reaches a predetermined time, a text image (the text image of "group") that suggests the execution of a group preview performance may be displayed.

As a result, by designing the second display period during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance to be longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display first ends, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. It is also possible to make it easier for players to notice the first character appearing.

(6-2) After the display of the effect related to the suggestive image (for example, an effect indicating that push button 31B has been pressed) has ended, the display of the character begins for the first time in the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 96).

This makes it easier for players to notice the character appearing for the first time.

(6-3) the suggestion image includes an image that prompts the player to operate the operation means (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!");
The output of a sound (e.g., a push sound) when the operating means is operated while the suggestive image is being displayed ends before the character first starts to be displayed in the first display period (e.g., the example shown in Figure 96).

This makes it easier for players to notice the character appearing for the first time.

(6-4) When the operating means is operated while the suggestive image is being displayed, one of a number of effects including the group effect (for example, a six-person group preview, a background preview, a lamp preview) is executed (for example, the examples shown in Figures 96, 105, and 106).

This allows multiple effects to be executed based on the player's operation, making the game more entertaining.

(7-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 50, the six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 97 to FIG. 103, and the dog group preview performance shown in FIG. 171 to FIG. 173) is provided,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 62 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a23) to FIG. 99 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 100 (a31) to FIG. 101 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 102 (a37) to FIG. 103 (a42)),
The group performance includes a first group performance (e.g., a six-person group preview performance) and a second group performance (e.g., a dog group preview performance),
The plurality of characters displayed in the first group performance each move at the same or substantially the same first speed (for example, speed V1);
The plurality of characters displayed in the second group performance each move at the same or substantially the same second speed (for example, speed V2);
The first speed is greater than the second speed,
The first group presentation is configured so that the straight-line distance from the first character to the last character displayed is longer than in the second group presentation (for example, the example shown in FIG. 173).

The "straight-line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character" is the straight-line distance (distance on the X-axis) from the edge of the first displayed character to the edge of the last displayed character in a group preview performance such as a six-person group preview performance or a dog group preview performance, as shown in FIG. 173. If the time from when the first character is displayed from the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 to when the last character is displayed is T and the speed of each character is V, then this straight-line distance can be calculated by multiplying the time T by the speed V (T x V).

As a result, by designing the second display period during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance to be longer than the first display period from when the display of the character first starts to when the display of the character first ends, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. Also, two types of group preview performances can be shown to the player in a suitable manner.

(7-2) The execution time of the first group performance (e.g., X1/V1) is the same as or approximately the same as the execution time of the second group performance (e.g., X2/V2) (e.g., the example shown in FIG. 173).

This allows two different types of group preview performances to be performed using the same or approximately the same amount of time.

(7-3) When the second group performance is executed, the probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result is higher than when the first group performance is executed;
The probability of executing the second group of effects is lower than the probability of executing the first group of effects.

In this way, by making the character speed slower for the dog pack preview performance, which has a lower probability of execution and higher expectations than the six-person preview, it is possible to, for example, increase the opportunities for the player to take a photo of the characters in the dog pack preview performance.

(7-4) The degree of crowding of the multiple characters displayed in the second group performance (e.g., crowding degree D2) is greater than the degree of crowding of the multiple characters displayed in the first group performance (e.g., crowding degree D1).

This allows characters to be positioned at an appropriate density during the group preview performance, taking into account the speed and distance traveled of the characters, providing players with a group preview performance that is ideal.

(7-5) In the second group performance, a plurality of characters located at the rear end are arranged from the bottom to the top of the screen,
After the rearmost characters have passed, a display corresponding to the subsequent performance is displayed on the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 172).

This allows the image for the next performance to be shown to the player when the group preview performance is triggered, increasing the excitement of the game.

(8-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, the group notice execution process shown in FIG. 50, the Boingo group notice execution process shown in FIG. 161 to FIG. 170) is provided for executing a group performance (for example, a group notice performance) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 62 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, until a new display of a character is performed, until the display of any character ends first,
the second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues;
the third display period is a period during which a state in which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without a new display of the character;
during the first display period, display of the character is started from a specific position such that the character progresses from the back side to the front side on the screen;
At a timing related to the initial start of the display of the character at the specific position, a front-stage display (for example, display of a front-stage image using light effects) is performed to make the display of the character at the specific position difficult to see (for example, the example shown in Figure 161).

"Front display" may be any display that makes the display of a character difficult to see, and includes displays that hide the specific location where a character appears (for example, displaying an effect image such as light or a pattern). "Difficult to see" includes a state in which the player cannot see the specific location at all, a state in which the player can see the specific location but has difficulty seeing it, a state in which the player can see the specific location but cannot see the character appearing from the specific location, and a state in which the player can see the specific location and can see the character appearing from the specific location but has difficulty seeing it.

"Timing related to the initial start of the display of a character at a specific position" includes timing that is the same as the initial start of the display of a character at a specific position, or timing within a specified period before or after the initial start of the display of a character at a specific position (this specified period is a period that gives the player the illusion that it is the initial start of the display of a character at a specific position).

This allows the second display period, during which characters appear one after the other in the group preview performance, to be longer than the first display period, which is from when the display of the characters first starts to when the display of the characters first ends, providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, because the first character is displayed from a specific position that was made difficult to see by the display of the previous image, the characters can be displayed at a certain size from the beginning, and the player does not experience the discomfort of suddenly seeing a large character.

(8-2) during the first display period, the character is enlarged and displayed so as to progress from a depth direction to a front direction on the screen;
The enlarged display of the character makes it difficult to visually recognize the character displayed at the specific position (example shown in FIG. 167).

This creates the visual effect of multiple characters appearing one after the other from a position of depth.

(8-3) The character that is displayed last in the group performance is enlarged and displayed over an area that extends from at least one end of the screen to the opposite end (example shown in FIG. 165).

This allows you to conveniently switch to the performance after the group preview performance by using the image display of the last character.

(8-4) In conjunction with the action of the character that is displayed last in the group performance, the background display displayed in the third display period is switched to the background display that corresponds to the subsequent performance (for example, the examples shown in Figures 165 and 166).

This allows you to conveniently switch to the performance after the group preview performance by using the image display of the last character.

(8-5) The character that is last displayed in the group performance is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end opposite the one end,
No other characters in the group performance are displayed behind the last character displayed (for example, the example shown in Figure 167).

As a result, even if a subsequent character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it will not be visible, so there is no need to place the subsequent character image, creating a visual effect as if multiple characters are appearing one after the other from a position with depth.

(9-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image of a group of characters proceeding (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 50, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 97 to FIG. 103),
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 62 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a23) to FIG. 99 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 100 (a31) to FIG. 101 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 102 (a37) to FIG. 103 (a42)),
The sound output means starts outputting a performance sound corresponding to the group performance at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and thereafter outputs the performance sound so that the volume of the performance sound is a specific volume higher than the predetermined volume during the first display period, the volume of the performance sound is also the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the performance sound is lower than the specific volume during the third display period.

In this way, the second display period during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance can be designed to be longer than the first display period from when the display of the characters first starts to when the display of the characters first ends, providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, by raising the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at the specific volume during the second display period, the group preview performance can be livened up at the specific volume before the second display period, improving the excitement of the game.

The volume may be controlled by the sound output means to increase or decrease it, or the volume control of the sound output means may be constant but the volume may increase or decrease because the increase or decrease in the volume is specified in the sound data referenced by the sound output means.

(9-2) The fade-in time from when the performance sound is output to when the volume of the performance sound rises to a specific volume during the first display period is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the performance sound starts to decrease to when the volume of the performance sound disappears during the third display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 62).

As a result, the sounds produced during the group preview performance fade in over a short period of time and fade out over a longer period of time, allowing the sounds produced during the group preview performance to be output optimally.

(10-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 50, the six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 97 to FIG. 103),
A plurality of lighting means (for example, game effect lamps 9 such as frame lamps),
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 62 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a23) to FIG. 99 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 100 (a31) to FIG. 101 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 102 (a37) to FIG. 103 (a42)),
a luminance data table composed of a plurality of luminance data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means includes a first luminance data table corresponding to the first display period (e.g., a grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 67(a)), a second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period (e.g., a grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 67(b)), and a third luminance data table corresponding to the third display period (e.g., a grandchild table W3 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 67(c));
Each of the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table is composed of first luminance data which is a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at a low luminance and data for lighting the lighting means at a high luminance, and second luminance data which is a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at a low luminance and data for lighting the lighting means at a high luminance different from the first luminance data (for example, an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 67 ).
The second brightness data table is set to light more of the lighting means at high brightness than the first brightness data table (for example, the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp stores high brightness data ("0" to "F") for more lamps than the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another is designed to be longer than the first display period from when the display of the characters first starts to when the display of the characters first ends, thereby providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, a brightness data table corresponding to each display period is provided, and the second brightness data table is designed to light the lamp at a higher brightness than the first brightness data table, so that during the first display period, weaker footsteps can be expressed when multiple characters appear, and during the second display period, stronger footsteps can be expressed when multiple characters appear one after another, providing the player with a more suitable group preview performance.

The "data for turning on the lighting means at low brightness" and "data for turning on the lighting means at high brightness" are lighting data (lighting elements) for each time period for multiple lighting sections (for example, RGB in the frame left lamp 9L1, and WWW in the panel lamp 9C) included in each lighting means. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 67(a), it is the data (100) for the frame left lamp 9L1 (RGB) at T1-1. Note that, for the RGB data, data corresponding to turning off the light is "000", data corresponding to turning on the light at low brightness is "100", and data corresponding to turning on the light at high brightness is "F00".

The "brightness data" is the lighting data for each lighting means (for example, the frame lamp, the panel lamp 9C) for each hour, and is a collection of "data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness" and "data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness" for each hour. For example, in the example shown in Figure 67(a), it is the data for the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R at T1-1.

The brightness data table is a collection of "brightness data" for a specific period (for example, the lighting time specified in the parent table or child table). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 67(a), it is data for the frame left lamp 9L and frame right lamp 9R at T1-1 to T1-11.

(10-2) The first brightness data table has a longer interval for switching brightness data than the second brightness data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp switches at intervals of 100 msec, and the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp switches at intervals of 50 to 80 msec).

This makes it possible to show that the characters are running faster during the second display period than during the first display period, providing a suitable group preview presentation.

(10-3) The first luminance data table has equal intervals for switching the luminance data, whereas the second luminance data table does not have equal intervals for switching the luminance data (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp switches at 100 msec intervals, and the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp switches at 50 to 80 msec intervals).

As a result, during the second display period, it is possible to express that multiple characters are running more out of step with each other than during the first display period. This makes it possible to provide a suitable group preview presentation.

(11-1) The first brightness data table includes brightness data that moves the lighting location in the direction in which the characters move in the group performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 lights up with high brightness in accordance with the direction of the group preview),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that does not move the lit areas in the direction in which the characters move in the group performance (for example, as shown in Figure 66, the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps lights up at high brightness over multiple points).

This allows a character to appear during the first display period, and multiple characters to appear one after another during the second display period. This allows for an ideal group preview presentation.

(11-2) The first brightness data table includes brightness data for lighting the lighting means located near the character first displayed in the group performance at high brightness in accordance with the progression position of the character, and turning off or lighting the lighting means located near a location not reached by the character at low brightness (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 67(a)).

As a result, the lamps light up at high brightness as the first-displayed leading character progresses, and the lamps are turned off or light up at low brightness for areas that have not yet been reached, so the lighting of the lamps can be used to express the progress of the leading character. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(11-3) The first brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the lighting means to light up at high brightness and then turns off the lighting means or lights it up at low brightness as the character first displayed in the group performance progresses (for example, the example of the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps shown in FIG. 67(a)).

As a result, the lamps light up at high brightness as the first-displayed leading character progresses, and the lamps are turned off or light up at low brightness for areas that have not yet been reached or areas that have already been passed, so the lighting of the lamps can be used to express the progress of the leading character. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(11-4) The first brightness data table includes brightness data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness and then lighting the lighting means located in the direction in which the characters move in the group performance at high brightness (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 67(a)),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that lights up the lighting means at high brightness and then does not light up the lighting means located in the direction in which the characters move in the group performance at high brightness (for example, an example of a grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp shown in Figure 67 (b)).

As a result, during the first display period, the lamp lights up at high brightness as the first-displayed leading character progresses, and the lamp is turned off or lights up at low brightness for areas that have not yet been reached or areas that have already been passed, so the lighting of the lamp can be used to express the progression of the leading character. Also, during the second display period, it is possible to express the progression of multiple characters one after another. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(11-5) The first brightness data table includes brightness data for turning on the lighting means at high brightness and turning off the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 67(a)),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness and for lighting the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, an example of a frame lamp grandchild table W2 shown in Figure 67 (b)).

As a result, during the first display period, the lamp lights up at high brightness as the first-displayed leading character progresses, and the lamp is turned off or lights up at low brightness for areas that have not yet been reached or areas that have already been passed, so the lighting of the lamp can be used to express the progression of the leading character. Also, during the second display period, it is possible to express the progression of multiple characters one after another. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(12-1) The third brightness data table includes brightness data that increases the number of lighting means that are turned off in accordance with the progress of the characters in the group performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, the frame lamp grandchild table W3 is turned off or lit at a low brightness in accordance with the direction of progress of the group preview).

As a result, during the third display period, the lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness in accordance with the progress of the characters, so the progress of the characters can be expressed by turning the lamps off or on. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(12-3) In the third brightness data table, the switching interval of the brightness data in the lighting means arranged on the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction in which the character advances in the group presentation is shorter than the switching interval of the brightness data in the lighting means arranged on the frame of the gaming machine located opposite the direction in which the character advances in the group presentation (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, the switching interval of the frame left lamp 9L is 10 msec, and the switching interval of the frame right lamp 9R is 80 msec).

As a result, during the third display period, it is possible to express the characters moving from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and disappearing. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(13-1) In the first luminance data table, control of the lighting means starts at a timing related to a start of the first display period, and control of the lighting means ends during the first display period,
The second luminance data table indicates that control of the lighting means starts during the first display period and continues during the second display period, and that control of the lighting means ends during the third display period,
The third luminance data table starts control of the lighting means during the third display period (for example, the example of the group preview luminance data table shown in FIG. 88).

As a result, halfway through the first display period, the lamps are lit with high brightness in the same way as in the second display period, so the progress of the characters from before the second display period can be expressed with excitement by the lighting of the lamps. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

(13-2) The second luminance data table is set to have a control period of the lighting means longer than those of the first luminance data table and the third luminance data table,
The first luminance data table is set to have a longer control period for the lighting means than the third luminance data table (for example, the example of the group preview luminance data table shown in FIG. 88).

This allows multiple characters to appear one after the other during the first display period to be displayed for an appropriate length of time, providing an ideal group preview presentation.

(14-1) The brightness data initially specified in the first brightness data table is the brightness data that turns off or turns on the multiple lighting means used in the group performance at a low brightness (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, in the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps, the initial brightness data for all lamps is turned off or turned on at a low brightness).

This allows the lamps to light up when the group preview performance is executed after a break, without mixing with the lamps that were turned on before the group preview performance was executed, providing a more suitable group preview performance.

(14-2) The brightness data initially specified in each of the second brightness data table and the third brightness data table is brightness data that does not turn off the multiple lighting means used in the group performance or light them at low brightness (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, in the grandchild tables W2 and W3 for frame lamps, the lamps are lit at high brightness for the initial brightness data).

As a result, when characters are progressing one after another after a group preview performance has been executed, the flow of the performance is emphasized, and the group preview performance can be shown to the player without being interrupted by turning off all the lamps or turning them on at a low brightness. This makes it possible to provide a suitable group preview performance.

(14-3) The last luminance data specified in the third luminance data table is luminance data that turns off or lights at a low luminance the multiple lighting means used in the group performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, in the grandchild table W3 for frame lamps, the last luminance data for all lamps is turned off or lights at a low luminance).

As a result, when the group preview performance ends, all lamps are turned off or turned on at a low brightness, allowing the player to recognize that the group preview performance is ending. This makes it possible to provide a suitable group preview performance.

(15-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat luminance data of the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, luminance data is not specified so that the same luminance data is used repeatedly in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, and luminance data is specified so that the same luminance data is used repeatedly in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp).

This allows the data volume to be reduced for the brightness data during the second display period, which is set over a long period of time. This makes it possible to provide a suitable group preview presentation.

(15-2) The third luminance data table is designed not to repeat luminance data with the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, in the grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp, luminance data is not specified so that the same luminance data is used repeatedly).

As a result, for the brightness data in the third display period, which is set to be no longer than the second display period, the brightness data can be specified as is, increasing the degree of freedom in design. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

(16-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat luminance data of the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, luminance data is not defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used, and in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp, luminance data is defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used).
In the first brightness data table, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified at the end, while in the second brightness data table, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is not specified at the end (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, 10-minute data for malfunction countermeasures is specified in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, and 10-minute data for malfunction countermeasures is not specified in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp).

This makes it possible to reduce the data volume for the brightness data in the second display period, which is set over a long period of time. On the other hand, for the brightness data in the first display period, the brightness data is specified as is, but instead, 10 minutes of data is specified for troubleshooting purposes, allowing troubleshooting to be done during those 10 minutes. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

(16-2) The luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is the luminance data for which the longest time is specified among the luminance data constituting the first luminance data table, and is the luminance data for preventing the lighting means from being controlled from the beginning of the first luminance data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, 10-minute data for malfunction countermeasures is specified in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp).

This makes it possible to prevent lamp lighting control from being performed from the beginning of the first brightness data table by using the 10-minute data for troubleshooting purposes, thereby providing an optimal group preview performance.

(16-3) The luminance data for fault countermeasures is luminance data that turns on adjacent lighting means in a regular order (for example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the luminance data for fault countermeasures for 10 minutes is luminance data that turns on adjacent frame lamps in a regular order so that the lighting locations are shifted from the previous state).

As a result, even if a malfunction occurs, adjacent frame lamps are lit in order and in a regular pattern so that the lighting locations are shifted from the previous state, preventing the appearance from becoming poor and providing an ideal group preview performance.

(17-1) The lighting means includes a single-color lighting means (e.g., on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that lights up in a single color and a multi-color lighting means (e.g., on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9 to 9C13) that lights up in a plurality of colors,
the luminance data for lighting the monochromatic lighting means at a specific high luminance includes a specific value (e.g., "6") corresponding to the lighting at the specific high luminance;
The brightness data for lighting the multi-color lighting means at the specific high brightness includes a value (for example, "8" to "F") larger than a specific value as a value corresponding to the lighting at the specific high brightness.

This allows the light variation between lamps that are lit at high brightness to be adjusted by setting an appropriate value for the type of light-emitting means, thereby providing an optimal group preview performance.

(17-2) The single-color lighting means includes a first-color lighting means (e.g., the board-up lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that lights up in a first color, and a second-color lighting means (e.g., the board-left lamps 9B1 to 9B5) that lights up in a second color,
Regardless of the brightness data for lighting either the first color lighting means or the second color lighting means at the specific high brightness, the brightness data includes the specific value (e.g., "6") as a value corresponding to the specific high brightness lighting.

This allows the light variation to be adjusted even between lamps that are lit in the same single color, providing an ideal group preview presentation.

(18-1) The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table each include different luminance data for each of the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, a frame lamp table shown in FIG. 67 ),
The brightness data table used in a preview performance, which is a performance different from the group performance and which predicts that the display result of the variable display will become the specific display result, includes common brightness data for each of the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, the grandchild table for a frame lamp shown in Figure 74).

As a result, by individually controlling the lighting of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R during the group preview performance, more detailed lighting patterns can be achieved, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided.

(19-1) During the execution of a preview effect (for example, a reach line effect) that is a different effect from the group effect and that predicts that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result, the group effect may be executed in an interrupt manner,
Even when the group performance is interrupted and executed, the lighting means continues to light up according to the brightness data table corresponding to the preview performance (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 174 and 175),
The lighting means used in the group performance is the same as the lighting means used in the advance notice performance, or includes the lighting means used in the advance notice performance and the lighting means not used in the advance notice performance (for example, as shown in Figure 73, in the reach line performance, there is a period during which the on-board lamps and attacca lamps which are always used in the group advance notice performance are not used).

As a result, even if a group preview performance is executed by interrupting another preview performance, the common lamps are lit, so that a performance with lighting can be realized without any sense of incongruity, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided. For example, if a group preview performance is executed by interrupting another preview performance, the lighting of the lamps in the group preview performance and the lighting of the lamps in the other preview performance will be mixed. If the lamps lit in both performances were different, the large number of lamps will be lit in a cumbersome manner, which may look unsightly and cause the player to feel uncomfortable. In this regard, if the lighting of the lamps in the group preview performance and the lighting of the lamps in the other preview performance are common, it is possible to prevent the lighting of many lamps in a cumbersome manner.

(19-2) The preview performance ends during the execution of the group performance, and a predetermined performance (for example, a symbol forwarding performance) different from the preview performance is executed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 174 and 175),
The lighting means used in the group performance is the same as the lighting means used in the specified performance, or includes the lighting means used in the specified performance and the lighting means not used in the specified performance (for example, the examples shown in Figures 174 and 175).

As a result, even if the group preview performance switches to another performance, the common lamp remains lit, so the performance can be realized without any sense of incongruity, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided.

(19-3) The group performance is executed with a predetermined execution probability of less than 100% (for example, the group preview lottery shown in FIG. 33).

As a result, whether or not the group preview performance is executed is determined by lottery, regardless of other performances, which reduces the processing burden related to the execution of the group preview performance and allows for the provision of a suitable group preview performance.

(20-1) The lighting means includes a specific lighting means (for example, a V lamp 9G) located at a position related to a direction in which the characters move in the group performance,
The specific lighting means can be lit when controlled to the advantageous state, and is not lit when not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the V lamp 9G is lit to notify that a round of a jackpot game state in which a V win can occur is in progress or that a V win has occurred),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, the example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 66).

This prevents the lamps located in positions related to the direction in which the characters move during the group preview performance from lighting up during the group preview performance, which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that they have been controlled to an advantageous state, such as a jackpot. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

(20-2) The lighting means includes specific lighting means (for example, a stick controller lamp 9J, a trigger button lamp 9K) located at a position related to a direction in which the characters move in the group performance,
The specific lighting means indicates to the player that the operation of the operating means is valid by lighting (for example, the stick controller lamp 9J lights up to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A, and the trigger button lamp 9K lights up to encourage the player to press the push button 31B).
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, the example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 66).

This prevents the player from mistaking the lamp located in the position related to the direction in which the characters move during the group preview performance for the lamp to light up during the group preview performance, leading the player to believe that the lamp is prompting the player to operate the operating means. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

[Modification]
A modified example of the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 will now be described.

(About the display period of the group preview performance)
In the present embodiment, the third display period is longer than the first display period, but the first display period may be longer than the third display period.

This allows the first character to appear in the first display period to be shown for a longer period, making it easier to draw attention to the fact that a group preview performance suggesting a jackpot has been performed.

(Regarding the timing of the group preview performance)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a failure display result, the group advance notice performance is executed in the latter half of the time of the variable display with a probability of 100%, but this is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a failure display result, the group advance notice performance may be executed with a higher probability in the latter half of the time of the variable display than in the first half of the time of the variable display.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a winning display result, the group preview performance is executed in the first half of the variable display time with a 100% probability, but this is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a winning display result, the group preview performance may be executed with a higher probability in the first half of the variable display time than in the second half of the variable display time.

(About the characters appearing in the group preview performance)
In this embodiment, the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), appears as the first (initial) character in the first display period, but the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), may be the character that appears most frequently in the second display period.

This allows the player to see the main character frequently during the second display period, which is the longest, and increases the player's interest in the game.

The character displayed first during the first display period may be a premium character.

This allows the player to see the premium character first during the initial first display period, making the group preview presentation more impactful. Note that if the first character displayed during the first display period is a premium character, this may guarantee a jackpot. Furthermore, in this case, the lighting pattern of each lamp, such as the frame lamp, may be a pattern that includes rainbow (seven colors).

The premium character may be a character that appears the least frequently in all states and effects, or a character that does not appear except in group preview effects. The premium character may also be a character whose appearance suggests a higher chance of a jackpot than other characters.

(About lighting control during group preview performances)
In this embodiment, the luminance data is defined as shown in the frame lamp grandchild table shown in Fig. 67, but the luminance data may be defined as follows: That is, there is first specific luminance data that combines data for turning on the lighting means at low luminance and data for turning on the lighting means at high luminance, and second specific luminance data that includes data for turning on the lighting means at low luminance but does not include data for turning on the lighting means at high luminance, and the first luminance data table may not use the first specific lighting data, and the second luminance data table may use the second specific lighting data.

In this way, during the first display period, data for lighting at high brightness is not specified, so the lamps are lit at low brightness, making it possible to express the appearance of multiple characters approaching, and during the second display period, data for lighting at high brightness is specified, making it possible to express the appearance of multiple characters advancing one after another.

The third brightness data table may also include brightness data that turns off all of the lighting means that were turned on in the second brightness data table.

In this way, the character's progression and disappearance during the third display period can be expressed by the lamp going off.

Further, the lighting means includes specific lighting means at a position related to a direction in which the characters advance in the group performance,
A specific member capable of transmitting light is disposed on the front side of the specific lighting means,
When the specific lighting means is turned on, the color visually recognized through the specific member becomes the specific color,
the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table include luminance data for lighting the lighting means in a color different from the specific color;
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table may not include luminance data for lighting a specific lighting means.

In this way, it is possible to prevent a lamp located in a position related to the direction in which the characters move during the group preview performance from turning on during the group preview performance, causing the color seen through the transparent specific member located in front of the lamp to become a specific color not used in the group preview performance, which would interfere with the color of the group preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance.

(About the video data for the group preview performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 55, video data in which the character to be acted and the action content (action pattern) of the character are associated in advance is created in the design stage, and the video data is stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121. In the pachinko game machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 plays the video data stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when it is time to execute the group advance notice performance based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. However, the video of the group advance notice performance may be played in a manner different from the above.

For example, data on the character to be acted on and data indicating the action content (action pattern) may be stored as separate data in RAM 122 or ROM 121. Then, in the pachinko game machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 may select the character data and the data indicating the action pattern stored in RAM 122 or ROM 121 when it is time to execute the group preview performance based on the variation pattern command received from CPU 103, combine the two to create video data, and play the created video data.

More specifically, in RAM 122 or ROM 121, multiple data of characters A, B, and C running and walking are stored in memory area 1, and video data of multiple arbitrary characters showing multiple movement patterns related to the group preview performance, although the characters are not fixed, is stored in memory area 2. When the time comes to execute the group preview performance, the performance control CPU 120 extracts the characters from memory area 1 and further extracts the video data related to the group preview performance from memory area 2, combines them to create one video data of the group preview performance, and plays the created video data.

(When the group preview performance overlaps with other preview performances)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 159 and FIG. 172, when the execution period of the group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of the other preview performance, the display area of the image in the group preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the other preview performance, and the display of the image in the group preview performance is prioritized over the display of the image in the other preview performance (for example, the display layer of the image in the group preview performance is in front of the display layer of the image in the other preview performance). However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the execution period of the group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of the other preview performance, the display area of the image in the other preview performance may be larger than the display area of the image in the group preview performance, and the display of the image in the other preview performance may be prioritized over the display of the image in the group preview performance (for example, the display layer of the image in the other preview performance is in front of the display layer of the image in the group preview performance). Alternatively, when the execution period of the group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of the other preview performance, the display area of the image in the group preview performance may be larger than the display area of the image in the other preview performance, and the display of the image in the other preview performance may be prioritized over the display of the image in the group preview performance (for example, the display layer of the image in the other preview performance may be on the front side of the display layer of the image in the group preview performance). Also, when the execution period of the group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of the other preview performance, the display area of the image in the other preview performance may be larger than the display area of the image in the group preview performance, and the display of the image in the group preview performance may be prioritized over the display of the image in the other preview performance (for example, the display layer of the image in the group preview performance may be on the front side of the display layer of the image in the other preview performance). Note that cases in which the display area of images in other preview performances is larger than the display area of images in the group preview performance include cases in which preview images that catch the player's attention, such as images suggesting a jackpot, are hidden by images in the group preview performance, but images located around the preview image (for example, images showing flames or an aura surrounding the preview image) are not hidden by images in the group preview performance and can be seen.

(Example of time-saving control without going through a hit)
Next, an example of executing time-saving control without going through a hit (a big hit, a small hit, etc.) as a time-saving state will be described.
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7A. In other words, the time-saving state may be controlled to execute time-saving control without passing through a win (big win, small win, etc.).

(A2) In addition, the time-saving symbols described above may be part of the losing symbols or part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries, such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small jackpot symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state. However, when a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state, and no lottery is conducted to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

(A5) In addition, when a lottery is held for a time-saving symbol and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value. In other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbol is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern may be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

(A7) In addition, for winning when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is conducted, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be the winning value. Also, a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area can be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area can be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery for the time-saving symbol is performed using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count of the time-saving state (time-saving count) is set so as not to change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

(A9) In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when these random numbers are used as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings will affect performance other than the probability of winning.

(A10) The timing of the lottery result for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is performed only in the low probability low base state. However, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already established, the number of times the time-saving symbol is reset or the lottery is not performed, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed when it is derived can have multiple predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

(A12) In addition, when the number of times the time-saving pattern is used varies depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving pattern can be changed between special pattern 1 and special pattern 2.

(A13) In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

(A14) In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving period until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time-saving times may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) In addition, the number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving times may be different between the time-saving times controlled by the time-saving symbols and the time-saving times controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

(A18) In addition, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled in the case of a lottery using a structure is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a predetermined number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the gaming machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

(A20) In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times for the time-saving limiter is updated.

(A21) The time required for the time-saving symbol to be determined may also be different from the time required for the other symbols to be determined.

(Other examples of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)
As another time-saving control using the time-saving symbol, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) In the normal state, game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern (special display result), and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern in the time-saving state (even if the time-saving pattern is displayed, game state switching control such as overwriting the time-saving state (such as the time-saving state occurring again) may not be performed). In addition, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the time-saving state (for example, for decorative patterns, a special pattern is displayed as the time-saving pattern in the normal state and a general losing pattern is displayed in the time-saving state). This allows suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is changed or not).

(B2) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol may be a time-saving symbol that is common in both the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol may be a different symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state as the display result (for example, the decorative symbol may be a special symbol that corresponds to the time-saving symbol in the normal state, but a symbol that simply corresponds to the time-saving symbol may be displayed in the time-saving state, such as a missing symbol). This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative symbol in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B3) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), in the normal state, a presentation is executed that suggests whether the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time-saving pattern), but in the time-saving state, the presentation that suggests whether the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time-saving pattern) may not be executed. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the presentation in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative symbols (the time for which the display state is maintained after the fixed surface result is displayed) may be controlled to be different between the normal state and the time-saving state. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the presentation of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B5) After the first variable display using the first special pattern has been performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern has been performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information, and different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored when the time-saving state ends (such as a display of continued time-saving when switching to time-saving control, and an effect that can identify that time-saving control is not being executed when switching to time-saving control is not switched to), and during the time-saving state, right-hit play is performed in response to a right-hit notification (an indication instructing right-hit), until all variable displays based on the reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to disable a left-hit notification (an indication instructing left-hit). This allows for suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is increased by executing an effect depending on whether the state is switched or not).

(B6) After the first variable display using the first special pattern has been performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern has been performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information, and different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored when the time-saving state ends (such as a display of continued time-saving when switching to time-saving control, and an effect that can identify that time-saving control is not being executed when switching to time-saving control is not switched to), and during the time-saving state, right-hitting play is performed in response to a right-hitting notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to disable a left-hitting notification (a notification instructing left-hitting). This allows for suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is switched or not).

(B7) A left hit notification may be executed in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends is completed. This allows the game to proceed smoothly because instructions on how to hit are displayed appropriately, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(B8) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and when a win (small win, big win) occurs in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This prevents the player from feeling like they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern through the presentation of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, when there is reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern and when there is no reserved memory information, it may be possible to execute a different effect after executing a common effect (for example, when the fourth of four remaining reserved memories has reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern, a common effect that suggests whether or not to return to the time-saving state can be executed up to the variable display based on the third reserved memory information, and a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect can be executed with the variable display based on the fourth reserved memory information). This prevents the player from feeling like they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This allows the presentation to change depending on the game state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time (the time from when the finalized surface result is displayed to when the display state is maintained) of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends may be the same as the final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This can suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends is executed, the right-hit notification may not be executed, and when the time-saving pattern display result is displayed in the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information, the right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows the game to proceed smoothly because the instructions on how to hit are given appropriately, and the interest in the game can be increased.

(B13) In the normal state, a game is controlled to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern, and a common specific effect (reach effect, advance notice effect) can be executed when the variable display result is a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a small win pattern or a big win pattern, and when the variable display result is a time-saving pattern (special display result), and the rate at which the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed may differ depending on which of the multiple types of common specific effects is executed. And when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display, a right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows the effect to be controlled appropriately depending on the game state when the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific effect, the display result may be a winning pattern (specific display result) or a time-saving pattern (special display result). This increases the variety of variable display results, making the game more interesting.

(B15) The game control CPU 103 can select a common variation pattern for when a winning symbol (specific display result) is obtained, when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, or when a losing symbol (predetermined display result) is obtained, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute different presentations in the variable display depending on the type of pattern designation command that designates the display result, even when it receives a command designating the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103. This increases the variety of presentations in the variable display, making the game more interesting.

(B16) After the common specific effect is executed, a special effect can be executed when a time-saving pattern (special display result) is obtained. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game by the special effect after the execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of common specific effect, a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving pattern (special display result) is achieved may or may not be executed (for example, a special effect may not be executed when an effect with a higher expectation of a win among multiple types of super reach effects is executed). This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without excessively encouraging the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B18) The expectation (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) appearing when the special effect is executed may be different depending on the type of common specific effect. This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without executing an effect that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B18) The expectation (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) appearing when the special effect is executed may be different depending on the type of common specific effect. This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without executing an effect that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B19) The expectation level (proportion) of a time-saving pattern (special display result) may be different depending on the presentation mode of a predetermined presentation different from the common specific presentation (for example, a presentation that displays an active display (a display that has moved from the display position of a pending display to another display position, and that performs a presentation that can suggest the expectation level of a win corresponding to the currently active variable display) that can change the display mode depending on the expectation level of a win)). This allows for an increase in interest in the game since a presentation that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state is not executed and the expectation of a win is maintained.

(B20) In a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is reached, an effect that indicates a winning symbol (specific display result) (such as a special jackpot with a higher play value than the time-saving state) may be executed after an effect that suggests the time-saving symbol (special display result) is reached (such as a time-saving suggestion effect). This increases the interest in the game because the expectation of a win is maintained without excessively emphasizing only the time-saving state.

(B21) The game control CPU 103 can control a time-saving state (special state) with a different number of time-saving times (duration of time-saving times) depending on the type of multiple types of time-saving patterns (special display results) provided (for example, first time-saving pattern: 50 time-saving times, second time-saving pattern: 100 time-saving times, etc.), and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a presentation in which the number of time-saving times (duration) granted when the time-saving pattern stops varies depending on the type of presentation executed (for example, the type of reach presentation, etc.). This can draw the player's attention to the number of time-saving times that will follow depending on the type of presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(B22) In the normal state, a game control is performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern, and a command is sent from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute a performance based on the command. The command sent includes a special command that can specify a transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and when the performance control CPU 120 receives multiple types of commands including a special command, it may limit the execution of a pre-reading preview performance for reserved memory information that occurs after reserved memory information that is specified to execute a variable display that can transition to the time-saving state (special state) based on the pre-reading of reserved memory information (such as not executing at all or rarely executing). This allows the performance control to be executed appropriately according to the game state when the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) It is also possible to restrict the execution of a pre-reading preview performance for reserved memory information that occurs after reserved memory information that has been identified as a variable display that can transition (control) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) based on a pre-reading of reserved memory information. In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to execute a performance of a common aspect as a pre-reading preview performance during the execution restriction of such a pre-reading preview performance. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state as the gaming state transitions.

(B24) In both cases where the variable display based on the reserved memory information for the pre-reading target is a variable display that displays a time-saving pattern (special display result) and a variable display that appears to display a time-saving pattern (special display result) but does not, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance for the reserved memory information that occurs after the reserved memory information may be restricted. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes.

(B25) During the execution restriction of the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead preview performance does not execute a performance with a higher expectation level than a specific expectation level (for example, when the expectation level of the color of the reserved display is blue < green < red, the color of the reserved display is not changed to red). This restricts the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(B26) During the execution restriction of the pre-reading preview performance, the pre-reading preview performance does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, when the expected color of the reserved display is blue < green < red, the color of the reserved display is not changed to red). This restricts the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using the number of variable display times resulting in a predetermined display result, such as the number of variable display times of failure)
Next, an example of time-saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss) that have resulted in a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As described below, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) has continued has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times). Note that, as the predetermined result, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss display result has continued has reached a special number.

(C1) After the first variable display by the first special symbol is performed and after the second variable display by the second special symbol is performed, the game can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the variable display result has become a specific display result, and the numerical information of the number of times the variable display has been executed that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small win display result that does not become a big win, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and when a special condition is established in which the number of times the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (the number of times it continues) has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.) based on the numerical information, the game can be controlled to transition from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state). The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result has been achieved continues to be updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, making it easier for the player to be rescued by the time-saving state and increasing the player's motivation to play. This makes it possible to optimally rescue players by reducing the time.

(C2) The special condition may be established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) in succession. This allows the player to be rescued by transitioning to a time-saving state (special state) when a series of display results unfavorable to the player are displayed, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when a variable display is executed even in a state other than the normal state (a high probability state, a time-saving state). This allows the player to be appropriately rescued when a series of display results that are unfavorable to the player are displayed.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is met. Such an initialization condition may be met by control to the advantageous state. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when an advantageous state is reached that is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the player's gambling tendency from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control for transitioning to a time-saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition may be established when the special display result is displayed. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when the time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player is reached, and to prevent the player from becoming more gambling than necessary.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is executed a special number of times. This effectively makes it possible to control the game to a time-saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(C7) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, the backed up and stored data can be initialized, and the numerical information can be initialized when the specific condition is met. This prevents the numerical information backed up in the event of a power outage from being initialized and remaining when the data is initialized, thereby preventing the amusement center from being disadvantaged.

(C8) The time-saving state (special state) for a period of more than the special number (for example, 1000 times or more) can be controlled based on the numerical information becoming the special number (for example, 1000 times or more), and during the time-saving state (special state), the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number, and different effects can be executed in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state). As a result, in a game in which the game is in an extremely unfavorable state such as being controlled in the second time-saving state (special state), it is possible to change the appearance of the effects, such as shortening the variable display time in the second time-saving state more than in the first time-saving state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. It is also possible to execute similar effects in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state) without executing such effects. This makes it possible to prevent players from being overly aware that they are in an extremely unfavorable state, such as being controlled to the second time-saving state (special state), and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(C9) When the value of the special chart process flag is a first value (0 to 2), a first process related to variable display is executed, when the value of the special chart process flag is a second value (4 or more) different from the first value, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special chart process flag is a third value (3) different from the first and second values, a third process for controlling to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition is executed. Also. The game ball can be hit into the first path (left game area) and the second path (right game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit into the first path, and in the time-saving state (special state), the game ball is hit into the second path to play. And, during the execution of the third process, although it is not controlled to the time-saving state (special state), a notification that the ball should be shot into the second path (for example, a right-hit notification by a right-hit lamp, etc.) may be made. In addition, during execution of the third process, a notification effect may be given to indicate that the game will transition to a time-saving state (special state). This allows for suitable control even if new functions are added to the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex. For example, by turning on the right-hit lamp using the gaming control CPU 103, it is possible to execute a notification effect regarding the launch direction early (before the actual time-saving fluctuation begins) when the game actually transitions to the time-saving state (special state).

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is met, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. This gives priority to control to an advantageous state over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the fulfillment of a special condition, so that the result is not more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display starts, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the time-saving state (special state) is controlled after the variable display in which the numerical information has become a specific value ends (next fluctuation starts, waiting for customers) and when the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the special information (special number of times reached flag) is changed from a first value to a second value (flag set), and when controlling to the time-saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second value to the first value (flag reset). This makes it possible to preferably execute control to transition to the time-saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 may select and determine a variation pattern of the variable display, and may select and determine a variation pattern of the symbol determination time that differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. This makes it possible to preferably execute a performance when the variable display of the special number of times is executed.

(C13) When the value of the special chart process flag is a first numerical value (0 to 2), a first process related to variable display is executed, when the value of the special chart process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special chart process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, a third process for controlling to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of a special condition is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the CPU 103 (game control means) for game control that controls the progress of the game, and a performance based on the command can be executed by the CPU 120 (performance control means) for performance control that receives the command. And, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variable pattern) according to when the value of the special chart process flag is the second numerical value and when it is the third numerical value when in the special state. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, different game states can be suitably identified, making game control easier. Then, by varying the command depending on the game state identified at that time, the presentation control CPU 120 (presentation control means) can execute suitable presentation control depending on the game state.

(C14) When the special condition is established during the time-saving state (special state), the value of the special chart process flag may be set to a fourth value different from the first value, the second value, and the third value, so that the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex.

(C15) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) or whether the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time is executed than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot game state). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C16) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to execute similar effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) and when the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, a time-saving state effect with a similar variable time may be executed when the time-saving state is entered because the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count and when the time-saving state is entered after a jackpot has ended). This does not require new performance data, so development costs do not increase, and interest in the game can be increased by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving pattern) or whether the special condition (condition for the number of variable display times) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the number of variable display times is equal to or greater than the special number, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot is executed). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C18) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to execute the same effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving pattern) and when the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot is executed). This does not require new effect data, so development costs do not increase, and interest in the game can be increased by not confusing the player.

(C19) In the event of a power outage or other power outage, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 can send predetermined information (a RAM clear command at cold start, and a command notifying the number of variable displays until the end of the time-saving state at hot start) to the presentation control CPU 120 based on the backed up data, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute suggestive presentations (such as a different early morning number roll, a different background image, or a presentation that suggests whether a 100-spin variation is far or close) regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on, based on receiving the predetermined information. This gives players a motivation to play early in the morning, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine while preventing an increase in the processing burden.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 may transmit specific information (a command capable of identifying information related to the time-saving state) to the presentation control CPU 120 in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the presentation control CPU 120 may execute a special presentation (such as a presentation suggesting the end of the time-saving state count) in relation to the control to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. The specific information may include first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown presentation information) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is less than a predetermined value (for example, 127), and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 spins) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). This can reduce the risk of the player unknowingly losing money by periodically suggesting the function, and can also suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The presentation control CPU 120 can execute a suggestion presentation (for time-saving state suggestion presentation control) that suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state (special state) when a special condition is met, based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 300 times) that are less than the special number of times, and can execute a suggestion presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 100 times) that are less than the first predetermined number are executed before the execution of the special number of variable displays. This reduces the risk of the player unknowingly incurring losses by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the presentation control CPU 120 executes different presentations (such as different presentations when transitioning to the time-shortening state) when the time-shortening state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for variable display count) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized and when the time-shortening state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition after the specific display result (winning pattern) is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, because the difference in the presentation allows the player to know whether the backed-up data has been initialized or not, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, the player can know that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of factors for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(C23) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the performance control CPU 120 executes different performances after being controlled to the time-saving state (special state) (e.g., different performances after transitioning to the time-saving state) when the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for the variable number of displays) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result (winning pattern) is displayed and the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition after the backup-stored data is initialized. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, because the difference in the presentation allows the player to know whether the backed-up data has been initialized or not, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, the player can know that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of factors for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview effect may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving pattern, a jackpot, or a miss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Each configuration related to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a winning prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a winning prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

(Explanation regarding the association of the characteristic part 092F with the characteristic part 069SG and the characteristic part 099SG)
(Regarding the time-saving state B (relief time-saving state, relief time-saving) in the characteristic part 069SG and the characteristic part 099SG)
In the above feature 092F, it was explained that the group notice performance is executed in the low base state. In the time-saving state B in the feature 069SG, it is preferable not to execute the group notice performance. The reason is that the time-saving state B in the feature 069SG is a controlled state in which a predetermined number of fluctuations are performed in a non-special state (normal game state), and in any fluctuation, it is not controlled to an advantageous state, and the player spends a certain amount of time and continues to be in a state that is not controlled to an advantageous state. If the group notice performance is frequently performed in the time-saving state B, there is a risk that it will become an annoying performance for the player who has spent a certain amount of time and is controlled in the time-saving state B. In consideration of this, it is preferable not to perform the group notice performance in the time-saving state B. Note that the group notice performance may be executed in the first special state (high base state).
In addition, it is preferable not to execute the group advance notice performance in the variation controlled by the time-saving state B in the characteristic part 069SG (the 900th variable display in the non-special state). The reason is that since it is designed to be more advantageous for the player to win the jackpot after being controlled by the time-saving state B than to win the jackpot in the non-special state, there is a possibility that the highly anticipated group advance notice performance will be executed in the 900th variation, which will cause a feeling of disappointment. Taking this into consideration, the group advance notice performance is not executed in the 900th variation, which has the effect of preventing a decline in the player's interest.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative pattern display area, 6A Winning ball device, 6B Variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game effect lamp, 10 General winning port, 11 Main board, 12 Performance control board, 13 Sound control board, 14 Lamp control board, 15 Relay board, 20 Special pattern LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A First start port switch, 22B Second start port switch, 23 Count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 Ball hitting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B Push button, 32 Movable body, 35A Controller sensor unit, 35B Push sensor, 41 Passing gate, 50 Fourth pattern unit, 81, 82, 83 Solenoid, 100 Game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitter;
a performance execution means capable of executing a moving performance that displays an image of a plurality of characters moving, a specific performance that can notify a player that the player will be controlled to the advantageous state by notifying the player of an advantageous result , a special performance that is executed when the advantageous result is notified by the specific performance , and an advantageous post-event performance that is executed after the special performance that is executed when the advantageous result is notified by the specific performance;
Equipped with
The display period of the image in the movement performance includes a first display period and a second display period,
The first display period is a period from when a first character starts to be displayed in the movement performance to when a new character is displayed and until the first character ends to be displayed,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific performance, a first specific performance displaying a specific character, a second specific performance displaying a special character, and a third specific performance displaying neither the specific character nor the special character can be executed;
As the advantageous post-event performance, a first advantageous post-event performance in which the specific character is displayed after the special performance is executed in the first specific performance can be executed,
As the advantageous post-event performance, a second advantageous post-event performance can be executed in which the special character is displayed after the special performance is executed in the second specific performance,
As the advantageous post-event performance, after executing the special performance in the third specific performance, a third advantageous post - event performance can be executed, which is a performance mode related to the third specific performance and does not display either the specific character or the special character;
The light-emitting body can be illuminated during the advantageous post-event performance,
In the first advantageous post-event performance, the light-emitting body is caused to emit light in a light-emitting pattern common to the second advantageous post-event performance ;
In the third advantageous post-event performance, the light emitter is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern different from that in the first advantageous post-event performance and the second advantageous post-event performance ;
The proportion of the second advantageous state controlled varies depending on which of the first specific performance, the second specific performance, and the third specific performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images